From 9a94c0f3de0c03ece0d7e52e9e5c0426aef46071 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 11 Jul 2023 15:20:00 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 001/370] Sample edits for HPE
---
.../HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx | 28 ++++++++-----------
.../partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 28 ++++++++++++-------
2 files changed, 30 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
index dbd9fdb6c88..ed1553b5ce4 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
@@ -1,35 +1,31 @@
---
title: 'Configuration'
-description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing EDB software on HPE requires the following components:
-!!! Note
- The EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server and PostgreSQL Server products will be referred to as Postgres distribution. The specific distribution type will be dependent upon customer need or preference.
- Postgres distribution
- HPE system components configured per your requirements
-Sample deployment:
-
-![HPE Sample Deployment](Images/SampleDeployment.png)
-
-## Prerequisites
-
-- HPE servers set up per your requirements
-
+!!! Note
+ We refer to EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server as *Postgres distribution*. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
-## Login to Server and Deploy Postgres Distribution
+The figure shows a sample deployment.
+![HPE sample deployment](Images/SampleDeployment.png)
-1. Login to your server per your chosen method, for example if on a Windows system accessing a RHEL Server, you would want to use a utility like PuTTy to SSH into your server to access it.
+## Prerequisites
-2. Login as the `Root` user via credentials you established with HPE during your server setup.
+Set up HPE servers per your requirements.
-3. Install your preferred Postgres distribution. For example, for EDB Postgres Advanced Server refer to the [EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/epas/latest/) or for EDB Postgres Extended Server refer to the [EDB Postgres Extended Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pge/latest/).
+## Log in to server and deploy Postgres distribution
-4. Install the other EDB tools, such as [Failover Manager (EFM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/efm/latest/), [Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pem/latest/), or [Barman](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/supported-open-source/barman/), as needed for your configuration in the appropriate servers. Refer to the [EDB documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs) for any other software needs.
+1. Log in to your server using your chosen method. For example, on a Windows system accessing a RHEL server, use a utility like PuTTy to SSH into your server.
+2. Log in as the root user using credentials you established with HPE during your server setup.
+3. Install your preferred Postgres distribution. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, see the [EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/epas/latest/). For EDB Postgres Extended Server, see the [EDB Postgres Extended Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pge/latest/).
+4. Install the other EDB tools, such as [Failover Manager (EFM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/efm/latest/), [Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pem/latest/), or [Barman](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/supported-open-source/barman/), in the appropriate servers as needed for your configuration. See the [EDB documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs) for any other software needs.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index 309c9340288..92dd10bf4b4 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -1,25 +1,33 @@
---
-title: 'Support and Logging Details'
+title: 'Support and logging details'
description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
---
## Support
-Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and HPE. A proper support contract is required to be in place at both EDB and HPE. A support ticket can be opened on either side to start the process. If it is determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor is required, the customer should open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This will allow both companies to work together to help the customer as needed.
+Both EDB and HPE provide technical support for the use of these products. To get support, you must have a support contract in place at both EDB and HPE. You can open a support ticket with either vendor to start the process.
+
+If the support ticket shows that resources from the other vendor are required, open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This approach allows both companies to work together to help you as needed.
## Logging
-**EDB Postgres Advanced Server Logs**
+The log location depends on the product.
+
+### EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs
+
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log` or `current_logfiles`. Alternatively, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
+
+An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs is `/var/lib/edb/as15/data/log`.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs: `/var/lib/edb/as15/data/log`.
+### EDB Postgres Extended Server logs
-**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log`. Alternatively, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs is `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
-**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
+### PostgreSQL Server logs
-The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
+The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs depend on the operating system:
- Debian-based system: `/var/log/postgresql/postgresql-x.x.main.log. X.x.`
@@ -27,6 +35,6 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
- Windows: `C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.3\data\pg_log`
-**HPE Logs**
+### HPE logs
-For HPE logging and support, please contact the HPE Support team to assist you.
\ No newline at end of file
+For HPE logging and support, contact the HPE Support team.
\ No newline at end of file
From 130adbce9c615344b7818a00189344336791c532 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Chris Estes <106166814+ccestes@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 27 Jul 2023 09:14:15 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 002/370] update
---
product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/04_using_edb_plus.mdx | 8 +++++++-
1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/04_using_edb_plus.mdx b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/04_using_edb_plus.mdx
index b166fce038c..5d8713e8707 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/04_using_edb_plus.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/04_using_edb_plus.mdx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ edbplus [ -S[ILENT ] ] [ | /NOLOG ] [ @[. ] ]
`connectstring` is the database connection string with the following format:
```text
-[:][/][?ssl={true | false}]
+[:],[:],[:],..[/][?ssl={true | false}][&targetServerType={primary}]
```
`host` is the hostname or IP address on which the database server resides. If you don't specify `@connectstring`, `@variable`, or `/NOLOG`, the default host is assumed to be the localhost.
@@ -114,6 +114,12 @@ define edb="localhost:5445/edb"
define hr_5445="localhost:5445/hr"
```
+Multi-host database connection strings can also be defined in the `login.sq`l file with the `?targetServerType=primary` parameter included in the connection string. The following shows an example how a multi-host connection string can be defined in `login.sql`:
+
+```ini
+define edb="192.168.2.24:5444,192.168.2.25:5445,192.168.2.26:5446/edb"
+```
+
The following example executes a script file, `dept_query.sql`, after connecting to database `edb` on server localhost at port 5444.
```sql
From 14d3d1e0739a3b1aa77b3217f01fe89d4733f639 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Bobby Bissett
Date: Thu, 27 Jul 2023 11:37:19 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 003/370] Adding warning message about openjdk 11 issue on
redhat
Pushing this first and will correct formatting after I see the generated pages.
---
product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx | 6 +++++-
product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx | 7 ++++++-
2 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
index 62749d37f2e..96c3d93de75 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: "Troubleshooting"
-redirects:
+redirects:
- ../efm_user/13_troubleshooting
legacyRedirectsGenerated:
# This list is generated by a script. If you need add entries, use the `legacyRedirects` key.
@@ -47,3 +47,7 @@ openjdk version "1.8.0_191"
OpenJDK Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_191-b12)
OpenJDK 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.191-b12, mixed mode)
```
+!!! Note:
+ There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
+ `java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
+ If so, the workaround is to manually install the missing package, e.g. `dnf install tzdata-java`
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
index 24e2b64e048..7a55ea3e34a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: "Prerequisites"
-redirects:
+redirects:
- ../efm_user/02_failover_manager_overview/01_prerequisites
- /efm/latest/01_prerequisites/
legacyRedirectsGenerated:
@@ -17,6 +17,11 @@ Before configuring a Failover Manager cluster, you must satisfy the prerequisite
Before using Failover Manager, you must first install Java (version 1.8 or later). Failover Manager is tested with OpenJDK, and we strongly recommend installing that version of Java. [Installation instructions for Java](https://openjdk.java.net/install/) are platform specific.
+!!! Note:
+ There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
+ `java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
+ If so, the workaround is to manually install the missing package, e.g. `dnf install tzdata-java`
+
## Provide an SMTP server
You can receive notifications from Failover Manager as specified by a user-defined notification script, by email, or both.
From e15922d3ed9e017567c407a541206797dbd3edaa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Bobby Bissett
Date: Thu, 27 Jul 2023 13:16:01 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 004/370] Trying to add newlines.
---
product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx | 2 ++
product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx | 2 ++
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
index 96c3d93de75..44da9ff6493 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
@@ -49,5 +49,7 @@ OpenJDK 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.191-b12, mixed mode)
```
!!! Note:
There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
+
`java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
+
If so, the workaround is to manually install the missing package, e.g. `dnf install tzdata-java`
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
index 7a55ea3e34a..83a7845f59c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
@@ -19,7 +19,9 @@ Before using Failover Manager, you must first install Java (version 1.8 or later
!!! Note:
There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
+
`java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
+
If so, the workaround is to manually install the missing package, e.g. `dnf install tzdata-java`
## Provide an SMTP server
From 40ed6bbd43906002918af9e86823368846a7e588 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Bobby Bissett
Date: Thu, 27 Jul 2023 13:54:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 005/370] Somehow "Note" was lost.
Trying it like other examples in the doc but can't find one with multiple lines yet.
---
product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
index 44da9ff6493..ff558cdb8bc 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/13_troubleshooting.mdx
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ openjdk version "1.8.0_191"
OpenJDK Runtime Environment (build 1.8.0_191-b12)
OpenJDK 64-Bit Server VM (build 25.191-b12, mixed mode)
```
-!!! Note:
+!!! Note
There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
`java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
index 83a7845f59c..7c221116dc5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/installing/prerequisites.mdx
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Before configuring a Failover Manager cluster, you must satisfy the prerequisite
Before using Failover Manager, you must first install Java (version 1.8 or later). Failover Manager is tested with OpenJDK, and we strongly recommend installing that version of Java. [Installation instructions for Java](https://openjdk.java.net/install/) are platform specific.
-!!! Note:
+!!! Note
There is a temporary issue with OpenJDK version 11 on RHEL and its derivatives. When starting Failover Manager, you may see an error like the following:
`java.lang.Error: java.io.FileNotFoundException: /usr/lib/jvm/java-11-openjdk-11.0.20.0.8-2.el8.x86_64/lib/tzdb.dat (No such file or directory)`
From c5a380833724b23b4aff960beb1a7a374943141c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 1 Aug 2023 11:47:42 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 006/370] Finished editing HPE content
---
.../partner_docs/HPE/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 10 +++++-----
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 8 ++++----
.../partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx | 11 +++++------
.../partner_docs/HPE/05-UsingHPEGreenlake.mdx | 4 ++--
.../partner_docs/HPE/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 8 ++++----
.../partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 10 ++++------
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx | 9 ++++-----
7 files changed, 28 insertions(+), 32 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 3d0da9ad59d..8ffbb5b7030 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
---
-title: 'Partner Information'
+title: 'Partner information'
description: 'Details of the partner'
---
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Partner Name** | HPE |
-| **Web Site** | https://www.hpe.com/us/en/greenlake.html |
-| **Partner Product** | HPE Servers |
-| **Product Description** | Whether on-prem or in the cloud, HPE provides customers with simple, secure systems to deploy their databases. HPE allows you to deploy your EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, PostgreSQL and other EDB software in a fast and secure environment. |
+| **Partner name** | HPE |
+| **Website** | https://www.hpe.com/us/en/greenlake.html |
+| **Partner product** | HPE servers |
+| **Product description** | Whether on premises or in the cloud, HPE provides you with simple, secure systems to deploy your databases. HPE allows you to deploy your EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, PostgreSQL, and other EDB software in a fast and secure environment. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index 3e2919819ca..bcb00836edf 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -1,12 +1,12 @@
---
-title: 'Solution Summary'
+title: 'Solution summary'
description: 'Explanation of the solution and its purpose'
---
-EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, PostgreSQL, Failover Manager, Postgres Enterprise Manager, and Barman can each be deployed on HPE hardware that is customizable per customer needs. Furthermore, using the HPE GreenLake Database model with EDB Postgres allows for a simpler end-to-end solution for the entire lifecycle of the database environment.
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, PostgreSQL, Failover Manager, Postgres Enterprise Manager, and Barman can each be deployed on HPE hardware that's customizable per your needs. Furthermore, using the HPE GreenLake Database model with EDB Postgres allows for a simpler end-to-end solution for the entire lifecycle of the database environment.
-HPE GreenLake Database works to remove some of the complexities of getting a database up and running which then allows you to deploy all of your EDB products quickly and securely. HPE does this by taking on some of the in depth pieces like designing, implementing and operating a database so customers do not have to put as much focus into these areas. HPE provides customers with complete, scalable solutions for all of their server needs in order to run their databases efficiently.
+HPE GreenLake Database works to remove some of the complexities of getting a database up and running, which then allows you to deploy all of your EDB products quickly and securely. HPE does this by taking on some of the in-depth pieces, like designing, implementing, and operating a database so you don't have to put as much focus into these areas. HPE provides you with complete, scalable solutions for all of your server needs to run your databases efficiently.
-The following diagram shows what EDB products were tested on HPE Servers:
+The following diagram shows the EDB products that were tested on HPE servers.
![EDB Products on HPE Servers](Images/HPESolutionSummaryImage.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
index ed1553b5ce4..b49fd7a5abb 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
@@ -3,14 +3,14 @@ title: 'Configuration'
description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
+!!! Note
+ We refer to EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server as the Postgres distribution. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
+
Implementing EDB software on HPE requires the following components:
- Postgres distribution
- HPE system components configured per your requirements
-!!! Note
- We refer to EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server as *Postgres distribution*. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
-
The figure shows a sample deployment.
![HPE sample deployment](Images/SampleDeployment.png)
@@ -21,11 +21,10 @@ Set up HPE servers per your requirements.
## Log in to server and deploy Postgres distribution
-
1. Log in to your server using your chosen method. For example, on a Windows system accessing a RHEL server, use a utility like PuTTy to SSH into your server.
2. Log in as the root user using credentials you established with HPE during your server setup.
-3. Install your preferred Postgres distribution. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, see the [EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/epas/latest/). For EDB Postgres Extended Server, see the [EDB Postgres Extended Server documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pge/latest/).
+3. Install your preferred Postgres distribution. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, see the [EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation](/epas/latest/). For EDB Postgres Extended Server, see the [EDB Postgres Extended Server documentation](/pge/latest/).
-4. Install the other EDB tools, such as [Failover Manager (EFM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/efm/latest/), [Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pem/latest/), or [Barman](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/supported-open-source/barman/), in the appropriate servers as needed for your configuration. See the [EDB documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs) for any other software needs.
+4. Install the other EDB tools, such as [Failover Manager (EFM)](/efm/latest/), [Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM)](/pem/latest/), or [Barman](/supported-open-source/barman/), in the appropriate servers as needed for your configuration. See the [EDB documentation](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs) for any other software needs.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/05-UsingHPEGreenlake.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/05-UsingHPEGreenlake.mdx
index d20c653d2b0..9c0e4bb4642 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/05-UsingHPEGreenlake.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/05-UsingHPEGreenlake.mdx
@@ -5,9 +5,9 @@ description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
HPE systems are easy to deploy, turn on and off, and install your Postgres distribution products on, while ensuring speed and security.
-To use HPE System Components:
+To use HPE system components:
-1. Access your server, either via GUI or SSH depending on your system setup.
+1. Access your server, either using the UI or SSH, depending on your system setup.
1. Install and deploy your Postgres distribution products as needed:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 3371353886c..bd8a037e9b8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,15 +1,15 @@
---
-title: 'Certification Environment'
+title: 'Certification environment'
description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
-## HPE DL380 Gen10 Plus Server Test Environment
+## HPE DL380 Gen10 Plus Server test environment
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Certification Test Date** | May 31, 2023 |
+| **Certification test date** | May 31, 2023 |
| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | 12,13,14,15 |
| **EDB Postgres Extended Server** | 12,13,14,15 |
| **Postgres Enterprise Manager** | 9.1.1 |
| **EDB Failover Manager** | 4.6 |
| **Barman** | 3.4.0 |
-| **HPE Server** | Proliant DL380 Gen10 Plus |
\ No newline at end of file
+| **HPE server** | Proliant DL380 Gen10 Plus |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index 92dd10bf4b4..1197e5fc217 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -5,23 +5,21 @@ description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
## Support
-Both EDB and HPE provide technical support for the use of these products. To get support, you must have a support contract in place at both EDB and HPE. You can open a support ticket with either vendor to start the process.
-
-If the support ticket shows that resources from the other vendor are required, open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This approach allows both companies to work together to help you as needed.
+Both EDB and HPE provide technical support for the use of these products. To get support, you must have a support contract in place at both EDB and HPE. You can open a support ticket with either vendor to start the process. If the support ticket shows that resources from the other vendor are required, open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This approach allows both companies to work together to help you as needed.
## Logging
-The log location depends on the product.
+The following log files are available.
### EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log` or `current_logfiles`. Alternatively, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log` or `current_logfiles`. Or, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs is `/var/lib/edb/as15/data/log`.
### EDB Postgres Extended Server logs
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log`. Alternatively, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options.
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log`. Or, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file, which you can use to customize logging options.
An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs is `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
index 0fd33dbf849..5bb17a486d9 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
@@ -1,14 +1,13 @@
---
-title: 'HPE Servers Implementation Guide'
+title: 'Implementing HPE Servers'
indexCards: simple
directoryDefaults:
iconName: handshake
---
-
-
-
+![Partner Program Logo](Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png)
+
This document is intended to augment each vendor’s product documentation in order to guide the reader in getting the products working together. It is not intended to show the optimal configuration for the certified integration.
\ No newline at end of file
+
This content is intended to augment each vendor’s product documentation to guide you in getting the products working together. It isn't intended to show the optimal configuration for the certified integration.
\ No newline at end of file
From 3fb9f83633d7563b46b5917c28e22fb8d49d4b21 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Chris Estes <106166814+ccestes@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 1 Aug 2023 09:07:59 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 007/370] update to CONNECT section
added code back and made some consistency fixes
follow up
---
product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/06_command_summary.mdx | 12 ++++++++++--
1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/06_command_summary.mdx b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/06_command_summary.mdx
index f83c7ae75b6..a43cfdfe2d2 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/06_command_summary.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/06_command_summary.mdx
@@ -315,7 +315,7 @@ C:\Users\Administrator\AppData\Roaming\postgresql\pgpass.conf
`variable` is a variable defined in the `login.sql` file that contains a database connection string. The `login.sql` file is in the `edbplus` subdirectory of the EDB Postgres Advanced Server home directory.
-In this example, the database connection is changed to database `edb` on the localhost at port 5445 with username smith.
+In this example, the database connection is changed to database `edb` on the localhost at port `5445` with username `smith`.
```sql
SQL> CONNECT smith/mypassword@localhost:5445/edb
@@ -323,7 +323,7 @@ Disconnected from EnterpriseDB Database.
Connected to EnterpriseDB 14.0.0 (localhost:5445/edb) AS smith
```
-In this session, the connection is changed to user name enterprisedb. The host defaults to the localhost, the port defaults to 5444 (which isn't the same as the port previously used), and the database defaults to `edb`.
+In this session, the connection is changed to user name `enterprisedb`. The host defaults to the `localhost`, the port defaults to `5444` (which isn't the same as the port previously used), and the database defaults to `edb`.
```sql
SQL> CONNECT enterprisedb/password
@@ -331,6 +331,14 @@ Disconnected from EnterpriseDB Database.
Connected to EnterpriseDB 14.0.0 (localhost:5444/edb) AS enterprisedb
```
+The following example illustrates connectivity for a multi-node cluster (one primary node and two secondary nodes) setup. The given multi-host `connectstring` syntax is used to establish a connection with the active primary database server. In this case, using `CONNECT` command, the connection is established with the primary database node on host `192.168.22.24` at port `5444`.
+
+```sql
+SQL> CONNECT enterprisedb/edb@192.168.22.24:5444,192.168.22.25:5445,192.168.22.26:5446/edb?targetServerType=primary
+Disconnected from EnterpriseDB Database.
+Connected to EnterpriseDB 15.3.0 (192.168.22.24:5444/edb) AS enterprisedb
+```
+
## DEFINE
The `DEFINE` command creates or replaces the value of a *user variable* (also called a *substitution variable*).
From 8289f29c5bf6c7b79b6070dde7e05b9350b63471 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 3 Aug 2023 09:34:17 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 008/370] A few fixes per Jennifer's global comments
---
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
index b49fd7a5abb..1b58ca03f8e 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/04-ConfiguringHPEGreenlake.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: 'Configuration'
+title: 'Configuring'
description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
index 5bb17a486d9..b6cbd09a76f 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HPE/index.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: 'Implementing HPE Servers'
+title: 'HPE Servers Implementation Guide'
indexCards: simple
directoryDefaults:
iconName: handshake
From 0ce57511a60a42f2cca20c3b7d39dd3f44058aeb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 10 Aug 2023 14:21:21 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 009/370] edits to PGD release PR4560
with queries
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/parallelapply.mdx | 43 +++++++-----
.../docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx | 13 ++--
.../docs/pgd/5/reference/catalogs-visible.mdx | 10 +--
.../pgd/5/rel_notes/pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes.mdx | 68 +++++++++----------
.../docs/pgd/5/routing/installing_proxy.mdx | 10 +--
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/proxy.mdx | 6 +-
.../docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 2 +-
7 files changed, 78 insertions(+), 74 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/parallelapply.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/parallelapply.mdx
index d8d8c63f92c..997148802d2 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/parallelapply.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/parallelapply.mdx
@@ -6,35 +6,44 @@ navTitle: Parallel Apply
## What is Parallel Apply?
!!! Note Improved in PGD 5.2
-This feature has been enhanced in PGD 5.2 and is recommended for more scenarios.
+This feature was enhanced in PGD 5.2 and is recommended for more scenarios.
!!!
Parallel Apply is a feature of PGD that allows a PGD node to use multiple writers per subscription. This behavior generally increases the throughput of a subscription and improves replication performance.
When Parallel Apply is operating, the transactional changes from the subscription are written by multiple writers. However, each writer ensures that the final commit of its transaction doesn't violate the commit order as executed on the origin node. If there's a violation, an error is generated and the transaction can be rolled back.
-This mechanism has previously meant that if a transaction is pending commit and modifies a row that another transaction needs to change, and that other transaction executed on the origin node before the pending transaction did, then the resulting error could manifest itself as a deadlock if the pending transaction has taken out a lock request.
+This mechanism previously meant that when the following are all true, the resulting error could manifest as a deadlock:
-Additionally, handling the error could increase replication lag, due to a combination of the time taken to detect the deadlock, the time taken for the client to rollback its transaction, the time taken for indirect garbage collection of the already applied changes, and the time taken to redo the work.
+- A transaction is pending commit and modifies a row that another transaction needs to change.
+- That other transaction executed on the origin node before the pending transaction did.
+- The pending transaction took out a lock request.
-This is where Parallel Apply’s deadlock mitigation, introduced in PGD 5.2, comes into play. For any transaction, Parallel Apply looks at transactions already scheduled for any row (tuple) that the current transaction wants to write. If it finds one, the row is marked as needing to wait until the other transaction is committed before applying its change to the row.
+Additionally, handling the error could increase replication lag, due to a combination of the time taken:
-This ensures that rows are written in the correct order.
+- To detect the deadlock
+- For the client to roll back its transaction
+- For indirect garbage collection of the changes that were already applied
+- To redo the work
+
+This is where Parallel Apply’s deadlock mitigation, introduced in PGD 5.2, can help. For any transaction, Parallel Apply looks at transactions already scheduled for any row (tuple) that the current transaction wants to write. If it finds one, the row is marked as needing to wait until the other transaction is committed before applying its change to the row.
+
+This approach ensures that rows are written in the correct order.
### Configuring Parallel Apply
-Two variables which control Parallel Apply in PGD 5, [`bdr.max_writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrmax_writers_per_subscription) (defaults to 8) and [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) (defaults to 2).
+Two variables control Parallel Apply in PGD 5: [`bdr.max_writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrmax_writers_per_subscription) (defaults to 8) and [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) (defaults to 2).
```plain
bdr.max_writers_per_subscription = 8
bdr.writers_per_subscription = 2
```
-This configuration gives each subscription two writers. However, in some circumstances, the system might allocate up to 8 writers for a subscription.
+This configuration gives each subscription two writers. However, in some circumstances, the system might allocate up to eight writers for a subscription.
You can only change [`bdr.max_writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrmax_writers_per_subscription) with a server restart.
-You can change [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) for a specific subscription, without a restart by:
+You can change [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) for a specific subscription without a restart by:
1. Halting the subscription using [`bdr.alter_subscription_disable`](/pgd/latest/reference/nodes-management-interfaces#bdralter_subscription_disable).
1. Setting the new value.
@@ -55,23 +64,21 @@ SELECT bdr.alter_subscription_enable ('bdr_bdrdb_bdrgroup_node2_node1');
### When to use Parallel Apply
-Parallel Apply is always on by default and, for most operations, we recommend that it's left on.
+Parallel Apply is always on by default and, for most operations, we recommend leaving it on.
-From PGD 5.2, Parallel Apply works with CAMO. It is not compatible with Group Commit or Eager Replication and should be disabled if Group Commit or Eager Replication are in use.
+From PGD 5.2, Parallel Apply works with CAMO. It isn't compatible with Group Commit or Eager Replication, so disable it if Group Commit or Eager Replication are in use.
-Up to and including PGD 5.1, Parallel Apply should not be used with Group Commit, CAMO and eager replication. You should disable Parallel Apply in these scenarios. If, using PGD 5.1 or earlier, you are experiencing a large number of deadlocks, you may also want to disable Parallel Apply or consider upgrading.
+Up to and including PGD 5.1, don't use Parallel Apply with Group Commit, CAMO, and Eager Replication. Disable Parallel Apply in these scenarios. If, using PGD 5.1 or earlier, you're experiencing a large number of deadlocks, you might also want to disable Parallel Apply or consider upgrading.
### Monitoring Parallel Apply
-To support Parallel Apply's deadlock mitigation, PGD 5.2 adds columns to [`bdr.stat_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible#bdrstat_subscription). The new columns are `nprovisional_waits`, `ntuple_waits` and `ncommmit_waits`. These
-are metrics which indicate how well Parallel Apply is managing what would have previously been deadlocks. They are not
-indicative of overall system performance.
+To support Parallel Apply's deadlock mitigation, PGD 5.2 adds columns to [`bdr.stat_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible#bdrstat_subscription). The new columns are `nprovisional_waits`, `ntuple_waits`, and `ncommmit_waits`. These
+are metrics that indicate how well Parallel Apply is managing what previously would have been deadlocks. They don't indicate overall system performance.
-The `nprovisional_waits` value reflects the number of operations on the same tuples being performed by concurrent apply transactions. These are provisional waits which aren't actually waiting yet but could.
+The `nprovisional_waits` value reflects the number of operations on the same tuples being performed by concurrent apply transactions. These are provisional waits that aren't actually waiting yet but could.
-If a tuple's write needs to wait until it can be safely applied, it is counted in `ntuple_waits`. Fully applied transactions which waited before being committed are counted in `ncommit_waits`.
+If a tuple's write needs to wait until it can be safely applied, it's counted in `ntuple_waits`. Fully applied transactions that waited before being committed are counted in `ncommit_waits`.
### Disabling Parallel Apply
-To disable Parallel Apply set [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) to 1.
-
+To disable Parallel Apply, set [`bdr.writers_per_subscription`](/pgd/latest/reference/pgd-settings#bdrwriters_per_subscription) to `1`.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
index 909cbe5b641..ab5c1d080b9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
@@ -5,8 +5,8 @@ indexdepth: 3
rootisheading: false
---
-Autopartition allows you to split tables into several partitions. Read more about it in the main
-[Scaling](../scaling) section.
+Autopartition allows you to split tables into several partitions. For more information, see
+[Scaling](../scaling).
### `bdr.autopartition`
@@ -33,7 +33,8 @@ bdr.autopartition(relation regclass,
- `partition_initial_lowerbound` — If the table has no partition, then the
first partition with this lower bound and `partition_increment` apart upper
bound is created.
-- `partition_autocreate_expression` — Used to detect if it's time to create new partitions.
+
+- `partition_autocreate_expression` — Detects if it's time to create new partitions.
- `minimum_advance_partitions` — The system attempts to always have at
least `minimum_advance_partitions` partitions.
- `maximum_advance_partitions` — Number of partitions to create in a single
@@ -57,7 +58,7 @@ unitsales int
bdr.autopartition('measurement', '1 day', data_retention_period := '30 days');
```
-Create five advance partitions when there are only two more partitions remaining. Each partition can hold 1 billion orders.
+Create five advance partitions when only two more partitions are remaining. Each partition can hold 1 billion orders.
```sql
bdr.autopartition('Orders', '1000000000',
@@ -229,7 +230,3 @@ This function places a DDL lock on the parent table before using `DROP TABLE` on
chosen partition table. This function is an internal function used by
AutoPartition for partition management. We recommend that you don't
use the function directly.
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/catalogs-visible.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/catalogs-visible.mdx
index abac3dab33b..20fca8df41c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/catalogs-visible.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/catalogs-visible.mdx
@@ -889,13 +889,13 @@ is enabled.
| start_lsn | pg_lsn | LSN from which this subscription requested to start replication from the upstream |
| retries_at_same_lsn | bigint | Number of attempts the subscription was restarted from the same LSN value |
| curr_ncommit | bigint | Number of commits this subscription did after the current connection was established |
-| npre_commit_confirmations | bigint | Number of pre-commit confirmations by CAMO partners |
-| npre_commit | bigint | Number of pre-commits |
+| npre_commit_confirmations | bigint | Number of precommit confirmations by CAMO partners |
+| npre_commit | bigint | Number of precommits |
| ncommit_prepared | bigint | Number of prepared transaction commits |
| nabort_prepared | bigint | Number of prepared transaction aborts |
-| nprovisional_waits | bigint | Number of update/delete operations on same tuples by concurrent apply transactions. These are provisional waits. See [Parallel apply](../parallelapply) |
-| ntuple_waits | bigint | Number of update/delete operations that waited to be safely applied. See [Parallel apply](../parallelapply) |
-| ncommit_waits | bigint | Number of fully applied transactions that had to wait before being committed. See [Parallel apply](../parallelapply) |
+| nprovisional_waits | bigint | Number of update/delete operations on same tuples by concurrent apply transactions. These are provisional waits. See [Parallel Apply](../parallelapply) |
+| ntuple_waits | bigint | Number of update/delete operations that waited to be safely applied. See [Parallel Apply](../parallelapply) |
+| ncommit_waits | bigint | Number of fully applied transactions that had to wait before being committed. See [Parallel Apply](../parallelapply) |
| stats_reset | timestamp with time zone | Time when these subscription statistics were reset |
### `bdr.subscription`
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes.mdx
index f1b8720d038..7ed48a0c20f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -7,9 +7,9 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 5.2.0 is a minor version of EDB Postgres Distri
## Highlights of EDB Postgres Distributed 5.2
-* Parallel apply is now available for PGD’s Commit at Most Once (CAMO) synchronous commit scope and improving replication performance.
-* Parallel apply for native Postgres asynchronous and synchronous replication has been improved for workloads where the same key is being modified concurrently by multiple transactions to maintain commit sequence and avoid deadlocks
-* PGD Proxy has added HTTP(S) APIs to allow the health of the proxy to be monitored directly for readiness and liveness. See [Proxy Health Check](../routing/proxy/#proxy-health-check)
+* Parallel Apply is now available for PGD’s Commit at Most Once (CAMO) synchronous commit scope and improving replication performance.
+* Parallel Apply for native Postgres asynchronous and synchronous replication has been improved for workloads where the same key is being modified concurrently by multiple transactions to maintain commit sequence and avoid deadlocks.
+* PGD Proxy has added HTTP(S) APIs to allow the health of the proxy to be monitored directly for readiness and liveness. See [Proxy health check](../routing/proxy/#proxy-health-check).
!!! Important Recommended upgrade
We recommend that users of PGD 5.1 upgrade to PGD 5.2.
@@ -21,34 +21,34 @@ This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11,
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
|-----------|---------|-----------------|--------------|
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Feature | Parallel apply for synchronous commit scopes with CAMO |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Feature | Allow multiple SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT clauses in a Commit Scope rule |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Allow transaction streaming with SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT and LAG CONTROL Commit Scopes |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Improve handling of concurrent workloads with parallel apply |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Modify `bdr.stat_subscription` for new columns |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Allow a logical join of node if there are foreign key constraints violations. (RT91745) |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Change to `group_raft_details` view to avoid deadlock possibility |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Log the extension upgrade |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Add check for conflicting node names |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix a crash during Raft manual snapshot restore |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Don't try to establish consensus connections to parting or parted nodes |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix `tcp_user_timeout` GUC to use the correct unit |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Address a crash when BDR is used together with pgaudit |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Skip parting synchronization to witness node |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Generate correct keepalive parameters in connection strings |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Enable various scenarios of switching nodes between groups and their subgroups. For example, transition node from a group to any of the nested sub-groups|
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Reduce the amount of WAL produced by consensus on idle server |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent `DROP EXTENSION` is executing |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix sporadic failure when dropping extension after node restart |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Add workaround for crash due to pgaudit bug 212 |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix deadlock between consensus and global monitoring queries |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fix query cancellation propagation across `bdr.run_on_all_nodes` |
-| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Disallow invoking `bdr.run_on_nodes()`, `bdr.run_on_group()` and `bdr.run_on_all_nodes()` on parted nodes |
-| CLI | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Add new GUCs verification in `verify-settings` command |
-| CLI | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Truncate the long value of GUC in tabular output of `verify-settings` |
-| CLI | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Upgrade database driver library version which fixes `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer` |
-| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Feature | Add HTTP(S) APIs for Proxy health check |
-| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Improve route change events handling mechanism |
-| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Add retry mechanism on consensus query error |
-| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Upgrade database driver library version which fixes `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer` |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Feature | Added Parallel Apply for synchronous commit scopes with CAMO. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Feature | Allow multiple SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT clauses in a commit scope rule. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | BDR extension now allows transaction streaming with SYNCHRONOUS_COMMIT and LAG CONTROL commit scopes. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Improved handling of concurrent workloads with Parallel Apply. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Modified `bdr.stat_subscription` for new columns. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by allowing a logical join of node if there are foreign key constraints violations. (RT91745) |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Changed `group_raft_details` view to avoid deadlock possibility. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by adding ability to log the extension upgrade. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed a crash during Raft manual snapshot restore. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby BDR extension was attempting to establish consensus connections to parting or parted nodes. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed `tcp_user_timeout` GUC to use the correct unit. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby a crash occurred when BDR extension is used with pgaudit. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by skipping parting synchronization to witness node. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by now generating correct keepalive parameters in connection strings. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Enabled various scenarios of switching nodes between groups and their subgroups, for example, transition node from a group to any of the nested subgroups.|
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Reduced the amount of WAL produced by consensus on idle server. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent `DROP EXTENSION` is executing. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed sporadic failure when dropping extension after node restart |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for crash due to pgaudit bug. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock between consensus and global monitoring queries. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed query cancellation propagation across `bdr.run_on_all_nodes`. |
+| BDR | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by disallowing invoking `bdr.run_on_nodes()`, `bdr.run_on_group()` and `bdr.run_on_all_nodes()` on parted nodes. |
+| CLI | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Added new GUCs verification in `verify-settings` command. |
+| CLI | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by truncating the long value of GUC in tabular output of `verify-settings`. |
+| CLI | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer` by upgrading database driver library version. |
+| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Feature | Added HTTP(S) APIs for Proxy health check. |
+| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Improved route change events handling mechanism. |
+| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Enhancement | Added retry mechanism on consensus query error. |
+| Proxy | 5.2.0 | Bug fix | Fixed `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer` by upgrading database driver library version. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/installing_proxy.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/installing_proxy.mdx
index c7eb9a0c779..d9828e46c15 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/installing_proxy.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/installing_proxy.mdx
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ PGD Proxy uses endpoints given in the local config file only at proxy startup. A
##### Configuring health check
-PGD Proxy provides [HTTP(S) health check APIs](proxy#proxy-health-check). If the health checks are required, you can enable them by adding the configuration parameters below to the pgd-proxy configuration file. By default it is disabled.
+PGD Proxy provides [HTTP(S) health check APIs](proxy#proxy-health-check). If the health checks are required, you can enable them by adding the following configuration parameters to the pgd-proxy configuration file. By default, it's disabled.
```yaml
cluster:
@@ -78,15 +78,15 @@ cluster:
timeout: 10s
```
-The API can be enabled by adding the config `cluster.proxy.http.enable: true`. When enabled, an HTTP server will listen on the default port, `8080`, with a ten second `timeout` and no HTTPS support.
+You can enable the API by adding the config `cluster.proxy.http.enable: true`. When enabled, an HTTP server listens on the default port, `8080`, with a 10-second `timeout` and no HTTPS support.
-To enable HTTPS set the config parameter `cluster.proxy.http.secure: true`. If it is set to `true`, the `cert_file` and `key_file` must also be set.
+To enable HTTPS, set the config parameter `cluster.proxy.http.secure: true`. If it's set to `true`, the `cert_file` and `key_file` must also be set.
-The `cluster.proxy.endpoint` is an endpoint used by the proxy to connect to the current write leader as part of its checks. When `cluster.proxy.http.enable` is `true`, `cluster.proxy.endpoint` must also be set. It could be same as BDR node [routing_dsn](../routing#configuration) where host will be `listen_address` and port will be `listen_port` [proxy options](../routing#configuration). If required, user can add additional connection string parameters in this endpoint, like `sslmode`, `sslrootcert`, `user`, etc.
+The `cluster.proxy.endpoint` is an endpoint used by the proxy to connect to the current write leader as part of its checks. When `cluster.proxy.http.enable` is `true`, `cluster.proxy.endpoint` must also be set. It can be the same as BDR node [routing_dsn](../routing#configuration), where host is `listen_address` and port is `listen_port` [proxy options](../routing#configuration). If required, you can add connection string parameters in this endpoint, like `sslmode`, `sslrootcert`, `user`, and so on.
#### PGD Proxy user
-The database user specified in the endpoint doesn't need to be a superuser. Typically, in the TPA environment, `pgdproxy` is an OS user as well as a database user with the `bdr_superuser` role.
+The database user specified in the endpoint doesn't need to be a superuser. Typically, in the TPA environment, pgdproxy is an OS user as well as a database user with the bdr_superuser role.
#### PGD Proxy service
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/proxy.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/proxy.mdx
index bb76f0933ec..34326b2088d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/proxy.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/routing/proxy.mdx
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ See [Connection management](../routing) for more information on the PGD side of
### Proxy health check
-PGD Proxy provides the following HTTP(s) health check API endpoints. The API endpoints respond to `GET` requests. They need to be enabled and configured before use; see [Configurations](installing_proxy#configuring-health-check) for how to do this.
+PGD Proxy provides the following HTTP(s) health check API endpoints. The API endpoints respond to `GET` requests. You need to enable and configure them before using them. See [Configurations](installing_proxy#configuring-health-check).
```
@@ -73,12 +73,12 @@ GET /health/is-live
#### Readiness
-On receiving a valid 'GET' request, the proxy checks if it can successfully route connections to the current write leader. If the check returns successfully, the API responds with a body containing `true` and an HTTP status code `200 (OK)`. Otherwise, it returns a body containing `false` with the HTTP status code `500 (Internal Server Error)`.
+On receiving a valid `GET` request, the proxy checks if it can successfully route connections to the current write leader. If the check returns successfully, the API responds with a body containing `true` and an HTTP status code `200 (OK)`. Otherwise, it returns a body containing `false` with the HTTP status code `500 (Internal Server Error)`.
#### Liveness
-Liveness check either return `true` with HTTP status code `200 (OK)` or an error but never `false`. This is because the HTTP server listening for request is automatically stopped if the Proxy service fails to start or exits.
+Liveness checks return either `true` with HTTP status code `200 (OK)` or an error. They never return `false` because the HTTP server listening for the request is stopped if the PGD Proxy service fails to start or exits.
## Proxy log location
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index 2a114d3af7c..0802df449da 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older version
## Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 5
-Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.7 to 5. You must first upgrade your cluster to 4.3.0 or later before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-from-version-37-to-version-4) documentation for more information.
+Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.7 to 5. You must first upgrade your cluster to 4.3.0 or later before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-from-version-37-to-version-4) for more information.
- `partition_autocreate_expression` — Detects if it's time to create new partitions.
- `minimum_advance_partitions` — The system attempts to always have at
least `minimum_advance_partitions` partitions.
From cc80b2eca140bc827b08445c34117d529b811f7e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 10 Aug 2023 14:50:19 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 011/370] Update autopartition.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
index 7f506444b64..b4d9feddbff 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/autopartition.mdx
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ unitsales int
bdr.autopartition('measurement', '1 day', data_retention_period := '30 days');
```
-Create five advance partitions when only two more partitions are remaining. Each partition can hold 1 billion orders.
+Create five advance partitions when only two more partitions remain. Each partition can hold 1 billion orders.
```sql
bdr.autopartition('Orders', '1000000000',
From b278fb3cd4243ef35ee5cac4505b3822c0d6f2bd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 10 Aug 2023 17:16:05 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 012/370] Edits to PR4538
First pass
---
.../01_setting_new_parameters.mdx | 16 ++++----
.../01_configuration_parameters/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../02_edb_loader/data_loading_methods.mdx | 6 +--
.../edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx | 4 +-
.../running_edb_loader.mdx | 39 +++++++++++--------
.../dirty_buffer_throttling.mdx | 4 +-
.../copying_a_remote_schema.mdx | 2 +-
.../setting_up_edb_clone_schema.mdx | 4 +-
8 files changed, 42 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/01_setting_new_parameters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/01_setting_new_parameters.mdx
index b8ce0d69c9d..4a30417ed58 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/01_setting_new_parameters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/01_setting_new_parameters.mdx
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ redirects:
-Set each configuration parameter using a name/value pair. Parameter names are not case sensitive. The parameter name is typically separated from its value by an optional equals sign (`=`).
+Set each configuration parameter using a name/value pair. Parameter names aren't case sensitive. The parameter name is typically separated from its value by an optional equals sign (`=`).
This example shows some configuration parameter settings in the `postgresql.conf` file:
@@ -56,19 +56,19 @@ The multiplier for memory units is 1024.
A number of parameter settings are set when the EDB Postgres Advanced Server database product is built. These are read-only parameters, and you can't change their values. A couple of parameters are also permanently set for each database when the database is created. These parameters are read-only and you can't later change them for the database. However, there are a number of ways to specify the configuration parameter settings:
-- The initial settings for almost all configurable parameters across the entire database cluster are listed **in the `postgresql.conf`** configuration file. These settings are put into effect upon database server start or restart. You can override some of these initial parameter settings. All configuration parameters have built-in default settings that are in effect unless they are explicitly overridden.
+- The initial settings for almost all configurable parameters across the entire database cluster are listed in the `postgresql.conf` configuration file. These settings are put into effect upon database server start or restart. You can override some of these initial parameter settings. All configuration parameters have built-in default settings that are in effect unless they're explicitly overridden.
-- Configuration parameters in the `postgresql.conf` file are overridden when the same parameters are included **in the `postgresql.auto.conf` file**. The `ALTER SYSTEM` command is used to manage the configuration parameters in the `postgresql.auto.conf` file.
+- Configuration parameters in the `postgresql.conf` file are overridden when the same parameters are included in the `postgresql.auto.conf` file. The `ALTER SYSTEM` command is used to manage the configuration parameters in the `postgresql.auto.conf` file.
-- You can modify parameter settings **in the configuration file while the database server is running**. If the configuration file is then reloaded (meaning a SIGHUP signal is issued), for certain parameter types, the changed parameters settings immediately take effect. For some of these parameter types, the new settings are available in a currently running session immediately after the reload. For other of these parameter types, you must start a new session to use the new settings. And yet for other parameter types, modified settings don't take effect until the database server is stopped and restarted. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/config-setting.html) for information on how to reload the configuration file:
+- You can modify parameter settings in the configuration file while the database server is running. If the configuration file is then reloaded (meaning a SIGHUP signal is issued), for certain parameter types, the changed parameters settings immediately take effect. For some of these parameter types, the new settings are available in a currently running session immediately after the reload. For others, you must start a new session to use the new settings. And for some others, modified settings don't take effect until the database server is stopped and restarted. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/config-setting.html) for information on how to reload the configuration file.
-- You can **use the SQL commands** `ALTER DATABASE`, `ALTER ROLE`, or `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` to modify certain parameter settings. The modified parameter settings take effect for new sessions after you execute the command. `ALTER DATABASE` affects new sessions connecting to the specified database. `ALTER ROLE` affects new sessions started by the specified role. `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` affects new sessions started by the specified role connecting to the specified database. Parameter settings established by these SQL commands remain in effect indefinitely, across database server restarts, overriding settings established by the other methods. Parameter settings established using the `ALTER DATABASE`, `ALTER ROLE`, or `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` commands can be changed only by either:
+- You can use the SQL commands `ALTER DATABASE`, `ALTER ROLE`, or `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` to modify certain parameter settings. The modified parameter settings take effect for new sessions after you execute the command. `ALTER DATABASE` affects new sessions connecting to the specified database. `ALTER ROLE` affects new sessions started by the specified role. `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` affects new sessions started by the specified role connecting to the specified database. Parameter settings established by these SQL commands remain in effect indefinitely, across database server restarts, overriding settings established by the other methods. You can change parameter settings established using the `ALTER DATABASE`, `ALTER ROLE`, or `ALTER ROLE IN DATABASE` commands by either:
- Reissuing these commands with a different parameter value.
- - Issuing these commands using either of the `SET parameter TO DEFAULT` clause or the `RESET parameter` clause. These clauses change the parameter back to using the setting set by the other methods. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/sql-commands.html) for the exact syntax of these SQL commands.
+ - Issuing these commands using the `SET parameter TO DEFAULT` clause or the `RESET parameter` clause. These clauses change the parameter back to using the setting set by the other methods. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/sql-commands.html) for the exact syntax of these SQL commands.
-- You can make changes for certain parameter settings for the duration of individual sessions **using the `PGOPTIONS` environment variable** or by **using the `SET` command in the EDB-PSQL or PSQL command-line programs**. Parameter settings made this way override settings established using any of the methods descussed earlier, but only during that session.
+- You can make changes for certain parameter settings for the duration of individual sessions using the `PGOPTIONS` environment variable or by using the `SET` command in the EDB-PSQL or PSQL command-line programs. Parameter settings made this way override settings established using any of the methods descussed earlier, but only during that session.
## Modifying the postgresql.conf file
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ SELECT name FROM pg_settings WHERE context = 'postmaster';
Appropriate authentication methods provide protection and security. Entries in the `pg_hba.conf` file specify the authentication methods that the server uses with connecting clients. Before connecting to the server, you might need to modify the authentication properties specified in the `pg_hba.conf` file.
-When you invoke the `initdb` utility to create a cluster, the utility creates a `pg_hba.conf` file for that cluster that specifies the type of authentication required from connecting clients. You can modify this file. After modifying the authentication settings in the `pg_hba.conf` file, restart the server and apply the changes. For more information about authentication and modifying the `pg_hba.conf` file, see the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/auth-pg-hba-conf.html).
+When you invoke the initdb utility to create a cluster, the utility creates a `pg_hba.conf` file for that cluster that specifies the type of authentication required from connecting clients. You can modify this file. After modifying the authentication settings in the `pg_hba.conf` file, restart the server and apply the changes. For more information about authentication and modifying the `pg_hba.conf` file, see the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/auth-pg-hba-conf.html).
When the server receives a connection request, it verifies the credentials provided against the authentication settings in the `pg_hba.conf` file before allowing a connection to a database. To log the `pg_hba.conf` file entry to authenticate a connection to the server, set the `log_connections` parameter to `ON` in the `postgresql.conf` file.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/index.mdx
index 2b48a5f7eeb..fecb50262fa 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/01_configuration_parameters/index.mdx
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ redirects:
The EDB Postgres Advanced Server configuration parameters control various aspects of the database server’s behavior and environment such as data file and log file locations, connection, authentication and security settings, resource allocation and consumption, archiving and replication settings, error logging and statistics gathering, optimization and performance tuning, and locale and formatting settings
-Configuration parameters that apply only to EDB Postgres Advanced Server are noted in the [Summary of configuration parameters](/epas/latest/reference/database_administrator_reference/02_summary_of_configuration_parameters/) topic, which lists all EDB Postgres Advanced Server configuration parameters along with a number of key attributes of the parameters.
+Configuration parameters that apply only to EDB Postgres Advanced Server are noted in [Summary of configuration parameters](/epas/latest/reference/database_administrator_reference/02_summary_of_configuration_parameters/), which lists all EDB Postgres Advanced Server configuration parameters along with a number of key attributes of the parameters.
You can find more information about configuration parameters in the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/runtime-config.html).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/data_loading_methods.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/data_loading_methods.mdx
index d75c1ccd3ea..5bde3714902 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/data_loading_methods.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/data_loading_methods.mdx
@@ -6,11 +6,11 @@ description: "Description of the data loading methods supported by EDB*Loader"
As with Oracle SQL\*Loader, EDB\*Loader supports three data loading methods:
-- *Conventional path load* — Conventional path load is the default method used by EDB\*Loader. Use basic insert processing to add rows to the table. The advantage of a conventional path load is that table constraints and database objects defined on the table are enforced during a conventional path load. Table constraints and database objects include primary keys, not null constraints, check constraints, unique indexes, foreign key constraints, triggers, and so on. One exception is that the EDB Postgres Advanced Server rules defined on the table aren't enforced. EDB\*Loader can load tables on which rules are defined. However, the rules aren't executed. As a consequence, you can't load partitioned tables implemented using rules with EDB\*Loader. See [Conventional path load](invoking_edb_loader/conventional_path_load.mdx)
+- **Conventional path load** — Conventional path load is the default method used by EDB\*Loader. Use basic insert processing to add rows to the table. The advantage of a conventional path load is that table constraints and database objects defined on the table are enforced during a conventional path load. Table constraints and database objects include primary keys, not null constraints, check constraints, unique indexes, foreign key constraints, triggers, and so on. One exception is that the EDB Postgres Advanced Server rules defined on the table aren't enforced. EDB\*Loader can load tables on which rules are defined. However, the rules aren't executed. As a consequence, you can't load partitioned tables implemented using rules with EDB\*Loader. See [Conventional path load](invoking_edb_loader/conventional_path_load.mdx).
-- *Direct path load* — A direct path load is faster than a conventional path load but requires removing most types of constraints and triggers from the table. See [Direct path load](invoking_edb_loader/direct_path_load.mdx).
+- **Direct path load** — A direct path load is faster than a conventional path load but requires removing most types of constraints and triggers from the table. See [Direct path load](invoking_edb_loader/direct_path_load.mdx).
-- *Parallel direct path load* — A parallel direct path load provides even greater performance improvement by permitting multiple EDB\*Loader sessions to run simultaneously to load a single table. See [Parallel direct path load](invoking_edb_loader/parallel_direct_path_load.mdx).
+- **Parallel direct path load** — A parallel direct path load provides even greater performance improvement by permitting multiple EDB\*Loader sessions to run simultaneously to load a single table. See [Parallel direct path load](invoking_edb_loader/parallel_direct_path_load.mdx).
!!! Note
Create EDB Postgres Advanced Server rules using the `CREATE RULE` command. EDB Postgres Advanced Server rules aren't the same database objects as rules and rule sets used in Oracle.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
index 9e87a46566c..bbd6d241e79 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
@@ -21,9 +21,9 @@ EDB\*Loader features include:
The important version compatibility restrictions between the EDB\*Loader client and the database server are:
-- When you invoke the EDB\*Loader program (called `edbldr`), you pass in parameters and directive information to the database server. We strongly recommend that you use the version 14 EDB\*Loader client (the edbldr program supplied with EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14) to load data only into version 14 of the database server. In general, use the same version for the EDB\*Loader client and database server.
+- When you invoke the EDB\*Loader program (called `edbldr`), you pass in parameters and directive information to the database server. We strongly recommend that you use the version 14 EDB\*Loader client (the `edbldr` program supplied with EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14) to load data only into version 14 of the database server. In general, use the same version for the EDB\*Loader client and database server.
-- Using EDB\*Loader with connection poolers such as PgPool-II and PgBouncer isn't supported. EDB\*Loader must connect directly to EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 14. Alternatively, there are commands you can use for loading data through connection poolers:
+- Using EDB\*Loader with connection poolers such as PgPool-II and PgBouncer isn't supported. EDB\*Loader must connect directly to EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 14. Alternatively, you can use these commands for loading data through connection poolers:
```shell
psql \copy
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/invoking_edb_loader/running_edb_loader.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/invoking_edb_loader/running_edb_loader.mdx
index ab018dcd42a..49a929473f1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/invoking_edb_loader/running_edb_loader.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/invoking_edb_loader/running_edb_loader.mdx
@@ -33,13 +33,20 @@ You can specify parameters listed in the syntax diagram in a *parameter file*. E
You can include the full directory path or a relative directory path to the file name when specifying `control_file`, `data_file`, `bad_file`, `discard_file`, `log_file`, and `param_file`. If you specify the file name alone or with a relative directory path, the file is assumed to exist in the case of `control_file`, `data_file`, or `param_file` relative to the current working directory from which `edbldr` is invoked. In the case of `bad_file`, `discard_file`, or `log_file`, the file is created.
-If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults for the database, port, and host are determined by the same rules as other EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) utility programs, such as `edb-psql`.
+If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults for the database, port, and host are determined by the same rules as other EDB Postgres Advanced Server utility programs, such as edb-psql.
## Requirements
- The control file must exist in the character set encoding of the client where `edbldr` is invoked. If the client is in an encoding different from the database encoding, then you must set the `PGCLIENTENCODING` environment variable on the client to the client’s encoding prior to invoking `edbldr`. This technique ensures character set conversion between the client and the database server is done correctly.
-- The file names for `control_file`, `data_file`, `bad_file`, `discard_file`, and `log_file` must include the extensions `.ctl`, `.dat`, `.bad`, `.dsc`, and `.log`, respectively. If the provided file name doesn't contain an extension, EDB\*Loader assumes the actual file name includes the appropriate extension.
+- The file names must include these extensions:
+ - `control_file` must use the `.ctl` extension.
+ - `data_file` must use the `.dat` extension.
+ - `bad_file` must use the `.bad` extension
+ - `discard_file` must use the `.dsc` extension
+ - `log_file` must include the `.log` extension
+
+ If the provided file name doesn't have an extension, EDB\*Loader assumes the actual file name includes the appropriate extension.
- The operating system account used to invoke `edbldr` must have read permission on the directories and files specified by `control_file`, `data_file`, and `param_file`.
@@ -59,18 +66,18 @@ If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults f
IP address of the host on which the database server is running.
-`USERID={ username/password | username/ | username | / }`
+`USERID={ | | | / }`
- EDB\*Loader connects to the database with `username`. `username` must be a superuser or a username with the required privileges. `password` is the password for `username`.
+ EDB\*Loader connects to the database with ``. `` must be a superuser or a username with the required privileges. `` is the password for ``.
If you omit the `USERID` parameter, EDB\*Loader prompts for `username` and `password`. If you specify `USERID=username/`, then EDB\*Loader either:
- - Uses the password file specified by environment variable `PGPASSFILE` if `PGPASSFILE` is set
+ - Uses the password file specified by the environment variable `PGPASSFILE` if `PGPASSFILE` is set
- Uses the `.pgpass` password file (`pgpass.conf` on Windows systems) if `PGPASSFILE` isn't set
If you specify `USERID=username`, then EDB\*Loader prompts for `password`. If you specify `USERID=/`, the connection is attempted using the operating system account as the user name.
!!! Note
- EDB\*Loader ignores the EPAS connection environment variables `PGUSER` and `PGPASSWORD`. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/libpq-pgpass.html) for information on the `PGPASSFILE` environment variable and the password file.
+ EDB\*Loader ignores the EDB Postgres Advanced Server connection environment variables `PGUSER` and `PGPASSWORD`. See the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/libpq-pgpass.html) for information on the `PGPASSFILE` environment variable and the password file.
`-c CONNECTION_STRING`
@@ -92,13 +99,13 @@ If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults f
`BAD=bad_file`
- `bad_file` specifies the name of a file that receives input data records that can't be loaded due to errors. Specifying a `bad_file` on the command line overrides any `BADFILE` clause specified in the control file.
+ `bad_file` specifies the name of a file that receives input data records that can't be loaded due to errors. Specifying `bad_file` on the command line overrides any `BADFILE` clause specified in the control file.
For more information about `bad_file`, see [Building the EDB\*Loader control file](../building_the_control_file/).
`DISCARD=discard_file`
- `discard_file` is the name of the file that receives input data records that don't meet any table’s selection criteria. Specifying a `discard_file` on the command line overrides the `DISCARDFILE` clause in the control file.
+ `discard_file` is the name of the file that receives input data records that don't meet any table’s selection criteria. Specifying `discard_file` on the command line overrides the `DISCARDFILE` clause in the control file.
For more information about `discard_file`, see [Building the EDB\*Loader control file](../building_the_control_file/).
@@ -131,7 +138,7 @@ If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults f
`DIRECT= { FALSE | TRUE }`
- If `DIRECT` is set to `TRUE` EDB\*Loader performs a direct path load instead of a conventional path load. The default value of `DIRECT` is `FALSE`.
+ If `DIRECT` is set to `TRUE`, EDB\*Loader performs a direct path load instead of a conventional path load. The default value of `DIRECT` is `FALSE`.
Don't set `DIRECT=true` when loading the data into a replicated table. If you're using EDB\*Loader to load data into a replicated table and set `DIRECT=true`, indexes might omit rows that are in a table or might contain references to rows that were deleted. EnterpriseDB doesn't support direct inserts to load data into replicated tables.
@@ -139,7 +146,7 @@ If you omit the `-d` option, the `-p` option, or the `-h` option, the defaults f
`FREEZE= { FALSE | TRUE }`
- Set `FREEZE` to `TRUE` to copy the data with the rows `frozen`. A tuple guaranteed to be visible to all current and future transactions is marked as frozen to prevent transaction ID wraparound. For more information about frozen tuples, see the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/routine-vacuuming.html).
+ Set `FREEZE` to `TRUE` to copy the data with the rows *frozen*. A tuple guaranteed to be visible to all current and future transactions is marked as frozen to prevent transaction ID wraparound. For more information about frozen tuples, see the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/routine-vacuuming.html).
You must specify a data-loading type of `TRUNCATE` in the control file when using the `FREEZE` option. `FREEZE` isn't supported for direct loading.
@@ -191,7 +198,7 @@ EDB*Loader: Copyright (c) 2007-2021, EnterpriseDB Corporation.
Successfully loaded (4) records
```
-In this example, EDB\*Loader prompts for the user name and password since they are omitted from the command line. In addition, the files for the bad file and log file are specified with the `BAD` and `LOG` command line parameters.
+In this example, EDB\*Loader prompts for the user name and password since they're omitted from the command line. In addition, the files for the bad file and log file are specified with the `BAD` and `LOG` command line parameters.
```shell
$ /usr/edb/as14/bin/edbldr -d edb CONTROL=emp.ctl BAD=/tmp/emp.bad
@@ -234,7 +241,7 @@ EDB*Loader: Copyright (c) 2007-2021, EnterpriseDB Corporation.
Successfully loaded (4) records
```
-This example invokes EDB\*Loader using a normal user. For this example, one empty table `bar` is created and a normal user `bob` is created. The `bob` user is granted all privileges on the table `bar`. The CREATE TABLE command creates the empty table. The CREATE USER command creates the user and the GRANT command gives required privileges to the user `bob` on the `bar` table:
+This example invokes EDB\*Loader using a normal user. For this example, one empty table `bar` is created and a normal user `bob` is created. The `bob` user is granted all privileges on the table `bar`. The CREATE TABLE command creates the empty table. The CREATE USER command creates the user, and the GRANT command gives required privileges to the user `bob` on the `bar` table:
```sql
CREATE TABLE bar(i int);
@@ -278,8 +285,8 @@ When EDB\*Loader exits, it returns one of the following codes:
| Exit code | Description |
| --------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `0` | Indicates that all rows loaded successfully. |
-| `1` | Indicates that EDB\*Loader encountered command line or syntax errors or aborted the load operation due to an unrecoverable error. |
-| `2` | Indicates that the load completed, but some (or all) rows were rejected or discarded. |
-| `3` | Indicates that EDB\*Loader encountered fatal errors (such as OS errors). This class of errors is equivalent to the `FATAL` or `PANIC` severity levels of PostgreSQL errors. |
+| `0` | All rows loaded successfully. |
+| `1` | EDB\*Loader encountered command line or syntax errors or aborted the load operation due to an unrecoverable error. |
+| `2` | The load completed, but some (or all) rows were rejected or discarded. |
+| `3` | EDB\*Loader encountered fatal errors (such as OS errors). This class of errors is equivalent to the `FATAL` or `PANIC` severity levels of PostgreSQL errors. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/10_edb_resource_manager/dirty_buffer_throttling.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/10_edb_resource_manager/dirty_buffer_throttling.mdx
index b76c12a008a..401da0a3db5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/10_edb_resource_manager/dirty_buffer_throttling.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/10_edb_resource_manager/dirty_buffer_throttling.mdx
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ edb=# INSERT INTO t1 VALUES (generate_series (1,10000), 'aaa');
INSERT 0 10000
```
-The following example shows the results from the `INSERT` command:
+This example shows the results from the `INSERT` command:
```sql
edb=# SELECT query, rows, total_time, shared_blks_dirtied FROM
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ edb=# INSERT INTO t1 VALUES (generate_series (1,10000), 'aaa');
INSERT 0 10000
```
-The following example shows the results from the `INSERT` command without the use of a resource group:
+This example shows the results from the `INSERT` command without the use of a resource group:
```sql
edb=# SELECT query, rows, total_time, shared_blks_dirtied FROM
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/copying_a_remote_schema.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/copying_a_remote_schema.mdx
index 80ee0ea6a19..0ada4c31486 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/copying_a_remote_schema.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/copying_a_remote_schema.mdx
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ __OUTPUT__
(1 row)
```
-The following example displays the status from the log file during various points in the cloning process:
+This example displays the status from the log file during various points in the cloning process:
```sql
tgtdb=# SELECT edb_util.process_status_from_log('clone_rmt_src_tgt');
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/setting_up_edb_clone_schema.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/setting_up_edb_clone_schema.mdx
index adaf5809c41..fcaf094944f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/setting_up_edb_clone_schema.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/14_edb_clone_schema/setting_up_edb_clone_schema.mdx
@@ -150,7 +150,7 @@ CREATE USER MAPPING FOR enterprisedb SERVER local_server
For more information about using the `CREATE USER MAPPING` command, see the [PostgreSQL core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/sql-createusermapping.html).
-These `psql` commands show the foreign server and user mapping:
+These psql commands show the foreign server and user mapping:
```sql
edb=# \des+
@@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ CREATE USER MAPPING FOR enterprisedb SERVER src_server
```
## Displaying foreign servers and user mappings
-These `psql` commands show the foreign servers and user mappings:
+These psql commands show the foreign servers and user mappings:
```sql
tgtdb=# \des+
From b33b6ee7cbc90bff55f584f4f56c7736c762409a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: francoughlin
Date: Thu, 10 Aug 2023 15:38:08 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 013/370] Edits for Working with Oracle Data section
Also includes some edits for tools and utilities
---
.../taking_a_snapshot.mdx | 58 +++++++++---------
.../06_unicode_collation_algorithm.mdx | 40 ++++++++-----
.../11_libpq_c_library.mdx | 8 +--
.../02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx | 60 +++++++++----------
.../02_calling_dblink_ora_functions.mdx | 6 ++
.../06_dblink_ora/connecting_to_oracle.mdx | 7 +++
.../06_dblink_ora/index.mdx | 4 +-
7 files changed, 103 insertions(+), 80 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/managing_performance/04_dynamic_runtime_instrumentation_tools_architecture_DRITA/taking_a_snapshot.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/managing_performance/04_dynamic_runtime_instrumentation_tools_architecture_DRITA/taking_a_snapshot.mdx
index 1b4c78de659..239812cfd24 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/managing_performance/04_dynamic_runtime_instrumentation_tools_architecture_DRITA/taking_a_snapshot.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/managing_performance/04_dynamic_runtime_instrumentation_tools_architecture_DRITA/taking_a_snapshot.mdx
@@ -9,35 +9,35 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server's `postgresql.conf` file includes a configuration p
`timed_statistics` is a dynamic parameter that you can modify in the `postgresql.conf` file or while a session is in progress. To enable DRITA, you must either:
-- Modify the `postgresql.conf` file, setting the `timed_statistics` parameter to `TRUE`.
-
-- Connect to the server with the EDB-PSQL client and invoke the command:
-
-```sql
-SET timed_statistics = TRUE
-```
-
-- After modifying the `timed_statistics` parameter, take a starting snapshot. A snapshot captures the current state of each timer and event counter. The server compares the starting snapshot to a later snapshot to gauge system performance. Use the `edbsnap()` function to take the beginning snapshot:
-
-```sql
-edb=# SELECT * FROM edbsnap();
-__OUTPUT__
- edbsnap
-----------------------
- Statement processed.
-(1 row)
-```
-
-- Run the workload that you want to evaluate. When the workload is complete or at a strategic point during the workload, take another snapshot:
-
-```sql
-edb=# SELECT * FROM edbsnap();
-__OUTPUT__
- edbsnap
-----------------------
- Statement processed.
-(1 row)
-```
+1. Modify the `postgresql.conf` file, setting the `timed_statistics` parameter to `TRUE`.
+
+2. Connect to the server with the EDB-PSQL client and invoke the command:
+
+ ```sql
+ SET timed_statistics = TRUE
+ ```
+
+3. After modifying the `timed_statistics` parameter, take a starting snapshot. A snapshot captures the current state of each timer and event counter. The server compares the starting snapshot to a later snapshot to gauge system performance. Use the `edbsnap()` function to take the beginning snapshot:
+
+ ```sql
+ edb=# SELECT * FROM edbsnap();
+ __OUTPUT__
+ edbsnap
+ ----------------------
+ Statement processed.
+ (1 row)
+ ```
+
+4. Run the workload that you want to evaluate. When the workload is complete or at a strategic point during the workload, take another snapshot:
+
+ ```sql
+ edb=# SELECT * FROM edbsnap();
+ __OUTPUT__
+ edbsnap
+ ----------------------
+ Statement processed.
+ (1 row)
+ ```
You can capture multiple snapshots during a session. Finally, you can use the DRITA functions and reports to manage and compare the snapshots to evaluate performance information.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/06_unicode_collation_algorithm.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/06_unicode_collation_algorithm.mdx
index 4e973df61f2..c3151e28ebe 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/06_unicode_collation_algorithm.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/06_unicode_collation_algorithm.mdx
@@ -19,7 +19,9 @@ redirects:
The Unicode Collation Algorithm (UCA) is a specification (*Unicode Technical Report #10*) that defines a customizable method of collating and comparing Unicode data. *Collation* means how data is sorted, as with a `SELECT … ORDER BY` clause. *Comparison* is relevant for searches that use ranges with less than, greater than, or equal to operators.
-Customizability is an important factor for various reasons such as:
+## Benefits
+
+Customizability is an important factor for various reasons:
- Unicode supports many languages. Letters that might be common to several languages might collate in different orders depending on the language.
- Characters that appear with letters in certain languages, such as accents or umlauts, have an impact on the expected collation depending on the language.
@@ -42,11 +44,11 @@ The basic concept behind the Unicode Collation Algorithm is the use of multileve
If the order can be determined based on the primary level, then the algorithm is done. If the order can't be determined based on the primary level, then the secondary level, level 2, is applied. If the order can be determined based on the secondary level, then the algorithm is done, otherwise the tertiary level is applied, and so on. There is typically a final, tie-breaking level to determine the order if it can't be resolved by the prior levels.
-- **Level 1 – Primary level for base characters.** The order of basic characters such as letters and digits determines the difference, such as `A < B`.
-- **Level 2 – Secondary level for accents.** If there are no primary level differences, then the presence or absence of accents and other such characters determines the order, such as `a < á`.
-- **Level 3 – Tertiary level for case.** If there are no primary level or secondary level differences, then a difference in case determines the order, such as `a < A`.
-- **Level 4 – Quaternary level for punctuation.** If there are no primary, secondary, or tertiary level differences, then the presence or absence of white-space characters, control characters, and punctuation determine the order, such as `-A < A`.
-- **Level 5 – Identical level for tie breaking.** If there are no primary, secondary, tertiary, or quaternary level differences, then some other difference such as the code point values determines the order.
+- **Level 1 – Primary level for base characters**. The order of basic characters such as letters and digits determines the difference, such as `A < B`.
+- **Level 2 – Secondary level for accents**. If there are no primary level differences, then the presence or absence of accents and other such characters determines the order, such as `a < á`.
+- **Level 3 – Tertiary level for case**. If there are no primary level or secondary level differences, then a difference in case determines the order, such as `a < A`.
+- **Level 4 – Quaternary level for punctuation**. If there are no primary, secondary, or tertiary level differences, then the presence or absence of white-space characters, control characters, and punctuation determine the order, such as `-A < A`.
+- **Level 5 – Identical level for tie breaking**. If there are no primary, secondary, tertiary, or quaternary level differences, then some other difference such as the code point values determines the order.
## International components for Unicode
@@ -111,14 +113,14 @@ For the complete and precise meaning and usage of collation attributes, see “C
Each collation attribute is represented by an uppercase letter. The possible valid values for each attribute are given by codes shown in the parentheses. Some codes have general meanings for all attributes. **X** means to set the attribute off. **O** means to set the attribute on. **D** means to set the attribute to its default value.
-- **A – Alternate (N, S, D).** Handles treatment of *variable* characters such as white spaces, punctuation marks, and symbols. When set to non-ignorable (N), differences in variable characters are treated with the same importance as differences in letters. When set to shifted (S), then differences in variable characters are of minor importance (that is, the variable character is ignored when comparing base characters).
-- **C – Case first (X, L, U, D).** Controls whether a lowercase letter sorts before the same uppercase letter (L), or the uppercase letter sorts before the same lowercase letter (U). You typically specify off (X) when you want lowercase first (L).
-- **E – Case level (X, O, D).** Set in combination with the Strength attribute, use the Case Level attribute when you want to ignore accents but not case.
-- **F – French collation (X, O, D).** When set to on, secondary differences (presence of accents) are sorted from the back of the string as done in the French Canadian locale.
-- **H – Hiragana quaternary (X, O, D).** Introduces an additional level to distinguish between the Hiragana and Katakana characters for compatibility with the JIS X 4061 collation of Japanese character strings.
-- **N – Normalization checking (X, O, D).** Controls whether text is thoroughly normalized for comparison. Normalization deals with the issue of canonical equivalence of text whereby different code point sequences represent the same character. This occurrence then presents issues when sorting or comparing such characters. For languages such as Arabic, ancient Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Thai, or Vietnamese, set normalization checking to on.
-- **S – Strength (1, 2, 3, 4, I, D).** Maximum collation level used for comparison. Influences whether accents or case are taken into account when collating or comparing strings. Each number represents a level. A setting of I represents identical strength (that is, level 5).
-- **T – Variable top (hexadecimal digits).** Applies only when the Alternate attribute isn't set to non-ignorable (N). The hexadecimal digits specify the highest character sequence to consider ignorable. For example, if white space is ignorable but visible variable characters aren't, then set Variable Top to 0020 along with the Alternate attribute set to S and the Strength attribute set to 3. (The space character is hexadecimal 0020. Other nonvisible variable characters, such as backspace, tab, line feed, and carriage return, have values less than 0020. All visible punctuation marks have values greater than 0020.)
+- **A – Alternate (N, S, D)**. Handles treatment of *variable* characters such as white spaces, punctuation marks, and symbols. When set to non-ignorable (N), differences in variable characters are treated with the same importance as differences in letters. When set to shifted (S), then differences in variable characters are of minor importance (that is, the variable character is ignored when comparing base characters).
+- **C – Case first (X, L, U, D)**. Controls whether a lowercase letter sorts before the same uppercase letter (L), or the uppercase letter sorts before the same lowercase letter (U). You typically specify off (X) when you want lowercase first (L).
+- **E – Case level (X, O, D)**. Set in combination with the Strength attribute, use the Case Level attribute when you want to ignore accents but not case.
+- **F – French collation (X, O, D)**. When set to on, secondary differences (presence of accents) are sorted from the back of the string as done in the French Canadian locale.
+- **H – Hiragana quaternary (X, O, D)**. Introduces an additional level to distinguish between the Hiragana and Katakana characters for compatibility with the JIS X 4061 collation of Japanese character strings.
+- **N – Normalization checking (X, O, D)**. Controls whether text is thoroughly normalized for comparison. Normalization deals with the issue of canonical equivalence of text whereby different code point sequences represent the same character. This occurrence then presents issues when sorting or comparing such characters. For languages such as Arabic, ancient Greek, Hebrew, Hindi, Thai, or Vietnamese, set normalization checking to on.
+- **S – Strength (1, 2, 3, 4, I, D)**. Maximum collation level used for comparison. Influences whether accents or case are taken into account when collating or comparing strings. Each number represents a level. A setting of I represents identical strength (that is, level 5).
+- **T – Variable top (hexadecimal digits)**. Applies only when the Alternate attribute isn't set to non-ignorable (N). The hexadecimal digits specify the highest character sequence to consider ignorable. For example, if white space is ignorable but visible variable characters aren't, then set Variable Top to 0020 along with the Alternate attribute set to S and the Strength attribute set to 3. (The space character is hexadecimal 0020. Other nonvisible variable characters, such as backspace, tab, line feed, and carriage return, have values less than 0020. All visible punctuation marks have values greater than 0020.)
A set of collation attributes and their values is represented by a text string consisting of the collation attribute letter concatenated with the desired attribute value. Each attribute/value pair is joined to the next pair with an underscore character:
@@ -208,6 +210,8 @@ INSERT INTO collate_tbl VALUES (10, '-B');
INSERT INTO collate_tbl VALUES (11, ' B');
```
+### Using the default collation
+
The following query sorts on column `c2` using the default collation. Variable characters (white space and punctuation marks) with `id` column values of `9`, `10`, and `11` are ignored and sort with the letter `B`.
```sql
@@ -229,6 +233,8 @@ __OUTPUT__
(11 rows)
```
+### Using collation icu_collate_lowercase
+
The following query sorts on column `c2` using collation `icu_collate_lowercase`. This collation forces the lowercase form of a letter to sort before the uppercase form of the same base letter. The `AN` attribute forces the sort order to include variable characters at the same level when comparing base characters. Thus rows with `id` values of `9`, `10`, and `11` appear at the beginning of the sort list before all letters and numbers.
```sql
@@ -250,6 +256,8 @@ __OUTPUT__
(11 rows)
```
+### Using collation icu_collate_uppercase
+
The following query sorts on column `c2` using collation `icu_collate_uppercase`. This collations forces the uppercase form of a letter to sort before the lowercase form of the same base letter.
```sql
@@ -271,6 +279,8 @@ __OUTPUT__
(11 rows)
```
+### Using collation icu_collate_ignore_punct
+
The following query sorts on column `c2` using collation `icu_collate_ignore_punct`. This collation causes variable characters to be ignored so rows with id values of `9`, `10`, and `11` sort with the letter `B`, the character immediately following the ignored variable character.
```sql
@@ -293,6 +303,8 @@ __OUTPUT__
(11 rows)
```
+### Using collation icu_collate_ignore_white_sp
+
The following query sorts on column `c2` using collation `icu_collate_ignore_white_sp`. The `AS` and `T0020` attributes of the collation cause variable characters with code points less than or equal to hexadecimal `0020` to be ignored while variable characters with code points greater than hexadecimal `0020` are included in the sort.
The row with `id` value of `11`, which starts with a space character (hexadecimal `0020`), sorts with the letter `B`. The rows with `id` values of `9` and `10`, which start with visible punctuation marks greater than hexadecimal `0020`, appear at the beginning of the sort list. These particular variable characters are included in the sort order at the same level when comparing base characters.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/11_libpq_c_library.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/11_libpq_c_library.mdx
index dad156fea8f..fbacee19c20 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/11_libpq_c_library.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/tools_utilities_and_components/application_developer_tools/11_libpq_c_library.mdx
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ You can now use `PQexec()` and `PQgetvalue()` to retrieve a `REFCURSOR` returned
!!! Note
The examples that follow don't include the error-handling code required in a real-world client application.
-## Returning a single REFCURSOR
+### Returning a single REFCURSOR
This example shows an SPL function that returns a value of type `REFCURSOR`:
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ If you call `getEmpsAndDepts(20, 30)`, the server returns a cursor that contains
30,SALES,CHICAGO
```
-## Array binding
+## Performing array binding
EDB Postgres Advanced Server's array binding functionality allows you to send an array of data across the network in a single round trip. When the back end receives the bulk data, it can use the data to perform insert or update operations.
@@ -398,7 +398,7 @@ PGresult *PQexecBulkPrepared(PGconn *conn,
const int *paramFormats);
```
-### Example code (Using PQBulkStart, PQexecBulk, PQBulkFinish)
+### Using PQBulkStart, PQexecBulk, PQBulkFinish
This example uses `PGBulkStart`, `PQexecBulk`, and `PQBulkFinish`:
@@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ void InsertDataUsingBulkStyle( PGconn *conn )
}
```
-### Example code (Using PQexecBulkPrepared)
+### Using PQexecBulkPrepared
This example uses `PQexecBulkPrepared`:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
index 55fdbf44d07..d3918121d22 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
@@ -26,16 +26,16 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server includes extended functionality that provides compa
## Enabling compatibility features
-You can install EDB Postgres Advanced Server in several ways to take advantage of compatibility features:
+You can install EDB Postgres Advanced Server in several ways to enable compatibility features:
-- Use the `INITDBOPTS` variable in the EDB Postgres Advanced Server service configuration file to specify `--redwood-like` before initializing your cluster.
-- When invoking `initdb` to initialize your cluster compatible with Oracle mode, include the `--redwood-like` or `--no-redwood-compat` option to initialize your cluster in Oracle non-compatible mode.
+- Use the `INITDBOPTS` variable in the EDB Postgres Advanced Server service configuration file to specify `--redwood-like` **before initializing your cluster**.
+- Include the `--redwood-like` parameter when using `initdb` to initialize your cluster.
See [Configuration parameters compatible with Oracle databases](../reference/database_administrator_reference/02_summary_of_configuration_parameters/) and [Managing an EDB Postgres Advanced Server installation](../installing/linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/) for more information about the installation options supported by the EDB Postgres Advanced Server installers.
## Stored procedural language
-EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports a highly productive procedural language that allows you to write custom procedures, functions, triggers, and packages. The procedural language:
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports a highly productive procedural language that allows you to write custom procedures, functions, triggers, and packages. This procedural language:
- Complements the SQL language and built-in packages.
- Provides a seamless development and testing environment.
@@ -86,31 +86,31 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports a number of built-in packages that provide
| Package name | Description |
| -------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| DBMS_ALERT | The DBMS_ALERT package lets you register for, send, and receive alerts. |
-| DBMS_AQ | The DBMS_AQ package provides message queueing and processing for EDB Postgres Advanced Server. |
-| DBMS_AQADM | The DBMS_AQADM package provides supporting procedures for Advanced Queueing functionality. |
-| DBMS_CRYPTO | The DBMS_CRYPTO package provides functions and procedures that allow you to encrypt or decrypt RAW, BLOB, or CLOB data. You can also use DBMS_CRYPTO functions to generate cryptographically strong random values. |
-| DBMS_JOB | The DBMS_JOB package provides for creating, scheduling, and managing jobs. |
-| DBMS_LOB | The DBMS_LOB package lets you operate on large objects. |
-| DBMS_LOCK | EDB Postgres Advanced Server provides support for the DBMS_LOCK.SLEEP procedure. |
-| DBMS_MVIEW | Use procedures in the DBMS_MVIEW package to manage and refresh materialized views and their dependencies. |
-| DBMS_OUTPUT | The DBMS_OUTPUT package lets you send messages to a message buffer or get messages from the message buffer. |
-| DBMS_PIPE | The DBMS_PIPE package lets you send messages through a pipe in or between sessions connected to the same database cluster. |
-| DBMS_PROFILER | The DBMS_PROFILER package collects and stores performance information about the PL/pgSQL and SPL statements that are executed during a performance profiling session. |
-| DBMS_RANDOM | The DBMS_RANDOM package provides methods to generate random values. |
-| DBMS_REDACT | The DBMS_REDACT package enables redacting or masking data that's returned by a query. |
-| DBMS_RLS | The DBMS_RLS package enables implementating Virtual Private Database on certain EDB Postgres Advanced Server database objects. |
-| DBMS_SCHEDULER | The DBMS_SCHEDULER package lets you create and manage jobs, programs, and job schedules. |
-| DBMS_SESSION | EDB Postgres Advanced Server provides support for the DBMS_SESSION.SET_ROLE procedure. |
-| DBMS_SQL | The DBMS_SQL package provides an application interface to the EDB dynamic SQL functionality. |
-| DBMS_UTILITY | The DBMS_UTILITY package provides various utility programs. |
-| UTL_ENCODE | The UTL_ENCODE package provides a way to encode and decode data. |
-| UTL_FILE | The UTL_FILE package lets you read from and write to files on the operating system’s file system. |
-| UTL_HTTP | The UTL_HTTP package lets you use the HTTP or HTTPS protocol to retrieve information found at a URL. |
-| UTL_MAIL | The UTL_MAIL package lets you manage email. |
-| UTL_RAW | The UTL_RAW package allows you to manipulate or retrieve the length of raw data types. |
-| UTL_SMTP | The UTL_SMTP package lets you send emails over the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). |
-| UTL_URL | The UTL_URL package provides a way to escape illegal and reserved characters in a URL. |
+| DBMS_ALERT | Lets you register for, send, and receive alerts. |
+| DBMS_AQ | Provides message queueing and processing for EDB Postgres Advanced Server. |
+| DBMS_AQADM | Provides supporting procedures for Advanced Queueing functionality. |
+| DBMS_CRYPTO | Provides functions and procedures that allow you to encrypt or decrypt RAW, BLOB, or CLOB data. You can also use DBMS_CRYPTO functions to generate cryptographically strong random values. |
+| DBMS_JOB | Provides for creating, scheduling, and managing jobs. |
+| DBMS_LOB | Lets you operate on large objects. |
+| DBMS_LOCK | Provides support for the DBMS_LOCK.SLEEP procedure. |
+| DBMS_MVIEW | Use to manage and refresh materialized views and their dependencies. |
+| DBMS_OUTPUT | Lets you send messages to a message buffer or get messages from the message buffer. |
+| DBMS_PIPE | Lets you send messages through a pipe in or between sessions connected to the same database cluster. |
+| DBMS_PROFILER | Collects and stores performance information about the PL/pgSQL and SPL statements that are executed during a performance profiling session. |
+| DBMS_RANDOM | Provides methods to generate random values. |
+| DBMS_REDACT | Enables redacting or masking data that's returned by a query. |
+| DBMS_RLS | Enables implementating Virtual Private Database on certain EDB Postgres Advanced Server database objects. |
+| DBMS_SCHEDULER | Lets you create and manage jobs, programs, and job schedules. |
+| DBMS_SESSION | Provides support for the DBMS_SESSION.SET_ROLE procedure. |
+| DBMS_SQL | Provides an application interface to the EDB dynamic SQL functionality. |
+| DBMS_UTILITY | Provides various utility programs. |
+| UTL_ENCODE | Provides a way to encode and decode data. |
+| UTL_FILE | Lets you read from and write to files on the operating system’s file system. |
+| UTL_HTTP | Lets you use the HTTP or HTTPS protocol to retrieve information found at a URL. |
+| UTL_MAIL | Lets you manage email. |
+| UTL_RAW | Allows you to manipulate or retrieve the length of raw data types. |
+| UTL_SMTP | Lets you send emails over the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). |
+| UTL_URL | Provides a way to escape illegal and reserved characters in a URL. |
See [Built-in packages](../reference/oracle_compatibility_reference/epas_compat_bip_guide/03_built-in_packages/) for detailed information about the procedures and functions available in each package.
@@ -169,7 +169,7 @@ See [Protecting proprietary source code](../epas_security_guide/03_edb_wrap/) fo
### Dynamic Runtime Instrumentation Tools Architecture (DRITA)
-The Dynamic Runtime Instrumentation Tools Architecture (DRITA) allows a DBA to query catalog views to determine the *wait events* that affect the performance of individual sessions or the system as a whole. DRITA records the number of times each event occurs as well as the time spent waiting. You can use this information to diagnose performance problems. DRITA offers this functionality while consuming minimal system resources.
+DRITA allows a DBA to query catalog views to determine the *wait events* that affect the performance of individual sessions or the system as a whole. DRITA records the number of times each event occurs as well as the time spent waiting. You can use this information to diagnose performance problems. DRITA offers this functionality while consuming minimal system resources.
DRITA compares *snapshots* to evaluate the performance of a system. A snapshot is a saved set of system performance data at a given point in time. A unique ID number identifies each snapshot. You can use snapshot ID numbers with DRITA reporting functions to return system performance statistics.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/02_calling_dblink_ora_functions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/02_calling_dblink_ora_functions.mdx
index 66d7aa114c2..8e32516d61f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/02_calling_dblink_ora_functions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/02_calling_dblink_ora_functions.mdx
@@ -11,6 +11,8 @@ redirects:
+## Using the dblink_ora_connect function
+
The following command establishes a connection using the `dblink_ora_connect()` function:
```sql
@@ -25,6 +27,8 @@ The example connects to:
You can use the connection name `acctg` to refer to this connection when calling other dblink_ora functions.
+## Using the dblink_ora_copy function
+
The following command uses the `dblink_ora_copy()` function over a connection named `edb_conn`. It copies the `empid` and `deptno` columns from a table on an Oracle server named `ora_acctg` to a table located in the `public` schema on an instance of EDB Postgres Advanced Server named `as_acctg`. The `TRUNCATE` option is enforced, and a feedback count of `3` is specified:
```sql
@@ -44,6 +48,8 @@ INFO: Row: 12
(1 row)
```
+## Using the dblink_ora_record function
+
The following `SELECT` statement uses the `dblink_ora_record()` function and the `acctg` connection to retrieve information from the Oracle server:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/connecting_to_oracle.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/connecting_to_oracle.mdx
index 37c3668fdfe..2ae2b741faa 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/connecting_to_oracle.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/connecting_to_oracle.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ description: "Describes how to create a link to an Oracle server"
To enable Oracle connectivity, download Oracle's freely available OCI drivers from [their website](http://www.oracle.com/technetwork/database/database-technologies/instant-client/overview/index.html).
+## Creating a symbolic link
+
For Linux, if the Oracle instant client that you downloaded doesn't include the `libclntsh.so` library, you must create a symbolic link named `libclntsh.so` that points to the downloaded version. Navigate to the instant client directory and execute the following command:
```shell
@@ -16,9 +18,12 @@ Where `version` is the version number of the `libclntsh.so` library. For example
```shell
ln -s libclntsh.so.12.1 libclntsh.so
```
+## Setting the environment variable
Before creating a link to an Oracle server, you must direct EDB Postgres Advanced Server to the correct Oracle home directory. Set the `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` environment variable on Linux or `PATH` on Windows to the `lib` directory of the Oracle client installation directory.
+## Setting the oracle_home configuration parameter
+
Alternatively, you can set the value of the `oracle_home` configuration parameter in the `postgresql.conf` file. The value specified in the `oracle_home` configuration parameter overrides the `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` environment variable in Linux and `PATH` environment variable in Windows.
!!! Note
@@ -32,6 +37,8 @@ oracle_home = 'lib_directory'
In place of ``, substitute the name of the `oracle_home` path to the Oracle client installation directory that contains `libclntsh.so` in Linux and `oci.dll` in Windows.
+## Restarting the server
+
After setting the `oracle_home` configuration parameter, you must restart the server for the changes to take effect. Restart the server:
- On Linux, using the `systemctl` command or `pg_ctl` services.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/index.mdx
index 2ac481d2dbd..ad2be4cde70 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/06_dblink_ora/index.mdx
@@ -11,6 +11,4 @@ redirects:
---
-dblink_ora enables you to issue arbitrary queries to a remote Oracle server. It provides an OCI-based database link that allows you to `SELECT`, `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, or `DELETE` data stored on an Oracle system from EDB Postgres Advanced Server.
-
-The following topics describe how to use the dblink_ora feature.
+dblink_ora enables you to issue arbitrary queries to a remote Oracle server. It provides an OCI-based database link that enables you to `SELECT`, `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, or `DELETE` data stored on an Oracle system from EDB Postgres Advanced Server.
From 38d1888ae3d9610b798e3c0998153857de0cb750 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: francoughlin
Date: Fri, 11 Aug 2023 15:56:37 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 014/370] Edits for Reference branch
Edits for Application programming branch and Database administration branch
---
.../06_user_defined_pl_sql_subtypes.mdx | 12 +++--
.../05_using_the_returning_into_clause.mdx | 6 ++-
.../04_basic_statements/06_select_into.mdx | 10 +++-
.../04_basic_statements/07_update.mdx | 2 +-
.../08_obtaining_the_result_status.mdx | 2 +-
.../01_if_statement/01_if_then.mdx | 4 ++
.../01_if_statement/02_if_then_else.mdx | 4 ++
.../04_if_then_elseif_else.mdx | 4 ++
.../01_if_statement/index.mdx | 1 +
.../02_return_statement.mdx | 4 ++
.../03_goto_statement.mdx | 12 ++++-
.../01_selector_case_expression.mdx | 4 ++
.../02_searched_case_expression.mdx | 4 ++
.../01_selector_case_statement.mdx | 4 ++
.../02_searched_case_statement.mdx | 4 ++
.../05_case_statement/index.mdx | 1 +
.../06_loops/02_exit.mdx | 4 ++
.../06_loops/04_while.mdx | 4 ++
.../06_loops/05_for_integer_variant.mdx | 4 ++
.../05_control_structures/06_loops/index.mdx | 1 +
.../07_exception_handling.mdx | 17 ++++--
.../08_user_defined_exceptions.mdx | 4 ++
.../09_pragma_exception_init.mdx | 10 +++-
.../10_raise_application_error.mdx | 4 +-
.../11_collection_methods/01_count.mdx | 8 ++-
.../11_collection_methods/02_deletes.mdx | 7 +++
.../11_collection_methods/03_exists.mdx | 8 ++-
.../11_collection_methods/04_extend.mdx | 10 +++-
.../11_collection_methods/05_first.mdx | 8 ++-
.../11_collection_methods/06_last.mdx | 8 ++-
.../11_collection_methods/08_next.mdx | 8 ++-
.../11_collection_methods/09_prior.mdx | 9 +++-
.../11_collection_methods/10_trim.mdx | 8 ++-
.../17_advanced_server_keywords.mdx | 2 +
.../02_edb_redwood_raw_names.mdx | 4 ++
.../03_edb_redwood_strings.mdx | 8 ++-
.../01_introduction/04_edb_stmt_level_tx.mdx | 4 ++
.../01_introduction/05_oracle_home.mdx | 4 ++
...02_summary_of_configuration_parameters.mdx | 8 +--
.../edb_loader_control_file_parameters.mdx | 52 +++++++++----------
40 files changed, 227 insertions(+), 55 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/01_basic_spl_elements/06_user_defined_pl_sql_subtypes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/01_basic_spl_elements/06_user_defined_pl_sql_subtypes.mdx
index 90e6626dad3..c8e67ed7ab6 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/01_basic_spl_elements/06_user_defined_pl_sql_subtypes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/01_basic_spl_elements/06_user_defined_pl_sql_subtypes.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,11 @@ redirects:
-EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports user-defined PL/SQL subtypes and subtype aliases. A subtype is a data type with an optional set of constraints that restrict the values that can be stored in a column of that type. The rules that apply to the type on which the subtype is based are still enforced, but you can use additional constraints to place limits on the precision or scale of values stored in the type.
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports user-defined PL/SQL subtypes and subtype aliases.
+
+## About subtypes
+
+A subtype is a data type with an optional set of constraints that restrict the values that can be stored in a column of that type. The rules that apply to the type on which the subtype is based are still enforced, but you can use additional constraints to place limits on the precision or scale of values stored in the type.
You can define a subtype in the declaration of a PL function, procedure, anonymous block, or package. The syntax is:
@@ -92,10 +96,10 @@ This example creates a subtype named `acct_balance` that shares all of the attri
An argument declaration (in a function or procedure header) is a *formal argument*. The value passed to a function or procedure is an *actual argument*. When invoking a function or procedure, the caller provides 0 or more actual arguments. Each actual argument is assigned to a formal argument that holds the value in the body of the function or procedure.
-If a formal argument is declared as a constrained subtype:
+If a formal argument is declared as a constrained subtype, EDB Postgres Advanced Server:
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server doesn't enforce subtype constraints when assigning an actual argument to a formal argument when invoking a function.
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server enforces subtype constraints when assigning an actual argument to a formal argument when invoking a procedure.
+- Enforces subtype constraints when assigning an actual argument to a formal argument when invoking a procedure.
+- Doesn't enforce subtype constraints when assigning an actual argument to a formal argument when invoking a function.
## Using the %TYPE operator
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/05_using_the_returning_into_clause.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/05_using_the_returning_into_clause.mdx
index 374a4aaa21d..b7d4467c968 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/05_using_the_returning_into_clause.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/05_using_the_returning_into_clause.mdx
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ redirects:
You can append the `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, and `DELETE` commands with the optional `RETURNING INTO` clause. This clause allows the SPL program to capture the newly added, modified, or deleted values from the results of an `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, or `DELETE` command, respectively.
-The following is the syntax:
+## Syntax
```sql
{ | | }
@@ -30,6 +30,8 @@ If the `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, or `DELETE` command returns a result set with more th
!!! Note
A variation of `RETURNING INTO` using the `BULK COLLECT` clause allows a result set of more than one row that's returned into a collection. See [Using the BULK COLLECT clause](/epas/latest/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/04_using_the_bulk_collect_clause/#using_the_bulk_collect_clause) for more information.
+## Adding the RETURNING INTO clause
+
This example modifies the `emp_comp_update` procedure introduced in [UPDATE](07_update/#update). It adds the `RETURNING INTO` clause:
```sql
@@ -88,6 +90,8 @@ New Salary : 6540.00
New Commission : 1200.00
```
+## Adding the RETURNING INTO clause using record types
+
This example modifies the `emp_delete` procedure, adding the `RETURNING INTO` clause using record types:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/06_select_into.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/06_select_into.mdx
index c79f922c11c..6c52566060c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/06_select_into.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/06_select_into.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,11 @@ The `SELECT INTO` statement is an SPL variation of the SQL `SELECT` command. The
- `SELECT INTO` assigns the results to variables or records where they can then be used in SPL program statements.
- The accessible result set of `SELECT INTO` is at most one row.
-Other than these differences, all of the clauses of the `SELECT` command, such as `WHERE`, `ORDER BY`, `GROUP BY`, and `HAVING`, are valid for `SELECT INTO`. The following are the two variations of `SELECT INTO`:
+Other than these differences, all of the clauses of the `SELECT` command, such as `WHERE`, `ORDER BY`, `GROUP BY`, and `HAVING`, are valid for `SELECT INTO`.
+
+## Syntax
+
+These examples show two variations of `SELECT INTO`:
```sql
SELECT INTO FROM ...;
@@ -33,6 +37,8 @@ If the query returns zero rows, null values are assigned to the targets. If the
- There is a variation of `SELECT INTO` using the `BULK COLLECT` clause that allows a result set of more than one row that's returned into a collection. See [SELECT BULK COLLECT](/epas/latest/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/04_using_the_bulk_collect_clause/01_select_bulk_collect/#select_bulk_collect) for more information.
+## Including the WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND clause
+
You can use the `WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND` clause in an `EXCEPTION` block to determine whether the assignment was successful, that is, at least one row was returned by the query.
This version of the `emp_sal_query` procedure uses the variation of `SELECT INTO` that returns the result set into a record. It also uses the `EXCEPTION` block containing the `WHEN NO_DATA_FOUND` conditional expression.
@@ -77,6 +83,8 @@ EXEC emp_sal_query(0);
Employee # 0 not found
```
+## Including a TOO_MANY_ROWS exception
+
Another conditional clause useful in the `EXCEPTION` section with `SELECT INTO` is the `TOO_MANY_ROWS` exception. If more than one row is selected by the `SELECT INTO` statement, SPL throws an exception.
When the following block is executed, the `TOO_MANY_ROWS` exception is thrown since there are many employees in the specified department:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/07_update.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/07_update.mdx
index 806dd0e583e..f7c42b4fd64 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/07_update.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/07_update.mdx
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ END;
The `SQL%FOUND` conditional expression returns `TRUE` if a row is updated, `FALSE` otherwise. See [Obtaining the result status](08_obtaining_the_result_status/#obtaining_the_result_status) for a discussion of `SQL%FOUND` and other similar expressions.
-The following shows the update on the employee using this procedure:
+This example shows the update on the employee:
```sql
EXEC emp_comp_update(9503, 6540, 1200);
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/08_obtaining_the_result_status.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/08_obtaining_the_result_status.mdx
index 1e299f9e41a..c890897d3b6 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/08_obtaining_the_result_status.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/04_basic_statements/08_obtaining_the_result_status.mdx
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ redirects:
You can use several attributes to determine the effect of a command. `SQL%FOUND` is a Boolean that returns `TRUE` if at least one row was affected by an `INSERT`, `UPDATE` or `DELETE` command or a `SELECT INTO` command retrieved one or more rows.
-The following anonymous block inserts a row and then displays the fact that the row was inserted:
+This anonymous block inserts a row and then displays the fact that the row was inserted:
```sql
BEGIN
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/01_if_then.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/01_if_then.mdx
index 04811ae9c8d..4063d33e5d6 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/01_if_then.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/01_if_then.mdx
@@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ redirects:
+## Syntax
+
```sql
IF boolean-expression THEN
@@ -15,6 +17,8 @@ END IF;
`IF-THEN` statements are the simplest form of `IF`. The statements between `THEN` and `END IF` are executed if the condition is `TRUE`. Otherwise, they are skipped.
+## Example
+
This example uses `IF-THEN` statement to test and display employees who have a commission:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/02_if_then_else.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/02_if_then_else.mdx
index ff47f3ad23a..43036e577cb 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/02_if_then_else.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/02_if_then_else.mdx
@@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ redirects:
+## Syntax
+
```sql
IF boolean-expression THEN
@@ -17,6 +19,8 @@ END IF;
`IF-THEN-ELSE` statements add to `IF-THEN` by letting you specify an alternative set of statements to execute if the condition evaluates to false.
+## Example
+
This example shows an `IF-THEN-ELSE` statement being used to display the text `Non-commission` if an employee doesn't get a commission:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/04_if_then_elseif_else.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/04_if_then_elseif_else.mdx
index bbe3ebe2173..5be6ab73913 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/04_if_then_elseif_else.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/04_if_then_elseif_else.mdx
@@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ redirects:
+## Syntax
+
```sql
IF boolean-expression THEN
@@ -21,6 +23,8 @@ END IF;
`IF-THEN-ELSIF-ELSE` provides a method of checking many alternatives in one statement. Formally it is equivalent to nested `IF-THEN-ELSE-IF-THEN` commands, but only one `END IF` is needed.
+## Example
+
The following example uses an `IF-THEN-ELSIF-ELSE` statement to count the number of employees by compensation ranges of $25,000:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/index.mdx
index 21cb499ac41..58abf3ff2d7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/index.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
---
title: "IF statement"
+indexCards: simple
redirects:
- /epas/latest/epas_compat_spl/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/ #generated for docs/epas/reorg-role-use-case-mode
- /epas/latest/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/05_control_structures/01_if_statement/
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/02_return_statement.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/02_return_statement.mdx
index 5044f4ba18f..2cefb6d86dd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/02_return_statement.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/02_return_statement.mdx
@@ -13,6 +13,8 @@ redirects:
The `RETURN` statement terminates the current function, procedure, or anonymous block and returns control to the caller.
+## Syntax
+
The `RETURN` statement has two forms. The first form of the `RETURN` statement terminates a procedure or function that returns `void`. The syntax of this form is:
```sql
@@ -27,6 +29,8 @@ RETURN ;
`expression` must evaluate to the same data type as the return type of the function.
+## Example
+
This example uses the `RETURN` statement and returns a value to the caller:
```sql
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/03_goto_statement.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/03_goto_statement.mdx
index 6978d316ebf..95b9fab493d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/03_goto_statement.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/application_programmer_reference/stored_procedural_language_reference/05_control_structures/03_goto_statement.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,11 @@ redirects:
-The `GOTO` statement causes the point of execution to jump to the statement with the specified label. The syntax of a `GOTO` statement is:
+The `GOTO` statement causes the point of execution to jump to the statement with the specified label.
+
+## Syntax
+
+The syntax of a `GOTO` statement is:
```sql
GOTO
This document is intended to augment each vendor’s product documentation to guide you in getting the products working together. It isn't intended to show the optimal configuration for the certified integration.
\ No newline at end of file
From 3712681cdb944cc51ad6f256df8e2f3834fd92f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 16:55:52 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 058/370] Error Edits
---
.../04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 2 --
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 4 +---
2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 2e9d2515c99..776bcb89d8a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
description: 'Walkthrough on configuring Commvault Backup & Recovery'
-redirects:
- - /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
---
Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB database requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index db902949db6..27dc9e2ded4 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Commvault Backup & Recovery usage scenarios'
-redirects:
- - /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
How to backup and restore an EDB Database using Commvault Backup & Recovery.
From 9447d0417b90a23221324719e11df79d2cc2287d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 04:13:35 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 059/370] Reduce deploy times by eliminating client redirects
(and huge, constantly-changing global array of redirects)
---
src/constants/gatsby-utils.js | 10 ++++++----
1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
index 115ecb32255..ac7e7abe4eb 100644
--- a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
@@ -2,6 +2,8 @@ const fs = require("fs");
const asyncFs = require("fs/promises");
const path = require("path");
+const IS_CI_BUILD = process.env.GITHUB_ACTIONS;
+
const sortVersionArray = (versions) => {
return versions.sort((a, b) =>
b.localeCompare(a, undefined, { numeric: true }),
@@ -330,7 +332,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath: toPath,
toPath: replacePathVersion(toPath),
- redirectInBrowser: true,
+ redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
isPermanent: false,
force: true,
});
@@ -344,7 +346,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath: replacePathVersion(toPath),
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: true,
+ redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
isPermanent: false,
});
}
@@ -361,7 +363,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath,
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: true,
+ redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
isPermanent,
});
}
@@ -406,7 +408,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath,
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: true,
+ redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
isPermanent: false,
});
}
From 63f76a374ad137a935fc1c6aae5b4f099cff5b0a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 04:15:34 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 060/370] Run deploys on bigger worker. May need to drop draft
deploys onto smaller one if they become a blocker.
---
.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml | 2 +-
.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml | 2 +-
.github/workflows/deploy-main.yml | 2 +-
3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml b/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
index 5683fdcaa49..803a9d07ac0 100644
--- a/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
+++ b/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ concurrency:
jobs:
build-deploy:
- runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+ runs-on: docs-16c-64gb-600gb
steps:
- uses: actions/checkout@v3
with:
diff --git a/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml b/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
index 14e86e4efa5..5e499e6a8b3 100644
--- a/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
+++ b/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ jobs:
if: |
(github.event.action == 'labeled' && github.event.label.name == 'deploy') ||
(github.event.action != 'labeled' && contains(github.event.pull_request.labels.*.name, 'deploy'))
- runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+ runs-on: docs-16c-64gb-600gb
steps:
- name: inject slug/short variables
uses: rlespinasse/github-slug-action@v4
diff --git a/.github/workflows/deploy-main.yml b/.github/workflows/deploy-main.yml
index ae0b29b8c19..89c99134685 100644
--- a/.github/workflows/deploy-main.yml
+++ b/.github/workflows/deploy-main.yml
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ concurrency:
jobs:
build-deploy:
- runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+ runs-on: docs-16c-64gb-600gb
steps:
- uses: actions/checkout@v3
with:
From f83d40f41eda29431e853b29bd52f5a5a82ddcce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 13:19:45 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 061/370] PEM 9.3 - Release branch
Added content as per [PEM-4853](https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/browse/PEM-4853), [PEM-4906](https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/browse/PEM-4906), and [PEM-4907]https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/browse/PEM-4907).
---
product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png | 4 +--
.../9/images/alert_history_report_general.png | 3 ++
.../pem/9/images/alerting_manage_alerts.png | 4 +--
.../pem/9/images/default_email_template.png | 3 ++
.../docs/pem/9/images/email_template_edit.png | 3 ++
.../pem/9/images/email_template_restore.png | 3 ++
.../docs/pem/9/images/pem_management_menu.png | 4 +--
.../pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx | 7 ++++-
.../monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx | 30 +++++++++++++++++++
product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_web_interface.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx | 15 ++++++++++
11 files changed, 70 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
mode change 100755 => 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_history_report_general.png
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/default_email_template.png
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_edit.png
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_restore.png
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png
old mode 100755
new mode 100644
index 02f990ef970..b3fea692ae8
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_copy.png
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:72b715546e266575e40f4c4b85fdf883f3f4126345a48bdca981a2a93cc22d36
-size 62210
+oid sha256:da3c35c608983fc063285d304923bb05eb1dc4119270eafeeb910f8fe7659f19
+size 71544
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_history_report_general.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_history_report_general.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..173690a76d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alert_history_report_general.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:063b3e8aab631ae507765aac68f7b0c60cf0b12eb8c5fdbf90138a1f4d9e92f4
+size 56260
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alerting_manage_alerts.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alerting_manage_alerts.png
index 8571dbe614d..3c65cb44852 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alerting_manage_alerts.png
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/alerting_manage_alerts.png
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:5f65c79ea86b8355493a226ef6ae144ab1ced63ece1a1f12965e829ad5bd83b6
-size 227680
+oid sha256:94c7cb1020cd098f3a31c31da60f9f66990ea091aea34ebcef8235e28922c2b0
+size 197737
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/default_email_template.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/default_email_template.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8290d5ce8fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/default_email_template.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:79c0add8779b0b871605bc038df4e01545309fc135a694ce253f11f0c49fce2c
+size 162139
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_edit.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_edit.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..21cab62c1ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_edit.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:606f6ac861a890c127c5a802358ca0715e5ee51fd9d6157abbda2c8a19e7e5ed
+size 205416
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_restore.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_restore.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b8accf8e661
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/email_template_restore.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:26887be4bb2bb27c5f2b55ad33b5ce1326f0d41ab2ba0596700112ce4bde3458
+size 155889
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/pem_management_menu.png b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/pem_management_menu.png
index 87f65dadd79..d1cd49508d5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/pem_management_menu.png
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/images/pem_management_menu.png
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:e22937a7945d6e32f306794c2fb11b016f92e1b3ed56059c6f9982993fb59224
-size 145437
+oid sha256:2fd691019a28583b02c0a378e239bf7a5d967485b4f062814e06c90a2f664083
+size 213670
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
index 0c8ca924e5a..b61ffe029d7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
@@ -62,6 +62,7 @@ Use the Quick Links toolbar to open dialog boxes and tabs for managing alerts:
- Select **Copy Alerts** to open the Copy Alert Configuration dialog box and copy an alert definition.
- Select **Alert Templates** to open the **Alert Template** tab and modify or create an alert template.
+- Select **Email Templates** to open the **Email Template** dialog, and modify the default email template to customize an email notification.
- Select **Email Groups** to open the **Email Groups** tab and modify or create an email group.
- Select **Webhooks** to open the **Webhooks** tab and create or manage the webhooks endpoints.
- Select **Server Configurations** to open the Server Configuration dialog box and review or modify server configuration settings.
@@ -628,7 +629,11 @@ The Copy Alert Configuration dialog box copies all alerts from the object select
To copy alerts to multiple objects at once, select a parent node of the targets. For example, to copy the alerts from one table to all tables in a schema, select the check box next to the schema. PEM copies alerts only to targets that are the same type as the source object.
-Select **Ignore duplicates** to prevent PEM from updating any existing alerts on the target objects with the same name as those being copied. Select **Replace duplicates** to replace existing alerts with alerts of the same name from the source object.
+Select **Ignore duplicates** to prevent PEM from updating any existing alerts on the target objects with the same name as those being copied.
+
+Select **Replace duplicates** to replace existing alerts with alerts of the same name from the source object.
+
+Select **Delete Existing Alerts** to delete all the alerts from the target object and copy all the alerts from the source object to the target object.
Select **Configure Alerts** to copy the alerts from the source object to all objects of the same type in or under those objects selected on the Copy Alert Configuration dialog box.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
index eb0d1ba755c..04ebaeec7a5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
@@ -265,3 +265,33 @@ You can use the following command to confirm that Nagios is properly configured:
After confirming that Nagios is configured correctly, restart the Nagios service:
`/usr/local/nagios/bin/nagios -d /usr/local/nagios/etc/nagios.cfg`
+
+## Customizing email templates
+
+Postgres Enterprise Manager monitors your system for conditions that require user attention and sends email notifications. Use the `Email Templates` to customize the email subject and the payload that the server sends if the current values deviate from the threshold values specified by an alert.
+
+These are the default email templates that are customizable:
+
+- Alert detected
+- Alert level increased
+- Alert level decreased
+- Alert cleared
+- Alert reminder
+- Job success
+- Job failure
+- Job cancellation
+- Job step
+- Job step (Database server)
+
+If any of the default alert template is customized then a green tick mark is displayed against that template in the `Custom Template?` column.
+
+Select the edit button to customize the email template:
+
+![Email Template Edit](../images/email_template_edit.png)
+
+Edit the `Subject` and `Payload` fields, as needed, from the available list of placeholders.
+
+Select the custom template and select the undo button at the top, to restore it as default template:
+
+![Email Template Restore](../images/email_template_restore.png)
+
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_web_interface.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_web_interface.mdx
index a9acc238663..d824e58d78e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_web_interface.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_web_interface.mdx
@@ -306,7 +306,7 @@ Use the **Management** menu to access the following PEM features.
| **Postgres Log Analysis Expert** | Open the Postgres Log Analysis Expert dialog box to analyze log file contents for usage trends. |
| **Scheduled Tasks** | Open the **Scheduled Tasks** tab and review tasks that are pending or recently completed. |
| **Tuning Wizard** | Open the Tuning Wizard dialog box to generate a set of tuning recommendations for your server. |
-| **Reports** | Open the Reports dialog box to generate the system configuration report and core usage report for your server. |
+| **Reports** | Open the Reports dialog box to generate the alert history report, system configuration report, or core usage report for your server. |
| **Schedule Alert Blackout** | Open the Schedule Alert Blackout dialog box and schedule the alerts blackout for your servers and agents. |
### Dashboards menu
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
index 2d51069dd4d..0d2c3ef1c79 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ You can generate the System Configuration report and Core Usage report for all l
Reports has following options:
+- Alert History Report (JSON)
- System Configuration Report (JSON)
- System Configuration Report (HTML)
- Core Usage Report (JSON)
@@ -22,6 +23,20 @@ Only superusers or the users with the pem_admin role can download the System Con
Information in these reports shows the latest probe run time.
+## Alert History Report
+
+The Alert History Report provides detailed information about the alerts history at the agent or server level in JSON format.
+
+Go to `Management` menu, select `Reports` then select `Alert History Report`. A new dialogue box opens:
+
+![Alert History Report](../images/alert_history_report_general.png)
+
+- **Agent/Server Name**— Select the agents and servers from the drop-down list. `Overall System Report` option is also available to generate a report for all the registered and active agents and servers.
+
+- **Timeframe**— Select the required timeframe from the drop-down list.
+
+- **Alert Types**— Select the alert types you wish to generate the alert history report for.
+
## System Configuration Report
The System Configuration Report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain Postgres Enterprise Manager, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
From c9e168903eae9de8efc5a0ad803459b1451c157b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Mon, 21 Aug 2023 16:56:19 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 062/370] Tech Partner Commvault v15 Testing
---
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 53 +++++++++++++++++--
.../Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png | 3 ++
.../Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png | 3 ++
.../Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png | 3 ++
4 files changed, 59 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index e24f6da2ed0..e579e7acf27 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ Commvault provides two methods of taking the backup from an EDB database and res
!!! Note
At this time there's a known issue with FSBased Restore that doesn't allow for proper restoration of the database. See [Known issues](#known-issues) for more information.
-### DumpBasedBackupSet backup and restore
+## DumpBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
@@ -160,5 +160,52 @@ epas13_test=#
```
-## Known issues
-FSBaseBackupSet restore has an issue if the default edb directory, for example, `*:\Program files\edb`, was lost or deleted. If this occurs, then after a restore is performed, the permissions on the restored directories aren't recovered. Instead, the directory inherits the permissions from the parent directory, which doesn't allow EDB Postgres Advanced Server services to start on the restored directory. We're working with Commvault to resolve the issue.
+## FSBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
+A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
+
+### Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
+1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+
+2. Click on the required instance.
+
+3. In the `Backup sets` section, click on `FSBasedBackupSet` backup set.
+
+4. In the `Database groups` section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is `default`.
+
+5. In the `Backup` section, click `Back up`.
+
+6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the `Select Backup Level` screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
+
+ ![Select FSBased Backup Type](Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png)
+
+7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the `Job ID` for that backup.
+
+ ![FSBased Backup Job](Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png)
+
+8. When the job is complete, the information about the job can be found on the job's page.
+
+ ![FSBased Backup Job Details](Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png)
+
+#### Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
+Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore or for a Linux file server to a standalone file server.
+
+1. From the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+
+2. Click the instance you want to restore.
+
+3. In the `Recovery Points` calender, select `FSBasedBackupSet`.
+
+4. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click `Restore`.
+
+5. The `Backup Content` screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+
+6. Click `Restore`.
+
+7. From the `Restore Options` screen, select where you want the restore to take go, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+
+8. Select the `Destination Server` and `Destination Instance` and click on submit.
+
+9.
+
+## Known Issues
+FSBaseBackupSet Restore has an issue if the default edb directory (for example, `*:\Program files\edb`) has been lost or deleted. If this occurs then after a restore is performed, the permissions on the restored directories are not recovered. Instead the directory inherits the permissions from the parent directory which does not allow EDB Postgres Advanced Server services to start on the restored directory. We are working with Commvault to resolve the issue.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e4995df8065
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:d43db9e5db0f0b0421541273f52d87736ae12e6879aee84bc8700a568d105691
+size 129298
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2676007aa44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:5da67b5742886735b8f41fc1c46f4d67483a70f405eb4f80c2e5b0740a6e7c9a
+size 140432
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5f3f1924352
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:68bc5a3f22590ee1e7068157679cb258506d757aa1f8cf6c14a1431925c2593c
+size 117372
From ac6ec309a0270eb9461f24ddd5307fd244806ab4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 09:40:56 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 063/370] Backup Info and Guide Updates
---
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 38 ++++++++++++++-----
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 8 ++--
2 files changed, 32 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index e579e7acf27..f69dca4fb49 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -189,23 +189,41 @@ A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
#### Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore or for a Linux file server to a standalone file server.
-1. From the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+1. Ensure that your EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance is stopped
-2. Click the instance you want to restore.
+2. Delete or rename the WAL directory and data directory.
-3. In the `Recovery Points` calender, select `FSBasedBackupSet`.
+3. From the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
-4. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click `Restore`.
+4. Click the instance you want to restore.
-5. The `Backup Content` screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+5. In the `Recovery Points` calender, select `FSBasedBackupSet`.
-6. Click `Restore`.
+6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click `Restore`.
-7. From the `Restore Options` screen, select where you want the restore to take go, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+7. The `Backup Content` screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
-8. Select the `Destination Server` and `Destination Instance` and click on submit.
+8. Click `Restore`.
-9.
+9. From the `Restore Options` screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+
+10. Select the `Destination Server` and `Destination Instance` and click on submit.
+
+11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
+
+12. When the Restore has completed successfully Commvault will automatically start the server using the pg_ctl utility.
+
+13. You can check that the server was started successfully with a command like, `"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"` and it should return a message that the server is running.
+
+```bash
+C:\Program Files\edb\as15>"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"
+pg_ctl: server is running (PID: 20896)
+C:/Program Files/edb/as15/bin/edb-postgres.exe "-D" "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"
+```
+
+14. If you would like the server to be controlled by a Services utility you will need to stop it with the pg_ctl utility and start it again in your Services utility, for example Services(Local) in Windows or systemctl in UNIX.
+
+15. After you have started the service with whichever utility you choose, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
## Known Issues
-FSBaseBackupSet Restore has an issue if the default edb directory (for example, `*:\Program files\edb`) has been lost or deleted. If this occurs then after a restore is performed, the permissions on the restored directories are not recovered. Instead the directory inherits the permissions from the parent directory which does not allow EDB Postgres Advanced Server services to start on the restored directory. We are working with Commvault to resolve the issue.
+FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen where there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on how to mitigate from their end.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 5624b0b1107..a0f30af3cd0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certificatio
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Certification test date** | June 16, 2022 |
-| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | 11, 12, 13, 14 |
-| **EDB Postgres Extended Server** | 11, 12, 13 |
-| **Commvault Backup & Recovery** | 11.24 |
+| **Certification Test Date** | August 22, 2023 |
+| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | 12, 13, 14, 15 |
+| **EDB Postgres Extended Server** | 12, 13 |
+| **Commvault Backup & Recovery** | 11.32 |
From 455ef8cabc18508de942dc27930101ee94df63f4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 16:49:15 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 064/370] More Restore and Guide Updates
---
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 8 +++-
.../07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 42 +++++++++++++++++++
.../Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png | 3 ++
.../Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png | 3 ++
.../Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png | 3 ++
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/index.mdx | 2 +
6 files changed, 59 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index f69dca4fb49..250f31681f8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ Commvault provides two methods of taking the backup from an EDB database and res
- FSBasedBackupSet backup and restore
!!! Note
- At this time there's a known issue with FSBased Restore that doesn't allow for proper restoration of the database. See [Known issues](#known-issues) for more information.
+ At this time there is a known issue with FSBased Incremental/PITR Restore that does not allow for proper restoration of the database. See the known issues section of the guide for more information.
## DumpBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
@@ -203,10 +203,14 @@ Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with eith
7. The `Backup Content` screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+ ![FSBased Backup Restore Databases](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png)
+
8. Click `Restore`.
9. From the `Restore Options` screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+ ![FSBased Backup Restore Details](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png)
+
10. Select the `Destination Server` and `Destination Instance` and click on submit.
11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
@@ -223,7 +227,7 @@ C:/Program Files/edb/as15/bin/edb-postgres.exe "-D" "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\d
14. If you would like the server to be controlled by a Services utility you will need to stop it with the pg_ctl utility and start it again in your Services utility, for example Services(Local) in Windows or systemctl in UNIX.
-15. After you have started the service with whichever utility you choose, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
+15. After you have started the service with your utility of choice, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
## Known Issues
FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen where there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on how to mitigate from their end.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..303d6c2bb43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+---
+title: 'Support and Logging Details'
+description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
+---
+
+## Support
+
+Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and Commvault. A proper support contract is required to be in place at both EDB and Commvault. A support ticket can be opened on either side to start the process. If it is determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor is required, the customer should open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This will allow both companies to work together to help the customer as needed.
+
+## Logging
+
+**EDB Postgres Advanced Server Logs:**
+
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
+
+**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
+
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+
+**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
+
+The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
+
+- Debian-based system: `/var/log/postgresql/postgresql-x.x.main.log. X.x.`
+
+- Red Hat-based system: `/var/lib/pgsql/data/pg_log`
+
+- Windows: `C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.3\data\pg_log`
+
+** Commvault Logs**
+
+Commvault logs can be found a few ways. A first way is within the Content Store directory/folder in the Commvault folder on your system. For example if on a Windows system the Log File path would be `C:\Program Files\Commvault\ContentStore\LogFiles` where you can then see all of the differnt types of logs Commvault collects.
+
+You can also gather some job specific logs within the Commvault interface.
+
+1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to `Jobs > Job History`.
+
+2. Find the specific job you would like to view logs for and click on the `...` beside that job.
+
+3. Select `View Logs`.
+
+ ![View Job Logs](Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ed1093daafa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:db6a73932cd532dad2bef06a09ba99f4e7c8184ae74ce204e2fab6747e270333
+size 1146108
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e537f6ca6af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:913d3eb2f127a84517ddab7039323da6ff2ac3eb67ec05a84a94cb993c40f6bf
+size 87505
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ae4a2a7023d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:d2827c237d4db8cb80a94b996c367c34e26df54a0d9447b1334055bf9ca04791
+size 755537
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/index.mdx
index c4c8905d918..87c365f7f4b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/index.mdx
@@ -9,3 +9,5 @@ directoryDefaults:
This document is intended to augment each vendor’s product documentation to guide you in getting the products working together. It isn't intended to show the optimal configuration for the certified integration.
\ No newline at end of file
From c8eb29148ce1802b6489bf37768ac19b84d1c5d6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 16:55:52 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 065/370] Error Edits
---
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 4 +---
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 250f31681f8..16152ba8b46 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -1,8 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Commvault Backup & Recovery usage scenarios'
-redirects:
- - /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
You can back up and restore an EDB database using Commvault Backup & Recovery.
From f0a1898c001397bc6e69876f21a7ac02da6fc1be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 13:13:04 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 066/370] Revert "Reduce deploy times by eliminating client
redirects"
This reverts commit 9447d0417b90a23221324719e11df79d2cc2287d.
We're too dependent on client redirects for "latest" paths still.
---
src/constants/gatsby-utils.js | 10 ++++------
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
index ac7e7abe4eb..115ecb32255 100644
--- a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
@@ -2,8 +2,6 @@ const fs = require("fs");
const asyncFs = require("fs/promises");
const path = require("path");
-const IS_CI_BUILD = process.env.GITHUB_ACTIONS;
-
const sortVersionArray = (versions) => {
return versions.sort((a, b) =>
b.localeCompare(a, undefined, { numeric: true }),
@@ -332,7 +330,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath: toPath,
toPath: replacePathVersion(toPath),
- redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
+ redirectInBrowser: true,
isPermanent: false,
force: true,
});
@@ -346,7 +344,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath: replacePathVersion(toPath),
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
+ redirectInBrowser: true,
isPermanent: false,
});
}
@@ -363,7 +361,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath,
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
+ redirectInBrowser: true,
isPermanent,
});
}
@@ -408,7 +406,7 @@ const configureRedirects = (
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath,
toPath,
- redirectInBrowser: !IS_CI_BUILD,
+ redirectInBrowser: true,
isPermanent: false,
});
}
From c6f18cf4a6333c3bd453d422e0022ed848e94e32 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 09:37:29 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 067/370] More Edits
---
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 2 +-
.../04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 2 +-
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 8 ++++----
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
5 files changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 9ec0f28b705..abb1dc20c75 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Partner information'
-description: 'Details for Commvault Backup & Recovery'
+description: 'Details of the Partner'
---
| | |
@@ -8,5 +8,5 @@ description: 'Details for Commvault Backup & Recovery'
| **Partner Name** | Commvault |
| **Partner product** | Commvault Backup & Recovery |
| **Website** | https://www.commvault.com/ |
-| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.24 |
+| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.32 |
| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server and EDB Postgres Extended Server, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index 4c81ede5ab6..0839f8fc321 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Solution summary'
-description: 'Brief explanation of the solution and its purpose'
+description: 'Explanation of the solution and its purpose'
---
Commvault enables your business to streamline management of its continuously evolving data environment, whether the data is on premises or in the cloud.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 5e629a4d158..a04f7e337ca 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Commvault Backup & Recovery'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
redirects:
- /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 16152ba8b46..9fcd267d26c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -187,11 +187,11 @@ A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
#### Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore or for a Linux file server to a standalone file server.
-1. Ensure that your EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance is stopped
+1. Ensure that your EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance is stopped.
2. Delete or rename the WAL directory and data directory.
-3. From the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
4. Click the instance you want to restore.
@@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with eith
11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
-12. When the Restore has completed successfully Commvault will automatically start the server using the pg_ctl utility.
+12. When the Restore has completed successfully, Commvault will automatically start the server using the pg_ctl utility.
13. You can check that the server was started successfully with a command like, `"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"` and it should return a message that the server is running.
@@ -228,4 +228,4 @@ C:/Program Files/edb/as15/bin/edb-postgres.exe "-D" "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\d
15. After you have started the service with your utility of choice, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
## Known Issues
-FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen where there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on how to mitigate from their end.
+FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen when there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on how to mitigate from their end.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index a0f30af3cd0..772fe4e5b5c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Commvault Backup & Recovery'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
From 4b550127540a0f17e65d3f20546fef55a6de958f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 10:41:42 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 068/370] EDB*Plus: fixed rel notes typo
---
.../edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx
index 574665d7c19..a8f415a1b59 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,5 +6,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in EDB\*Plus 41.2.0 inc
| Type | Description |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| Enhancement | The connection string syntax in EDB\*Plus now supports multi-host connectivity. When multiple hosts are specified, you can also use the `targetServerType` connection property and set it to `primary` to ensure that EDB\*Plus always establishes a connection with the active primary EDB Postgres Database Server (EPAS) database server. [Support ticket #92553] |
+| Enhancement | The connection string syntax in EDB\*Plus now supports multi-host connectivity. When multiple hosts are specified, you can also use the `targetServerType` connection property and set it to `primary` to ensure that EDB\*Plus always establishes a connection with the active primary EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) database server. [Support ticket #92553] |
| Bug fix | Fixed the issue whereby the ECHO command wasn't emitting the SQL statement in the spooled file when using EDB\*Plus in an interactive session. [Support ticket # 83580] |
From c8c2d0d8642f5671588b66fccaf5a4c66b077c52 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Thu, 4 Aug 2022 23:35:01 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 069/370] Outline strategy for forking product docs without
losing history
---
docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md | 108 ++++++++++++++++++++++++
1 file changed, 108 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
diff --git a/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md b/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0eb45eec687
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
@@ -0,0 +1,108 @@
+# Docs repository product version forking strategy
+
+## Version forking in brief
+
+"Forking" is currently (and traditionally) our strategy for handling product versions in the documentation for EDB products. In short, "forking" means that when a new (major) version of a product is released, a new set of documentation is released along with it, based on the documentation for the previous version but with updates to reflect the changes present in the new version of the product.
+
+For example: when EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14 was released, a new version of the documentation was created in this repo at product_docs/docs/epas/14/ - this was based on the documentation at product_docs/docs/epas/13/, but contains several key differences.
+
+There are other strategies for handling product versioning in documentation, but forking is the one we've used for most of EDB's history. Of particular interest is the contrast with the approach used by PGDG for the PostgreSQL documentation, which maintains a branch for each major release that can be updated both independently and also allows for backporting corrections from the latest release into past versions.
+
+## The problems with forked versions
+
+There are quite a few tradeoffs between various versioning strategies for documentation, but our current approach suffers from two major flaws:
+
+1. **It is difficult to share concurrent changes between versions.** There are many cases where a change should be made to documentation for more than one product version:
+
+- Errors present in more than one version should ideally be corrected in all of them.
+- Structural changes made to facilitate navigation or comprehension should be applied consistently.
+- Updates to the product itself in one version will likely need to be noted for subsequent versions as well if they affect how the product can be used. In many cases, a minor version update will be backported to previous versions of a product and such changes should also be reflected in the documentation.
+- Work must begin on a new version's documentation while major updates are still expected for the last version's documentation; in some cases, documentation for new features in one version will not be complete before the documentation must be forked.
+
+In all of these cases, changes must be manually copied from one subtree to another. While there are tools to make this somewhat easier, it remains a tedious and error-prone process.
+
+2. **Past version control history is lost when files are copied**. Technically, git does offer copy detection... But it is slow and doesn't always work. By default, tools like `git log` and `git blame` don't use it. Thus, practically speaking, it is difficult to trace back to the origin of a change after a file has been forked. Over multiple releases, the context for most changes slowly disappears from view - thus negating much of the value of using source control!
+
+The forking strategy outlined below _partially_ mitigates these problems.
+
+## Our forking strategy
+
+We recognize that the critical period for changes comes between the time when work has started on documentation for the next major version of a product and the time when that version has been released. During this period, work is split between the two versions - the current latest (_vLatest_) and the yet-to-be-released next version (_vNext_). Prior to the start of this period, most work on product documentation will focus on _vLatest_; after the end of this period, _vNext_ has **become** _vLatest_ and work continues to focus primarily on _vLatest_.
+
+Therefore, our strategy aims to minimize unnecessary differences between the two sets of documentation.
+
+### Initializing the branch
+
+When work is begun on the next version of a product, [a long-lived future release documentation branch](branch-and-release.md#future-release-documentation) should be created. All changes _specific to the next version_ should be made in this branch (either directly, or via PRs that are merged into it). Changes that apply to both _vLatest_ and _vNext_ should be made to _vLatest_ - once merged, the _vNext_ branch can be rebased to incorporate them. For this to be possible, the branch should be initialized by **renaming** the _vNext_ subdirectory and then **restoring** the current _vNext_ subdirectory prior to merging - essentially a variation on [Robert Pollak's technique for tracking copies](https://stackoverflow.com/questions/1043388/record-file-copy-operation-with-git/46484848#46484848), with an extended delay between steps \#2 and \#3 where all the work happens.
+
+1. Create the new branch
+2. _Rename_ the subdirectory corresponding to the latest version of the product to reflect the new version. (e.g., `git mv product_docs/docs/epas/14/ product_docs/docs/epas/15/`)
+3. Commit the version rename to the branch and push to the docs repo. (e.g., `git commit -m "begin fork of epas 15 docs"`)
+4. Create a PR for the branch in which you note the purpose and provide instructions as follows (replace all placeholders that appear in square brackets):
+
+ > # Documentation for [Product] [vNext]
+ >
+ > This is a future release branch - specific instructions must be followed when merging, [see below](#merging-this-branch).
+ > **This branch shall not be merged until [Product] [vNext] is released!**
+ >
+ > Please use this branch _only_ for changes specific to version [vNext] -
+ > changes and corrections that apply to [vLatest] should be made in short-lived
+ > branches that can be merged into develop and released promptly.
+ >
+ > ## Working on this branch
+ >
+ > Other people may be editing and altering this branch. Be sure to pull latest before
+ > beginning work - and be aware that this branch may be rebased on a regular basis to
+ > incorporate changes from the previous version. We recommend using `git pull --rebase` or
+ > setting `pull.rebase` to `true` in git config to avoid mistakes,
+ > e.g. run `git config pull.rebase true` on your local clone.
+ >
+ > This branch will live for months, but try to merge and delete your branches within hours or days.
+ >
+ > For changes that need review or feedback, create a branch based on this branch and
+ > request feedback on a PR before merging your changes into this branch. See:
+ >
+ > Please use descriptive messages and comments for your commits and PRs - this allows
+ > other people working on this PR to see at a glance what is changing.
+ >
+ > Good: "updated version to 15 in index.mdx" / "correct misspelled option in CLI reference"
+ > Bad: "updated index.mdx" / "fixed typos"
+ >
+ > ## Incorporating [vLatest] updates
+ >
+ > To bring in applicable changes that have been made to [Product] [vLatest], rebase
+ > this branch against develop and force-push. Be sure to review changes for areas
+ > that should be updated for [vNext]. When resolving conflicts, defer to [vLatest]
+ > except when changes in this branch are necessary to support [vNext].
+ >
+ > ## Merging this branch
+ >
+ > When [Product] [vNext] is released, follow this procedure to complete the separation of
+ > documenation for [vLatest] and [vNext]:
+ >
+ > 1. Rebase one last time (see above)
+ > 2. Bring the [vNext] subdirectory back into the source tree:
+ > ```
+ > git checkout develop product_docs/docs/[product]/[vNext]/
+ > git commit -m "restore [product] [vNext] docs"
+ > git push
+ > ```
+ > 3. Immediately merge this branch into develop.
+
+5. Ensure all contributors are made aware of the branch and have read the instructions for use.
+
+### Merging the branch
+
+When the time comes to merge, follow the instructions noted in the template above:
+
+1. Rebase the branch - this ensures that the _vNext_ changes are built on top of the most up-to-date _vLatest_ changes and avoids conflicts when merging.
+2. Restore the latest version files by checking them out from the most recent develop branch commit and then committing them on the future branch.
+ This ensures that no changes are lost, as when the future branch is merged all unincorporated commits for _vLatest_ will be merged into _vNext_.
+3. Merge the branch without delay after step \#2 - any interim commits to _vLatest_ will be lost (from the _vLatest_ directory).
+
+## The downsides of our mitigation
+
+The biggest downside is simply that it only works _before_ the next version of documentation is released - after that, we're back to having to patch each version independently.
+
+A smaller downside is the inability to work on both _vLatest_ and _vNext_ in the same branch. We should try to avoid that anyway,
+but it is sometimes useful.
From 9a8eeeafa96865f7a656ee32a408b456f7537e8c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer <63653723+josh-heyer@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 26 Aug 2022 10:58:46 -0600
Subject: [PATCH 070/370] fix vNext/vLatest confusion in template
---
docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md b/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
index 0eb45eec687..e27b3b9cf6c 100644
--- a/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
+++ b/docs/agreements/product-version-fork.md
@@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ When work is begun on the next version of a product, [a long-lived future releas
> documenation for [vLatest] and [vNext]:
>
> 1. Rebase one last time (see above)
- > 2. Bring the [vNext] subdirectory back into the source tree:
+ > 2. Bring the [vLatest] subdirectory back into the source tree:
> ```
- > git checkout develop product_docs/docs/[product]/[vNext]/
- > git commit -m "restore [product] [vNext] docs"
+ > git checkout develop product_docs/docs/[product]/[vLatest]/
+ > git commit -m "restore [product] [vLatest] docs"
> git push
> ```
> 3. Immediately merge this branch into develop.
From 5a03d531050291498bc5a2c7825b75d03b34a865 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Lenz Grimmer
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 18:15:31 +0200
Subject: [PATCH 071/370] Update README.md, add and fix links in PGD docs
Minor improvements to `README.md`.
Add link to the OpenTelemetry project in the OpenTelemetry chapter.
Fix broken links in the Monitoring through SQL chapter.
Signed-off-by: Lenz Grimmer
---
README.md | 6 +++---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/otel.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/sql.mdx | 4 ++--
3 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
index 569ae835259..9a659fcd2f6 100644
--- a/README.md
+++ b/README.md
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ At this point you have a couple options.
1. Run `npm run start`. The application will start in the background and take a few minutes to load.
-1. You can view logs and monitor the startup process by running `npm run logs`. Once it's finished it can be accessed at `http://localhost:8000/`.
+1. You can view logs and monitor the startup process by running `npm run logs`. Once it's finished it can be accessed at [http://localhost:8000/](http://localhost:8000).
#### Additional Commands and Options for the Docker Environment
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ At this point you have a couple options.
If you find that the container crashes frequently or see that your container has exited with code 137, increasing the Docker memory should help. Allocating at least 4GB is recommended.
-1. open Docker Desktop
+1. Open Docker Desktop
1. Go to Preferences (gear icon in the top right corner)
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ If you need to setup a redirect from Docs 1.0 to Docs 2.0 manually, this is the
# MDX Format
-Documentation must be formatted as an [MDX file](https://www.gatsbyjs.com/docs/mdx/writing-pages/) with the `.mdx` extension. MDX is a superset of [Markdown](https://www.markdownguide.org/).
+Documentation must be formatted as an [MDX file](https://www.gatsbyjs.com/docs/how-to/routing/mdx/) with the `.mdx` extension. MDX is a superset of [Markdown](https://www.markdownguide.org/). See [What is MDX?](https://mdxjs.com/docs/what-is-mdx/) for a detailed explanation of the format.
## Frontmatter
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/otel.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/otel.mdx
index ca7df3a644d..c33fb9ec965 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/otel.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/otel.mdx
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: OpenTelemetry integration
---
You can configure EDB Postgres Distributed to report monitoring information
-as well as traces to the OpenTelemetry collector.
+as well as traces to the [OpenTelemetry](https://opentelemetry.io/) collector.
EDB Postgres Distributed OTEL collector fills several resource attributes.
These are attached to all metrics and traces:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/sql.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/sql.mdx
index 0a7f7d64719..36ac35396c8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/sql.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/monitoring/sql.mdx
@@ -113,7 +113,7 @@ You can use another view for monitoring of outgoing replication activity:
- [`bdr.node_replication_rates`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible/#bdrnode_replication_rates) for monitoring outgoing replication
-The []`bdr.node_replication_rates`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible/#bdrnode_replication_rates) view gives an overall picture of the outgoing
+The [`bdr.node_replication_rates`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible/#bdrnode_replication_rates) view gives an overall picture of the outgoing
replication activity along with the catchup estimates for peer nodes,
specifically.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ view.
!!! Note
This catalog is present only when the bdr-enterprise extension is installed.
-Administrators can query `[`bdr.node_slots`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible/#bdrnode_slots) for outgoing replication from the
+Administrators can query [`bdr.node_slots`](/pgd/latest/reference/catalogs-visible/#bdrnode_slots) for outgoing replication from the
local node. It shows information about replication status of all other nodes
in the group that are known to the current node as well as any additional
replication slots created by PGD on the current node.
From a6f87fbb2e82627f504e77c4022ec8d96a55e741 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 14:22:34 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 072/370] BigAnimal: clarifying language for listing valid
values for properties in config file
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
index b46c2d00abd..f0065f0c1fa 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ To create the cluster using the sample configuration file `config_file.yaml`:
biganimal cluster create --config-file "./config_file.yaml"
```
-To query an enumeration of valid values for the BigAnimal and cloud service provider-related properties, CLI provides a series of subcommands. For example, you can use `cluster show-architectures` to list all cloud architectures available to your current login account:
+To view valid values you can use in the configuration file for BigAnimal and cloud service provider-related properties, the CLI provides a series of cluster subcommands. For example, you can use `cluster show-architectures` to list all BigAnimal database architectures available within your cloud service provider account:
```shell
biganimal cluster show-architectures
From 5dbc5bad1c7cfe566adfd4b69b6cb0b8fdcae01c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 15:25:17 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 073/370] Postgres Add
---
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index abb1dc20c75..a630a37e94f 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Partner product** | Commvault Backup & Recovery |
| **Website** | https://www.commvault.com/ |
| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.32 |
-| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server and EDB Postgres Extended Server, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
+| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server and PostgreSQL Server, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
From 9e08eb987be951de8a66e54b0711ed86af74ee89 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 15:26:06 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 074/370] PG Edit
---
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index a630a37e94f..d6abe7d2c7b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Partner product** | Commvault Backup & Recovery |
| **Website** | https://www.commvault.com/ |
| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.32 |
-| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server and PostgreSQL Server, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
+| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server and PostgreSQL, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
From 2ea4d89f018fee786c989a8fd1c861108c2839d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: kunliuedb <95676424+kunliuedb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 4 Jul 2023 16:18:21 +0800
Subject: [PATCH 075/370] Update import_data.mdx
---
.../release/free_trial/detail/experiment/import_data.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/free_trial/detail/experiment/import_data.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/free_trial/detail/experiment/import_data.mdx
index fbc00dbd960..fea2f96b028 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/free_trial/detail/experiment/import_data.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/free_trial/detail/experiment/import_data.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ PostgreSQL includes a variety of ways to import data. Here, we'll show how to im
For this demonstration, we're going to import batter data from the [Baseball Databank](https://github.com/chadwickbureau/baseballdatabank), which is in CSV form. While it's easy to import the data using [PostgreSQL's COPY command](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/sql-copy.html), we'll need to first define a table to put that data into.
-We're going to [add a database](/biganimal/latest/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/#one-database-with-one-application) called "baseball," which we'll populate with some Major League Baseball statistics.
+We're going to add a database called "baseball," which we'll populate with some Major League Baseball statistics.
```sql
create database baseball;
From ccb443bf970b0f226f468c6a7f9a81a3a7b01c72 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 17:03:56 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 076/370] BigAnimal: removed duplicated sections
---
.../reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx | 133 ------------------
1 file changed, 133 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
index b46c2d00abd..a866f5b2a69 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
@@ -278,139 +278,6 @@ To restore a deleted cluster, use the `--from-deleted` flag in the command.
You can restore a cluster in a single cluster to a primary/standby high-availability cluster and vice versa. You can restore a distributed high-availability cluster only to a cluster using the same architecture.
!!!
-### Get cluster connection information
-
-To use your BigAnimal cluster, you first need to get your cluster's connection information. To get your cluster's connection information, use the `cluster show-connection` command:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster show-connection \
- --name "my-biganimal-cluster" \
- --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus"
-__OUTPUT__
-┌─────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┐
-│ Access Type │ Connection String │
-├─────────────┼──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤
-│ read-write │ postgresql://edb_admin@p-gxhkfww1fe.30glixgayvwhtmn3.enterprisedb.network:5432/edb_admin │
-│ read-only │ Disabled │
-└─────────────┴──────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘
-```
-
-!!!tip
-You can query the complete connection information with other output formats, like JSON or YAML. For example:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster show-connection \
- --name "my-biganimal-cluster" \
- --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus" \
- --output "json"
-```
-!!!
-
-### Update cluster
-
-After the cluster is created, you can update attributes of the cluster, including both the cluster’s profile and its deployment architecture. You can update the following attributes:
-
-- Cluster name
-- Password of administrator account
-- Cluster architecture
-- Number of standby replicas
-- Instance type of cluster
-- Instance volume properties
-- Networking
-- Allowed IP list
-- Postgres database configuration
-- Volume properties, size, IOPS
-- Retention period
-- Read-only workloads
-- IAM authentication
-
-For example, to set the public allowed IP range list, use the `--cidr-blocks` flag:
-
-```shell
-./biganimal cluster update --name "my-biganimal-cluster" --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus" \
- --cidr-blocks "9.9.9.9/28=Traffic from App A"
-```
-
-To check whether the setting took effect, use the `cluster show` command, and view the detailed cluster information output in JSON format. For example:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster show --name "my-biganimal-cluster" --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus" \
- --output "json" \
-| jq '.[0].allowIpRangeMap'
-__OUTPUT__
-[
- [
- "9.9.9.9/28",
- "Traffic from App A"
- ]
-]
-```
-
-### Update the Postgres configuration of a cluster
-
-To update the Postgres configuration of a BigAnimal cluster directly from the CLI:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster update --id "p-gxhkfww1fe" \
- --pg-config "application_name=ba_test_app,array_nulls=false"
-__OUTPUT__
-Update Cluster operation is started
-Cluster ID is "p-gxhkfww1fe"
-```
-To specify multiple configurations, you can use multiple `--pg-config` flags or include multiple configuration settings as a key-value array string separated by commas in one `--pg-config` flag. If a Postgres setting contains a comma, you need to specify it with a separate `--pg-config` flag.
-
-!!! Note
-You can update the cluster architecture with the `--cluster-architecture` flag. The only supported scenario is to update a single-node cluster to a primary/standby high-availability cluster.
-!!!
-
-### Delete a cluster
-
-To delete a cluster you no longer need, use the `cluster delete` command. For example:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster delete \
- --name "my-biganimal-cluster" \
- --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus"
-```
-
-You can list all deleted clusters using the `show-deleted-clusters` command and restore them from their history backups as needed.
-
-
-### Restore a cluster
-BigAnimal continuously backs up your PostgreSQL clusters. Using the CLI, you can restore a cluster from its backup to any point in time as long as the backups are retained in the backup storage. The restored cluster can be in another region and with different configurations. You can specify new configurations in the `cluster restore` command. For example:
-
-```shell
-biganimal cluster restore\
- --name "my-biganimal-cluster" \
- --provider "azure" \
- --region "eastus" \
- --password "mypassword@123" \
- --new-name "my-biganimal-cluster-restored" \
- --new-region="eastus2" \
- --cluster-architecture "single" \
- --instance-type "azure:Standard_E2s_v3" \
- --volume-type "azurepremiumstorage" \
- --volume-property "P1" \
- --networking "public" \
- --cidr-blocks="10.10.10.10/27=Traffic from App B" \
- --restore-point "2022-01-26T15:04:05+0800" \
- --backup-retention-period "2w" \
- --read-only-workloads: "true"
-```
-
-The password for the restored cluster is mandatory. The other parameters, if not specified, inherit the source database's settings.
-
-To restore a deleted cluster, use the `--from-deleted` flag in the command.
-
-!!! Note
-You can restore a cluster in a single cluster to a primary/standby high-availability cluster and vice versa. You can restore a distributed high-availability cluster only to a cluster using the same architecture.
-!!!
-
## Managing distributed high-availability clusters
From cb7682a29d04d99918c07dd4e777a87fb70b56c0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 17:54:03 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 077/370] Review Edits
---
...-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 33 ++++++++++---------
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 24 +++++++-------
2 files changed, 30 insertions(+), 27 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index a04f7e337ca..d8d7d27b376 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -7,18 +7,21 @@ redirects:
Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB database requires the following components:
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server
+- EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server or PostgreSQL Server
- Commvault Backup & Recovery software
+!!! Note
+ We refer to the EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server products as Postgres distribution. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
+
## Prerequisites
-- A running EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server instance
+- A running Postgres distribution
- Commvault Backup & Recovery installed
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server application path and library directory path, for example, `c:\Program Files\edb\as13\bin` and `c:\Program Files\edb\as13\lib`
-- The login credentials used to access the EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server database
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server archive log directory configured
+- Postgres distribution application path and library directory path, for example, `c:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin` and `c:\Program Files\edb\as15\lib`
+- The login credentials used to access the Postgres distribution database
+- Postgres distribution archive log directory configured
-## Configure Commvault Backup & Recovery for EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server
+## Configure Commvault Backup & Recovery for Postgres distribution
### Set up a disk storage pool
@@ -42,11 +45,11 @@ Next, create a server backup plan in Core Setup. To create a server backup plan
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/BackupPlanConf.png)
-### Install a client on an EDB database
+### Install a client on a Postgres distribution database
1. From the Navigation pane of the Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center, select **Protect > Databases**.
2. Select **Add server**.
-3. Select the database type for EDB database, which in this case is **PostgreSQL**.
+3. Select the database type for the Postgres distribution database, which in this case is **PostgreSQL**.
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/ServerAdd1.png)
@@ -66,7 +69,7 @@ Next, create a server backup plan in Core Setup. To create a server backup plan
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/ServerAdd6.png)
-### Configure the EDB database instances to back up and protect
+### Configure the Postgres distribution instances to backup and protect
1. From the navigation pane, select **Protect > Databases > DB Instances**.
2. Select **Add instance**, and then select **PostgreSQL**.
@@ -74,18 +77,18 @@ Next, create a server backup plan in Core Setup. To create a server backup plan
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/CreateInstance1.png)
3. From the **Server name** list, select the server where you want to create the new instance.
-4. In the **Instance Name** box, enter the EDB database instance name.
-5. From the **Plan** list, select the server plan you set up for use with your EDB database.
+4. In the **Instance Name** box, enter the Postgres distribution database instance name.
+5. From the **Plan** list, select the server plan you set up for use with your Postgres distribution database.
6. Under **Connection details**, enter the following information.
- - In the **Database user** box, enter the user name to access the EDB database instance.
- - In the **Password** box, enter the EDB database user account password.
- - In the **Port** box, enter the port to open the communication between the EDB database and the clients.
+ - In the **Database user** box, enter the user name to access the Postgres distribution database instance.
+ - In the **Password** box, enter the Postgres distribution database user account password.
+ - In the **Port** box, enter the port to open the communication between the Postgres distribution and the clients.
- In the **Maintenance DB** box, enter the name of a system database that's used as a maintenance database.
- In the **PostgreSQL** section, enter paths for **Binary Directory**, **Lib Directory**, and **Archive Log Directory**.
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/CreateInstance2.png)
- Your database instance to back up is now created. You can view its configuration.
+ Your Postgres distribution database instance to back up is now created. You can view its configuration.
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/CreateInstance3.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 9fcd267d26c..f2fff4a148b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -3,23 +3,23 @@ title: 'Using'
description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
-You can back up and restore an EDB database using Commvault Backup & Recovery.
+You can back up and restore a Postgres distribution database using Commvault Backup & Recovery.
## Using Commvault Backup & Recovery
-Commvault provides two methods of taking the backup from an EDB database and restoring it:
+Commvault provides two methods of taking the backup from a Postgres distribution database and restoring it:
- DumpBasedBackupSet backup and restore
- FSBasedBackupSet backup and restore
!!! Note
- At this time there is a known issue with FSBased Incremental/PITR Restore that does not allow for proper restoration of the database. See the known issues section of the guide for more information.
+ At this time there is a known issue with FSBased Incremental/PITR Restore that does not allow for proper restoration of the database using the defined process. See the known issues section of the guide for more information and workaround.
-## DumpBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
+### DumpBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
-#### Taking DumpBasedBackupSet backup
+## Taking DumpBasedBackupSet backup
1. Open the Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center. From the navigation pane, select **Protect > Databases**.
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
![Backup Job](Images/Dumpbackup7.png)
-#### Restoring DumpBasedBackupSet backup
+## Restoring DumpBasedBackupSet backup
You can use DumpBasedBackupSet to restore the individual databases.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ You can use DumpBasedBackupSet to restore the individual databases.
![Restore Job](Images/Dumprestore5.png)
-8. When the Restore has completed successfully, log in to the EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data. This example connected to an EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance:
+8. When the Restore has completed successfully, log in to the Postgres distribution database and check that the restore operation recovered the data. This example connected to an EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance:
```bash
edb=#
@@ -158,10 +158,10 @@ epas13_test=#
```
-## FSBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
+### FSBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
-### Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
+## Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
2. Click on the required instance.
@@ -184,10 +184,10 @@ A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
![FSBased Backup Job Details](Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png)
-#### Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
+## Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore or for a Linux file server to a standalone file server.
-1. Ensure that your EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance is stopped.
+1. Ensure that your Postgres distribution instance is stopped.
2. Delete or rename the WAL directory and data directory.
@@ -228,4 +228,4 @@ C:/Program Files/edb/as15/bin/edb-postgres.exe "-D" "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\d
15. After you have started the service with your utility of choice, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
## Known Issues
-FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen when there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on how to mitigate from their end.
+FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with PostgreSQL server, EDB Postgres Advanced Server and EDB Postgres Extended versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen when there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on a fix.
From 1e1ec10b3e257e03907c7b3496d15f693d4e40b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 12:08:12 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 078/370] Added the configure options as per PEM-4905
---
.../configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx | 30 +++++++++++--------
1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
index 370ef1e2387..1372d7d887e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
@@ -22,18 +22,24 @@ The PEM server package includes a script (`configure-pem-server.sh`) to help aut
When invoking the script, you can include command line options to specify configuration properties. The script prompts you for values that you omit on the command line. The accepted options are:
-| Option | Description |
-| ---------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `-acp` | Defines PEM agent certificate path. The default is `/root/.pem`. |
-| `-ci` | CIDR-formatted network address range that agents connect to the server from, to be added to the server's `pg_hba.conf` file, for example, `192.168.1.0/24`. The default is `0.0.0.0/0`. |
-| `-dbi` | The directory for the database server installation, for example, `/usr/edb/as12` for EDB Postgres Advanced Server or `/usr/pgsql-12` for PostgreSQL. |
-| `-ds` | The unit file name of the PEM database server. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, the default file name is `edb-as-12`. For PostgreSQL, it's `postgresql-12`. |
-| `-ho` | The host address of the PEM database server. |
-| `-p` | The port number of the PEM database server. |
-| `-ps` | The service name of the pemagent. The default value is `pemagent`. |
-| `-sp` | The superuser password of the PEM database server. This value is required. |
-| `-su` | The superuser name of the PEM database server. |
-| `-t` | The installation type: Specify `1` if the configuration is for web services and backend database, `2` if you're configuring web services, or `3` if you're configuring the backend database. If you specify `3`, the database must reside on the local host. |
+| Option | Description |
+| ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `-acp` or `--pemagent-certificate-path` | Defines PEM agent certificate path. The default is `/root/.pem`. |
+| `-ci` or `--cidr-address` | CIDR-formatted network address range that agents connect to the server from, to be added to the server's `pg_hba.conf` file, for example, `192.168.1.0/24`. The default is `0.0.0.0/0`. |
+| `-dbi` or `--db-install-path` | The directory for the database server installation, for example, `/usr/edb/as12` for EDB Postgres Advanced Server or `/usr/pgsql-12` for PostgreSQL. |
+| `-ds` or `--db-unitfile` | The unit file name of the PEM database server. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, the default file name is `edb-as-12`. For PostgreSQL, it's `postgresql-12`. |
+| `-ho` or `--host` | The host address of the PEM database server. |
+| `-p` or `--port` | The port number of the PEM database server. |
+| `-ps` or `--pemagent-servicename` | The service name of the pemagent. The default value is `pemagent`. |
+| `-sp` or `--superpassword` | The superuser password of the PEM database server. This value is required. |
+| `-su` or `--superuser` | The superuser name of the PEM database server. |
+| `-au` or `--use-agent-user` | The option to provide the PEM agent user name. |
+| `-t` or `--type` | The installation type: Specify `1` if the configuration is for web services and backend database, `2` if you're configuring web services, or `3` if you're configuring the backend database. If you specify `3`, the database must reside on the local host. |
+| `-un` or `--uninstall-pem-server` | The option to uninstall the PEM server. |
+| `-nhc` or `--no-hba-change` | The option to skip the changes done to `pg_hba.conf` and `pg_config` files. |
+| `-uac` or `--use-agent-sslcert` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL certificates while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-uak` or `--use-agent-sslkey` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL key while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-h` or `--help` | The option to list all the available options while configuring the PEM server. |
If you don't provide configuration properties on the command line, the script prompts you for values. When you invoke the script, choose from:
From 09781637de096f0fee52cbbcda677f37b5a3e3f1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 12:09:20 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 079/370] Added the PEM 9.3.0 release notes
---
.../pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 19 +++++++++++++++++++
.../docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx | 1 +
2 files changed, 20 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..1e01310c8ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+---
+title: "Version 9.3.0"
+---
+
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
+
+| Type | Description |
+| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| Enhancement | Added the functionality to delete all the existing alert while using the copy alert feature. |
+| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EPAS 16 support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
+| Enhancement | Added support to customize the default email templates. |
+| Enhancement | Added the support to download the alert history report for agents and servers from the reports tab. |
+| Enhancement | Added options to reuse the existing agent SSL certificates and key files while configuring the PEM server. |
+| Bug Fix | Added the functionality to add/view ignore mount points in the agent REST API. |
+| Bug Fix | Added the `hostaddr` body parameter to the server REST API. |
+| Bug Fix | Removed the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
+| Bug Fix | Added the support to allow the webhook endpoint registration without providing the client SSL certificates and key files or CA certificates using `allow_insecure_webhooks` parameter in the `agent.cfg` file. Also set `ssl_verifypeer` parameter to `false` while establishing the connection with webhook endpoint. |
+| Bug Fix | Improved the error message for better user understanding of put/post server REST API. |
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashbaord. |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 778ae3c93c2..e7909211984 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ The Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM) documentation describes the latest version
| Version | Release Date | Upstream Merges | Accessibility Conformance |
| ------------------------- | ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| [9.3.0](930_rel_notes) | 31 Aug 2023 | NA | [Conformance Report](https://www.enterprisedb.com/accessibility) |
| [9.2.2](922_rel_notes) | 14 Jul 2023 | NA | [Conformance Report](https://www.enterprisedb.com/accessibility) |
| [9.2.1](921_rel_notes) | 03 Jul 2023 | NA | [Conformance Report](https://www.enterprisedb.com/accessibility) |
| [9.2.0](920_rel_notes) | 24 May 2023 | NA | [Conformance Report](https://www.enterprisedb.com/accessibility) |
From 04a8919bb8e26a0ca022069105fc10777f8c6642 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 07:46:24 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 080/370] Syntax Edits
---
...-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 2 +-
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 26 +++++++++----------
2 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index d8d7d27b376..db7372a2446 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ redirects:
- /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
---
-Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB database requires the following components:
+Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server or PostgreSQL Server database requires the following components:
- EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server or PostgreSQL Server
- Commvault Backup & Recovery software
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index f2fff4a148b..dc1974407d1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -162,21 +162,21 @@ epas13_test=#
A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
## Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
-1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to ***Protect > Databases***.
2. Click on the required instance.
-3. In the `Backup sets` section, click on `FSBasedBackupSet` backup set.
+3. In the ***Backup sets*** section, click on ***FSBasedBackupSet*** backup set.
-4. In the `Database groups` section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is `default`.
+4. In the ***Database groups*** section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is ***default***.
-5. In the `Backup` section, click `Back up`.
+5. In the ***Backup*** section, click ***Back up***.
-6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the `Select Backup Level` screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
+6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the ***Select Backup Level*** screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
![Select FSBased Backup Type](Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png)
-7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the `Job ID` for that backup.
+7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the ***Job ID*** for that backup.
![FSBased Backup Job](Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png)
@@ -191,25 +191,25 @@ Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with eith
2. Delete or rename the WAL directory and data directory.
-3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to `Protect > Databases`.
+3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to ***Protect > Databases***.
4. Click the instance you want to restore.
-5. In the `Recovery Points` calender, select `FSBasedBackupSet`.
+5. In the ***Recovery Points*** calender, select ***FSBasedBackupSet***.
-6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click `Restore`.
+6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click ***Restore***.
-7. The `Backup Content` screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+7. The ***Backup Content*** screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
![FSBased Backup Restore Databases](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png)
-8. Click `Restore`.
+8. Click ***Restore***.
-9. From the `Restore Options` screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+9. From the ***Restore Options*** screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
![FSBased Backup Restore Details](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png)
-10. Select the `Destination Server` and `Destination Instance` and click on submit.
+10. Select the ***Destination Server*** and ***Destination Instance*** and click on submit.
11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
From af62fadb07b87f59598ecf4a5aca86c619159713 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 08:21:36 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 081/370] Final syntax fix
---
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 26 +++++++++----------
1 file changed, 13 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index dc1974407d1..876a5d237cf 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -162,21 +162,21 @@ epas13_test=#
A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
## Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
-1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to ***Protect > Databases***.
+1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to **Protect > Databases**.
2. Click on the required instance.
-3. In the ***Backup sets*** section, click on ***FSBasedBackupSet*** backup set.
+3. In the **Backup sets** section, click on **FSBasedBackupSet** backup set.
-4. In the ***Database groups*** section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is ***default***.
+4. In the **Database groups** section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is **default**.
-5. In the ***Backup*** section, click ***Back up***.
+5. In the **Backup** section, click **Back up**.
-6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the ***Select Backup Level*** screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
+6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the **Select Backup Level** screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
![Select FSBased Backup Type](Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png)
-7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the ***Job ID*** for that backup.
+7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the **Job ID** for that backup.
![FSBased Backup Job](Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png)
@@ -191,25 +191,25 @@ Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with eith
2. Delete or rename the WAL directory and data directory.
-3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to ***Protect > Databases***.
+3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to **Protect > Databases**.
4. Click the instance you want to restore.
-5. In the ***Recovery Points*** calender, select ***FSBasedBackupSet***.
+5. In the **Recovery Points** calender, select **FSBasedBackupSet**.
-6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click ***Restore***.
+6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click **Restore**.
-7. The ***Backup Content*** screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+7. The **Backup Content** screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
![FSBased Backup Restore Databases](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png)
-8. Click ***Restore***.
+8. Click **Restore**.
-9. From the ***Restore Options*** screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+9. From the **Restore Options** screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
![FSBased Backup Restore Details](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png)
-10. Select the ***Destination Server*** and ***Destination Instance*** and click on submit.
+10. Select the **Destination Server** and **Destination Instance** and click on submit.
11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
From 9a5f74202f0c21ffbde21e0b598e9275aca15938 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 16:17:57 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 082/370] All renumbered with no code involved
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../advanced_storage_pack/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../ldap_sync/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../pg_failover_slots/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../pg_tuner/rel_notes/index.mdx | 4 +-
.../query_advisor/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/index.mdx | 6 +-
.../docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx | 12 +-
.../docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx | 46 ++++----
.../docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx | 34 +++---
.../docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx | 26 ++---
.../docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx | 18 +--
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx | 6 +-
...schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/eprs/7/eprs_rel_notes/index.mdx | 18 +--
.../2/hadoop_rel_notes/index.mdx | 16 +--
.../42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 22 ++--
.../55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx | 20 ++--
.../5/mongo_rel_notes/index.mdx | 16 +--
.../2/mysql_rel_notes/index.mdx | 16 +--
.../ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx | 6 +-
.../12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 4 +-
.../13/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 10 +-
.../pgbouncer/1/pgbouncer_rel_notes/index.mdx | 10 +-
.../pgd/3.7/harp/01_release_notes/index.mdx | 24 ++--
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 22 ++--
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/index.mdx | 8 +-
.../docs/pge/15/release_notes/index.mdx | 4 +-
.../docs/pgpool/4/pgpool_rel_notes/index.mdx | 10 +-
.../postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx | 8 +-
.../1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 104 +++++++++---------
31 files changed, 241 insertions(+), 241 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/advanced_storage_pack/rel_notes/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/advanced_storage_pack/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 8dcbf2d9680..1802a3e9ad8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/advanced_storage_pack/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/advanced_storage_pack/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [1.0.0](asp_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 30 |
+| [1.0.0](asp_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 30 Nov 2022 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/ldap_sync/rel_notes/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/ldap_sync/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 8d55874c4a2..363bad1651c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/ldap_sync/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/ldap_sync/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [1.0.0](ldap_sync_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 30 |
+| [1.0.0](ldap_sync_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 30 Nov 2022 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_failover_slots/rel_notes/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_failover_slots/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 52e15d35198..4d6373b08ca 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_failover_slots/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_failover_slots/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [1.0.0](pg_failover_slots_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 31 |
+| [1.0.0](pg_failover_slots_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 31 Mar 2023 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_tuner/rel_notes/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_tuner/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 0669deef032..1fcdf91696d 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_tuner/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/pg_tuner/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -14,8 +14,8 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [1.1.0](pg_tuner_1.1.0_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 10 |
-| [1.0.0](pg_tuner_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 30 |
+| [1.1.0](pg_tuner_1.1.0_rel_notes) | 10 Feb 2023 |
+| [1.0.0](pg_tuner_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 30 Nov 2022 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/query_advisor/rel_notes/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/query_advisor/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 8560ac96b8e..2cb1d75b6c1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/query_advisor/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/pg_extensions/query_advisor/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [1.0.0](query_advisor_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 2023 May 10 |
+| [1.0.0](query_advisor_1.0.0_rel_notes) | 10 May 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/index.mdx
index dac25ecd895..5269d7c8505 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/edb_plus/41/02_release_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,6 +13,6 @@ The EDB\*Plus documentation describes the latest version of EDB\*Plus Version 41
| Version | Release Date |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [41.2.0](edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Aug 23 |
-| [41.1.0](edbplus_41.1_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Apr 20 |
-| [41.0.0](edbplus_41.0_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Feb 14 |
+| [41.2.0](edbplus_41.2_rel_notes.mdx) | 23 Aug 2023 |
+| [41.1.0](edbplus_41.1_rel_notes.mdx) | 20 Apr 2023 |
+| [41.0.0](edbplus_41.0_rel_notes.mdx) | 14 Feb 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
index f63a2e6ede6..b25f4fe7c17 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| Version | Release Date |
| ------- | ------------ |
-| [4.7](03_efm_47_rel_notes) | 2023 Jun 20 |
-| [4.6](04_efm_46_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 |
-| [4.5](05_efm_45_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 30 |
-| [4.4](06_efm_44_rel_notes) | 2022 Jan 5 |
+| [4.7](03_efm_47_rel_notes) | 20 Jun 2023|
+| [4.6](04_efm_46_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023|
+| [4.5](05_efm_45_rel_notes) | 30 Aug 2022|
+| [4.4](06_efm_44_rel_notes) | 5 Jan 2022|
| [4.3](07_efm_43_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 18|
| [4.2](08_efm_42_rel_notes) | 2021 Apr 19|
-| [4.1](09_efm_41_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 11 |
-| [4.0](10_efm_40_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 2 |
+| [4.1](09_efm_41_rel_notes) | 11 Dec 2021|
+| [4.0](10_efm_40_rel_notes) | 2 Sep 2021 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 1cab0645dad..b321278359f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -24,26 +24,26 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server (Advanced Server) documentation describes the l
| Version | Release Date | Upstream Merge |
| ------- | ------------ | -------------- |
-| [11.21.32](epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Aug 21 | [11.21](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-21.html) |
-| [11.20.31](epas11_20_31_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 May 11 | [11.20](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-20.html) |
-| [11.19.30](epas11_19_30_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Feb 10 | [11.19](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-19.html) |
-| [11.18.29](epas11_18_29_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Nov 10 | [11.18](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-18.html) |
-| [11.17.28](epas11_17_28_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Aug 11 | [11.17](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-17.html) |
-| [11.16.26](epas11_16_26_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 May 12 | [11.16](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-16.html) |
-| [11.15.25](09_epas11.15.25_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Feb 10 | [11.15](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-15.html) |
-| [11.14.24](10_epas11.14.24_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Nov 11 | [11.14](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-14.html) |
-| [11.13.23](11_epas11.13.23_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Sep 08 | [11.13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-13.html) |
-| [11.12.22](13_epas11.12.22_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 May 05 | [11.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-12.html) |
-| [11.12.21](15_epas11.12.21_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Apr 15 | [11.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-12.html) |
-| [11.11.20](17_epas11.11.20_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Feb 12 | [11.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-11.html) |
-| [11.10.19](19_epas11.10.19_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Nov 20 | [11.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-10.html) |
-| [11.9.17](21_epas11.9.17_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Aug 18 | [11.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-9.html) |
-| [11.9.16](23_epas11.9.16_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Aug 17 | [11.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-9.html) |
-| [11.8.15](25_epas11.8.15_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 May 18 | [11.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-8.html) |
-| [11.7.14](27_epas11.7.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Feb 14 | [11.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-7.html) |
-| [11.6.13](29_epas11.6.13_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 Nov 19 | [11.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-6.html) |
-| [11.5.12](31_epas11.5.12_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 Aug 26 | [11.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-5.html) |
-| [11.4.11](33_epas11.4.11_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 Jun 25 | [11.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-4.html) |
-| [11.3.10](35_epas11.3.10_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 May 13 | [11.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-3.html) |
-| [11.2.9](37_epas11.2.9_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 Feb 22 | [11.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-2.html) |
-| [11.1.7](39_epas11.1.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 2018 Nov 28 | [11.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-1.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
+| [11.21.32](epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx) | 21 Aug 2023 | [11.21](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-21.html) |
+| [11.20.31](epas11_20_31_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 May 2023 | [11.20](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-20.html) |
+| [11.19.30](epas11_19_30_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Feb 2023 | [11.19](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-19.html) |
+| [11.18.29](epas11_18_29_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Nov 2022 | [11.18](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-18.html) |
+| [11.17.28](epas11_17_28_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 Aug 2022 | [11.17](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-17.html) |
+| [11.16.26](epas11_16_26_rel_notes.mdx) | 12 May 2022 | [11.16](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-16.html) |
+| [11.15.25](09_epas11.15.25_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Feb 2022 | [11.15](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-15.html) |
+| [11.14.24](10_epas11.14.24_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 Nov 2021| [11.14](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-14.html) |
+| [11.13.23](11_epas11.13.23_rel_notes.mdx) | 08 Sep 2021| [11.13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-13.html) |
+| [11.12.22](13_epas11.12.22_rel_notes.mdx) | 05 May 2021| [11.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-12.html) |
+| [11.12.21](15_epas11.12.21_rel_notes.mdx) | 15 Apr 2021| [11.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-12.html) |
+| [11.11.20](17_epas11.11.20_rel_notes.mdx) | 12 Feb 2021| [11.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-11.html) |
+| [11.10.19](19_epas11.10.19_rel_notes.mdx) | 20 Nov 2020| [11.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-10.html) |
+| [11.9.17](21_epas11.9.17_rel_notes.mdx) | 18 Aug 2020| [11.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-9.html) |
+| [11.9.16](23_epas11.9.16_rel_notes.mdx) | 17 Aug 2020| [11.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-9.html) |
+| [11.8.15](25_epas11.8.15_rel_notes.mdx) | 18 May 2020| [11.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-8.html) |
+| [11.7.14](27_epas11.7.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 14 Feb 2020| [11.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-7.html) |
+| [11.6.13](29_epas11.6.13_rel_notes.mdx) | 19 Nov 2019| [11.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-6.html) |
+| [11.5.12](31_epas11.5.12_rel_notes.mdx) | 26 Aug 2019| [11.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-5.html) |
+| [11.4.11](33_epas11.4.11_rel_notes.mdx) | 25 Jun 2019| [11.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-4.html) |
+| [11.3.10](35_epas11.3.10_rel_notes.mdx) | 13 May 2019| [11.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-3.html) |
+| [11.2.9](37_epas11.2.9_rel_notes.mdx) | 22 Feb 2019| [11.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-2.html) |
+| [11.1.7](39_epas11.1.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 28 Nov 2018| [11.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/11/release-11-1.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 9261a7af773..2c30ddf4612 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -27,20 +27,20 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server (Advanced Server) documentation describes the l
| Version | Release Date | Upstream Merges |
| ------- | ------------ | --------------- |
-| [12.16.20](epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Aug 21 | [12.16](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-16.html)
-| [12.15.19](epas12_15_19_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 May 11 | [12.15](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-15.html) |
-| [12.14.18](epas12_14_18_rel_notes.mdx) | 2023 Feb 10 | [12.14](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-14.html) |
-| [12.13.17](epas12_13_17_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Nov 10 | [12.13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-13.html) |
-| [12.12.16](epas12_12_16_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Aug 11 | [12.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-12.html) |
-| [12.11.15](epas12_11_15_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 May 12 | [12.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-11.html) |
-| [12.10.14](05_epas12.10.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Feb 10 | [12.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-10.html) | | [12.10.14](05_epas12.10.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 2022 Feb 10 | [12.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-10.html) |
-| [12.9.13](06_epas12.9.13_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Nov 11 | [12.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-9.html) |
-| [12.8.12](07_epas12.8.12_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Sep 28 | [12.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-8.html) |
-| [12.7.10](08_epas12.7.10_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 May 25 | [12.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-7.html) |
-| [12.7](09_epas12.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 May 14 | [12.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-7.html) |
-| [12.6.7](10_epas12.6.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 2021 Feb 12 | [12.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-6.html) |
-| [12.5.6](11_epas12.5.6_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Nov 20 | [12.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-5.html) |
-| [12.4.5](13_epas12.4.5_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Aug 17 | [12.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-4.html) |
-| [12.3.4](15_epas12.3.4_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 May 18 | [12.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-3.html) |
-| [12.2.3](17_epas12.2.3_rel_notes.mdx) | 2020 Feb 14 | [12.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-2.html) |
-| [12.1.2](19_epas12.1.2_rel_notes.mdx) | 2019 Dec 10 | [12.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
+| [12.16.20](epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx) | 21 Aug 2023 | [12.16](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-16.html)
+| [12.15.19](epas12_15_19_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 May 2023 | [12.15](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-15.html) |
+| [12.14.18](epas12_14_18_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Feb 2023 | [12.14](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-14.html) |
+| [12.13.17](epas12_13_17_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Nov 2022 | [12.13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-13.html) |
+| [12.12.16](epas12_12_16_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 Aug 2022 | [12.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-12.html) |
+| [12.11.15](epas12_11_15_rel_notes.mdx) | 12 May 2022 | [12.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-11.html) |
+| [12.10.14](05_epas12.10.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Feb 2022 | [12.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-10.html) | | [12.10.14](05_epas12.10.14_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Feb 2022 | [12.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-10.html) |
+| [12.9.13](06_epas12.9.13_rel_notes.mdx) | 11 Nov 2021| [12.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-9.html) |
+| [12.8.12](07_epas12.8.12_rel_notes.mdx) | 28 Sep 2021| [12.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-8.html) |
+| [12.7.10](08_epas12.7.10_rel_notes.mdx) | 25 May 2021| [12.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-7.html) |
+| [12.7](09_epas12.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 14 May 2021| [12.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-7.html) |
+| [12.6.7](10_epas12.6.7_rel_notes.mdx) | 12 Feb 2021| [12.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-6.html) |
+| [12.5.6](11_epas12.5.6_rel_notes.mdx) | 20 Nov 2020| [12.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-5.html) |
+| [12.4.5](13_epas12.4.5_rel_notes.mdx) | 17 Aug 2020| [12.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-4.html) |
+| [12.3.4](15_epas12.3.4_rel_notes.mdx) | 18 May 2020| [12.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-3.html) |
+| [12.2.3](17_epas12.2.3_rel_notes.mdx) | 14 Feb 2020| [12.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12-2.html) |
+| [12.1.2](19_epas12.1.2_rel_notes.mdx) | 10 Dec 2019| [12.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/release-12.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
index eb487d41638..e0a3eb281bd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -20,16 +20,16 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server (Advanced Server) documentation describes the l
| Version | Release Date | Upstream Merges |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| [13.12.17](epas13_12_17_rel_notes) | 2023 Aug 21 | [13.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.12/) |
-| [13.11.15](epas13_11_15_rel_notes) | 2023 May 11 | [13.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.11/) |
-| [13.10.14](epas13_10_14_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 10 | [13.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.10/) |
-| [13.9.13](epas13_9_13_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 10 | [13.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.9/) |
-| [13.8.12](epas13_8_12_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 11 | [13.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.8/) |
-| [13.7.11](epas13_7_11_rel_notes) | 2022 May 23 | [13.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.7/)
-| [13.6.10](13_epas13.6.10_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 10 | [13.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-6.html) |
-| [13.5.9](14_epas13.5.9_rel_notes) | 2021 Nov 11 | [13.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-5.html) |
-| [13.4.8](15_epas13.4.8_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 28 | [13.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-4.html) |
-| [13.3.7](16_epas13.3.7_rel_notes) | 2021 May 25 | NA |
-| [13.3.6](17_epas13.3.6_rel_notes) | 2021 May 14 | [13.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-3.html) |
-| [13.2.5](19_epas13.2.5_rel_notes) | 2021 Feb 02 | [13.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-2.html) |
-| [13.1.4](20_epas13_rel_notes) | 2020 Dec 12 | [13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13.html), [13.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-1.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
+| [13.12.17](epas13_12_17_rel_notes) | 21 Aug 2023 | [13.12](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.12/) |
+| [13.11.15](epas13_11_15_rel_notes) | 11 May 2023 | [13.11](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.11/) |
+| [13.10.14](epas13_10_14_rel_notes) | 10 Feb 2023 | [13.10](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.10/) |
+| [13.9.13](epas13_9_13_rel_notes) | 10 Nov 2022 | [13.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.9/) |
+| [13.8.12](epas13_8_12_rel_notes) | 11 Aug 2022 | [13.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.8/) |
+| [13.7.11](epas13_7_11_rel_notes) | 23 May 2022 | [13.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/13.7/)
+| [13.6.10](13_epas13.6.10_rel_notes) | 10 Feb 2022 | [13.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-6.html) |
+| [13.5.9](14_epas13.5.9_rel_notes) | 11 Nov 2021 | [13.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-5.html) |
+| [13.4.8](15_epas13.4.8_rel_notes) | 28 Sep 2021 | [13.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-4.html) |
+| [13.3.7](16_epas13.3.7_rel_notes) | 25 May 2021 | NA |
+| [13.3.6](17_epas13.3.6_rel_notes) | 14 May 2021 | [13.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-3.html) |
+| [13.2.5](19_epas13.2.5_rel_notes) | 02 Feb 2021 | [13.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-2.html) |
+| [13.1.4](20_epas13_rel_notes) | 12 Dec 2020 | [13](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13.html), [13.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/13/release-13-1.html) |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 3fdff1905c9..a11ad85cf6e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -19,15 +19,15 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EDB Postgres Advanced Server) documentation de
| Version | Release date | Upstream merges |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| [14.9.0](epas14_9_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Aug 21 | [14.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-9.html) |
-| [14.8.0](epas14_8_0_rel_notes) | 2023 May 11 | [14.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-8.html) |
-| [14.7.0](epas14_7_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 10 | [14.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-7.html) |
-| [14.6.0](epas14_6_0_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 10 | [14.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-6.html) |
-| [14.5.0](epas14_5_0_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 11 | [14.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-5.html) |
-| [14.4.0](epas14_4_0_rel_notes) | 2022 Jun 16 | [14.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-4.html) |
-| [14.3.0](epas14_3_0_rel_notes) | 2022 May 12 | [14.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-3.html) |
-| [14.2.1](19_epas14.2.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 10 | [14.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-2.html) |
-| [14.1.0](20_epas14_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 01 | [14.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14.html), [14.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-1.html) |
+| [14.9.0](epas14_9_0_rel_notes) | 21 Aug 2023 | [14.9](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-9.html) |
+| [14.8.0](epas14_8_0_rel_notes) | 11 May 2023 | [14.8](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-8.html) |
+| [14.7.0](epas14_7_0_rel_notes) | 10 Feb 2023 | [14.7](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-7.html) |
+| [14.6.0](epas14_6_0_rel_notes) | 10 Nov 2022 | [14.6](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-6.html) |
+| [14.5.0](epas14_5_0_rel_notes) | 11 Aug 2022 | [14.5](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-5.html) |
+| [14.4.0](epas14_4_0_rel_notes) | 16 Jun 2022 | [14.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-4.html) |
+| [14.3.0](epas14_3_0_rel_notes) | 12 May 2022 | [14.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-3.html) |
+| [14.2.1](19_epas14.2.1_rel_notes) | 10 Feb 2022 | [14.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-2.html) |
+| [14.1.0](20_epas14_rel_notes) | 01 Dec 2021 | [14.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14.html), [14.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/14/release-14-1.html) |
## Support announcements
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 039dd690f8c..6739f08a0e5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation describes the latest version of E
| Version | Release date | Upstream merges |
| ------------------------------------- | ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| [15.4.0](epas15_4_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Aug 21 | [15.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.4/)
-| [15.3.0](epas15_3_0_rel_notes) | 2023 May 11 | [15.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.3/) |
-| [15.2.0](epas15_2_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | [15.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.0/), [15.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.1/), [15.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.2/) |
+| [15.4.0](epas15_4_0_rel_notes) | 21 Aug 2023 | [15.4](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.4/)
+| [15.3.0](epas15_3_0_rel_notes) | 11 May 2023 | [15.3](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.3/) |
+| [15.2.0](epas15_2_0_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | [15.0](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.0/), [15.1](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.1/), [15.2](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/release/15.2/) |
## Component certification
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
index 3e969e562cb..3a205855418 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ _edb_replicator_pub.sp_dropsequence SQL_STORED_PROCEDURE
_edb_replicator_sub.rrep_common_seq USER_TABLE
```
-SQL Server versions 2012 and 2014 support creation of sequence objects that can now perform the functionality previously provided by the preceding list of objects. The following are the sequence objects that are now used when the publication database is SQL Server 2012 or 2014:
+SQL Server versions 2014 and 2012support creation of sequence objects that can now perform the functionality previously provided by the preceding list of objects. The following are the sequence objects that are now used when the publication database is SQL Server 2012 or 2014:
```shell
1> USE edb;
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/eprs_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/eprs_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 36623d6ebb4..8ba40e8def8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/eprs_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/eprs_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,15 +13,15 @@ The Replication Server documentation describes the latest version including mino
| Version | Release Date |
| -------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [7.5.1](eprs_rel_notes_7.5.1) | 2023 May 26 |
-| [7.5.0](eprs_rel_notes_7.5.0) | 2023 Feb 14 |
-| [7.4.0](eprs_rel_notes_7.4.0) | 2022 Nov 29 |
-| [7.3.0](15_eprs_rel_notes_7.3.0) | 2022 Nov 15 |
-| [7.2.1](16_eprs_rel_notes_7.2.1) | 2022 Jul 25 |
-| [7.2.0](17_eprs_rel_notes_7.2.0) | 2022 Jun 24 |
-| [7.1.0](18_eprs_rel_notes_7.1.0) | 2022 Mar 21 |
-| [7.0.1](19_eprs_rel_notes_7.0.1) | 2022 Mar 03 |
-| [7.0.0](20_eprs_rel_notes_7.0.0) | 2021 Dec 01 |
+| [7.5.1](eprs_rel_notes_7.5.1) | 26 May 2023 |
+| [7.5.0](eprs_rel_notes_7.5.0) | 14 Feb 2023 |
+| [7.4.0](eprs_rel_notes_7.4.0) | 29 Nov 2022 |
+| [7.3.0](15_eprs_rel_notes_7.3.0) | 15 Nov 2022 |
+| [7.2.1](16_eprs_rel_notes_7.2.1) | 25 Jul 2022 |
+| [7.2.0](17_eprs_rel_notes_7.2.0) | 24 Jun 2022 |
+| [7.1.0](18_eprs_rel_notes_7.1.0) | 21 Mar 2022 |
+| [7.0.1](19_eprs_rel_notes_7.0.1) | 03 Mar 2022 |
+| [7.0.0](20_eprs_rel_notes_7.0.0) | 01 Dec 2021 |
## Supported upgrade paths
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/hadoop_data_adapter/2/hadoop_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/hadoop_data_adapter/2/hadoop_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 04658f3c2c7..e435172e198 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/hadoop_data_adapter/2/hadoop_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/hadoop_data_adapter/2/hadoop_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -18,11 +18,11 @@ The Hadoop Foreign Data Wrapper documentation describes the latest version inclu
| Version | Release Date |
| --------------------------------| ------------ |
-| [2.3.1](hadoop_rel_notes_2.3.1) | 2023 Jul 20 |
-| [2.3.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.3.0) | 2023 Jan 06 |
-| [2.2.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.2.0) | 2022 May 26 |
-| [2.1.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.1.0) | 2021 Dec 02 |
-| [2.0.8](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.8) | 2021 Jun 24 |
-| [2.0.7](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.7) | 2020 Nov 23 |
-| [2.0.5](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.5) | 2019 Dec 10 |
-| [2.0.4](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.4) | 2018 Nov 28 |
+| [2.3.1](hadoop_rel_notes_2.3.1) | 20 Jul 2023 |
+| [2.3.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.3.0) | 06 Jan 2023 |
+| [2.2.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.2.0) | 26 May 2022 |
+| [2.1.0](hadoop_rel_notes_2.1.0) | 02 Dec 2021 |
+| [2.0.8](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.8) | 24 Jun 2021 |
+| [2.0.7](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.7) | 23 Nov 2020 |
+| [2.0.5](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.5) | 10 Dec 2019 |
+| [2.0.4](hadoop_rel_notes_2.0.4) | 28 Nov 2018 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 020b7b15338..7c72652e3e8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,16 +13,16 @@ These release notes describe what's new in each release. When a minor or patch r
| Version | Release Date |
| ---------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [42.5.4.1](jdbc_42.5.4.1_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 16 |
-| [42.5.1.2](jdbc_42.5.1.2_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 |
-| [42.5.1.1](jdbc_42.5.1.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Dec 9 |
-| [42.5.0.1](jdbc_42.5.0.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Sep 1 |
-| [42.3.3.1](08_jdbc_42.3.3.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Apr 20 |
-| [42.3.2.1](09_jdbc_42.3.2.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 15 |
-| [42.2.24.1](10_jdbc_42.2.24.1_rel_notes) | 2021 Nov 5 |
-| [42.2.19.1](12_jdbc_42.2.19.1_rel_notes) | 2021 Apr 15 |
-| [42.2.12.3](14_jdbc_42.2.12.3_rel_notes) | 2020 Oct 22 |
-| [42.2.9.1](16_jdbc_42.2.9.1_rel_notes) | 2020 May 18 |
-| [42.2.8.1](18_jdbc_42.2.8.1_rel_notes) | 2019 Oct 21 |
+| [42.5.4.1](jdbc_42.5.4.1_rel_notes) | 16 Mar 2023 |
+| [42.5.1.2](jdbc_42.5.1.2_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
+| [42.5.1.1](jdbc_42.5.1.1_rel_notes) | 9 Dec 2022 |
+| [42.5.0.1](jdbc_42.5.0.1_rel_notes) | 1 Sep 2022 |
+| [42.3.3.1](08_jdbc_42.3.3.1_rel_notes) | 20 Apr 2022 |
+| [42.3.2.1](09_jdbc_42.3.2.1_rel_notes) | 15 Feb 2022 |
+| [42.2.24.1](10_jdbc_42.2.24.1_rel_notes) | 5 Nov 2021 |
+| [42.2.19.1](12_jdbc_42.2.19.1_rel_notes) | 15 Apr 2021 |
+| [42.2.12.3](14_jdbc_42.2.12.3_rel_notes) | 22 Oct 2020 |
+| [42.2.9.1](16_jdbc_42.2.9.1_rel_notes) | 18 May 2020 |
+| [42.2.8.1](18_jdbc_42.2.8.1_rel_notes) | 21 Oct 2019 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 71b24680f38..aa7cc862c00 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -19,14 +19,14 @@ The Migration Toolkit documentation describes the latest version of Migration To
| Version | Release Date |
| ------- | ------------ |
-| [55.6.0](mtk_556_rel_notes) | 2023 May 25 |
-| [55.5.0](mtk_555_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 |
-| [55.4.0](mtk_554_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 29 |
-| [55.3.0](mtk_553_rel_notes) | 2022 Oct 06 |
-| [55.2.3](mtk_5523_rel_notes) | 2022 Jun 16 |
-| [55.2.2](05_mkt_5522_rel_notes) | 2022 Mar 10 |
-| [55.2.1](06_mkt_5521_rel_notes) | 2022 Jan 13 |
-| [55.2.0](07_mkt_552_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 2 |
-| [55.1.0](08_mkt_551_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 20 |
-| [55.0.0](09_mkt_55_rel_notes) | 2021 Mar 19 |
+| [55.6.0](mtk_556_rel_notes) | 25 May 2023 |
+| [55.5.0](mtk_555_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
+| [55.4.0](mtk_554_rel_notes) | 29 Nov 2022 |
+| [55.3.0](mtk_553_rel_notes) | 06 Oct 2022 |
+| [55.2.3](mtk_5523_rel_notes) | 16 Jun 2022 |
+| [55.2.2](05_mkt_5522_rel_notes) | 10 Mar 2022 |
+| [55.2.1](06_mkt_5521_rel_notes) | 13 Jan 2022 |
+| [55.2.0](07_mkt_552_rel_notes) | 2 Dec 2021 |
+| [55.1.0](08_mkt_551_rel_notes) | 20 Sep 2021 |
+| [55.0.0](09_mkt_55_rel_notes) | 19 Mar 2021 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/mongo_data_adapter/5/mongo_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/mongo_data_adapter/5/mongo_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 3e99eee7f41..92d5ea532ba 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/mongo_data_adapter/5/mongo_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/mongo_data_adapter/5/mongo_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -17,13 +17,13 @@ The Mongo Foreign Data Wrapper documentation describes the latest version of Mon
| Version | Release date |
| ----------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [5.5.1](mongo5.5.1_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 20 |
-| [5.5.0](mongo5.5.0_rel_notes) | 2023 Jan 06 |
-| [5.4.0](mongo5.4.0_rel_notes) | 2022 May 26 |
-| [5.3.0](mongo5.3.0_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 02 |
-| [5.2.9](mongo5.2.9_rel_notes) | 2021 Jun 24 |
-| [5.2.8](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 2020 Nov 23 |
-| [5.2.6](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 2019 Sep 27 |
-| [5.2.3](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 2018 Nov 01 |
+| [5.5.1](mongo5.5.1_rel_notes) | 20 Jul 2023 |
+| [5.5.0](mongo5.5.0_rel_notes) | 06 Jan 2023 |
+| [5.4.0](mongo5.4.0_rel_notes) | 26 May 2022 |
+| [5.3.0](mongo5.3.0_rel_notes) | 02 Dec 2021 |
+| [5.2.9](mongo5.2.9_rel_notes) | 24 Jun 2021 |
+| [5.2.8](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 23 Nov 2020 |
+| [5.2.6](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 27 Sep 2019 |
+| [5.2.3](mongo5.2.8_rel_notes) | 01 Nov 2018 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/mysql_data_adapter/2/mysql_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/mysql_data_adapter/2/mysql_rel_notes/index.mdx
index ed38e10191e..99debbb99dd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/mysql_data_adapter/2/mysql_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/mysql_data_adapter/2/mysql_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -17,11 +17,11 @@ The MySQL Foreign Data Wrapper documentation describes the latest version of MyS
| Version | Release Date |
| ----------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [2.9.1](mysql2.9.1_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 20 |
-| [2.9.0](mysql2.9.0_rel_notes) | 2023 Jan 06 |
-| [2.8.0](mysql2.8.0_rel_notes) | 2022 May 26 |
-| [2.7.0](mysql2.7.0_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 02 |
-| [2.6.0](mysql2.6.0_rel_notes) | 2021 May 18 |
-| [2.5.5](mysql2.5.5_rel_notes) | 2020 Nov 23 |
-| [2.5.3](mysql2.5.3_rel_notes) | 2019 Dec 10 |
-| [2.5.1](mysql2.5.1_rel_notes) | 2018 Nov 28 |
\ No newline at end of file
+| [2.9.1](mysql2.9.1_rel_notes) | 20 Jul 2023 |
+| [2.9.0](mysql2.9.0_rel_notes) | 06 Jan 2023 |
+| [2.8.0](mysql2.8.0_rel_notes) | 26 May 2022 |
+| [2.7.0](mysql2.7.0_rel_notes) | 02 Dec 2021 |
+| [2.6.0](mysql2.6.0_rel_notes) | 18 May 2021 |
+| [2.5.5](mysql2.5.5_rel_notes) | 23 Nov 2020 |
+| [2.5.3](mysql2.5.3_rel_notes) | 10 Dec 2019 |
+| [2.5.1](mysql2.5.1_rel_notes) | 28 Nov 2018 |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 6312a14c160..a174db2f141 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ Release notes describe what's new in a release. When a minor or patch release in
| Version | Release date |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | 2023 Jun 20 |
-| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | 2023 May 19 |
-| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 |
+| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | 20 Jun 2023 |
+| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | 19 May 2023 |
+| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 9e63dbfb4c3..70a8e648c0d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -8,6 +8,6 @@ Release notes describe what is new in a release. When a minor or patch release i
| Version | Release Date |
| ------------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [12.02.0000.02](01_odbc_12.2.0.2_rel_notes) | 2021 Nov 16 |
-| [12.00.0000.02](03_odbc_12.0.0.2_rel_notes) | 2020 Aug 9 |
+| [12.02.0000.02](01_odbc_12.2.0.2_rel_notes) | 16 Nov 2021 |
+| [12.00.0000.02](03_odbc_12.0.0.2_rel_notes) | 9 Aug 2020 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/13/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/13/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index f4f7db8dacc..1263f196cd5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/13/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/13/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ Release notes describe what's new in a release. When a minor or patch release in
| Version | Release date |
| ----------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [13.02.0000.02](odbc_13.2.0.02_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 |
-| [13.02.0000.01](02_odbc_13.2.0.01_rel_notes) | 2022 May 17 |
-| [13.01.0000.02](03_odbc_13.1.0.02_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 12 |
-| [13.01.0000.01](04_odbc_13.1.0.01_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 14 |
-| [13.00.0000.01](05_odbc_13.0.0.01_rel_notes) | 2020 Nov 19 |
+| [13.02.0000.02](odbc_13.2.0.02_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023|
+| [13.02.0000.01](02_odbc_13.2.0.01_rel_notes) | 17 May 2022|
+| [13.01.0000.02](03_odbc_13.1.0.02_rel_notes) | 12 Dec 2021 |
+| [13.01.0000.01](04_odbc_13.1.0.01_rel_notes) | 14 Sep 2021 |
+| [13.00.0000.01](05_odbc_13.0.0.01_rel_notes) | 19 Nov 2020 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgbouncer/1/pgbouncer_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgbouncer/1/pgbouncer_rel_notes/index.mdx
index c8c1c6e8829..c2a53ccf12d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgbouncer/1/pgbouncer_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgbouncer/1/pgbouncer_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ The EDB PgBouncer documentation describes the latest version of EDB PgBouncer 1,
| Version | Release date | Upstream merges |
| ------------------------------ | ------------ | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| [1.19.0.0](06_11900_rel_notes) | 2023 Jun 07 | Upstream [1.19.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-119x)
-| [1.18.0.0](07_11800_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | Upstream [1.18.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-118x)
-| [1.17.0.0](08_11700_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 04 | Upstream [1.17.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-117x)
-| [1.16.1.0](09_11610_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 11 | Upstream [1.16.1.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-116x) |
-| [1.16.0.1](10_11601_rel_notes) | 2021 Jun 10 | Upstream [1.16.0.1](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-116x) |
+| [1.19.0.0](06_11900_rel_notes) | 07 Jun 2023 | Upstream [1.19.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-119x)
+| [1.18.0.0](07_11800_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [1.18.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-118x)
+| [1.17.0.0](08_11700_rel_notes) | 04 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-117x)
+| [1.16.1.0](09_11610_rel_notes) | 11 Dec 2021 | Upstream [1.16.1.0](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-116x) |
+| [1.16.0.1](10_11601_rel_notes) | 10 Jun 2021 | Upstream [1.16.0.1](https://www.pgbouncer.org/changelog.html#pgbouncer-116x) |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/harp/01_release_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/harp/01_release_notes/index.mdx
index 722e81914b4..190f1efe85f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/harp/01_release_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/harp/01_release_notes/index.mdx
@@ -25,15 +25,15 @@ The release notes in this section provide information on what was new in each re
| Version | Release Date |
| ----------------------- | ------------ |
-| [2.3.1](harp2.3.1_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 27 |
-| [2.3.0](harp2.3.0_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 12 |
-| [2.2.3](harp2.2.3_rel_notes) | 2023 May 16 |
-| [2.2.2](harp2.2.2_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 30 |
-| [2.2.1](harp2.2.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 16 |
-| [2.2.0](harp2.2.0_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 22 |
-| [2.1.1](harp2.1.1_rel_notes) | 2022 Jun 21 |
-| [2.1.0](harp2.1.0_rel_notes) | 2022 May 17 |
-| [2.0.3](harp2.0.3_rel_notes) | 2022 Mar 31 |
-| [2.0.2](harp2.0.2_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 24 |
-| [2.0.1](harp2.0.1_rel_notes) | 2021 Jan 31 |
-| [2.0.0](harp2_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 01 |
+| [2.3.1](harp2.3.1_rel_notes) | 27 Jul 2023 |
+| [2.3.0](harp2.3.0_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2023 |
+| [2.2.3](harp2.2.3_rel_notes) | 16 May 2023 |
+| [2.2.2](harp2.2.2_rel_notes) | 30 Mar 2023 |
+| [2.2.1](harp2.2.1_rel_notes) | 16 Nov 2022 |
+| [2.2.0](harp2.2.0_rel_notes) | 22 Aug 2022 |
+| [2.1.1](harp2.1.1_rel_notes) | 21 Jun 2022 |
+| [2.1.0](harp2.1.0_rel_notes) | 17 May 2022 |
+| [2.0.3](harp2.0.3_rel_notes) | 31 Mar 2022 |
+| [2.0.2](harp2.0.2_rel_notes) | 24 Feb 2022 |
+| [2.0.1](harp2.0.1_rel_notes) | 31 Jan 2021 |
+| [2.0.0](harp2_rel_notes) | 01 Dec 2021 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 75e5ab566bc..9ea08a1e8fd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -27,17 +27,17 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2023 July 27 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 2023 July 12 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
-| 2023 May 17 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
-| 2023 Mar 30 | [4.3.0-1](pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.2 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
-| 2023 Feb 14 | [4.3.0](pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
-| 2022 Dec 14 | [4.2.2](pgd_4.2.2_rel_notes) | 4.2.2 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
-| 2022 Nov 16 | [4.2.1](pgd_4.2.1_rel_notes) | 4.2.1 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.7](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-237) |
-| 2022 Aug 22 | [4.2.0](pgd_4.2.0_rel_notes) | 4.2.0 | 2.2.0 | 1.1.0 | [23.5](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-235) |
+| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
+| 30 Mar 2023 | [4.3.0-1](pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.2 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
+| 14 Feb 2023 | [4.3.0](pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
+| 14 Dec 2022 | [4.2.2](pgd_4.2.2_rel_notes) | 4.2.2 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
+| 16 Nov 2022 | [4.2.1](pgd_4.2.1_rel_notes) | 4.2.1 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.7](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-237) |
+| 22 Aug 2022 | [4.2.0](pgd_4.2.0_rel_notes) | 4.2.0 | 2.2.0 | 1.1.0 | [23.5](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-235) |
| 2022 June 21 | [4.1.1](pgd_4.1.1_rel_notes) | 4.1.1 | 2.1.1 | 1.0.0 | [23.2](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-232) |
-| 2022 May 17 | [4.1.0](pgd_4.1.0_rel_notes) | 4.1.0 | 2.1.0 | 1.0.0 | [23.1](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-231) |
-| 2022 Mar 31 | [4.0.3](pgd_4.0.3_rel_notes) | - | 2.0.3 | - | 22.10 |
-| 2022 Feb 24 | [4.0.2](pgd_4.0.2_rel_notes) | 4.0.2 | 2.0.2 | - | 22.9 |
-| 2022 Jan 31 | [4.0.1](pgd_4.0.1_rel_notes) | 4.0.1 | 2.0.1 | - | 22.6 |
-| 2021 Dec 01 | [4.0.0](pgd_4.0.0_rel_notes) | 4.0.0 | 2.0.0 | - | 21.9 |
+| 17 May 2022 | [4.1.0](pgd_4.1.0_rel_notes) | 4.1.0 | 2.1.0 | 1.0.0 | [23.1](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-231) |
+| 31 Mar 2022 | [4.0.3](pgd_4.0.3_rel_notes) | - | 2.0.3 | - | 22.10 |
+| 24 Feb 2022 | [4.0.2](pgd_4.0.2_rel_notes) | 4.0.2 | 2.0.2 | - | 22.9 |
+| 31 Jan 2022 | [4.0.1](pgd_4.0.1_rel_notes) | 4.0.1 | 2.0.1 | - | 22.6 |
+| 01 Dec 2021 | [4.0.0](pgd_4.0.0_rel_notes) | 4.0.0 | 2.0.0 | - | 21.9 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 8ca36d6563f..c5eb7e32160 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ that introduced the feature.
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR extension | PGD CLI | PGD Proxy |
| ------------- | ---------------------------- | ------------- | ------- | --------- |
-| 2023 Aug 4 | [5.2.0](pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes) | 5.2.0 | 5.2.0 | 5.2.0 |
-| 2023 May 16 | [5.1.0](pgd_5.1.0_rel_notes) | 5.1.0 | 5.1.0 | 5.1.0 |
-| 2023 Mar 21 | [5.0.1](pgd_5.0.1_rel_notes) | 5.0.0 | 5.0.1 | 5.0.1 |
-| 2023 Feb 21 | [5.0.0](pgd_5.0.0_rel_notes) | 5.0.0 | 5.0.0 | 5.0.0 |
+| 4 Aug 2023 | [5.2.0](pgd_5.2.0_rel_notes) | 5.2.0 | 5.2.0 | 5.2.0 |
+| 16 May 2023 | [5.1.0](pgd_5.1.0_rel_notes) | 5.1.0 | 5.1.0 | 5.1.0 |
+| 21 Mar 2023 | [5.0.1](pgd_5.0.1_rel_notes) | 5.0.0 | 5.0.1 | 5.0.1 |
+| 21 Feb 2023 | [5.0.0](pgd_5.0.0_rel_notes) | 5.0.0 | 5.0.0 | 5.0.0 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pge/15/release_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pge/15/release_notes/index.mdx
index bd99b69f9b0..0d513be5602 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pge/15/release_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pge/15/release_notes/index.mdx
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ cover what was new in each release.
| Version | Release date |
| ------------------------ | ------------ |
-| [15.3](rel_notes15.3) | 2023 May 11 |
-| [15.2](rel_notes15.2) | 2023 Feb 14 |
+| [15.3](rel_notes15.3) | 11 May 2023 |
+| [15.2](rel_notes15.2) | 14 Feb 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgpool/4/pgpool_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgpool/4/pgpool_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 24731fc47b7..1b0236f8d2f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgpool/4/pgpool_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgpool/4/pgpool_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ The EDB Pgpool-II documentation describes the latest version of EDB Pgpool-II, i
| Version | Release Date | Upstream merges | |
| ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------ | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
-| [4.4.2](442_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | Upstream [4.4.2](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/44/en/html/release-4-4-2.html) | |
-| [4.3.2](07_432_rel_notes), [4.2.9](429_rel_notes), [4.1.12](4112_rel_notes), [4.0.19](4019_rel_notes), [3.7.24](3724_rel_notes) | 2022 Jul 05 | Upstream [4.3.2](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-3-2.html#bug-fixes), [4.2.9](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-2-9.html#bug-fixes), [4.1.12](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-1-12.html#bug-fixes), [4.0.19](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-0-19.html#bug-fixes), [3.7.24](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-3-7-24.html#bug-fixes) | |
-| [4.3.0](08_430_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 01 | Upstream [4.3.0](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-3-0.html#bug-fixes) | |
-| [4.2.6](09_426_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 01 | Upstream [4.2.6](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-6.html#bug-fixes) | |
-| [4.2.5](10_425_rel_notes) | 2021 Jun 10 | Upstream [4.2.5](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-5.html) and [4.2.4](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-4.html) | |
\ No newline at end of file
+| [4.4.2](442_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [4.4.2](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/44/en/html/release-4-4-2.html) | |
+| [4.3.2](07_432_rel_notes), [4.2.9](429_rel_notes), [4.1.12](4112_rel_notes), [4.0.19](4019_rel_notes), [3.7.24](3724_rel_notes) | 05 Jul 2022 | Upstream [4.3.2](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-3-2.html#bug-fixes), [4.2.9](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-2-9.html#bug-fixes), [4.1.12](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-1-12.html#bug-fixes), [4.0.19](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-0-19.html#bug-fixes), [3.7.24](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-3-7-24.html#bug-fixes) | |
+| [4.3.0](08_430_rel_notes) | 01 Feb 2022 | Upstream [4.3.0](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/43/en/html/release-4-3-0.html#bug-fixes) | |
+| [4.2.6](09_426_rel_notes) | 01 Dec 2021 | Upstream [4.2.6](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-6.html#bug-fixes) | |
+| [4.2.5](10_425_rel_notes) | 10 Jun 2021 | Upstream [4.2.5](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-5.html) and [4.2.4](https://www.pgpool.net/docs/42/en/html/release-4-2-4.html) | |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
index ba879151a01..5a8edc43541 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
@@ -13,10 +13,10 @@ cover what was new in each release.
| Version | Release date |
| ------------------------ | ------------ |
-| [3.2.1](rel_notes321) | 2022 Aug 04 |
-| [3.2.0](rel_notes32) | 2022 Dec 01 |
-| [3.1.5](rel_notes315) | 2022 Aug 03 |
-| [3.1.4](rel_notes314) | 2021 Dec 01 |
+| [3.2.1](rel_notes321) | 04 Aug 2022 |
+| [3.2.0](rel_notes32) | 01 Dec 2022 |
+| [3.1.5](rel_notes315) | 03 Aug 2022|
+| [3.1.4](rel_notes314) | 01 Dec 2021|
| [3.1.2](rel_notes312) | 2021 Jun 24|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_distributed_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_distributed_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index a847b4e6165..cf3533088ad 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_distributed_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_distributed_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes documentation describes the major ve
| Version | Release date |
| -------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [0.6.0](0_6_rel_notes) | 2023 May 15 |
+| [0.6.0](0_6_rel_notes) | 15 May 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 335c160cdfa..a761c22c20c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -63,58 +63,58 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| Version | Release date | Upstream merges |
| -------------------------- | ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| [1.20.2](1_20_2_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 27 | Upstream [1.20.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
-| [1.20.1](1_20_1_rel_notes) | 2023 Jun 13 | Upstream [1.20.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
-| [1.20.0](1_20_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Apr 27 | Upstream [1.20.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
-| [1.19.4](1_19_4_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 27 | Upstream [1.19.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
-| [1.19.3](1_19_3_rel_notes) | 2023 Jun 13 | Upstream [1.19.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
-| [1.19.2](1_19_2_rel_notes) | 2023 Apr 27 | Upstream [1.19.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
-| [1.19.1](1_19_1_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 20 | Upstream [1.19.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
-| [1.19.0](1_19_0_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | Upstream [1.19.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
-| [1.18.6](1_18_6_rel_notes) | 2023 Jul 27 | None |
-| [1.18.5](1_18_5_rel_notes) | 2023 Jun 13 | Upstream [1.18.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.18.4](1_18_4_rel_notes) | 2023 Apr 27 | Upstream [1.18.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.18.3](1_18_3_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 20 | Upstream [1.18.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.18.2](1_18_2_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | Upstream [1.18.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.18.1](1_18_1_rel_notes) | 2022 Dec 21 | Upstream [1.18.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.18.0](1_18_0_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 14 | Upstream [1.18.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
-| [1.17.5](1_17_5_rel_notes) | 2023 Mar 20 | Upstream [1.17.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.4](1_17_4_rel_notes) | 2023 Feb 14 | Upstream [1.17.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.3](1_17_3_rel_notes) | 2022 Dec 21 | Upstream [1.17.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.2](1_17_2_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 14 | Upstream [1.17.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 2022 Oct 7 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 2022 Sep 6 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 2022 Nov 14 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 2022 Oct 7 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 2022 Sep 6 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 12 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 2022 Jul 07 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
-| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 2022 Oct 7 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.4](1_15_4_rel_notes) | 2022 Sep 6 | Upstream [1.15.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.3](1_15_3_rel_notes) | 2022 Aug 12 | Upstream [1.15.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.2](1_15_2_rel_notes) | 2022 Jul 07 | Upstream [1.15.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.1](1_15_1_rel_notes) | 2022 May 27 | Upstream [1.15.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.0](1_15_rel_notes) | 2022 Apr 21 | Upstream [1.15.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.14.0](1_14_rel_notes) | 2022 Mar 25 | NA |
-| [1.13.0](1_13_rel_notes) | 2022 Feb 17 | NA |
-| [1.12.0](1_12_rel_notes) | 2022 Jan 11 | NA |
-| [1.11.0](1_11_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 15 | NA |
-| [1.10.0](1_10_rel_notes) | 2021 Nov 11 | NA |
-| [1.9.2](1_9_2_rel_notes) | 2021 Oct 15 | NA |
-| [1.9.1](1_9_1_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 30 | NA |
-| [1.9.0](1_9_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 28 | NA |
-| [1.8.0](1_8_rel_notes) | 2021 Sep 13 | NA |
-| [1.7.1](1_7_1_rel_notes) | 2021 Aug 11 | NA |
-| [1.7.0](1_7_rel_notes) | 2021 Jul 28 | NA |
-| [1.6.0](1_6_rel_notes) | 2021 Jul 12 | NA |
-| [1.5.1](1_5_1_rel_notes) | 2021 Jun 11 | NA |
-| [1.5.0](1_5_rel_notes) | 2021 Jun 17 | NA |
-| [1.4.0](1_4_rel_notes) | 2021 May 18 | NA |
-| [1.3.0](1_3_rel_notes) | 2021 Apr 23 | NA |
-| [1.2.1](1_2_1_rel_notes) | 2021 Apr 06 | NA |
-| [1.2.0](1_2_rel_notes) | 2021 Mar 31 | NA |
-| [1.1.0](1_1_rel_notes) | 2021 Mar 03 | NA |
-| [1.0.0](1_0_rel_notes) | 2021 Feb 04 | NA |
+| [1.20.2](1_20_2_rel_notes) | 27 Jul 2023 | Upstream [1.20.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
+| [1.20.1](1_20_1_rel_notes) | 13 Jun 2023 | Upstream [1.20.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
+| [1.20.0](1_20_0_rel_notes) | 27 Apr 2023 | Upstream [1.20.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.20/release_notes/v1.20/) |
+| [1.19.4](1_19_4_rel_notes) | 27 Jul 2023 | Upstream [1.19.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
+| [1.19.3](1_19_3_rel_notes) | 13 Jun 2023 | Upstream [1.19.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
+| [1.19.2](1_19_2_rel_notes) | 27 Apr 2023 | Upstream [1.19.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
+| [1.19.1](1_19_1_rel_notes) | 20 Mar 2023 | Upstream [1.19.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
+| [1.19.0](1_19_0_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [1.19.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.19/release_notes/v1.19/) |
+| [1.18.6](1_18_6_rel_notes) | 27 Jul 2023 | None |
+| [1.18.5](1_18_5_rel_notes) | 13 Jun 2023 | Upstream [1.18.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.18.4](1_18_4_rel_notes) | 27 Apr 2023 | Upstream [1.18.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.18.3](1_18_3_rel_notes) | 20 Mar 2023 | Upstream [1.18.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.18.2](1_18_2_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [1.18.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.18.1](1_18_1_rel_notes) | 21 Dec 2022 | Upstream [1.18.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.18.0](1_18_0_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.18.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.18/release_notes/v1.18/) |
+| [1.17.5](1_17_5_rel_notes) | 20 Mar 2023 | Upstream [1.17.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.4](1_17_4_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [1.17.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.3](1_17_3_rel_notes) | 21 Dec 2022 | Upstream [1.17.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.2](1_17_2_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.17.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
+| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.4](1_15_4_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.15.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.3](1_15_3_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.15.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.2](1_15_2_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.15.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.1](1_15_1_rel_notes) | 27 May 2022 | Upstream [1.15.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.0](1_15_rel_notes) | 21 Apr 2022 | Upstream [1.15.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.14.0](1_14_rel_notes) | 25 Mar 2022 | NA |
+| [1.13.0](1_13_rel_notes) | 17 Feb 2022 | NA |
+| [1.12.0](1_12_rel_notes) | 11 Jan 2022 | NA |
+| [1.11.0](1_11_rel_notes) | 15 Dec 2021 | NA |
+| [1.10.0](1_10_rel_notes) | 11 Nov 2021 | NA |
+| [1.9.2](1_9_2_rel_notes) | 15 Oct 2021 | NA |
+| [1.9.1](1_9_1_rel_notes) | 30 Sep 2021 | NA |
+| [1.9.0](1_9_rel_notes) | 28 Sep 2021 | NA |
+| [1.8.0](1_8_rel_notes) | 13 Sep 2021 | NA |
+| [1.7.1](1_7_1_rel_notes) | 11 Aug 2021 | NA |
+| [1.7.0](1_7_rel_notes) | 28 Jul 2021 | NA |
+| [1.6.0](1_6_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2021 | NA |
+| [1.5.1](1_5_1_rel_notes) | 11 Jun 2021 | NA |
+| [1.5.0](1_5_rel_notes) | 17 Jun 2021 | NA |
+| [1.4.0](1_4_rel_notes) | 18 May 2021 | NA |
+| [1.3.0](1_3_rel_notes) | 23 Apr 2021 | NA |
+| [1.2.1](1_2_1_rel_notes) | 06 Apr 2021 | NA |
+| [1.2.0](1_2_rel_notes) | 31 Mar 2021 | NA |
+| [1.1.0](1_1_rel_notes) | 03 Mar 2021 | NA |
+| [1.0.0](1_0_rel_notes) | 04 Feb 2021 | NA |
From 29aaf6b64571e62839e395bec6b3b309512a0e2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:35:06 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 083/370] added digit to day and fixed two rows that got missed
---
product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx | 8 ++++----
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
index b25f4fe7c17..6eb796f3255 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/efm/4/efm_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -12,11 +12,11 @@ about the release that introduced the feature.
| [4.7](03_efm_47_rel_notes) | 20 Jun 2023|
| [4.6](04_efm_46_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023|
| [4.5](05_efm_45_rel_notes) | 30 Aug 2022|
-| [4.4](06_efm_44_rel_notes) | 5 Jan 2022|
-| [4.3](07_efm_43_rel_notes) | 2021 Dec 18|
-| [4.2](08_efm_42_rel_notes) | 2021 Apr 19|
+| [4.4](06_efm_44_rel_notes) | 05 Jan 2022|
+| [4.3](07_efm_43_rel_notes) | 18 Dec 2021|
+| [4.2](08_efm_42_rel_notes) | 19 Apr 2021 |
| [4.1](09_efm_41_rel_notes) | 11 Dec 2021|
-| [4.0](10_efm_40_rel_notes) | 2 Sep 2021 |
+| [4.0](10_efm_40_rel_notes) | 02 Sep 2021 |
From d16b54fe4f01d9dad50cbcbfd16e6a48d8246995 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:40:14 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 084/370] fixed inadvertent change
---
.../04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
index 3a205855418..a9e46eded50 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/04_control_schema_objects_created_for_publication.mdx
@@ -411,7 +411,7 @@ _edb_replicator_pub.sp_dropsequence SQL_STORED_PROCEDURE
_edb_replicator_sub.rrep_common_seq USER_TABLE
```
-SQL Server versions 2014 and 2012support creation of sequence objects that can now perform the functionality previously provided by the preceding list of objects. The following are the sequence objects that are now used when the publication database is SQL Server 2012 or 2014:
+SQL Server versions 2014 and 2012 support creation of sequence objects that can now perform the functionality previously provided by the preceding list of objects. The following are the sequence objects that are now used when the publication database is SQL Server 2012 or 2014:
```shell
1> USE edb;
From 168dbf950439b16b8076353efdbf430a597f7a0c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:45:17 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 085/370] made day two digits
---
.../docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 7c72652e3e8..95b0f91177f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ These release notes describe what's new in each release. When a minor or patch r
| ---------------------------------------- | ------------ |
| [42.5.4.1](jdbc_42.5.4.1_rel_notes) | 16 Mar 2023 |
| [42.5.1.2](jdbc_42.5.1.2_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
-| [42.5.1.1](jdbc_42.5.1.1_rel_notes) | 9 Dec 2022 |
+| [42.5.1.1](jdbc_42.5.1.1_rel_notes) | 09 Dec 2022 |
| [42.5.0.1](jdbc_42.5.0.1_rel_notes) | 1 Sep 2022 |
| [42.3.3.1](08_jdbc_42.3.3.1_rel_notes) | 20 Apr 2022 |
| [42.3.2.1](09_jdbc_42.3.2.1_rel_notes) | 15 Feb 2022 |
From 2fd8210bce0e31793cd836b7c54fd7a4047fde53 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:45:56 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 086/370] made day two digits
---
.../docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 95b0f91177f..0f26c6d3125 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/jdbc_connector/42.5.4.1/01_jdbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ These release notes describe what's new in each release. When a minor or patch r
| [42.5.4.1](jdbc_42.5.4.1_rel_notes) | 16 Mar 2023 |
| [42.5.1.2](jdbc_42.5.1.2_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
| [42.5.1.1](jdbc_42.5.1.1_rel_notes) | 09 Dec 2022 |
-| [42.5.0.1](jdbc_42.5.0.1_rel_notes) | 1 Sep 2022 |
+| [42.5.0.1](jdbc_42.5.0.1_rel_notes) | 01 Sep 2022 |
| [42.3.3.1](08_jdbc_42.3.3.1_rel_notes) | 20 Apr 2022 |
| [42.3.2.1](09_jdbc_42.3.2.1_rel_notes) | 15 Feb 2022 |
| [42.2.24.1](10_jdbc_42.2.24.1_rel_notes) | 5 Nov 2021 |
From e2d4e1065abe70b851dd14b1c59cf3c5f82cf252 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:46:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 087/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 70a8e648c0d..63ce06b4210 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/odbc_connector/12/01_odbc_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -9,5 +9,5 @@ Release notes describe what is new in a release. When a minor or patch release i
| Version | Release Date |
| ------------------------------------------- | ------------ |
| [12.02.0000.02](01_odbc_12.2.0.2_rel_notes) | 16 Nov 2021 |
-| [12.00.0000.02](03_odbc_12.0.0.2_rel_notes) | 9 Aug 2020 |
+| [12.00.0000.02](03_odbc_12.0.0.2_rel_notes) | 09 Aug 2020 |
From 5274fd2569b71dad7838adde87b7fe713c46b9b0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:46:34 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 088/370] Fixed missed row
---
product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
index 5a8edc43541..769dc9c3e12 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgis/3.2/01_release_notes/index.mdx
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ cover what was new in each release.
| [3.2.0](rel_notes32) | 01 Dec 2022 |
| [3.1.5](rel_notes315) | 03 Aug 2022|
| [3.1.4](rel_notes314) | 01 Dec 2021|
-| [3.1.2](rel_notes312) | 2021 Jun 24|
+| [3.1.2](rel_notes312) | 24 Jun 2021 |
From b1dff672246039604b3a293cf26b3900fc69091e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:48:38 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 089/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index a761c22c20c..c2aa5e5f555 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.17.4](1_17_4_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 | Upstream [1.17.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.3](1_17_3_rel_notes) | 21 Dec 2022 | Upstream [1.17.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.2](1_17_2_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.17.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
From 883e90d6ba04a7baa32d8392bbd46965d11e0171 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:48:49 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 090/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index c2aa5e5f555..1b887972507 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.17.3](1_17_3_rel_notes) | 21 Dec 2022 | Upstream [1.17.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.2](1_17_2_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.17.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
-| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
+| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
From 6d8a7397dfd876ab08ffe0aaa4cdd353c9332c2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:48:59 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 091/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 1b887972507..f6d2ab9413c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.17.1](1_17_1_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.17.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
From cf18eeb9c71ecc42dbdc956d727cc77d05e6706b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:49:12 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 092/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index f6d2ab9413c..c511b176546 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.17.0](1_17_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.17.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.17/release_notes/v1.17/) |
| [1.16.4](1_16_4_rel_notes) | 14 Nov 2022 | Upstream [1.16.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.3](1_16_3_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.16.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
-| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
+| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
From d5d79460654dfe13dae7288d0abe51dabed213d7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:49:27 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 093/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index c511b176546..b5f5d3aa9d7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.16.2](1_16_2_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.16.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
-| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 7 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.4](1_15_4_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.15.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.3](1_15_3_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.15.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.2](1_15_2_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.15.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
From 72531e3d61c9c1860e883ae0a2eefe16addd2e0c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:49:40 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 094/370] made day two digits
---
product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
index b5f5d3aa9d7..d490711144a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes documentation describes the major version of EDB
| [1.16.1](1_16_1_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.16.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16/) |
| [1.16.0](1_16_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.16.0](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.16/release_notes/v1.16) |
| [1.15.5](1_15_5_rel_notes) | 07 Oct 2022 | Upstream [1.15.5](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
-| [1.15.4](1_15_4_rel_notes) | 6 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.15.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
+| [1.15.4](1_15_4_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2022 | Upstream [1.15.4](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.3](1_15_3_rel_notes) | 12 Aug 2022 | Upstream [1.15.3](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.2](1_15_2_rel_notes) | 07 Jul 2022 | Upstream [1.15.2](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
| [1.15.1](1_15_1_rel_notes) | 27 May 2022 | Upstream [1.15.1](https://cloudnative-pg.io/documentation/1.15/release_notes/v1.15) |
From 0b16cbfb70ee8422d86a61d60942bb2316cf8d5b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 21 Aug 2023 14:28:25 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 095/370] OCL Connector: 15.2.0.4 release
---
.../15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 10 ++++++++++
.../docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 ++
2 files changed, 12 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..326a3eb5878
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+---
+title: "Version 15.2.0.4"
+---
+The EDB OCL Connector provides an API similar to the Oracle Call Interface.
+
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connector 15.2.0.4 include:
+
+| Type | Description |
+| ------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
index a174db2f141..4af95474060 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
title: "EDB OCL Connector release notes"
navTitle: Release Notes
navigation:
+ - 15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes
- 15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes
- 15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes
- 01_ocl_release_notes
@@ -13,6 +14,7 @@ Release notes describe what's new in a release. When a minor or patch release in
| Version | Release date |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------ |
+| [15.2.0.4](15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes) | 22 Aug 2023 |
| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | 20 Jun 2023 |
| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | 19 May 2023 |
| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
From c97f6ef61b0a19c3d309a00c14df50437cc19bc2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 08:59:26 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 096/370] added epas 15.x requirement
---
.../docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx | 10 ++++++++++
.../15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 1 +
2 files changed, 11 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
index 9bf7285cd7b..127652f9ef4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
@@ -7,3 +7,13 @@ title: "Supported platforms"
The EDB OCL Connector is supported on the same platforms as EDB Postgres Advanced Server. To determine the platform support for the EDB OCL Connector, you can either refer to the platform support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server on the [Platform Compatibility page](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#epas) on the EDB website or refer to [Installing EDB OCL Connector](./installing).
+## Supported database versions
+
+This table lists the latest OCL Connector versions and their supported corresponding EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) versions.
+
+| ODBC Connector | EPAS 15.4 | EPAS 15.3 | EPAS 15.2 | EPAS 15.1 |
+| -------------------------------------- | --------- | --------- | --------- | --------- |
+| [15.2.0.4](15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes) | Y | N | N | N |
+| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | N | Y | Y | Y |
+| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | N | N | Y | Y |
+| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | N | N | N | Y |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
index 326a3eb5878..d57e5ccc853 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -8,3 +8,4 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connecto
| Type | Description |
| ------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
+| Change | This version works with EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15 and later. |
From ee9b8ae2e846c25786c64c1e89c8024b3f421f07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 10:11:25 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 097/370] added note instead of table
---
.../docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx | 10 ----------
.../15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 4 +++-
2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
index 127652f9ef4..9bf7285cd7b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
@@ -7,13 +7,3 @@ title: "Supported platforms"
The EDB OCL Connector is supported on the same platforms as EDB Postgres Advanced Server. To determine the platform support for the EDB OCL Connector, you can either refer to the platform support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server on the [Platform Compatibility page](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#epas) on the EDB website or refer to [Installing EDB OCL Connector](./installing).
-## Supported database versions
-
-This table lists the latest OCL Connector versions and their supported corresponding EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) versions.
-
-| ODBC Connector | EPAS 15.4 | EPAS 15.3 | EPAS 15.2 | EPAS 15.1 |
-| -------------------------------------- | --------- | --------- | --------- | --------- |
-| [15.2.0.4](15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes) | Y | N | N | N |
-| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | N | Y | Y | Y |
-| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | N | N | Y | Y |
-| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | N | N | N | Y |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
index d57e5ccc853..a401f116870 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -8,4 +8,6 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connecto
| Type | Description |
| ------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
-| Change | This version works with EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15 and later. |
+
+!!!Important
+ This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4 or later.
From f42d2b7a0e5f1d2f2ea15811fca64ead7d437d1a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 10:29:02 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 098/370] fixed date
---
product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
index 4af95474060..861724d4958 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Release notes describe what's new in a release. When a minor or patch release in
| Version | Release date |
| -------------------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [15.2.0.4](15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes) | 22 Aug 2023 |
+| [15.2.0.4](15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes) | 24 Aug 2023 |
| [15.2.0.3](15.2.0.3_ocl_release_notes) | 20 Jun 2023 |
| [15.2.0.2](15.2.0.2_ocl_release_notes) | 19 May 2023 |
| [15.2.0.1](01_ocl_release_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
From 7b3b6df3928b42802189530857404a6a27f19223 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 10:51:28 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 099/370] Fixed consistency and logo issues
Missing exclamation point for several images
---
.../02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVault/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/ImpervaDataSecurityFabric/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/LiquibasePro/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/index.mdx | 2 +-
12 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 1e7fc5e6322..60ad95e9d22 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Partner information'
-description: 'Details for Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Details of the partner'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index d6abe7d2c7b..34a7b7cd7e0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
---
title: 'Partner information'
-description: 'Details of the Partner'
+description: 'Details of the partner'
---
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Partner Name** | Commvault |
+| **Partner name** | Commvault |
| **Partner product** | Commvault Backup & Recovery |
| **Website** | https://www.commvault.com/ |
| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.32 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 38fd7c9672d..6c1803e05c1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Partner information'
-description: 'Details for Esri ArcGIS Pro and Esri ArcGIS Enterprise'
+description: 'Details of the partner'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVault/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVault/index.mdx
index 69c4276def1..e32eabb75b0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVault/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVault/index.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ directoryDefaults:
---
-[Partner Program Logo](Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png)
+![Partner Program Logo](Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png)
From 6f4b6d25f040a94b51635d8ec67b4e561c0db302 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 16 Aug 2023 09:59:46 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 100/370] Styleguide and supporting content updated
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../community/contributing/index.mdx | 17 +-
advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx | 2 +-
.../community/contributing/styleguide.mdx | 523 ++++++++++++++++++
advocacy_docs/community/index.mdx | 12 +
4 files changed, 546 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/community/index.mdx
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
index 7c09679cf3e..e754ebc07f2 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,23 @@
---
-title: We love feedback!
-navTitle: Feedback
+title: Contributing Feedback and More
+navTitle: Contributing
description: Guidelines for offering feedback to EDB Docs.
iconName: IdeaSharing
---
All feedback is welcome:
-1. an idea for something new
+Is it a simple edit for a typo? Use the **Suggest Edits** button and you can make a change to the docs which we'll review it.
+
+If, on the other hand you:
+
+1. have an idea for something new
2. you feel there's something missing
-3. a mistake
+3. you can see a mistake thats more than a typo
-Github Issues is the fastest way to get that feedback in front of us.
+Then Github Issues is the fastest way to get that feedback in front of us.
-[Open an issue on Github →](https://github.com/rocketinsights/edb_docs_advocacy/issues)
+[Open an issue on Github →](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/issues)
---
@@ -22,4 +26,3 @@ Github Issues is the fastest way to get that feedback in front of us.
The only things we love more than feedback are pull requests. Check out [the README on Github](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs) to get started.
-
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
index 879e228bd52..a5375442328 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
@@ -88,4 +88,4 @@ You'll make edits and additions via your IDE (VS Code). We recommend using [Gith
## Further reading
-- [Format & Style](/community/contribute/style)
+- [Format & Style](/community/contribute/styleguide)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..58bcc508ed9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,523 @@
+---
+title: Documentation Style Guide
+navTitle: Documentation Style Guide
+iconName: Docs
+description: Our style guide to help you get your writing right
+indexdepth: 3
+rootisheading: true
+deepToC: true
+---
+
+
+## Introduction
+
+EDB docs follow the 5 Cs of technical writing:
+
+* Clear
+
+* Correct
+
+* Concise
+
+* Complete
+
+* Consistent
+
+
+Follow these guidelines to ensure consistency.
+
+Included in this guide:
+
+* 1 [Language and tone](#language-and-tone)
+ * 1.1 [Tense and voice](#tense-and-voice)
+ * 1.2 [Person](#person)
+ * 1.3 [Sentence length](#sentence-length)
+ * 1.4 [Contractions](#contractions)
+ * 1.5 [Latin abbreviations](#latin-abbreviations)
+ * 1.6 [Em-dashes and en-dashes](#em-dashes-and-en-dashes)
+ * 1.7 [Numbers](#numbers)
+* 2 [Capitalization and punctuation](#capitalization-and-punctuation)
+* 3 [Topic structure](#topic-structure)
+* 4 [Verbiage](#verbiage)
+ * 4.1 [Future and conditional tenses](#future-and-conditional-tenses)
+ * 4.2 [Empty phrases](#empty-phrases)
+ * 4.3 [Weak sentence starters](#weak-sentence-starters)
+ * 4.4 [“This” without a noun](#this-without-a-noun)
+ * 4.5 [Misplaced modifiers](#misplaced-modifiers)
+ * 4.6 [Hyphen use](#hyphen-use)
+ * 4.6.1 [With a prefix](#with-a-prefix)
+ * 4.6.2 [With compound adjectives](#with-compound-adjectives)
+ * 4.7 [Directing users up and down through a topic](#directing-users-up-and-down-through-a-topic)
+ * 4.8 [Select versus click](#select-versus-click)
+* 5 [Common errors/words to avoid](#common-errors/words-to-avoid)
+ * 5.1 [Login and log in](#login-and-log-in)
+ * 5.2 [Setup and set up](#setup-and-set-up)
+ * 5.3 [Words to avoid](#words-to-avoid)
+* 6 [Headings](#headings)
+* 7 [Font treatments](#font-treatments)
+ * 7.1 [Bold (\*\*text\*\*)](#bold-text))
+ * 7.2 [Courier aka code or monospace ('text')](#courier-aka-code-or-monospace-text)
+ * 7.3 [Italics (*text*)](#italics-text)
+ * 7.4 [Underline](#underline)
+* 8 [Links](#links)
+* 9 [Admonitions: notes, tips, and warnings](#admonitions:-notes,-tips,-and-warnings)
+ * 9.1 [Notes](#notes)
+ * 9.2 [Tips](#tips)
+ * 9.3 [Warnings](#warnings)
+ * 9.4 [Code](#inlinextensionCode)
+ * 9.4.1 [Inline code](#inline-code)
+ * 9.4.2 [Code blocks](#code-blocks)
+* 10 [Tables](#tables)
+ * 10.1 [Markdown](#markdown)
+* 11 [Lists](#lists)
+* 12 [Images](#images)
+
+## Language and tone
+
+EDB docs are helpful, humble, positive, and friendly. To achieve this, write topics that are factual and free of hyperbole and wordiness.
+
+Where possible, use active voice instead of passive.
+
+### Tense and voice
+
+For reference and general task-based docs, use the second-person [imperative present tense](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Imperative_mood), also known as "imperative mood." These docs should be straightforward and conventional.
+
+**Example:** Use the following command to create a user:
+
+`CREATE USER john IDENTIFIED BY abc;`
+
+For tutorials, the docs can be more casual and conversational but must also be straightforward and clear.
+
+**Example:** In this lab, start with a fresh cluster. Make sure to stop and clean up the cluster from the previous labs.
+
+### Person
+
+Use second person (you) when referring to the user. Don’t use “the user,” which is third person, unless you are talking about the customer’s user.
+
+Use first person plural (we) to refer to EDB. For example, use:
+
+We recommend that you restart your server.
+
+Instead of
+
+EDB recommends that you restart your server.
+
+However, don’t use first person plural when talking about how the software works or in an example. For example:
+
+Instead of:
+
+Next, we process the instruction.
+
+Use:
+
+Next, Barman processes the instruction.
+
+Instead of:
+
+Next, we enter the following the information:
+
+Use:
+
+Enter the following information:
+
+### Sentence length
+
+Use simple and direct language and keep your sentences short. Avoid combining sentences, which makes the content complicated. Maximum sentence length is 26 words when possible.
+
+### Contractions
+
+In keeping with the casual and friendly tone, use contractions. However, use common contractions (isn’t, can’t, don’t). Don't use contractions that are unclear or difficult to pronounce (there’ll).
+
+### Latin abbreviations
+
+Don’t use the Latin abbreviations i.e. and e.g. Use “that is” and “for example” instead.
+
+### Em-dashes and en-dashes
+
+Avoid using em-dashes to set off phrases within a sentence, which creates a complicated sentence structure and can be difficult to translate. You can use em-dashes for definition lists such as:
+
+* Autonomous — Use to create autonomous calls to the server.
+
+
+Use spaces around em-dashes in a definition list. Otherwise, don't put spaces around em-dashes.
+
+To create an em-dash, use the character entity —.
+
+Use en-dashes to mean “through,” for example, items 1–10. Don’t use en-dashes otherwise. (There's only one other use of en-dashes that doesn’t typically come up in technical writing.). To create an en-dash, use the character entity –.
+
+### Numbers
+
+Spell out numbers zero through nine. Use digits for numbers 10 and greater. Spell out any number that starts a sentence. For this reason, avoid starting a sentence with a long or complex number.
+
+Capitalization and punctuation
+------------------------------
+
+Capitalization rules:
+
+* Use sentence-case for headings (including column headings in tables).
+
+* Capitalize the first letter in each list item except for function and command names that are naturally lower case
+
+* Capitalize link labels to match the case of the topic you're linking to.
+
+* Capitalize proper nouns and match the case of UI features:
+
+ **Examples:** EDB, the Overview dashboard, the SQL Queries graph
+
+* Don’t capitalize the words that make up an initialization unless they're part of proper noun. For example, single sign-on is not a proper noun even though it is usually written as the initialism SSO.
+
+
+Punctuation rules:
+
+* Avoid semicolons. Instead, use two sentences.
+
+* Don’t join related sentences using a comma. This syntax is incorrect.
+
+* Don't end headings with a period or colon
+
+* Use periods at the end of list items that are a sentence or that complete a sentence. If one item in a list uses a period, use a period for all the items in that list.
+
+* Use the [Oxford (a.k.a. serial) comma](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Serial_comma).
+
+
+Topic structure
+---------------
+
+* Procedure headings use gerunds, for example, _Modifying your cluster_.
+
+* Use a stem sentence to introduce a procedure only if multiple paragraphs of text fall between the head and the start of the procedure. The stem sentence helps to reorient the user when the heading might have scrolled of the screen. A stem sentence starts with “To” and ends with a colon:
+ To modify your cluster:
+
+* In general, include text between a heading and any subheadings. However, if such text is superfluous, a subhead can directly follow the head.
+
+
+See also [Headings](https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/DCBC/pages/2387870239/Documentation+Style+Guide#Headings).
+
+## Verbiage
+
+Use language that's precise and informative.
+
+### Future and conditional tenses
+
+Avoid future tense (will) and conditional tenses (would, could, should). These tenses lack precision and can create passive voice. You can use future tense when an action occurs in the future, for example, “This feature will be removed in a future release.”
+
+### Empty phrases
+
+Phrases like, “This section tells you about how to \[do something\]” are empty and don’t impart any real information. The title of the chapter or section tells you what the section is about. These phrases describe the documentation (documenting the documentation) rather than the product or user actions.
+
+Replace these empty phrases with wording that focuses on the product or process. So instead of:
+
+This chapter is divided into five sections. Each section tells you about part of the process.
+
+Write:
+
+To complete the process, perform these five steps:
+
+You can then link to each of the sections.
+
+### Weak sentence starters
+
+“There is” and “there are” are [weak sentence starters](http://www2.ensc.sfu.ca/~whitmore/courses/style/templates/sentence.html). Avoid starting sentences this way.
+
+### “This” without a noun
+
+Avoid using “this” without a noun following. Doing so can lead to ambiguity. For example, instead of:
+
+This happens when…
+
+Write:
+
+This error happens when…
+
+### Misplaced modifiers
+
+Make sure the word “only” precedes the word or expression you mean to modify. For example, instead of:
+
+This condition only happens after you select **Okay**.
+
+Write:
+
+This condition happens only after you select **Okay**.
+
+### Hyphen use
+
+#### With a prefix
+
+Don't use hyphens with prefixes such as re, non, multi, and pre unless needed for readability or to eliminate ambiguity. Often, when two vowels end up up together, a hyphen is needed, for example, multi-instance. However, preexisting is a legitimate word; don’t hyphenate it. Re-create (create again) requires a hyphen to avoid confusion with recreate (play). You can check many words using a spell checker. For example, nonexistent is not flagged by the spell checker.
+
+If you're unsure whether to include a hyphen, check with your editor or google the word without the hyphen
+
+#### With compound adjectives
+
+A compound adjective is formed when two words together describe a noun, for example, _red-bellied warbler_. Don’t use a hyphen when and adverb and a verb together describe a noun. The adverb describes the verb and doesn’t need a hyphen to create the relationship between the words. An example is _finely tuned settings_.
+
+### Directing users up and down through a topic
+
+Don’t use words like “below” and “above” to refer to previous and following sections. Link to the section instead.
+
+It also isn't necessary to use the words “the following” to refer to list items. These words are empty. So, for example, instead of:
+
+The palette includes the following colors:
+
+Write:
+
+The color palette includes:
+
+### Select versus click
+
+House style is to use “select” instead of “click” to allow for mobile-device use.
+
+Common errors/words to avoid
+----------------------------
+
+Avoid these common errors and wording issues.
+
+### Login and log in
+
+The verb form is “log in”:
+
+To log in to the system…
+
+The adjective form is “login”:
+
+At the login screen, enter your username.
+
+### Setup and set up
+
+The verb form is “set up”:
+
+To set up your environment…
+
+The noun form is “setup”:
+
+Check your setup for errors.
+
+### Words to avoid
+
+Don't use:
+
+* Please
+
+* Note that
+
+* In order to (just use “to”)
+
+
+## Headings
+
+Use headings to create a hierarchy for readers to navigate to more easily find information.
+
+In Markdown, headings are denoted by number signs (`#`) followed by one space. Enter a line break between a heading and its content. EDB docs use Heading 2 (`##`), Heading 3 (`###`) and Heading 4 (`####`). Use Heading 4 sparingly.
+
+Heading 1 is reserved for page titles. You can denote anything below Heading 4 using bold text or other layout options. (Consider redesigning the material.)
+
+Examples:
+
+* `## This is heading 2`
+
+* `### This is heading 3`
+
+* `## Step 2. This is a step in a tutorial`
+
+
+## Font treatments
+
+Don’t use any font treatments for:
+
+* Roles
+
+* User names (e.g. edb_admin)
+
+* Permissions
+
+* Window or dialog box names
+
+
+### Bold (\*\*text\*\*)
+
+Use for UI elements. For menu items, include a greater-than sign: Select **File > Save**.
+
+### Courier aka code or monospace (`'text'`)
+
+Use for text entered in text boxes, parameters, commands, text in configuration files, and file paths. Don’t use for utility names.
+
+If you need to enter a `value in a field`, type the `ls` or `dd` command, add a setting to a `configuration=file` or just refer to `/etc/passwd`, then this is the font treatment to use.
+
+See [Code](#code) for more information.
+
+### Italics (*_text_*)
+
+Use for book titles and first instance of terms. Do not use Italics for keywords.
+
+### Underline
+
+Do not use underlined text in EDB docs.
+
+## Links
+
+Whenever an EDB feature is referenced, provide a link to the relevant documentation. For example, “BDR (Bi-Directional Replication) dashboards and probes to monitor status and activities for Admin, Nodes, and Groups. See [Monitoring BDR Nodes](http://localhost:8000/pem/latest/pem_ent_feat/17_monitoring_BDR_nodes/).”
+
+Avoid using the URL as the label. For example,
+
+**Best practice:** For information about the platforms and versions supported by PEM, see [Product Compatibility](https://www.enterprisedb.com/services-support/edb-supported-products-and-platforms) on the EnterpriseDB website**.**
+
+**Avoid:** For information about the platforms and versions supported by PEM, visit the EnterpriseDB website at: [https://www.enterprisedb.com/services-support/edb-supported-products-and-platforms](https://www.enterprisedb.com/services-support/edb-supported-products-and-platforms).
+
+You can also provide links to external resources, but only if the resource is vetted and no EDB documentation covers the topic. For example: “Information about managing authentication is also available in the [Postgres core documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/auth-pg-hba-conf.html).”
+
+If you're referring to a guide on Docs 2.0, the label is the name of the guide and in italics. For example, “For information about modifying the `pg_hba.conf` file, see the [_PEM Administrator's Guide_](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pem/latest/pem_admin/).”
+
+Link capitalization can be either title- or sentence-case:
+
+* **Use title-case** and _italics_ when referring to the linked doc by name. For example. “For information about modifying the `pg_hba.conf` file, see the [_PEM Administrator's Guide_](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pem/latest/pem_admin/).”).
+
+* **Use sentence-case** when linking in the middle of a sentence. For example, “\[…\] follow the identifier rules when creating \[…\]“).
+
+
+Addresses are relative. In these examples of links to topics, “folder” means the folder in the repo such as the product folder or the guide folder. For the destination topic, use the name of the file without the .mdx extension. If the destination includes a topic\_identifier (sub-section of a file), include the topic\_identifier prefixed with a # sign, such as in “/09\_controlling\_logging/#enabling_syslog.”
+
+| | | | | |
+| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
+| **Link type** | **Syntax** | **Example** | **Source path** | **Destination path** |
+
+| | | | | |
+| --- | --- | --- | --- | --- |
+| **Link type** | **Syntax** | **Example** | **Source path** | **Destination path** |
+| Another topic in the same folder | `[here](file_name)` | `[Using the EFM Utility](07_using_efm_utility/#using_efm_utility)` | /efm/4.2/efm\_user/07\_using_efm.mdx | /efm/4.2/efm\_user/07\_using\_efm\_utility.mdx |
+| Another topic in a different folder at the same level | `[here](../dest_folder_name/file_name)` | \[The ERD Tool\](../pem\_ent\_feat/04\_pem\_erd_tool/) | /pem/8/pem\_rel\_notes/08\_810\_rel_notes.mdx | /pem/8/pem\_ent\_feat04\_pem\_erd_tool/ |
+| Another topic in a different folder at a different level | `[here](../../folder_name/file_name`) | \[Enabling syslog Log File Entries\](../../09\_controlling\_logging/#enabling_syslog) | /efm/4.2/efm\_user/04\_configuring\_efm/01\_cluster_properties/index.mdx | /efm/4.2/efm\_user/09\_controlling\_logging.mdx/enabling\_syslog |
+
+* To link to a specific heading on another page, use the name of the file plus the heading.
+
+ **Example:** `[xyz](file_name#heading-on-page)`
+
+* To link to a specific heading on the current page, use just the heading.
+
+ **Example:** `[xyz](#heading-on-page)`
+
+* To link to a specific location on a page that isn't a heading (for example, a specific command-line flag in a table), add a manual anchor and use the `id` parameter:
+
+ **Example:**
+
+ ``# Anchor: `--max-offset` # Link: [--max-offset](#flags-max-offset)``
+
+
+## Admonitions: notes, tips, and warnings
+
+Our docs currently use notes, tips, and warnings.
+
+See [https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/blob/develop/README.md](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/blob/develop/README.md) for more information on admonitions.
+
+For multiple, consecutive admonitions, use separate admonitions. If there are more than two consecutive admonitions, consider adding a subsection called **Additional notes** or **Additional information**. Admonitions can contain bullets and code, but consider instead adding a subsection (or whether an admonition is the appropriate mechanism) to keep the formatting simple.
+
+### Notes
+
+Use notes to call attention to a piece of clarifying information. This information isn't crucial to accomplishing the task in the document.
+
+For example, you might use a note to let users know that the `DELETE` command deletes only rows and that to delete columns you must use `ALTER TABLE`. This information helps to clarify the command's purpose and point users to the right place.
+
+### Tips
+
+Use for indicating a new version added in a particular release when working in the major version of the documentation for products that are adhering to semantic versioning. See the PEM documentation for examples. Also can use for information that might improve productivity.
+
+### Warnings
+
+Use warning to express that a piece of information is critical to preventing unexpected things from happening.
+
+For example, you might include a warning that using `CASCADE` in `DROP INDEX` drops dependent objects without warning. This is critical to prevent users from unexpectedly losing constraints or additional indexes.
+
+## Code
+
+Code can be shown inline or as a code block.
+
+### Inline code
+
+Inline `code` has `back-ticks (``) around` it and is used when referring to code, commands, or other technical syntax within a sentence.
+
+Example: The `CREATE TABLE` statement creates a new table in a database.
+
+### Code blocks
+
+Code blocks provide executable code samples, marked with an opening and closing set of three backticks (` ``` `). Code blocks can support syntax highlighting if you add the language name immediately after the first line of backticks. Use one returned line before and after a code block for better Markdown readability. For example:
+
+`This is a sample line of text. ``` {% include copy-clipboard.html %} ~~~shell $ go get -u github.com/lib/pq ~~~ ``` This is more sample text.`
+
+Use syntax highlighting for configuration file , shell, and SQL commands, where appropriate, as follows.
+
+**Shell code samples**
+
+Start shell code samples with ` ```shell` followed by a line break. Use the terminal marker `$` as the first character of the next line. For multi-line shell commands, use a backslash (`\`) at the end of each line to indicate a line break.
+
+**SQL code samples**
+
+SQL code samples are broken into two sections: commands and responses.
+
+* **Commands** (e.g., `SELECT`, `CREATE TABLE`) begin with ` ```sql` followed by a line break. The first character of the next line should be the terminal marker `>`. Capitalize commands properly. Use only one command per code sample.
+
+* **Responses** (e.g., retrieved tables) add (_ _ 0UTPUT _ _) on a line between the command and the output, you'll get highlights for the code but not the output. For example,
+
+ `
+ ```sql SELECT slot_name, slot_type, database, active FROM pg_replication_slots ORDER BY 1; __OUTPUT__ slot_name | slot_type | database | active -------------+-----------+-----------+-------- xdb_47877_5 | logical | MMRnode_a | t xdb_47878_5 | logical | MMRnode_b | t xdb_47879_5 | logical | MMRnode_c | t (3 rows) ``` `
+
+```
+sql SELECT slot_name, slot_type, database, active FROM pg_replication_slots ORDER BY 1; __OUTPUT__ slot_name | slot_type | database | active -------------+-----------+-----------+-------- xdb_47877_5 | logical | MMRnode_a | t xdb_47878_5 | logical | MMRnode_b | t xdb_47879_5 | logical | MMRnode_c | t (3 rows)
+```
+
+
+**Configuration file samples**
+
+For files that have key-value pairs use ` ```ini`. For example:
+
+` ```ini promotable=false auto.reconfigure=false ``` `
+
+Tables
+------
+
+Use tables to display structured information in an easy-to-read format. There are two types of tables we use: Markdown and HTML.
+
+## Markdown
+
+If table formatting can be kept simple (e.g., basic text formatting and using ` ` tags for paragraph breaks), create a table using Markdown. This is the preferred table format.
+
+To create a table, use pipes (`|`) between columns and at least 3 dashes (`-`) separating the header cells from the body cells. A return denotes the start of the next row. The text within each column does not need to align in order to be rendered correctly, and you can inline Markdown or HTML.
+
+We don’t use outer pipes.
+
+Example:
+
+```
+Term | Description | Example ----------|-----------------------------|---------------- `term_1` | This is a description. | `3.14` `term_2` | This is also a description. | `"lola mcdog"`
+```
+
+## Lists
+
+EDB docs uses two types of lists:
+
+* **Numbered** (ordered) — Use to list information that should appear in order, like tutorial steps.
+
+ **Bulleted** (unordered) — Use to list related information in an easy-to-read way.
+
+ Introduce lists with a sentence and a colon. Use periods at the end of list items if it is a sentence or completes a sentence.
+
+
+For each item of a **numbered list**, use `1.` followed by a period and a space, for example,`1. This is a numbered list`. Markdown renders the steps in the correct order.
+
+For each item of a **bulleted list**, use one dash followed by one space to denote a list item, e.g., `- This is a bulleted list`.
+
+## Images
+
+Use images to clarify a topic, but use them only as needed. Images are either:
+
+* **Screenshots** — Provide a UI visual. Don’t use to show dialog boxes and parts of the UI a user can see for themselves, as these are hard to maintain and don’t provide useful information. If a screenshot needs an annotation, use a red box.
+
+* **Diagrams** — Provide a visual of a complicated theory. Diagrams must be simple and easy to read.
+
+
+**Syntax:**
+
+! \[Alternate\_text\](<path\_to\_image\_file>/<image_filename.png>)
+
+**Example:**
+
+`![PEM Architecture](../images/pem_architecture.png)`
+
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/index.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..6d5c00feeab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/index.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+---
+title: Community
+navTitle: Community
+description: The EDB Docs Community
+iconName: IdeaSharing
+---
+
+All guides, notes and documentation for anyone working in the community of EDB documenters.
+
+* [Contributing Documentation](contributing)
+
+
From 8cfd9463949d76e83ad90c71db002c82ef3375aa Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 16 Aug 2023 10:10:33 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 101/370] Tidied community/contrib page
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx | 7 +++----
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
index e754ebc07f2..1144730282a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/index.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ iconName: IdeaSharing
All feedback is welcome:
-Is it a simple edit for a typo? Use the **Suggest Edits** button and you can make a change to the docs which we'll review it.
+Is it a simple edit for a typo? Use the **Suggest Edits** button and you can make a change to the docs which we'll review before including in the next docs update.
If, on the other hand you:
@@ -19,10 +19,9 @@ Then Github Issues is the fastest way to get that feedback in front of us.
[Open an issue on Github →](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/issues)
----
-
### Have code or content to contribute?
-The only things we love more than feedback are pull requests. Check out [the README on Github](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs) to get started.
+The only things we love more than feedback are pull requests.
+Check out [the README on Github](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs) to get started.
From 130255fa6699d566e57c934ad3eb25b6421084bd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 09:10:50 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 102/370] Added date formatting rules and release note dates
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../community/contributing/styleguide.mdx | 7 ++++
docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md | 36 +++++++++++++++----
2 files changed, 36 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
index 58bcc508ed9..6ea7ba2c3d9 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/styleguide.mdx
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ Included in this guide:
* 10.1 [Markdown](#markdown)
* 11 [Lists](#lists)
* 12 [Images](#images)
+* 13 [Dates](#dates)
## Language and tone
@@ -521,3 +522,9 @@ Use images to clarify a topic, but use them only as needed. Images are either:
`![PEM Architecture](../images/pem_architecture.png)`
+## Dates
+
+When specifying dates for human readability, use the DD mmm YYYY format with a short month name in English. Where the date is being used in a column in a table, use a leading 0 on the day of month, e.g. 01 Jan 2024, for easier alignment.
+
+When specifying dates as solely numbers, use [ISO8601](https://www.iso.org/iso-8601-date-and-time-format.html) format; YYYY/MM/DD. This is the internationally accepted, disambiguous format and should be used where you may expect the date to be read by automated systems.
+
diff --git a/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md b/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
index 73bedfef8f1..53d19869b11 100644
--- a/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
+++ b/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
@@ -1,6 +1,28 @@
-# Guidelines for wording release notes
+# Guidelines for release notes
-## General guidelines
+## Structural guidelines
+
+Release notes start with the name of the product, the version number being released and the words "Release Notes".
+This should be the setting for the frontmatter title field. The frontmatter will also need a short navigation title
+(navTitle). This should just be the version number, preceded by the word "Version".
+
+This is followed, in the body of the content, by a date of release in the `Released: DD mmm YYYY` format:
+
+```
+---
+title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server 64.0 Release Notes
+navTitle: Version 64.0
+---
+
+Released: 1 Jan 2024
+
+```
+
+If the release notes are substantially updated after release, add an `Updated: DD mmm YYYY` line, or update any existing `Updated:` line.
+
+## Guidelines for wording release notes
+
+### General guidelines
- For features and enhancements, use second person (you) instead of third person (the user).
- For bug fixes, avoid referring to the user. Instead, describe the software behavior. If the description is clearer by referring to the user, use third person.
@@ -10,11 +32,11 @@
- Use contractions.
- Use serial (aka Oxford) commas.
-## Phrasing guidelines for enhancements
+### Phrasing guidelines for enhancements
You can use either of the forms described in the following sections for enhancements. Add as much detail as needed to convey the relevance of the enhancement. If you need to describe how the product worked before, use “previously,” not “currently.”
-### Past tense description of the development work
+#### Past tense description of the development work
Start with a past-tense word that describes what you did. Then provide any relevant detail.
@@ -24,7 +46,7 @@ Examples:
- Added the ability to copy probes and alerts to all servers in a group without having to select them individually.
- Enabled multi-insert support for the dynamic partition for EDB*Loader and COPY command.
-### “Now” phrase
+#### “Now” phrase
Describe what the product does now as a result of the enhancement, generally in the form: The *product/feature* now *does the new behavior*.
@@ -32,7 +54,7 @@ Examples:
- EDB Postgres Advanced Server now provides INDEX and NO_INDEX hints for the partitioned table. The optimizer hints apply to the inherited index in the partitioned table. The execution plan internally expands to include the corresponding inherited child indexes and applies them in later processing.
- The INTO clause now accepts multiple composite row type targets in SPL. This enhancement allows you to assign a SELECT list having a mix of scalar and composite type values that are fetched from a table to corresponding scalar or composite variables (including collection variables) in the SPL code.
-### Enhancement don’ts
+#### Enhancement don’ts
Don’t start the enhancement with a gerund, which suggests the work is still in progress:
- **Correct**: Added the XYZ function.
@@ -44,7 +66,7 @@ Don’t use a title or short description:
- **Correct**: You can now configure the durability options, such as Group Commit, CAMO, Eager Replication, and Lag Control, through Commit Scope.
- **Incorrect**: Unified replication durability configuration - The durability options such as Group Commit, CAMO, Eager Replication, or Lag Control are now all configured through Commit Scope configuration.
-## Bug fix writing guidelines
+### Bug fix writing guidelines
Start bug fix descriptions with:
- Fixed an issue whereby…
From ee38153619c149d44953d84ee331cdd9d9c8a427 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 10:29:10 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 103/370] Update repo.mdx
Fix link
---
advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
index a5375442328..36c5d4ad8be 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/community/contributing/repo.mdx
@@ -88,4 +88,4 @@ You'll make edits and additions via your IDE (VS Code). We recommend using [Gith
## Further reading
-- [Format & Style](/community/contribute/styleguide)
+- [Format & Style](/community/contributing/styleguide)
From 83bb336856ce6115641419d9df2cd6323feb863f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 10:32:59 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 104/370] Update release-notes-guidelines.md
Release Notes -> release notes
---
docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md | 4 ++--
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md b/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
index 53d19869b11..9a8d80482f4 100644
--- a/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
+++ b/docs/agreements/release-notes-guidelines.md
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
## Structural guidelines
-Release notes start with the name of the product, the version number being released and the words "Release Notes".
+Release notes start with the name of the product, the version number being released and the words "release notes".
This should be the setting for the frontmatter title field. The frontmatter will also need a short navigation title
(navTitle). This should just be the version number, preceded by the word "Version".
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ This is followed, in the body of the content, by a date of release in the `Relea
```
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server 64.0 Release Notes
+title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server 64.0 release notes
navTitle: Version 64.0
---
From 56795b504e2d2c98a33a3420b37ab01dd14e4a78 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 11:24:46 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 105/370] fixed typo
---
.../PreciselyConnectCDC/04-Configuratingpreciselyconnectcdc.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/PreciselyConnectCDC/04-Configuratingpreciselyconnectcdc.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/PreciselyConnectCDC/04-Configuratingpreciselyconnectcdc.mdx
index 5d900d58895..719aaf20945 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/PreciselyConnectCDC/04-Configuratingpreciselyconnectcdc.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/PreciselyConnectCDC/04-Configuratingpreciselyconnectcdc.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: 'ConfiguringC'
+title: 'Configuring'
description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
From 030bb633f6b60cdd6fb1788aec5ac1deacc61ff1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 12:40:28 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 106/370] Made the short descriptions consistent
---
...guringCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
...-UsingCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 32 +++++++++++--------
.../DBeaverPRO/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 26 +++++++--------
...ngEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx | 2 +-
...ngEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../04-ConfiguringTransitSecretsEngine.mdx | 2 +-
.../04-ConfiguringLiquibasePro.mdx | 2 +-
.../LiquibasePro/05-UsingLiquibasePro.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../04-ConfiguringQuestToadEdge.mdx | 2 +-
.../QuestToadEdge/05-UsingQuestToadEdge.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
...ringRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
...singRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../04-ConfiguringSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx | 2 +-
.../05-UsingSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
...ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx | 2 +-
...ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
...nfiguringVeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
.../05-UsingVeritasNetBackupForPostgreSQL.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
27 files changed, 56 insertions(+), 52 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
index f463b877357..a649e353e4a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL with EDB Postgres Advanced Server requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/05-UsingCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/05-UsingCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
index 0ee222986b2..ae4d3ca210c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/05-UsingCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/05-UsingCohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
These use cases show how backups are taken and restored from EDB Postgres Advanced Server using Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 59344126b31..6a78be85955 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CohesityDataProtectforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Cohesity DataProtect for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index 303d6c2bb43..bdc628d1ec6 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -1,23 +1,25 @@
---
-title: 'Support and Logging Details'
+title: 'Support and logging details'
description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
---
## Support
-Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and Commvault. A proper support contract is required to be in place at both EDB and Commvault. A support ticket can be opened on either side to start the process. If it is determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor is required, the customer should open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This will allow both companies to work together to help the customer as needed.
+Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and Commvault. A support contract must be in place at both EDB and Commvault. You can open a support ticket with either company to start the process. If it's determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor are required, open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This approach allows both companies to work together to help you as needed.
## Logging
-**EDB Postgres Advanced Server Logs:**
+The following logs are available.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
+### EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs
-**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log` or `current_logfiles`. Or, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+### EDB Postgres Extended Server logs
-**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance. From there you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs is `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+
+### PostgreSQL Server logs
The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
@@ -27,16 +29,18 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
- Windows: `C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.3\data\pg_log`
-** Commvault Logs**
+### Commvault logs
+
+You can find Commvault logs using either of these methods:
-Commvault logs can be found a few ways. A first way is within the Content Store directory/folder in the Commvault folder on your system. For example if on a Windows system the Log File path would be `C:\Program Files\Commvault\ContentStore\LogFiles` where you can then see all of the differnt types of logs Commvault collects.
+- Look in the Content Store directory/folder in the Commvault folder on your system. For example, on a Windows system, the log file path is `C:\Program Files\Commvault\ContentStore\LogFiles`. There you can see all of the different types of logs Commvault collects.
-You can also gather some job specific logs within the Commvault interface.
+- Gather some job-specific logs in the Commvault interface:
-1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to `Jobs > Job History`.
+ 1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center. From the navigation pane, go to **Jobs > Job History**.
-2. Find the specific job you would like to view logs for and click on the `...` beside that job.
+ 2. Find the specific job you want to view logs for, and select `...` next to that job.
-3. Select `View Logs`.
+ 3. Select **View Logs**.
- ![View Job Logs](Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png)
+ ![View Job Logs](Images/CommvaultViewLogsForJob.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/DBeaverPRO/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/DBeaverPRO/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index 5f476add649..f78487e87ea 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/DBeaverPRO/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/DBeaverPRO/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -1,23 +1,25 @@
---
-title: 'Support and Logging Details'
+title: 'Support and logging details'
description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
---
## Support
-Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and DBeaver. A proper support contract is required to be in place at both EDB and DBeaver. A support ticket can be opened on either side to start the process. If it is determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor is required, the customer should open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This will allow both companies to work together to help the customer as needed.
+Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and DBeaver. A support contract must be in place at both EDB and DBeaver. You can open a support ticket with either company to start the process. If it's determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor are required, open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This approach allows both companies to work together to help you as needed.
## Logging
-**EDB Postgres Advanced Server Logs:**
+The following logs are available.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
+### EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs
-**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance. From there, you can navigate to `log` or `current_logfiles`. Or, you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs.
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+### EDB Postgres Extended Server logs
-**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance. From there you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs is `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+
+### PostgreSQL Server logs
The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
@@ -27,15 +29,13 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
- Windows: `C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.3\data\pg_log`
-** DBeaver Logs**
-
-If you are experiencing errors during the DBeaver runtime you can gather those within the DBeaver Pro interface.
+## DBeaver logs
-1. On the top menu bar navigate to `Window` and select it.
+If you experience errors during the DBeaver runtime, you can gather them in the DBeaver Pro interface:
-2. Scroll down to `Show View`.
+1. At the top menu bar, select **Window**.
-3. In the menu options that come up select `Error Log` and this will contain all the errors that occur during the DBeaver runtime.
+2. Select **Show View > Error Log**. The log contains all the errors that occur during the DBeaver runtime.
![DBeaver Log Viewer](Images/DBeaverLogViewer.png)
4. You can save and attach these logs to a support ticket or bug report to DBeaver support.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/04-ConfiguringEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/04-ConfiguringEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
index 1562aced751..ac0448ffbc8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/04-ConfiguringEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/04-ConfiguringEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Esri ArcGIS Pro and Esri ArcGIS Enterprise'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Esri ArcGIS Pro and Esri ArcGIS Enterprise with EDB Postgres Advanced Server requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/05-UsingEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/05-UsingEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
index 20727db6af6..1df16dbc962 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/05-UsingEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/05-UsingEsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Esri ArcGIS Pro and Esri ArcGIS Enterprise usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
## Create file geodatabase
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 4eb20c5cecc..6c7b3d68f34 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/EsriArcGISProandEsriArcGISEnterprise/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Esri ArcGIS Pro and Esri ArcGIS Enterprise'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVaultTransitSecretsEngine/04-ConfiguringTransitSecretsEngine.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVaultTransitSecretsEngine/04-ConfiguringTransitSecretsEngine.mdx
index 5d6357b42ca..5475fd3cf5b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVaultTransitSecretsEngine/04-ConfiguringTransitSecretsEngine.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/HashicorpVaultTransitSecretsEngine/04-ConfiguringTransitSecretsEngine.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Hashicorp Vault with EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.2 and later or EDB Postgres Extended Server version 15.2 and later requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/04-ConfiguringLiquibasePro.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/04-ConfiguringLiquibasePro.mdx
index e7b6d8e6e62..dac57dc6cf0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/04-ConfiguringLiquibasePro.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/04-ConfiguringLiquibasePro.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Liquibase Pro'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Liquibase with EDB Postgres Advanced Server requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/05-UsingLiquibasePro.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/05-UsingLiquibasePro.mdx
index 30b0d520f29..b44a91a5246 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/05-UsingLiquibasePro.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/05-UsingLiquibasePro.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Liquibase Pro usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
Liquibase is a development tool that allows you to apply changes to the EDB database using the Liquibase CLI and view them on the Liquibase Hub.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 4192e3e5828..a8960b444a0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/LiquibasePro/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Liquibase Pro'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/04-ConfiguringQuestToadEdge.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/04-ConfiguringQuestToadEdge.mdx
index 1c2cd26138f..44128048aa3 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/04-ConfiguringQuestToadEdge.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/04-ConfiguringQuestToadEdge.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Quest Toad Edge'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Quest Toad Edge with EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/05-UsingQuestToadEdge.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/05-UsingQuestToadEdge.mdx
index 2f4b607cefe..b420540c62b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/05-UsingQuestToadEdge.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/05-UsingQuestToadEdge.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Quest Toad Edge usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
After you connect an instance of EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended to Quest Toad Edge, you can access the capabilities of Toad Edge.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index a70d85b3bf1..484542b7533 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/QuestToadEdge/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Quest Toad Edge'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
redirects:
- /partner_docs/ToadEdgeGuide/06-CertificationEnvironment/
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
index 6e386a32fc9..948bc82ef22 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Repostor Data Protector for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
## Prerequisites
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/05-UsingRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/05-UsingRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
index 45ef071fca7..0f3d8d49404 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/05-UsingRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/05-UsingRepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Repostor Data Protector for PostgreSQL usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
The current RDP version is a command-line client. You run three commands:
`postgresbackup`, `postgresquery`, and `postgresrestore`. The logwriter and logreader tools are called by PostgreSQL during execution of `archive_command` and `restore_command`.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index dd700ca1c67..78bc46cc22c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/RepostorDataProtectorforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used for certifying Repostor Data Protector for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
redirects:
- /partner_docs/RepostorGuide/06-CertificationEnvironment/
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/04-ConfiguringSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/04-ConfiguringSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
index 559f6487c74..9a6e5027b26 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/04-ConfiguringSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/04-ConfiguringSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring SIB Visions VisionX'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing SIB Visions VisionX with EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/05-UsingSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/05-UsingSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
index 459f669fc14..be6a1dbaed6 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/05-UsingSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/05-UsingSIBVisionsVisionX.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple SIB Visions VisionX usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
These examples walk you though some of the common usage scenarios that can be used with EDB Postgres Advanced Server or EDB Postgres Extended Server. These are examples to help get you started and show how the products can work together.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 1e32fc978a5..3104d19b267 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/SIBVisionsVisionX/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used for certifying SIB Visions VisionX'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/04-ConfiguringThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/04-ConfiguringThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
index bfe650e1e87..d11d30109ce 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/04-ConfiguringThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/04-ConfiguringThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Thales CipherTrust Transparent Encryption (CTE)'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/05-UsingThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/05-UsingThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
index a61583ac745..0fc6d06ceac 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/05-UsingThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/05-UsingThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Thales CipherTrust Transparent Encryption (CTE) usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
CTE protects data either at the file level or at the storage device level. A CTE agent running on the Postgres host manages the files behind a GuardPoint by enforcing the policy associated with it and communicates data access events to the CipherTrust Manager for logging. A GuardPoint is usually associated with a Linux mount point or a Windows volume but can also be associated with a directory subtree.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 13966b47a9e..685f65c5d1e 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/ThalesCipherTrustTransparentEncryption/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of Thales CipherTrust Transparent Encryption (CTE)'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringVeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringVeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL.mdx
index b135cc2f49f..1756937df97 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringVeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/04-ConfiguringVeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Configuring'
-description: 'Walkthrough of configuring Veritas NetBackup for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Walkthrough of configuring the integration'
---
Implementing Veritas NetBackup solution for backup/restore of PostgreSQL databases requires the following components:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/05-UsingVeritasNetBackupForPostgreSQL.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/05-UsingVeritasNetBackupForPostgreSQL.mdx
index 2fbb3b67d4a..d2ea6f6ec77 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/05-UsingVeritasNetBackupForPostgreSQL.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/05-UsingVeritasNetBackupForPostgreSQL.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Using'
-description: 'Walkthroughs of multiple Veritas NetBackup for PostgreSQL usage scenarios'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
Common backup/restore operations for PostgreSQL databases using Veritas NetBackup for PostgreSQL are:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 1539573025d..bcc4e553f23 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Certification environment'
-description: 'Overview of the certification environment used in the certification of NetBackup for PostgreSQL'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
---
| | |
From a5563f5456185b0ece07de795780e9e97401d113 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: kelpoole <44814688+kelpoole@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 3 Aug 2023 16:29:54 -0500
Subject: [PATCH 107/370] Update index.mdx
Updated Long Term Support content and added supporting links for features described in other parts of the doc
---
.../docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/index.mdx | 33 ++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 18 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/index.mdx
index 6f00e5e9e10..523dbc4964d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/index.mdx
@@ -89,11 +89,12 @@ primary/standby architecture, using native streaming replication.
## Features unique to EDB Postgres of Kubernetes
-- [Long Term Support](#long-term-support) for 1.18.x
+- [Long Term Support](#long-term-support)
- Red Hat certified operator for OpenShift
-- Support on IBM Power
+- Support on IBM Power and z/Linux through partnership with IBM
+- [Oracle compatibility](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/epas/latest/fundamentals/epas_fundamentals/epas_compat_ora_dev_guide/) through EDB Postgres Advanced Sever
+- [Transparent Data Encryption (TDE)](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/tde/latest/) through EDB Postgres Advanced Server
- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes Plugin
-- Oracle compatibility through EDB Postgres Advanced Sever
- Velero/OADP cold backup support
- Generic adapter for third-party Kubernetes backup tools
@@ -107,18 +108,20 @@ You need a valid license key to use EDB Postgres for Kubernetes in production.
### Long Term Support
-EDB is committed to declaring one version of EDB Postgres for Kubernetes per
-year as a Long Term Support version. This version will be supported and receive
-maintenance releases for an additional 12 months beyond the last release of
-CloudNativePG by the community for the same version. For example, the last
-version of 1.18 of CloudNativePG was released on June 12, 2023. This was
-declared a LTS version of EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and it will be supported
-for additional 12 months until June 12, 2024. Customers can expect that they
-will have at least 6 months to move between LTS versions. So they should
-expect the next LTS to be available by January 12, 2024 to allow at least 6
-months to migrate. While we encourage customers to regularly upgrade to the
-latest version of the operator to take advantage of new features, having LTS
-versions allows customers desiring additional stability to stay on the same
+EDB is committed to declaring a Long Term Support (LTS) version of EDB
+Postgres for Kubernetes annually (1.18 was our first). Each LTS version will
+receive maintenance releases and be supported for an additional 12 months beyond
+the last community release of CloudNativePG for the same version.
+
+For example, the last version of 1.18 of CloudNativePG was released on June 12, 2023.
+Because this was declared an LTS version of EDB Postgres for Kubernetes, it will be supported
+for additional 12 months until June 12, 2024.
+
+In addition, customers will always have at least 6 months to move between LTS versions. This
+means a new LTS version will be available by January 12, 2024 at the latest.
+
+While we encourage customers to regularly upgrade to the latest version of the operator to take
+advantage of new features, having LTS versions allows customers desiring additional stability to stay on the same
version for 12-18 months before upgrading.
## Licensing
From a81ae444fe7a9c193f3f192b8a6b5030b23f5cca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 13:38:49 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 108/370] Update configuring_cli.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/cli/configuring_cli.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/cli/configuring_cli.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/cli/configuring_cli.mdx
index b1bc7a1f88a..8a3ba373087 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/cli/configuring_cli.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/cli/configuring_cli.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ PGD CLI can be installed on any system that can connect to the PGD cluster. To u
## PGD CLI and database connection strings
-You might not need a database connection string. For example, when Trusted Postgres Architect installs the PGD CLI on a system, it also configures the connection to the PGD cluster, which means that the PGD CLI connects when run.
+You might not need a database connection string. For example, when Trusted Postgres Architect installs the PGD CLI on a system, it also configures the connection to the PGD cluster, which means that the PGD CLI can connect to the cluster when run.
If you're installing PGD CLI manually, you must give PGD CLI a database connection string so it knows which PGD cluster to connect to.
From 700d7252f7a05ae550f9dfb0ddb7b13dbe624c16 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 14:26:43 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 109/370] typo
---
.../VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index a4a7734d758..3941a3964af 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeritasNetBackupforPostgreSQL/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
---
title: 'Partner information'
-description: 'Details of the parnter'
+description: 'Details of the partner'
redirects:
- /partner_docs/VeritasGuide/02-PartnerInformation/
---
From 72f1d0d3d21773be7c64e21ab423878c21c454af Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 16:15:47 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 110/370] Small edits to this biganimal content
---
.../biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx | 8 ++++----
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
index a866f5b2a69..2f97f75a835 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
@@ -249,7 +249,7 @@ You can list all deleted clusters using the `show-deleted-clusters` command and
### Restore a cluster
-BigAnimal continuously backs up your PostgreSQL clusters. Using the CLI, you can restore a cluster from its backup to any point in time as long as the backups are retained in the backup storage. The restored cluster can be in another region and with different configurations. You can specify new configurations in the `cluster restore` command. For example:
+BigAnimal continuously backs up your PostgreSQL clusters. Using the CLI, you can restore a cluster from its backup to any point in time as long as the backups are retained in the backup storage. The restored cluster can be in another region and have different configurations. You can specify new configurations in the `cluster restore` command. For example:
```shell
biganimal cluster restore\
@@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ You can restore a cluster in a single cluster to a primary/standby high-availabi
Use the BigAnimal `pgd` commands to create, retrieve information on, and manage distributed high-availability clusters.
!!!note
- In addition to the BigAnimal `pgd` commands, you can switch over and use additional commands available in the [EDB Postgres Distributed CLI](/pgd/latest/cli/) to perform PGD-specific operations. The only EDB Postgres Distributed CLI commands that aren't applicable with BigAnimal are `create-proxy` and `delete-proxy`.
+ In addition to the BigAnimal `pgd` commands, you can switch over and use commands available in the [EDB Postgres Distributed CLI](/pgd/latest/cli/) to perform PGD-specific operations. The only EDB Postgres Distributed CLI commands that don't apply to BigAnimal are `create-proxy` and `delete-proxy`.
### Create a distributed high-availability cluster
@@ -403,7 +403,7 @@ biganimal pgd show [--id] [--deleted]
### Restore a distributed high-availability cluster
-Restore a distributed high-availability cluster or a deleted distributed high-availability cluster to a new cluster on the same cloud provider. You can restore an active cluster or a deleted cluster within its retention period. You can only restore one data group. By default, the new cluster inherits all settings of the source cluster. You can change the cluster setting and database configurations by specifying new values in the configuration file.
+Restore a distributed high-availability cluster or a deleted distributed high-availability cluster to a new cluster on the same cloud provider. You can restore an active cluster or a deleted cluster within its retention period. You can restore only one data group. By default, the new cluster inherits all settings of the source cluster. You can change the cluster setting and database configurations by specifying new values in the configuration file.
The syntax of the command is:
@@ -438,7 +438,7 @@ dataGroups:
### Get distributed high-availability cluster connection information
-You first need to get your cluster group's connection information in order to connect to and use your BigAnimal distributed high-availability cluster.
+To connect to and use your BigAnimal distributed high-availability cluster, you first need to get your cluster group's connection information.
The syntax of the command is:
From 6d1111a323c4695a8e58cb45347f4b0e43c55f33 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 17:21:48 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 111/370] Light edits to reorged content
---
.../ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx | 26 +++++++++----------
.../01_creating_a_procedure.mdx | 2 +-
.../declaring_parameters.mdx | 6 ++---
.../about_transactions.mdx | 8 +++---
.../10_collections/about_collections.mdx | 2 +-
.../03_using_the_forall_statement.mdx | 7 +++--
.../13_triggers/02_types_of_triggers.mdx | 4 +--
.../06_compound_trigger.mdx | 2 +-
.../01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx | 6 ++---
.../01_basic_object_concepts/index.mdx | 4 +--
.../03_constructor_methods.mdx | 2 +-
.../about_optimizer_hints.mdx | 6 ++---
12 files changed, 39 insertions(+), 36 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
index 240bca41fd7..7570615a7ee 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ export PATH=$EDB_PATH:$PATH
A makefile contains a set of instructions that tell the make utility how to transform a program written in C that contains embedded SQL into a C program. To try the examples, you need:
-- A C compiler (and linker)
+- A C compiler and linker
- The make utility
- ECPGPlus preprocessor and library
- A makefile that contains instructions for ECPGPlus
@@ -62,14 +62,14 @@ LDLIBS += $(LIBPATH) -lecpg -lpq
ecpg -C PROC -c $(INCLUDES) $?
```
-The first two lines use the `pg_config` program to locate the necessary header files and library directories:
+The first two lines use the pg_config program to locate the necessary header files and library directories:
```sql
INCLUDES = -I$(shell pg_config --includedir)
LIBPATH = -L $(shell pg_config --libdir)
```
-The `pg_config` program is shipped with EDB Postgres Advanced Server.
+The pg_config program is shipped with EDB Postgres Advanced Server.
make knows to use the `CFLAGS` variable when running the C compiler and `LDFLAGS` and `LDLIBS` when invoking the linker. ECPG programs must be linked against the ECPG runtime library (`-lecpg`) and the libpq library (`-lpq`).
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ The make utility:
In the sample makefile, make includes the `-C` option when invoking ECPGPlus to invoke ECPGPlus in Pro\*C-compatible mode.
-If you include the `-C` `PROC` keywords on the command line, in addition to the ECPG syntax, you can use Pro\*C command line syntax. For example:
+If you include the `-C` `PROC` keywords at the command line, in addition to the ECPG syntax, you can use Pro\*C command line syntax. For example:
```shell
$ ecpg -C PROC INCLUDE=/usr/edb/as14/include acct_update.c
@@ -127,16 +127,16 @@ The command line options are:
| Option | Description |
| ------------ | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| -c | Automatically generate C code from embedded SQL code. |
-| -C *mode* | Use the `-C` option to specify a compatibility mode:
`INFORMIX`
`INFORMIX_SE`
`PROC` |
-| -D *symbol* | Define a preprocessor *symbol*.
The *-D* keyword is not supported when compiling in *PROC mode.* Instead, use the Oracle-style *‘DEFINE=’* clause. |
-| -h | Parse a header file, this option includes option `'-c'`. |
-| -i | Parse system, include files as well. |
-| -I directory | Search *directory* for `include` files. |
-| -o *outfile* | Write the result to *outfile*. |
-| -r *option* | Specify runtime behavior; *option* can be:
`no_indicator` - Don't use indicators, but instead use special values to represent NULL values.
`prepare` - Prepare all statements before using them.
`questionmarks` - Allow use of a question mark as a placeholder.
`usebulk` - Enable bulk processing for `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, and `DELETE` statements that operate on host variable arrays. |
+| -c | Generate C code from embedded SQL code. |
+| -C <mode> | Specify a compatibility mode:
`INFORMIX`
`INFORMIX_SE`
`PROC` |
+| -D <symbol> | Define a preprocessor symbol.
The -D keyword isn't supported when compiling in `PROC` mode. Instead, use the Oracle-style `‘DEFINE=’` clause. |
+| -h | Parse a header file. This option includes option `'-c'`. |
+| -i | Parse system. Include files as well. |
+| -I <directory> | Search for `include` files. |
+| -o <outfile> | Write the result to <outfile>. |
+| -r <option> | Specify runtime behavior. The value of <option> can be:
`no_indicator` — Don't use indicators, but instead use special values to represent NULL values.
`prepare` — Prepare all statements before using them.
`questionmarks` — Allow use of a question mark as a placeholder.
`usebulk` — Enable bulk processing for `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, and `DELETE` statements that operate on host variable arrays. |
| --regression | Run in regression testing mode. |
-| -t | Turn on `autocommit` of transactions. |
+| -t | Turn on autocommit of transactions. |
| -l | Disable `#line` directives. |
| --help | Display the help options. |
| --version | Output version information. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/04_procedures_overview/01_creating_a_procedure.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/04_procedures_overview/01_creating_a_procedure.mdx
index 2c53ad027ad..6b3eb1053d3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/04_procedures_overview/01_creating_a_procedure.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/04_procedures_overview/01_creating_a_procedure.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ The `CREATE PROCEDURE` command defines and names a standalone procedure that's s
If you include a schema name, then the procedure is created in the specified schema. Otherwise it's created in the current schema. The name of the new procedure must not match any existing procedure with the same input argument types in the same schema. However, procedures of different input argument types can share a name. This is called *overloading*.
!!! Note
- Overloading of procedures is an EDB Postgres Advanced Server feature. **Overloading of stored, standalone procedures isn't compatible with Oracle databases.**
+ Overloading of procedures is an EDB Postgres Advanced Server feature. Overloading of stored, standalone procedures isn't compatible with Oracle databases.
## Updating the definition of an existing procedure
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/06_procedure_and_function_parameters/declaring_parameters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/06_procedure_and_function_parameters/declaring_parameters.mdx
index 807061bacd6..a84ced4e434 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/06_procedure_and_function_parameters/declaring_parameters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/02_spl_programs/06_procedure_and_function_parameters/declaring_parameters.mdx
@@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ title: "Declaring parameters"
Declare parameters in the procedure or function definition, and enclose them in parentheses following the procedure or function name. Parameters declared in the procedure or function definition are known as *formal parameters*. When you invoke the procedure or function, the calling program supplies the actual data to use in the called program’s processing as well as the variables that receive the results of the called program’s processing. The data and variables supplied by the calling program when the procedure or function is called are referred to as the *actual parameters*.
-The following is the general format of a formal parameter declaration.
+The following is the general format of a formal parameter declaration:
```text
( [ IN | OUT | IN OUT ] [ DEFAULT ])
@@ -40,9 +40,9 @@ END;
In this example, `p_deptno` is an `IN` formal parameter, `p_empno` and `p_ename` are `IN OUT` formal parameters, and `p_job, p_hiredate` and `p_sal` are `OUT` formal parameters.
!!! Note
- In the example, no maximum length was specified on the `VARCHAR2` parameters and no precision and scale were specified on the `NUMBER` parameters. It's illegal to specify a length, precision, scale, or other constraints on parameter declarations. These constraints are inherited from the actual parameters that are used when the procedure or function is called.
+ In the example, no maximum length was specified on the `VARCHAR2` parameters, and no precision and scale were specified on the `NUMBER` parameters. It's illegal to specify a length, precision, scale, or other constraints on parameter declarations. These constraints are inherited from the actual parameters that are used when the procedure or function is called.
-The `emp_query` procedure can be called by another program, passing it the actual parameters. This example is another SPL program that calls `emp_query`.
+The `emp_query` procedure can be called by another program, passing it the actual parameters. This example is another SPL program that calls `emp_query`:
```sql
DECLARE
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/06_transaction_control/about_transactions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/06_transaction_control/about_transactions.mdx
index 42cc6364f32..2469034108f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/06_transaction_control/about_transactions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/06_transaction_control/about_transactions.mdx
@@ -6,10 +6,10 @@ A transaction begins when the first SQL command is encountered in the SPL progra
The transaction ends when one of the following occurs:
-- **An unhandled exception occurs**. In this case, the effects of all database updates made during the transaction are rolled back, and the transaction is aborted.
-- **A `COMMIT` command is encountered**. In this case, the effect of all database updates made during the transaction become permanent.
-- **A `ROLLBACK` command is encountered**. In this case, the effects of all database updates made during the transaction are rolled back, and the transaction is aborted. If a new SQL command is encountered, a new transaction begins.
-- **Control returns to the calling application** (such as Java or PSQL). In this case, the action of the application determines whether the transaction is committed or rolled back. The exception is when the transaction is in a block in which `PRAGMA AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION` was declared. In this case, the commitment or rollback of the transaction occurs independently of the calling program.
+- An unhandled exception occurs. In this case, the effects of all database updates made during the transaction are rolled back, and the transaction is aborted.
+- A `COMMIT` command is encountered. In this case, the effect of all database updates made during the transaction become permanent.
+- A `ROLLBACK` command is encountered. In this case, the effects of all database updates made during the transaction are rolled back, and the transaction is aborted. If a new SQL command is encountered, a new transaction begins.
+- Control returns to the calling application, such as Java or PSQL. In this case, the action of the application determines whether the transaction is committed or rolled back. The exception is when the transaction is in a block in which `PRAGMA AUTONOMOUS_TRANSACTION` was declared. In this case, the commitment or rollback of the transaction occurs independently of the calling program.
!!! Note
Unlike Oracle, DDL commands such as `CREATE TABLE` don't implicitly occur in their own transaction. Therefore, DDL commands don't cause an immediate database commit as in Oracle, and you can roll back DDL commands just like DML commands.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/10_collections/about_collections.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/10_collections/about_collections.mdx
index 312f99a6310..1071875345f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/10_collections/about_collections.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/10_collections/about_collections.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ The most commonly known type of collection is an array. In EDB Postgres Advanced
To set up a collection:
1. Define a collection of the desired type. You can do this in the declaration section of an SPL program, which results in a *local type* that you can access only in that program. For nested table and varray types, you can also do this using the `CREATE TYPE` command, which creates a persistent, *standalone type* that any SPL program in the database can reference.
-2. Declare variables of the collection type. The collection associated with the declared variable is *uninitialized* at this point if no value assignment is made as part of the variable declaration.
+2. Declare variables of the collection type. The collection associated with the declared variable is uninitialized at this point if no value assignment is made as part of the variable declaration.
## Initializing a null collection
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/03_using_the_forall_statement.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/03_using_the_forall_statement.mdx
index 2a5dc71c8cc..860cfa6e692 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/03_using_the_forall_statement.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/12_working_with_collections/03_using_the_forall_statement.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ redirects:
-You can use collections to process DML commands more efficiently by passing all the values to be used for repetitive execution of a `DELETE`, `INSERT`, or `UPDATE` command in one pass to the database server. The alternative is to reiteratively invoking the DML command with new values. Specify the DML command to process this way with the `FORALL` statement. In addition, provide one or more collections in the DML command where you want to subsitute different values each time the command is executed.
+You can use collections to process DML commands more efficiently by passing all the values to be used for repetitive execution of a `DELETE`, `INSERT`, or `UPDATE` command in one pass to the database server. The alternative is to reiteratively invoke the DML command with new values. Specify the DML command to process this way with the `FORALL` statement. In addition, provide one or more collections in the DML command where you want to subsitute different values each time the command is executed.
## Syntax
@@ -19,7 +19,10 @@ FORALL IN ..
## How it works
-If an exception occurs during any iteration of the `FORALL` statement, all updates that occurred since the start of the execution of the `FORALL` statement are rolled back. This behavior **isn't compatible** with Oracle databases. Oracle allows explicit use of the `COMMIT` or `ROLLBACK` commands to control whether to commit or roll back updates that occurred prior to the exception.
+If an exception occurs during any iteration of the `FORALL` statement, all updates that occurred since the start of the execution of the `FORALL` statement are rolled back.
+
+!!! Note
+ This behavior isn't compatible with Oracle databases. Oracle allows explicit use of the `COMMIT` or `ROLLBACK` commands to control whether to commit or roll back updates that occurred prior to the exception.
The `FORALL` statement creates a loop. Each iteration of the loop increments the `index` variable. You typically use the `index` in the loop to select a member of a collection. Control the number of iterations with the `lower_bound .. upper_bound` clause. The loop executes once for each integer between the `lower_bound` and `upper_bound` (inclusive), and the index increments by one for each iteration.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/02_types_of_triggers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/02_types_of_triggers.mdx
index 390529a1f64..347856c8faa 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/02_types_of_triggers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/02_types_of_triggers.mdx
@@ -12,9 +12,9 @@ redirects:
EDB Postgres Advanced Server supports *row-level* and *statement-level* triggers.
-- A *row-level trigger* fires once for each row that's affected by a triggering event. For example, suppose deletion is defined as a triggering event on a table, and a single `DELETE` command is issued that deletes five rows from the table. In this case, the trigger fires five times, once for each row.
+- A row-level trigger fires once for each row that's affected by a triggering event. For example, suppose deletion is defined as a triggering event on a table, and a single `DELETE` command is issued that deletes five rows from the table. In this case, the trigger fires five times, once for each row.
-- A *statement-level* trigger fires once per triggering statement, regardless of the number of rows affected by the triggering event. In the previous example of a single `DELETE` command deleting five rows, a statement-level trigger fires only once.
+- A statement-level trigger fires once per triggering statement, regardless of the number of rows affected by the triggering event. In the previous example of a single `DELETE` command deleting five rows, a statement-level trigger fires only once.
You can define the sequence of actions regarding whether the trigger code block executes before or after the triggering statement for statement-level triggers. For row-level triggers, you can define whether the trigger code block executes before or after each row is affected by the triggering statement.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/07_trigger_examples/06_compound_trigger.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/07_trigger_examples/06_compound_trigger.mdx
index 790774bb68d..9f267d486f1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/07_trigger_examples/06_compound_trigger.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/13_triggers/07_trigger_examples/06_compound_trigger.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ redirects:
## Defining a compound trigger on a table
-This example shows a compound trigger that records a change to the employee salary by defining a compound trigger (named `hr_trigger`) on the `emp` table.
+This example shows a compound trigger that records a change to the employee salary by defining a compound trigger named `hr_trigger` on the `emp` table.
1. Create a table named `emp`:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
index 37e4955855e..5a048e37fa7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
@@ -8,6 +8,6 @@ redirects:
Methods are SPL procedures or functions defined in an object type. Methods are categorized into three general types:
-- *Member methods* — Procedures or functions that operate in the context of an object instance. Member methods have access to and can change the attributes of the object instance on which they're operating.
-- *Static methods* — Procedures or functions that operate independently of any particular object instance. Static methods don't have access to and can't change the attributes of an object instance.
-- *Constructor methods* — Functions used to create an instance of an object type. A default constructor method is always provided when an object type is defined.
+- Member methods — Procedures or functions that operate in the context of an object instance. Member methods have access to and can change the attributes of the object instance on which they're operating.
+- Static methods — Procedures or functions that operate independently of any particular object instance. Static methods don't have access to and can't change the attributes of an object instance.
+- Constructor methods — Functions used to create an instance of an object type. A default constructor method is always provided when an object type is defined.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/index.mdx
index e6369debb98..89c4ee511b3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/index.mdx
@@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ redirects:
An object type is a description or definition of some entity. This definition of an object type is characterized by two components:
-- *Attributes* — Fields that describe particular characteristics of an object instance. For a person object, examples are name, address, gender, date of birth, height, weight, eye color, and occupation.
-- *Methods* — Programs that perform some type of function or operation on or are related to an object. For a person object, examples are calculating the person’s age, displaying the person’s attributes, and changing the values assigned to the person’s attributes.
+- Attributes — Fields that describe particular characteristics of an object instance. For a person object, examples are name, address, gender, date of birth, height, weight, eye color, and occupation.
+- Methods — Programs that perform some type of function or operation on or are related to an object. For a person object, examples are calculating the person’s age, displaying the person’s attributes, and changing the values assigned to the person’s attributes.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
index 2053696e50a..5b156e5b03d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION address
The body of the default constructor sets each member to `NULL`.
-To create a custom constructor, declare the constructor function (using the keyword constructor) in the `CREATE TYPE` command and define the construction function in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command. For example, you might want to create a custom constructor for the `address` type that computes the city and state given a `street_address` and `postal_code`:
+To create a custom constructor, using the keyword constructor, declare the constructor function in the `CREATE TYPE` command and define the construction function in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command. For example, you might want to create a custom constructor for the `address` type that computes the city and state given a `street_address` and `postal_code`:
```sql
CREATE TYPE address AS OBJECT
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/optimizing_code/05_optimizer_hints/about_optimizer_hints.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/optimizing_code/05_optimizer_hints/about_optimizer_hints.mdx
index 9e16c46c6d0..0fd018abed8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/optimizing_code/05_optimizer_hints/about_optimizer_hints.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/optimizing_code/05_optimizer_hints/about_optimizer_hints.mdx
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
title: "About optimizer hints"
---
-An *optimizer hint* is one or more directives embedded in a comment-like syntax that immediately follows a `DELETE`, `INSERT`, `SELECT` or `UPDATE` command. Keywords in the comment instruct the server to use or avoid a specific plan when producing the result set.
+An *optimizer hint* is one or more directives embedded in a comment-like syntax that immediately follows a `DELETE`, `INSERT`, `SELECT`, or `UPDATE` command. Keywords in the comment instruct the server to use or avoid a specific plan when producing the result set.
## Synopsis
@@ -23,8 +23,8 @@ If you're using the first form, the hint and optional comment might span multipl
Note:
- The database server always tries to use the specified hints if at all possible.
-- If a planner method parameter is set so as to disable a certain plan type, then this plan isn't used even if it is specified in a hint, unless there are no other possible options for the planner. Examples of planner method parameters are `enable_indexscan`, `enable_seqscan`, `enable_hashjoin`, `enable_mergejoin`, and `enable_nestloop`. These are all Boolean parameters.
-- The hint is embedded in a comment. As a consequence, if the hint is misspelled or if any parameter to a hint such as view, table, or column name is misspelled or nonexistent in the SQL command, there's no indication that an error occurred. No syntax error is given. The entire hint is silently ignored.
+- If a planner method parameter is set so as to disable a certain plan type, then this plan isn't used even if it's specified in a hint, unless there are no other possible options for the planner. Examples of planner method parameters are `enable_indexscan`, `enable_seqscan`, `enable_hashjoin`, `enable_mergejoin`, and `enable_nestloop`. These are all Boolean parameters.
+- The hint is embedded in a comment. As a consequence, if the hint is misspelled or if any parameter to a hint, such as view, table, or column name, is misspelled or nonexistent in the SQL command, there's no indication that an error occurred. No syntax error is given. The entire hint is silently ignored.
- If an alias is used for a table name in the SQL command, then you must use the alias name in the hint, not the original table name. For example, in the command `SELECT /*+ FULL(acct) */ * FROM accounts acct ..., acct`, you must specify the alias for `accounts` in the `FULL` hint, not in the table name `accounts`.
Use the `EXPLAIN` command to ensure that the hint is correctly formed and the planner is using the hint.
From ec1b3f1de5491fe5b536c2fa8b4bd072979f54df Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: kelpoole <44814688+kelpoole@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 15:21:41 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 112/370] Update architectures.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/architectures.mdx | 17 +++++++++++------
1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/architectures.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/architectures.mdx
index aee575d6b11..210ac0bcf2f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/architectures.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/architectures.mdx
@@ -94,12 +94,14 @@ they aren't part of the standard Always On architectures.
* Can be 3 data nodes (recommended)
* Can be 2 data nodes and 1 witness that doesn't hold data (not depicted)
* A PGD Proxy for each data node with affinity to the applications
- * Can be colocated with data node
+ * Can be colocated with data node (recommended)
+ * Can be located on a separate node
+ * Configuration and infrastructure symmetry of data nodes is expected to ensure proper resources are available to handle application workload when rerouted
* Barman for backup and recovery (not depicted)
* Offsite is optional but recommended
- * Can be shared by multiple clusters
+ * Can be shared by multiple PGD clusters
* Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM) for monitoring (not depicted)
- * Can be shared by multiple clusters
+ * Can be shared by multiple PGD clusters
### Always On multi-location
@@ -112,14 +114,17 @@ they aren't part of the standard Always On architectures.
* Can be 3 data nodes (recommended)
* Can be 2 data nodes and 1 witness which does not hold data (not depicted)
* A PGD-Proxy for each data node with affinity to the applications
- * can be co-located with data node
+ * can be co-located with data node (recommended)
+ * can be located on a separate node
+ * Configuration and infrastructure symmetry of data nodes and locations is expected to ensure proper resources are available to handle application workload when rerouted
* Barman for backup and recovery (not depicted).
- * Can be shared by multiple clusters
+ * Can be shared by multiple PGD clusters
* Postgres Enterprise Manager (PEM) for monitoring (not depicted).
- * Can be shared by multiple clusters
+ * Can be shared by multiple PGD clusters
* An optional witness node must be placed in a third region to increase tolerance for location failure.
* Otherwise, when a location fails, actions requiring global consensus are blocked, such as adding new nodes and distributed DDL.
+
## Choosing your architecture
All architectures provide the following:
From 836845aedb01b1a0ecaa35bab1031d07edd2cf0b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: kelpoole <44814688+kelpoole@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 17:53:36 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 113/370] Update index.mdx
removed Extreme HA nomenclature - (link may still need to be updated if path changes)
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
index e7d45925288..9101908990a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ navigation:
EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) is a multi-master replicating implementation of Postgres designed for high performance and availability. You can create database clusters made up of many bidirectionally synchronizing database nodes. The clusters can have a number of proxy servers that direct your query traffic to the most available nodes, adding further resilience to your cluster configuration.
!!! Note Fully managed BigAnimal
- If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as the Extreme High Availability option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal Extreme High Availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-preview).
+ If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as an option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal Distributed High Availability clusters](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-preview).
PGD is very configurable. To quickly evaluate and deploy PGD, use this quick start. It'll get you up and running with a fully configured PGD cluster using the same tools that you'll use to deploy to production. This quick start includes:
From 63a60c7013e4ff394e3a1956dcdd480a6b3d13eb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: kelpoole <44814688+kelpoole@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 18:13:29 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 114/370] Update deployments.mdx
updated deployment info
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 6 ++----
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index f57916d3e1b..743593a332a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,9 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account where it's operated by the Postgres experts. BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of extreme-high-availability support through EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) allows single-region Always On Gold clusters. These clusters are two PGD groups in different availability zones in a single cloud region, with a witness node in a third availability zone. See [Extreme high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-beta) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or an EDB hosted account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed, high availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-beta) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
-Coming soon:
-
-- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes will be a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It will cover the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift.
+- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From 1f02bee835dc73e048f85adee20d2a5e66367720 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 11:03:57 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 115/370] Added more in release notes
---
product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx | 1 +
2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
index 1e01310c8ab..9d0f9cb8b66 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -16,4 +16,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
| Bug Fix | Removed the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
| Bug Fix | Added the support to allow the webhook endpoint registration without providing the client SSL certificates and key files or CA certificates using `allow_insecure_webhooks` parameter in the `agent.cfg` file. Also set `ssl_verifypeer` parameter to `false` while establishing the connection with webhook endpoint. |
| Bug Fix | Improved the error message for better user understanding of put/post server REST API. |
-| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashbaord. |
\ No newline at end of file
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashbaord. |
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue with unformatted data while importing the audit logs. |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
index e7909211984..03b08dbda47 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
---
title: "Release notes"
navigation:
+ - 930_rel_notes
- 922_rel_notes
- 921_rel_notes
- 920_rel_notes
From c571b14ee1d32159d8de9053f56187544ea9feae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 11:36:38 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 116/370] Edited release notes
---
.../docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 11 +++++------
1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
index 9d0f9cb8b66..96a0525d819 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,15 +6,14 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
| Type | Description |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| Enhancement | Added the functionality to delete all the existing alert while using the copy alert feature. |
+| Enhancement | Added the functionality to delete all the existing alerts while using the copy alert feature. |
| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EPAS 16 support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
| Enhancement | Added support to customize the default email templates. |
-| Enhancement | Added the support to download the alert history report for agents and servers from the reports tab. |
+| Enhancement | Added support to download the alert history report for agents and servers from the reports tab. |
| Enhancement | Added options to reuse the existing agent SSL certificates and key files while configuring the PEM server. |
| Bug Fix | Added the functionality to add/view ignore mount points in the agent REST API. |
| Bug Fix | Added the `hostaddr` body parameter to the server REST API. |
-| Bug Fix | Removed the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
-| Bug Fix | Added the support to allow the webhook endpoint registration without providing the client SSL certificates and key files or CA certificates using `allow_insecure_webhooks` parameter in the `agent.cfg` file. Also set `ssl_verifypeer` parameter to `false` while establishing the connection with webhook endpoint. |
-| Bug Fix | Improved the error message for better user understanding of put/post server REST API. |
-| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashbaord. |
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue by removing the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
+| Bug Fix | Added support to allow the Webhook endpoint registration without providing the client SSL certificates and key files or CA certificates using `allow_insecure_webhooks` parameter in the `agent.cfg` file.|
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashboard. |
| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue with unformatted data while importing the audit logs. |
\ No newline at end of file
From 1e4040cdc1d1f01872b0485ec966473b03895b32 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 13:47:14 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 117/370] Edits done as per feedback from Shubam Tondare and
Shubham Agrawal
---
.../9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 6 +++---
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
index 1372d7d887e..8d3a039b251 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ When invoking the script, you can include command line options to specify config
| `-t` or `--type` | The installation type: Specify `1` if the configuration is for web services and backend database, `2` if you're configuring web services, or `3` if you're configuring the backend database. If you specify `3`, the database must reside on the local host. |
| `-un` or `--uninstall-pem-server` | The option to uninstall the PEM server. |
| `-nhc` or `--no-hba-change` | The option to skip the changes done to `pg_hba.conf` and `pg_config` files. |
-| `-uac` or `--use-agent-sslcert` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL certificates while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-uac` or `--use-agent-sslcert` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL certificate while configuring the PEM server. |
| `-uak` or `--use-agent-sslkey` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL key while configuring the PEM server. |
| `-h` or `--help` | The option to list all the available options while configuring the PEM server. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
index 96a0525d819..fe54a38d40a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -7,10 +7,10 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
| Type | Description |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Enhancement | Added the functionality to delete all the existing alerts while using the copy alert feature. |
-| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EPAS 16 support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
+| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EPAS 16 beta support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
| Enhancement | Added support to customize the default email templates. |
-| Enhancement | Added support to download the alert history report for agents and servers from the reports tab. |
-| Enhancement | Added options to reuse the existing agent SSL certificates and key files while configuring the PEM server. |
+| Enhancement | Added support to download the alert history report for agents and servers. |
+| Enhancement | Added options to reuse the existing agent SSL certificate and key file while configuring the PEM server. |
| Bug Fix | Added the functionality to add/view ignore mount points in the agent REST API. |
| Bug Fix | Added the `hostaddr` body parameter to the server REST API. |
| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue by removing the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
From 56d335b118bf7a1ff278bc01e2adc5ff08f67883 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 05:24:40 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 118/370] fixed link to BA docs
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 743593a332a..365f7b6ff22 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or an EDB hosted account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed, high availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-beta) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or an EDB hosted account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed, high availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From e2854896eeeeb40e39c10bd1ed5933e0ea7a8185 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 08:54:26 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 119/370] Replication Server: adding driver step to upgrade
instructions
---
.../eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/index.mdx | 3 ++-
.../upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_linux.mdx | 3 +++
.../upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx | 2 ++
.../upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx | 2 ++
4 files changed, 9 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/index.mdx
index 35567da06db..48eb227facf 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/index.mdx
@@ -15,11 +15,12 @@ It is assumed that you are installing Replication Server 7.x on the same host ma
If you are using a version of Replication Server earlier than 6.2.x on Linux, first upgrade to 6.2.x, and then upgrade to version 7.x. See:
- [Upgrading from a Replication Server 6.2 installation on Linux](upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package)
-
For more details on upgrading Replication Server, see:
- [Updating the publication and subscription server](updating_sub_and_pub_ports)
- [Upgrading from a Replication Server 7.x installation on Linux](upgrading_linux)
- [Upgrading with the graphical user interface installer](upgrading_with_gui_installer)
+After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink to it (for Linux) or rename the driver (for Windows). See [Installing a JDBC driver](enterprisedb.com/docs/eprs/latest/installing/installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
+
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_linux.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_linux.mdx
index 9649957e183..988eaf4f128 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_linux.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_linux.mdx
@@ -15,3 +15,6 @@ If you have an existing Replication Server 7.x installation on Linux, you can us
`yum upgrade edb-xdb*`
If you are upgrading from a Replication Server 6.2 installation on Linux, see [Upgrading from a Replication Server 6.2 installation on Linux](upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package) for details.
+
+After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink to it. See [Installing a JDBC driver](enterprisedb.com/docs/eprs/latest/installing/installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
+
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
index 6ea33561b9a..d15969f4d99 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
@@ -47,6 +47,8 @@ You can upgrade to Replication Server 7 using the graphical user interface insta
If you don't need to adjust the port numbers, register the publication server and subscription server with the Replication Server console as described in [Registering a publication server](../../05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/01_registering_publication_server/#registering_publication_server) and [Registering a subscription server](../../05_smr_operation/03_creating_subscription/01_registering_subscription_server/#registering_subscription_server). The existing replication systems appear in the replication tree of the Replication Server Console.
+After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink (for Linux) to it or rename the driver (for Windows). See [Installing a JDBC driver](enterprisedb.com/docs/eprs/latest/installing/installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
+
You are now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
!!! Note
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
index ef0d1a47e7e..97c6a720728 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
@@ -183,4 +183,6 @@ If you're using Replication Server 6.2.x that was installed using the Replicatio
If you don't need to adjust the port numbers, register the publication server and subscription server with the Replication Server console as described in [Registering a publication server](../../05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/01_registering_publication_server/#registering_publication_server) and [Registering a subscription server](../../05_smr_operation/03_creating_subscription/01_registering_subscription_server/#registering_subscription_server)). The existing replication systems appear in the replication tree of the Replication Server console.
+After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink to it. See [Installing a JDBC driver](enterprisedb.com/docs/eprs/latest/installing/installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
+
You are now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
From f8e108c2f53001fd6623615aa2f2b5acaecc67e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 10:20:06 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 120/370] BigAnimal: a few more name change misses
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx | 2 +-
.../using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx | 6 +++---
.../biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
index 8ade89424af..04deef53917 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ EDB reserves the right to upgrade customers to the latest minor version without
In some cases, these updates might terminate existing network connections to your clusters. If that happens, the outage is typically less than 30 seconds. Be sure your applications are configured to automatically reconnect when connections are interrupted. Most modern database libraries do this by default.
-If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly maintenance window for each cluster or each data group in the case of an extreme-high-availability cluster. BigAnimal displays a *scheduled maintenance* message on your cluster list four hours prior to the scheduled maintenance time to remind you of the upcoming maintenance window. This reminder allows you to make any necessary preparations, such as saving your work and closing any open connections. For more information on specifying maintenance windows, see [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance).
+If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly maintenance window for each cluster or each data group in the case of an distributed high-availability cluster. BigAnimal displays a *scheduled maintenance* message on your cluster list four hours prior to the scheduled maintenance time to remind you of the upcoming maintenance window. This reminder allows you to make any necessary preparations, such as saving your work and closing any open connections. For more information on specifying maintenance windows, see [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance).
## Connectivity issues after an automatic upgrade
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
index 22468f65f91..c70eceb791b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -25,14 +25,14 @@ You can also modify your cluster by installing Postgres extensions. See [Postgre
| Settings | Tab | Notes |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
- | Cluster type | **Cluster Info** | You can't switch from a single-node cluster or a high-availability cluster to an extreme-high-availability cluster or vice versa. |
+ | Cluster type | **Cluster Info** | You can't switch from a single-node cluster or a high-availability cluster to an distributed high-availability cluster or vice versa. |
| Number of replicas (for a high-availability cluster) | **Cluster Info** | — |
| Cluster name and password | **Cluster Settings** | — |
| Instance type | **Cluster Settings** | Changing the instance type can incur higher cloud infrastructure charges. |
| Volume type | **Cluster Settings** | You can't switch between the io2 and io2 Block Express volume types in an AWS cluster. |
| Volume properties | **Cluster Settings** | It can take up to six hours to tune IOPS or resize the disks of your cluster because AWS requires a cooldown period after volume modifications, as explained in [Limitations](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AWSEC2/latest/UserGuide/modify-volume-requirements.html). The volume properties are disabled and can't be modified while this is in progress. |
| Networking type (public or private) | **Cluster Settings** | If you're using Azure and previously set up a private link and want to change to a public network, you must remove the private link resources before making the change. |
- | Nodes (for an extreme-high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | — |
+ | Nodes (for an distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | — |
| Database configuration parameters | **DB Configuration** | If you're using faraway replicas, only a small subset of parameters are editable. These parameters need to be modified in the replica when increased in the replica's source cluster. See [Modify a faraway replica](/biganimal/latest/using_cluster/managing_replicas/#modify-a-faraway-replica) for details. |
| Retention period for backups | **Additional Settings** | — |
| Custom maintenance window | **Additional Settings** | Set or modify a maintenance window in which maintenance upgrades occur for the cluster. See [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance). |
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ You can also modify your cluster by installing Postgres extensions. See [Postgre
## Modify a data group
-You can modify the data groups in your extreme-high-availability cluster by editing the configuration settings.
+You can modify the data groups in your distributed high-availability cluster by editing the configuration settings.
1. Sign in to the [BigAnimal portal](https://portal.biganimal.com).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
index 55073ed6224..07a6eff2185 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ You can promote a faraway replica to a full-fledged cluster, which makes it capa
1. The cluster settings are populated with values inherited from the source cluster. You can edit the cluster settings while creating your cluster.
!!! NoteNotes
- - You can promote a faraway replica to a single node or high-availability cluster but not to an extreme-high-availability cluster.
+ - You can promote a faraway replica to a single node or high-availability cluster but not to an distributed high-availability cluster.
- While promoting a replica to a cluster, you can't modify the **Provider** and **Region** fields and the **Database Type** section or enable read-only workloads.
1. Select **Promote Replica**.
From 6748fb249e43e92afdb9e93b0cb11c6e13e536a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 10:49:28 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 121/370] update to terminology used in BA docs
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 365f7b6ff22..8bd88c5b120 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or an EDB hosted account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed, high availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From 036c2b210836982e89250e4e48805cb852b76538 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 11:14:28 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 122/370] Homepage: What's new - epas reorg
---
src/pages/index.js | 12 ++++++------
1 file changed, 6 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/src/pages/index.js b/src/pages/index.js
index 9ae45ffbb86..8358dcdc884 100644
--- a/src/pages/index.js
+++ b/src/pages/index.js
@@ -99,18 +99,18 @@ const Page = () => (
className="homepage-headling-link"
to="/pgd/latest/reference/"
>
- EDB Postgres Distributed's ready reference
+ Find the EPAS content you're looking for
- Use the new reference section in EDB Postgres Distributed to
- quickly look up views, catalogs, functions, and variables.
- It's a new view of the documentation designed to centralize
- essential information and speed up your development.
+ Whether you are an application programmer trying to debug your
+ programs or a DBA configuring your database, the new structure
+ of the EDB Postgres Advanced Server documentation makes
+ finding relevant content a snap.
From 82b42548c1eeec1df086b4a7c6d391fe24c202ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 11:22:47 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 123/370] fixed link (keeping preview until GA)
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 8bd88c5b120..ea5c28523f4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From 56945e6d8f5aa889c072bcf2819e8e61aca2921c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 11:36:36 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 124/370] fixed articles
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx | 2 +-
.../release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx | 4 ++--
.../biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
index 04deef53917..f232efe1632 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ EDB reserves the right to upgrade customers to the latest minor version without
In some cases, these updates might terminate existing network connections to your clusters. If that happens, the outage is typically less than 30 seconds. Be sure your applications are configured to automatically reconnect when connections are interrupted. Most modern database libraries do this by default.
-If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly maintenance window for each cluster or each data group in the case of an distributed high-availability cluster. BigAnimal displays a *scheduled maintenance* message on your cluster list four hours prior to the scheduled maintenance time to remind you of the upcoming maintenance window. This reminder allows you to make any necessary preparations, such as saving your work and closing any open connections. For more information on specifying maintenance windows, see [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance).
+If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly maintenance window for each cluster or each data group in the case of a distributed high-availability cluster. BigAnimal displays a *scheduled maintenance* message on your cluster list four hours prior to the scheduled maintenance time to remind you of the upcoming maintenance window. This reminder allows you to make any necessary preparations, such as saving your work and closing any open connections. For more information on specifying maintenance windows, see [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance).
## Connectivity issues after an automatic upgrade
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
index c70eceb791b..69f3e3dfed0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -25,14 +25,14 @@ You can also modify your cluster by installing Postgres extensions. See [Postgre
| Settings | Tab | Notes |
| ---------------------------------------------------- | ------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
- | Cluster type | **Cluster Info** | You can't switch from a single-node cluster or a high-availability cluster to an distributed high-availability cluster or vice versa. |
+ | Cluster type | **Cluster Info** | You can't switch from a single-node cluster or a high-availability cluster to a distributed high-availability cluster or vice versa. |
| Number of replicas (for a high-availability cluster) | **Cluster Info** | — |
| Cluster name and password | **Cluster Settings** | — |
| Instance type | **Cluster Settings** | Changing the instance type can incur higher cloud infrastructure charges. |
| Volume type | **Cluster Settings** | You can't switch between the io2 and io2 Block Express volume types in an AWS cluster. |
| Volume properties | **Cluster Settings** | It can take up to six hours to tune IOPS or resize the disks of your cluster because AWS requires a cooldown period after volume modifications, as explained in [Limitations](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AWSEC2/latest/UserGuide/modify-volume-requirements.html). The volume properties are disabled and can't be modified while this is in progress. |
| Networking type (public or private) | **Cluster Settings** | If you're using Azure and previously set up a private link and want to change to a public network, you must remove the private link resources before making the change. |
- | Nodes (for an distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | — |
+ | Nodes (for a distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | — |
| Database configuration parameters | **DB Configuration** | If you're using faraway replicas, only a small subset of parameters are editable. These parameters need to be modified in the replica when increased in the replica's source cluster. See [Modify a faraway replica](/biganimal/latest/using_cluster/managing_replicas/#modify-a-faraway-replica) for details. |
| Retention period for backups | **Additional Settings** | — |
| Custom maintenance window | **Additional Settings** | Set or modify a maintenance window in which maintenance upgrades occur for the cluster. See [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance). |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
index 07a6eff2185..2f0727e496a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/managing_replicas.mdx
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ You can promote a faraway replica to a full-fledged cluster, which makes it capa
1. The cluster settings are populated with values inherited from the source cluster. You can edit the cluster settings while creating your cluster.
!!! NoteNotes
- - You can promote a faraway replica to a single node or high-availability cluster but not to an distributed high-availability cluster.
+ - You can promote a faraway replica to a single node or high-availability cluster but not to a distributed high-availability cluster.
- While promoting a replica to a cluster, you can't modify the **Provider** and **Region** fields and the **Database Type** section or enable read-only workloads.
1. Select **Promote Replica**.
From 915f86a4bbf3864cce2a9f4dd7da571a291e7fa2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 12:32:25 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 125/370] updated links
---
src/pages/index.js | 7 ++-----
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/src/pages/index.js b/src/pages/index.js
index 8358dcdc884..89f663535ac 100644
--- a/src/pages/index.js
+++ b/src/pages/index.js
@@ -95,10 +95,7 @@ const Page = () => (
-
+
Find the EPAS content you're looking for
@@ -114,7 +111,7 @@ const Page = () => (
-
+
Find out more →
From 83760420bff9b1f1663b37affa9a5f79f5d26168 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:03:55 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 126/370] Update alerts.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
index b61ffe029d7..d84e2b4ed4b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/alerts.mdx
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Use the Quick Links toolbar to open dialog boxes and tabs for managing alerts:
- Select **Copy Alerts** to open the Copy Alert Configuration dialog box and copy an alert definition.
- Select **Alert Templates** to open the **Alert Template** tab and modify or create an alert template.
-- Select **Email Templates** to open the **Email Template** dialog, and modify the default email template to customize an email notification.
+- Select **Email Templates** to open the Email Template dialog box and modify the default email template to customize an email notification.
- Select **Email Groups** to open the **Email Groups** tab and modify or create an email group.
- Select **Webhooks** to open the **Webhooks** tab and create or manage the webhooks endpoints.
- Select **Server Configurations** to open the Server Configuration dialog box and review or modify server configuration settings.
From 463d846d32fb852db194e22d01ae5ade8242da93 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:08:06 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 127/370] Update notifications.mdx
---
.../docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
index 04ebaeec7a5..a0b726c4fc8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ These are the default email templates that are customizable:
- Job step
- Job step (Database server)
-If any of the default alert template is customized then a green tick mark is displayed against that template in the `Custom Template?` column.
+If any of the default alert template is customized, then a green tick mark is displayed against that template in the `Custom Template?` column.
Select the edit button to customize the email template:
From e669898a7de46434147efcabf53de9732a8ff731 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:11:18 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 128/370] Update notifications.mdx
---
.../docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx | 4 ++--
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
index a0b726c4fc8..8e6ff214bdf 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
@@ -289,9 +289,9 @@ Select the edit button to customize the email template:
![Email Template Edit](../images/email_template_edit.png)
-Edit the `Subject` and `Payload` fields, as needed, from the available list of placeholders.
+From the available list of placeholders, edit the **Subject** and **Payload** fields, as needed.
-Select the custom template and select the undo button at the top, to restore it as default template:
+To restore it as the default template, select the custom template and select the undo button at the top:
![Email Template Restore](../images/email_template_restore.png)
From 0ca72edc504bef7470732cca57d9724b61610331 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 10:14:21 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 129/370] OCL Connector: libpq requirement
---
.../ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx | 23 +++++++++++++++++++
.../15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
2 files changed, 25 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
index 46baa8d506e..417679a100b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
@@ -30,3 +30,26 @@ Where `` is the package manager used with your operating system
| apt-get | Debian and Ubuntu |
+## Upgrading libpq
+
+You may need to upgrade the EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq library to a required version on the client machine where you installed EDB OCL Connector. Any new libpq version dependencies are listed in the release notes. If you need to upgrade libpq, run the appropriate command for your operating system.
+
+### For Ubuntu/Debian
+
+```
+sudo apt-get install edb-as15-libpq5
+```
+
+### For RHEL and SLES
+
+```
+sudo install edb-as15-server-libs
+```
+
+Where `` is the package manager used with your operating system:
+
+| Package manager | Operating system |
+| --------------- | -------------------------------- |
+| dnf | RHEL 8/9 and derivatives |
+| yum | RHEL 7 and derivatives, CentOS 7 |
+| zypper | SLES |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
index a401f116870..69544d6e9a2 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -10,4 +10,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connecto
| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
!!!Important
- This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4 or later.
+ This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq version 15.4 or later on the client machine where the EDB OCL Connector is installed. See [Upgrading libpq](../installing/upgrading/#upgrading-libpq).
+
From 3b7b59b11cc996005987616097fbbc3e73287baf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:21:00 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 130/370] Update reports.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx | 18 +++++++++---------
1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
index 0d2c3ef1c79..14f217dd99d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ redirects:
You can generate the System Configuration report and Core Usage report for all locally and remotely managed servers. To generate this report, select **Management > Reports**.
-Reports has following options:
+Reports has the following options:
- Alert History Report (JSON)
- System Configuration Report (JSON)
@@ -23,23 +23,23 @@ Only superusers or the users with the pem_admin role can download the System Con
Information in these reports shows the latest probe run time.
-## Alert History Report
+## Alert History report
-The Alert History Report provides detailed information about the alerts history at the agent or server level in JSON format.
+The Alert History report provides detailed information about the alerts history at the agent or server level in JSON format.
-Go to `Management` menu, select `Reports` then select `Alert History Report`. A new dialogue box opens:
+Select **Management > Reports > Alert History Report**. A dialog box opens:
![Alert History Report](../images/alert_history_report_general.png)
-- **Agent/Server Name**— Select the agents and servers from the drop-down list. `Overall System Report` option is also available to generate a report for all the registered and active agents and servers.
+- **Agent/Server Name** — Select the agents and servers from the list. The **Overall System Report** option is also available to generate a report for all the registered and active agents and servers.
-- **Timeframe**— Select the required timeframe from the drop-down list.
+- **Timeframe** — Select the required timeframe from the list.
-- **Alert Types**— Select the alert types you wish to generate the alert history report for.
+- **Alert Types** — Select the alert types you want to generate the alert history report for.
-## System Configuration Report
+## System Configuration report
-The System Configuration Report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain Postgres Enterprise Manager, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
+The System Configuration report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain Postgres Enterprise Manager, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
The Postgres Enterprise Manager Summary provides details about:
From f266cee94be0bac522c7eee728d9ae789ef56fbe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:36:45 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 131/370] Update 02_methods.mdx
---
.../01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
index 5a048e37fa7..4e7ba1654be 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/01_basic_object_concepts/02_methods.mdx
@@ -8,6 +8,6 @@ redirects:
Methods are SPL procedures or functions defined in an object type. Methods are categorized into three general types:
-- Member methods — Procedures or functions that operate in the context of an object instance. Member methods have access to and can change the attributes of the object instance on which they're operating.
-- Static methods — Procedures or functions that operate independently of any particular object instance. Static methods don't have access to and can't change the attributes of an object instance.
-- Constructor methods — Functions used to create an instance of an object type. A default constructor method is always provided when an object type is defined.
+- **Member methods** — Procedures or functions that operate in the context of an object instance. Member methods have access to and can change the attributes of the object instance on which they're operating.
+- **Static methods** — Procedures or functions that operate independently of any particular object instance. Static methods don't have access to and can't change the attributes of an object instance.
+- **Constructor methods** — Functions used to create an instance of an object type. A default constructor method is always provided when an object type is defined.
From d5440e896a4c136d168f6fc2705eafa17ef80db5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:37:46 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 132/370] Update 03_constructor_methods.mdx
---
.../03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
index 5b156e5b03d..3ce3180cc15 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/03_creating_object_types/03_constructor_methods.mdx
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION address
The body of the default constructor sets each member to `NULL`.
-To create a custom constructor, using the keyword constructor, declare the constructor function in the `CREATE TYPE` command and define the construction function in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command. For example, you might want to create a custom constructor for the `address` type that computes the city and state given a `street_address` and `postal_code`:
+To create a custom constructor, using the keyword constructor, declare the constructor function in the `CREATE TYPE` command, and define the construction function in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command. For example, you might want to create a custom constructor for the `address` type that computes the city and state given a `street_address` and `postal_code`:
```sql
CREATE TYPE address AS OBJECT
From 1a4ccbf832bba2e99528bf7841e81f3f59f2896d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 14:47:45 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 133/370] refining language
---
.../15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx | 28 ++++++++++++++++++-
.../ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx | 22 ---------------
.../15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 28 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
index 078f6e096e6..2f5ea245c55 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
@@ -5,8 +5,34 @@ title: "libpq cross-version compatibility"
-EDB OCL installation always uses the latest libpq. The different scenarios supported under libpq cross-version compatibility are as following:
+EDB OCL installation always uses the latest libpq. The different scenarios supported under libpq cross-version compatibility are as following when upgrading to a new major release of EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS):
- If the latest libpq is installed on the machine, OCL uses it.
- If the latest libpq isn't already installed, OCL installs it. It doesn't use the existing libpq of older versions even if it's installed.
- If you upgrade the OCL version, then libpq is also upgraded to its latest version.
+
+If you are upgrading to a minor release, you need to manually upgrade libpq. See the following section for instructions.
+
+## Upgrading libpq for minor releases of EPAS
+
+For minor releases of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you may need to upgrade libpq to a required version on the client machine where you installed EDB OCL Connector. (Any new libpq version dependencies are listed in the release notes.) If you need to upgrade libpq, run the appropriate command for your operating system.
+
+### For Ubuntu/Debian
+
+```
+sudo apt-get install edb-as15-libpq5
+```
+
+### For RHEL and SLES
+
+```
+sudo install edb-as15-server-libs
+```
+
+Where `` is the package manager used with your operating system:
+
+| Package manager | Operating system |
+| --------------- | -------------------------------- |
+| dnf | RHEL 8/9 and derivatives |
+| yum | RHEL 7 and derivatives, CentOS 7 |
+| zypper | SLES |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
index 417679a100b..376b5dbdcfa 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/upgrading.mdx
@@ -30,26 +30,4 @@ Where `` is the package manager used with your operating system
| apt-get | Debian and Ubuntu |
-## Upgrading libpq
-You may need to upgrade the EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq library to a required version on the client machine where you installed EDB OCL Connector. Any new libpq version dependencies are listed in the release notes. If you need to upgrade libpq, run the appropriate command for your operating system.
-
-### For Ubuntu/Debian
-
-```
-sudo apt-get install edb-as15-libpq5
-```
-
-### For RHEL and SLES
-
-```
-sudo install edb-as15-server-libs
-```
-
-Where `` is the package manager used with your operating system:
-
-| Package manager | Operating system |
-| --------------- | -------------------------------- |
-| dnf | RHEL 8/9 and derivatives |
-| yum | RHEL 7 and derivatives, CentOS 7 |
-| zypper | SLES |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
index 69544d6e9a2..ecdef1079f4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -10,5 +10,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connecto
| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
!!!Important
- This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq version 15.4 or later on the client machine where the EDB OCL Connector is installed. See [Upgrading libpq](../installing/upgrading/#upgrading-libpq).
+ This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq version 15.4 or later on the client machine where the EDB OCL Connector is installed. See [Upgrading libpq for minor releases](../03_libpq_compatibility/#upgrading-libpq-for-minor-releases-of-epas).
From e5c26577be39898868423562bdf17b3a13572746 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 15:12:54 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 134/370] PGD: fixing link and tweaking language
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
index 9101908990a..7bd143a9660 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ navigation:
EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) is a multi-master replicating implementation of Postgres designed for high performance and availability. You can create database clusters made up of many bidirectionally synchronizing database nodes. The clusters can have a number of proxy servers that direct your query traffic to the most available nodes, adding further resilience to your cluster configuration.
!!! Note Fully managed BigAnimal
- If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as an option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal Distributed High Availability clusters](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability-preview).
+ If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as an option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal distributed high-availability clusters](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview).
PGD is very configurable. To quickly evaluate and deploy PGD, use this quick start. It'll get you up and running with a fully configured PGD cluster using the same tools that you'll use to deploy to production. This quick start includes:
From 90ba836020d4acfabc9c5854fca31c86c32ffd51 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 15:36:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 135/370] Edits to Commvault updates
---
.../02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 2 +-
...-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 12 ++--
.../05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx | 71 ++++++++++---------
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 4 +-
6 files changed, 49 insertions(+), 44 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 34a7b7cd7e0..a1ca60ece76 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ description: 'Details of the partner'
| **Partner product** | Commvault Backup & Recovery |
| **Website** | https://www.commvault.com/ |
| **Version** | Commvault Backup & Recovery 11.32 |
-| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers domprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server and PostgreSQL, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
+| **Product description** | Wherever your data resides, ensure availability by way of a single interface with Commvault Backup & Recovery. It offers comprehensive workload coverage, files, apps, and databases, including EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL, from a single extensible platform and user interface. Commvault Backup & Recovery provides a comprehensive backup and archiving solution for your trusted recovery, ransomware protection, and security. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index 0839f8fc321..130c61bd9d6 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -6,6 +6,6 @@ Commvault enables your business to streamline management of its continuously evo
Commvault PostgreSQL iDataAgent provides the flexibility to back up PostgreSQL, EDB Postgres Advanced Server, and EDB Postgres Extended Server databases in different modes and restore them when needed. You can perform a full/log backup or restore of database servers, individual databases, and archive logs at any time and have full control over the process.
-Managing your data means knowing that it's protected and being able to effectively report on success or failure. Through an easy-to-use interface, you can quickly check on the progress of your jobs to ensure things are moving as expected. To keep you in the know, you can also use prebuilt reports either on demand or on a scheduled basis.
+Managing your data means knowing that it's protected and being able to effectively report on success or failure. Through an easy-to-use interface, you can quickly check on the progress of your jobs to ensure things are moving as expected. To keep you in the know, you can also use prebuilt reports either on demand or on a scheduled basis.
![Commvault Architecture](Images/Final-SolutionSummaryImage.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index db7372a2446..2d350d56b2b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -5,13 +5,13 @@ redirects:
- /partner_docs/CommVaultGuide/04-ConfiguringCommvaultBackupandRecovery/
---
-Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server or PostgreSQL Server database requires the following components:
+Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, or PostgreSQL Server database requires the following components:
-- EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server or PostgreSQL Server
+- EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, or PostgreSQL Server
- Commvault Backup & Recovery software
!!! Note
- We refer to the EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server products as Postgres distribution. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
+ We refer to the EDB Postgres Advanced Server, EDB Postgres Extended Server, and PostgreSQL Server products as the Postgres distribution. The specific distribution type depends on your needs and preferences.
## Prerequisites
@@ -25,7 +25,7 @@ Implementing Commvault Backup & Recovery with an EDB Postgres Advanced Server, E
### Set up a disk storage pool
-1. From the machine where Commvault Backup & Recovery is installed, run the Core Setup wizard from the Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center. The wizard helps to set up a disk storage pool and to modify the server backup plan according to your requirements.
+1. From the machine where Commvault Backup & Recovery is installed, run the Core Setup wizard from the Commvault Backup & Recovery Command Center. The wizard helps to set up a disk storage pool and to modify the server backup plan according to your requirements.
2. Set up storage pool/disk storage. From the Welcome page, select **Let's get started**. On the **Disk** tab, in the **Name** box, enter a name for the storage pool.
3. In the **MediaAgent** box, accept the default value.
4. For **Type**, select **Local**.
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Next, create a server backup plan in Core Setup. To create a server backup plan
### Install a client on a Postgres distribution database
-1. From the Navigation pane of the Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center, select **Protect > Databases**.
+1. From the Navigation pane of the Commvault Backup & Recovery Command Center, select **Protect > Databases**.
2. Select **Add server**.
3. Select the database type for the Postgres distribution database, which in this case is **PostgreSQL**.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Next, create a server backup plan in Core Setup. To create a server backup plan
![Creating a Server Backup Plan in Core Setup](Images/ServerAdd6.png)
-### Configure the Postgres distribution instances to backup and protect
+### Configure the Postgres distribution instances to back up and protect
1. From the navigation pane, select **Protect > Databases > DB Instances**.
2. Select **Add instance**, and then select **PostgreSQL**.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
index 876a5d237cf..5305d86d7ff 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/05-UsingCommvaultBackupandRecovery.mdx
@@ -13,15 +13,15 @@ Commvault provides two methods of taking the backup from a Postgres distribution
- FSBasedBackupSet backup and restore
!!! Note
- At this time there is a known issue with FSBased Incremental/PITR Restore that does not allow for proper restoration of the database using the defined process. See the known issues section of the guide for more information and workaround.
+ At this time, there's a known issue with FSBased Incremental/PITR Restore that doesn't allow for proper restoration of the database using the defined process. See [Known issues](#known-issues) for more information and workarounds.
-### DumpBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
+### DumpBasedBackupSet backup and restore
Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
-## Taking DumpBasedBackupSet backup
+## Taking a DumpBasedBackupSet backup
-1. Open the Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center. From the navigation pane, select **Protect > Databases**.
+1. Open the Commvault Backup & Recovery Command Center. From the navigation pane, select **Protect > Databases**.
![Instances Page](Images/Dumpbackup1.png)
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
![Backup Section](Images/Dumpbackup4.png)
-6. in the Select Backup Level screen, select **Full**.
+6. In the Select Backup Level screen, select **Full**.
![Backup Level Screen](Images/Dumpbackup5.png)
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Dump-based backup uses the pg_dump utility to take the backup.
![Backup Job](Images/Dumpbackup7.png)
-## Restoring DumpBasedBackupSet backup
+## Restoring a DumpBasedBackupSet backup
You can use DumpBasedBackupSet to restore the individual databases.
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ You can use DumpBasedBackupSet to restore the individual databases.
![Recovery Points Calendar](Images/Dumprestore1.png)
4. Select a date from the calendar, and then select **Restore**.
-5. The Backup Content screen displays the databases to restore. Select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+5. The Backup Content screen displays the databases to restore. Select the required database to restore, or select all of them to restore all.
![Backup Content Screen](Images/Dumprestore2.png)
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ You can use DumpBasedBackupSet to restore the individual databases.
![Restore Job](Images/Dumprestore5.png)
-8. When the Restore has completed successfully, log in to the Postgres distribution database and check that the restore operation recovered the data. This example connected to an EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance:
+8. When the restore has completed successfully, log in to the Postgres distribution database and check that the restore operation recovered the data. This example connected to an EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance:
```bash
edb=#
@@ -158,34 +158,34 @@ epas13_test=#
```
-### FSBasedBackupSet Backup and Restore
+### FSBasedBackupSet backup and restore
A file system backup backs up data that resides on a Windows or UNIX computer.
-## Taking FSBasedBackupSet Backup
-1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center and from the navigation pane, go to **Protect > Databases**.
+## Taking a FSBasedBackupSet backup
+1. Open the Commvault Backup & Recovery Command Center. From the navigation pane, go to **Protect > Databases**.
-2. Click on the required instance.
+2. Select the required instance.
-3. In the **Backup sets** section, click on **FSBasedBackupSet** backup set.
+3. In the **Backup sets** section, select the **FSBasedBackupSet** backup set.
-4. In the **Database groups** section, click the database group that you want to back up. In this case it is **default**.
+4. In the **Database groups** section, select the database group that you want to back up. In this case, it's **default**.
-5. In the **Backup** section, click **Back up**.
+5. In the **Backup** section, select **Back up**.
-6. Choose between a Full or Incremental backup in the **Select Backup Level** screen, this example chose an incremental backup.
+6. In the **Select Backup Level** screen, choose between a full or incremental backup. This example uses an incremental backup.
![Select FSBased Backup Type](Images/SelectFSBasedBackupType.png)
-7. A job will be created to take the backup, which you can view by clicking on the **Job ID** for that backup.
+7. A job is created to take the backup. View the job by selecting the **Job ID** for that backup.
![FSBased Backup Job](Images/FSBasedBackupJob.png)
-8. When the job is complete, the information about the job can be found on the job's page.
+8. When the job is complete, you can find the information about the job on the job's page.
![FSBased Backup Job Details](Images/FSBasedBackupJobDetails.png)
-## Restoring FSBasedBackupSet Full Backup
-Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore or for a Linux file server to a standalone file server.
+## Restoring a FSBasedBackupSet full backup
+You can restore backed-up data for a subclient or an entire backup set using either an in-place restore, out-of-place restore, or, for a Linux file server, to a standalone file server.
1. Ensure that your Postgres distribution instance is stopped.
@@ -193,29 +193,29 @@ Backed up data can be restored for a subclient or an entire backup set with eith
3. From the Commvault navigation pane, go to **Protect > Databases**.
-4. Click the instance you want to restore.
+4. Select the instance you want to restore.
5. In the **Recovery Points** calender, select **FSBasedBackupSet**.
-6. Select a date where a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and click **Restore**.
+6. Select a date when a full FSBasedBackupSet was taken and select **Restore**.
-7. The **Backup Content** screen will display the databases to be restored, select the required database to restore or select all of them to restore all.
+7. The Backup Content screen displays the databases to restore. Select the required database to restore, or select all of them to restore all.
![FSBased Backup Restore Databases](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreDatabases.png)
-8. Click **Restore**.
+8. Select **Restore**.
-9. From the **Restore Options** screen, select where you want the restore to complete, in-place, out-of-place or restore to disk for a Linux server.
+9. From the Restore Options screen, select where you want the restore to complete: in-place, out-of-place, or restore to disk for a Linux server.
![FSBased Backup Restore Details](Images/FSBasedFullRestoreOptions.png)
-10. Select the **Destination Server** and **Destination Instance** and click on submit.
+10. Select the **Destination Server** and **Destination Instance**, and select **Submit**.
-11. A Job will be created to restore the backup.
+11. A job is created to restore the backup.
-12. When the Restore has completed successfully, Commvault will automatically start the server using the pg_ctl utility.
+12. When the restore has completed successfully, Commvault starts the server using the pg_ctl utility.
-13. You can check that the server was started successfully with a command like, `"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"` and it should return a message that the server is running.
+ You can check that the server was started successfully with a command like, `"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"`. It returns a message that the server is running.
```bash
C:\Program Files\edb\as15>"C:\Program Files\edb\as15\bin\pg_ctl" -U enterprisedb status -D "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"
@@ -223,9 +223,14 @@ pg_ctl: server is running (PID: 20896)
C:/Program Files/edb/as15/bin/edb-postgres.exe "-D" "C:\Program Files\edb\as15\data"
```
-14. If you would like the server to be controlled by a Services utility you will need to stop it with the pg_ctl utility and start it again in your Services utility, for example Services(Local) in Windows or systemctl in UNIX.
+14. If you want the server to be controlled by a Services utility, you need to stop it with the pg_ctl utility and start it again in your Services utility, for example, Services(Local) in Windows or systemctl in UNIX.
+
+15. After you start the service using your utility of choice, log in to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
+
+## Known issues
+
+FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with PostgreSQL server, EDB Postgres Advanced Server, and EDB Postgres Extended versions 13 and later. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres, and Postgres doesn't know how to reach that time target. Therefore, it fails. This can happen when there are no transactions between backup jobs.
-15. After you have started the service with your utility of choice, login to your EDB database and check that the restore operation recovered the data.
+A workaround for this issue is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the `postgresql.conf` file instead of using `recovery_target_time`.
-## Known Issues
-FSBaseBackupSet Incremental or Point-In-Time(PITR) Restore has issues with PostgreSQL server, EDB Postgres Advanced Server and EDB Postgres Extended versions 13 and onward. The behavior is due to a change that was made in Postgres version 13. From the release notes, `Generate an error if recovery does not reach the specified recovery target`. While Commvault does provide a time target for the recovery, the recovery is performed entirely by Postgres and Postgres does not know how to reach that time target, therefore it fails. This can happen when there are no transactions between backup jobs. A workaround for this solution is to always introduce a transaction scenario, such as a create and drop database, before doing a log backup. Another workaround is to use `recovery_target_lsn` in the postgresql.conf file instead of uisng `recovery_target_time`. Commvault is aware of this error on their side and is working on a fix.
+Commvault is aware of this error and is working on a fix.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 772fe4e5b5c..237e72146d0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Certification Test Date** | August 22, 2023 |
+| **Certification test date** | August 22, 2023 |
| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | 12, 13, 14, 15 |
| **EDB Postgres Extended Server** | 12, 13 |
| **Commvault Backup & Recovery** | 11.32 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index bdc628d1ec6..65dec90fb94 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/CommvaultBackupandRecovery/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -37,9 +37,9 @@ You can find Commvault logs using either of these methods:
- Gather some job-specific logs in the Commvault interface:
- 1. Open Commvault Backup & Recovery's Command Center. From the navigation pane, go to **Jobs > Job History**.
+ 1. Open the Commvault Backup & Recovery Command Center. From the navigation pane, go to **Jobs > Job History**.
- 2. Find the specific job you want to view logs for, and select `...` next to that job.
+ 2. Find the specific job you want to view logs for, and select **...** next to that job.
3. Select **View Logs**.
From 0e78882ae54a32f776cacba070a20b5f85278e2f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Fri, 25 Aug 2023 16:20:26 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 136/370] Light edits to this content
Mostly removing emphasis.
---
.../sql_reference/01_sql_syntax/01_lexical_structure.mdx | 8 ++++----
.../02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/sql_reference/01_sql_syntax/01_lexical_structure.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/sql_reference/01_sql_syntax/01_lexical_structure.mdx
index efa81536f45..e40a474410f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/sql_reference/01_sql_syntax/01_lexical_structure.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/reference/sql_reference/01_sql_syntax/01_lexical_structure.mdx
@@ -10,17 +10,17 @@ redirects:
-There are several aspects to the lexical structure of SQL:
+The lexical structure of SQL has several aspects:
- SQL input consists of a sequence of commands.
-- A *command* is composed of a sequence of *tokens*, terminated by a semicolon (;). The end of the input stream also terminates a command.
+- A command is composed of a sequence of tokens, terminated by a semicolon (;). The end of the input stream also terminates a command.
- The valid tokens depend on the syntax of the command.
-- A token can be a *key word*, an *identifier*, a *quoted identifier*, a *literal* (or *constant*), or a special character symbol. Tokens are normally separated by *whitespace* (space, tab, new line) but don't need to be if there's no ambiguity (which is generally the case only if a special character is adjacent to some other token type).
+- A token can be a key word, an identifier, a quoted identifier, a literal or constant, or a special character symbol. Tokens are normally separated by whitespace (space, tab, new line) but don't need to be if there's no ambiguity. This is generally the case only if a special character is adjacent to some other token type.
-- *Comments* can occur in SQL input. They aren't tokens; they are equivalent to whitespace.
+- Comments can occur in SQL input. They aren't tokens. They are equivalent to whitespace.
For example, the following is syntactically valid SQL input:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
index f8f8a938d72..e22b9e455dc 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/working_with_oracle_data/02_enhanced_compatibility_features.mdx
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server includes extended functionality that provides compa
You can install EDB Postgres Advanced Server in several ways to enable compatibility features:
-- Use the `INITDBOPTS` variable in the EDB Postgres Advanced Server service configuration file to specify `--redwood-like` **before initializing your cluster**.
+- Before initializing your cluster, use the `INITDBOPTS` variable in the EDB Postgres Advanced Server service configuration file to specify `--redwood-like`.
- Include the `--redwood-like` parameter when using `initdb` to initialize your cluster.
See [Configuration parameters compatible with Oracle databases](../reference/database_administrator_reference/02_summary_of_configuration_parameters/) and [Managing an EDB Postgres Advanced Server installation](../installing/linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/) for more information about the installation options supported by the EDB Postgres Advanced Server installers.
From 5b82bc23a99b0ea8f0d7eee914c96774b002e6b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Sun, 27 Aug 2023 05:51:29 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 137/370] fixed left angle bracket
---
.../ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
index 7570615a7ee..29605d0a77d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/application_programming/ecpgplus_guide/installing_ecpgplus.mdx
@@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ The command line options are:
| -D <symbol> | Define a preprocessor symbol.
The -D keyword isn't supported when compiling in `PROC` mode. Instead, use the Oracle-style `‘DEFINE=’` clause. |
| -h | Parse a header file. This option includes option `'-c'`. |
| -i | Parse system. Include files as well. |
-| -I <directory> | Search for `include` files. |
+| -I <directory> | Search <directory> for `include` files. |
| -o <outfile> | Write the result to <outfile>. |
| -r <option> | Specify runtime behavior. The value of <option> can be:
`no_indicator` — Don't use indicators, but instead use special values to represent NULL values.
`prepare` — Prepare all statements before using them.
`questionmarks` — Allow use of a question mark as a placeholder.
`usebulk` — Enable bulk processing for `INSERT`, `UPDATE`, and `DELETE` statements that operate on host variable arrays. |
| --regression | Run in regression testing mode. |
From 8f1e612f3a6172cff0defc3426f6e3b7d127b5c4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 14:11:28 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 138/370] Edited as per review comments from Betsy
---
.../9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx | 15 ++++-----------
.../docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx | 4 +---
3 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 15 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
index 8e6ff214bdf..a282fd81d8e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ After confirming that Nagios is configured correctly, restart the Nagios service
## Customizing email templates
-Postgres Enterprise Manager monitors your system for conditions that require user attention and sends email notifications. Use the `Email Templates` to customize the email subject and the payload that the server sends if the current values deviate from the threshold values specified by an alert.
+Postgres Enterprise Manager monitors your system for conditions that require user attention and sends email notifications. Use the **Email Templates** to customize the email subject and the payload that the server sends if the current values deviate from the threshold values specified by an alert.
These are the default email templates that are customizable:
@@ -283,15 +283,8 @@ These are the default email templates that are customizable:
- Job step
- Job step (Database server)
-If any of the default alert template is customized, then a green tick mark is displayed against that template in the `Custom Template?` column.
+To customize the email template, select the edit button next to the email template name. Edit the **Subject** and **Payload** fields, as needed from the available list of placeholders. After modifying the field values, select the **Save** in the lower-right corner.
-Select the edit button to customize the email template:
-
-![Email Template Edit](../images/email_template_edit.png)
-
-From the available list of placeholders, edit the **Subject** and **Payload** fields, as needed.
-
-To restore it as the default template, select the custom template and select the undo button at the top:
-
-![Email Template Restore](../images/email_template_restore.png)
+If any of the default email templates are customized, then a green tick mark is displayed for that template in the `Custom Template?` column on the **Email Templates** tab.
+To restore the customized email template as the default template, select the custom template and select the undo button at the top on the **Email Templates** tab.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
index fe54a38d40a..c8012cd752b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -15,5 +15,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
| Bug Fix | Added the `hostaddr` body parameter to the server REST API. |
| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue by removing the newline character in the alert details from the payload of Webhook. |
| Bug Fix | Added support to allow the Webhook endpoint registration without providing the client SSL certificates and key files or CA certificates using `allow_insecure_webhooks` parameter in the `agent.cfg` file.|
-| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM's Barman dashboard. |
+| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue related to the backup sizes displaying on the PEM Barman dashboard. |
| Bug Fix | Fixed an issue with unformatted data while importing the audit logs. |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
index 14f217dd99d..f81d03c01e7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
@@ -27,9 +27,7 @@ Information in these reports shows the latest probe run time.
The Alert History report provides detailed information about the alerts history at the agent or server level in JSON format.
-Select **Management > Reports > Alert History Report**. A dialog box opens:
-
-![Alert History Report](../images/alert_history_report_general.png)
+Select **Management > Reports > Alert History Report**. From the dialog box, select your options:
- **Agent/Server Name** — Select the agents and servers from the list. The **Overall System Report** option is also available to generate a report for all the registered and active agents and servers.
From 8739b919015a413d74153ce4a962d431cc8c8ce5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Sat, 26 Aug 2023 13:43:57 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 139/370] Updates with final CVEs
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../security/advisories/cve20074639.mdx | 2 +-
.../security/advisories/cve201910128.mdx | 2 +-
.../security/advisories/cve202331043.mdx | 2 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx3.mdx => cve202341113.mdx} | 13 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx6.mdx => cve202341114.mdx} | 13 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx7.mdx => cve202341115.mdx} | 14 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx5.mdx => cve202341116.mdx} | 16 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx1.mdx => cve202341117.mdx} | 13 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx4.mdx => cve202341118.mdx} | 13 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx2.mdx => cve202341119.mdx} | 13 +-
.../{cve2023xxxxx8.mdx => cve202341120.mdx} | 13 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx | 145 +++++++++---------
advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx | 134 ++++++++--------
13 files changed, 201 insertions(+), 192 deletions(-)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx3.mdx => cve202341113.mdx} (77%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx6.mdx => cve202341114.mdx} (79%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx7.mdx => cve202341115.mdx} (84%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx5.mdx => cve202341116.mdx} (84%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx1.mdx => cve202341117.mdx} (80%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx4.mdx => cve202341118.mdx} (80%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx2.mdx => cve202341119.mdx} (78%)
rename advocacy_docs/security/advisories/{cve2023xxxxx8.mdx => cve202341120.mdx} (82%)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve20074639.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve20074639.mdx
index c6bcadfe967..87c6c3bb631 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve20074639.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve20074639.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: EDB Advanced Server 8.2 improperly handles debugging function calls
+title: CVE-2007-4639 - EDB Advanced Server 8.2 improperly handles debugging function calls
navTitle: CVE-2007-4639
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve201910128.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve201910128.mdx
index c1d8586d38f..1625190c580 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve201910128.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve201910128.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: EDB supplied PostgreSQL inherits ACL for installation directory
+title: CVE-2019-10128 - EDB supplied PostgreSQL inherits ACL for installation directory
navTitle: CVE-2019-10128
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202331043.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202331043.mdx
index 5bae8969359..bbdace27441 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202331043.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202331043.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) logs unredacted passwords prior to 14.6.0
+title: CVE-2023-31043 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) logs unredacted passwords prior to 14.6.0
navTitle: CVE-2023-31043
---
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
similarity index 77%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
index 9eeffc826cb..e9c67e52f30 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-3
+title: CVE-2023-41113 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41113
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 allow an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents regardless of permissions. This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents (regardless of permissions). This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-3
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41113
CVSS Base Score: 4.3
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing d
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
similarity index 79%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
index 4d12fc9d97b..8fb4c6a9d37 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-6
+title: CVE-2023-41114 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41114
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the functions get_url_as_text and get_url_as_bytea. These functions are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the functions get_url_as_text and get_url_as_bytea that are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-6
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41114
CVSS Base Score: 6.5
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -69,6 +69,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
similarity index 84%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
index f4be16f2e63..43a171e6f74 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-7
+title: CVE-2023-41115 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41115
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0, using UTL_ENCODE allows an authenticated user to read any large object, regardless of that users permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. When using UTL_ENCODE, an authenticated user can read any large object, regardless of that user's permissions.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-7
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41115
CVSS Base Score: 6.5
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing d
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 14th 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -71,6 +71,8 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
similarity index 84%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
index 66ae38b4c2d..2183c207db8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,22 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-5
+title: CVE-2023-41116 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41116
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) up to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 using DBMS_MVIEW allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized view, regardless of that user’s permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before
+11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and
+15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized
+view, regardless of that user's permissions.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-5
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41116
CVSS Base Score: 4.3
@@ -45,7 +48,7 @@ Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing d
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -71,6 +74,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
similarity index 80%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
index 869b2456e8b..956850f22f1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-1
+title: CVE-2023-41117 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41117
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain packages, standalone packages and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contain packages, standalone packages, and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-1
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41117
CVSS Base Score: 8.8
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -68,6 +68,7 @@ Source: TBD
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
similarity index 80%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
index 8df45b62dfa..10947eb6eb8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-4
+title: CVE-2023-41118 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41118
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-4
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41118
CVSS Base Score: 8.8
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing d
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -71,6 +71,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
similarity index 78%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
index db7df82c0a1..cb7a1141fa1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-2
+title: CVE-2023-41119 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41119
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue which may be used to elevate a user’s privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, then accesses that table as the superuser using SELECT and DML commands.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue that may be used to elevate a user's privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, and then accesses that table as the superuser by using SELECT and DML commands.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-2
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41119
CVSS Base Score: 8.8
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -69,6 +69,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
similarity index 82%
rename from advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8.mdx
rename to advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
index cc5af3eeada..36b0918f025 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
@@ -1,19 +1,19 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
-navTitle: CVE-2023-XXXXX-8
+title: CVE-2023-41120 - EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
+navTitle: CVE-2023-41120
---
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/21
+Last Updated: 2023/08/28
## Summary
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 permit an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user’s permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It permits an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user's permissions.
## Vulnerability details
-CVE-ID: CVE-2023-XXXXX-8
+CVE-ID: CVE-2023-41120
CVSS Base Score: 6.5
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing d
| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of August 21st 2023
+No updates as of 28 August 2023
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -70,6 +70,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
index 36d55754a2e..baf3c369dd8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
@@ -5,158 +5,153 @@ iconName: Security
hideKBLink: true
hideToC: false
navigation:
-- cve2023xxxxx8
-- cve2023xxxxx7
-- cve2023xxxxx6
-- cve2023xxxxx5
-- cve2023xxxxx4
-- cve2023xxxxx3
-- cve2023xxxxx2
-- cve2023xxxxx1
+- cve202341120
+- cve202341119
+- cve202341118
+- cve202341117
+- cve202341116
+- cve202341115
+- cve202341114
+- cve202341113
- cve202331043
- cve201910128
- cve20074639
---
-!!! Note
-Advisories with numbers in the format `CVE-YYYY-XXXXX-n` are submitted and pending full number assignment.
-!!!
-
## Updated 2023
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain packages, standalone packages and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It permits an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
-
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser
All EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) versions prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue which may be used to elevate a user’s privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, then accesses that table as the superuser using SELECT and DML commands.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue that may be used to elevate a user's privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, and then accesses that table as the superuser by using SELECT and DML commands.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/2128
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass
-
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
-
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 allow an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents regardless of permissions. This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
-Read More...
-
-
-
-
-
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
+
+Read More...
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
+Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contain packages, standalone packages, and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
-Read More...
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) up to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 using DBMS_MVIEW allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized view, regardless of that user’s permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized view, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/28
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) up to 11.21,32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the functions `get_url_as_text` and `get_url_as_bytea`. These functions are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. When using UTL_ENCODE, an authenticated user can read any large object, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0, using UTL_ENCODE allows an authenticated user to read any large object, regardless of that users permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the functions get_url_as_text and get_url_as_bytea that are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/28
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 permit an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user’s permissions.
-
-Read More...
-
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents (regardless of permissions). This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
+
+Read More...
+
+
+
CVE-2023-31043
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
index 1780c405865..640abdeecc1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
@@ -23,143 +23,145 @@ This policy outlines how EnterpriseDB handles disclosures related to suspected v
## Most Recent Advisories
-!!! Note
-Advisories with numbers in the format `CVE-YYYY-XXXXX-n` are submitted and pending full number assignment.
-!!!
-
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain packages, standalone packages and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It permits an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
-
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser
All EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) versions prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue which may be used to elevate a user’s privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, then accesses that table as the superuser using SELECT and DML commands.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the function _dbms_aq_move_to_exception_queue that may be used to elevate a user's privileges to superuser. This function accepts the OID of a table, and then accesses that table as the superuser by using SELECT and DML commands.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/2128
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass
-
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
-
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 allow an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents regardless of permissions. This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
-Read More...
-
-
-
-
-
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
+
+Read More...
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path
+
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
+Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 may allow an authenticated user to bypass authorization requirements and access underlying implementation functions. When a superuser has configured file locations using CREATE DIRECTORY, these functions allow users to take a wide range of actions, including read, write, copy, rename, and delete.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contain packages, standalone packages, and functions that run SECURITY DEFINER but are inadequately secured against search_path attacks.
-Read More...
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) up to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 using DBMS_MVIEW allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized view, regardless of that user’s permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to refresh any materialized view, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/28
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) up to 11.21,32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 contain the functions `get_url_as_text` and `get_url_as_bytea`. These functions are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. When using UTL_ENCODE, an authenticated user can read any large object, regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
+ Read Advisory
+ Updated: 2023/08/28
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0, using UTL_ENCODE allows an authenticated user to read any large object, regardless of that users permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It contains the functions get_url_as_text and get_url_as_bytea that are publicly executable, thus permitting an authenticated user to read any file from the local filesystem or remote system regardless of that user's permissions.
-Read More...
+Read More...
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
Summary:
-All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0 and 15.4.0 permit an authenticated user to use DBMS_PROFILER to remove all accumulated profiling data on a system-wide basis, regardless of that user’s permissions.
+An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 11.21.32, 12.x before 12.16.20, 13.x before 13.12.16, 14.x before 14.9.0, and 15.x before 15.4.0. It allows an authenticated user to to obtain information about whether certain files exist on disk, what errors if any occur when attempting to read them, and some limited information about their contents (regardless of permissions). This can occur when a superuser has configured one or more directories for filesystem access via CREATE DIRECTORY and adopted certain non-default settings for log_line_prefix and log_connections.
-Read More...
-
>
);
diff --git a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
index 59f6e46a8ce..f93a968b89b 100644
--- a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
@@ -34,9 +34,6 @@ const removeTrailingSlash = (url) => {
return url;
};
-const isPathAnIndexPage = (filePath) =>
- filePath.endsWith("/index.mdx") || filePath === "index.mdx";
-
const removeNullEntries = (obj) => {
if (!obj) return obj;
for (const [key, value] of Object.entries(obj)) {
@@ -267,11 +264,14 @@ const preprocessPathsAndRedirects = (nodes, productVersions) => {
node.fields.docType === "doc" &&
productVersions[node.fields.product][0] === node.fields.version;
const nodePathLatest = isLatest && replacePathVersion(nodePath);
- const addPath = (url) =>
- validPaths.set(url, {
+ const addPath = (url) => {
+ let value = validPaths.get(url) || [];
+ value.push({
urlpath: nodePathLatest || nodePath,
filepath: node.fileAbsolutePath,
});
+ if (value.length === 1) validPaths.set(url, value);
+ };
addPath(nodePath);
if (isLatest) {
@@ -284,32 +284,6 @@ const preprocessPathsAndRedirects = (nodes, productVersions) => {
if (!redirects || !redirects.length) continue;
const newRedirects = new Set();
- const addNewRedirect = (redirect) => {
- if (validPaths.has(redirect)) {
- const existing = validPaths.get(redirect);
- const existingIsRedirect = existing.urlpath !== redirect;
- if (isGHBuild) {
- console.warn(`
-::warning file=${
- node.fileAbsolutePath
- },title=Overlapping redirect::Redirect ${redirect} matches another ${
- existingIsRedirect ? "redirect pointing to" : "page at"
- }: https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/blob/${ghBranch}/${path.relative(
- process.cwd(),
- existing.filepath,
- )}`);
- } else {
- console.warn(
- `Redirect ${redirect} for page ${nodePath} matches the path of a ${
- existingIsRedirect
- ? "redirect added in the page at"
- : "page already added"
- } ${existing.filepath} and will be ignored!`,
- );
- }
- }
- newRedirects.add(redirect);
- };
for (let redirect of redirects) {
if (!redirect) continue;
@@ -338,7 +312,7 @@ const preprocessPathsAndRedirects = (nodes, productVersions) => {
path.sep,
);
- if (fromPath !== nodePath) addNewRedirect(fromPath);
+ if (fromPath !== nodePath) newRedirects.add(fromPath);
}
for (let redirect of newRedirects) addPath(redirect);
@@ -348,17 +322,36 @@ const preprocessPathsAndRedirects = (nodes, productVersions) => {
return validPaths;
};
-const configureRedirects = (
- toPath,
- redirects,
- actions,
- versions,
- pathVersions,
-) => {
+const configureRedirects = (productVersions, node, validPaths, actions) => {
+ const toPath = node.fields.path;
+ const redirects = node.frontmatter.redirects || [];
+ const versions =
+ node.fields.docType === "doc"
+ ? productVersions[node.fields.product] || []
+ : [];
+
+ // all versions for this path.
+ // Null entries for versions that don't exist. Will try to match redirects to avoid this, but won't follow redirect chains
+ // Canonical version is the first non-null in the list, e.g. pathVersions.filter((p) => !!p)[0]
+ const allPaths = [node.fields.path, ...(redirects || [])];
+ const pathVersions = versions.map((v, i) => {
+ const versionPaths = allPaths.map((p) => replacePathVersion(p, v));
+ const match = versionPaths.find((vp) => validPaths.has(vp));
+ if (!match) return null;
+ const sources = validPaths.get(match);
+ // this is problematic situation: multiple sources (pages, redirects) exist for this version
+ // the first one will usually "win" - unless one is a page, in which case that will win.
+ // we'll warn about this later on
+ return (
+ sources.find((p) => p.urlpath === match)?.urlpath || sources[0].urlpath
+ );
+ });
+
const splitToPath = toPath.split(path.sep);
const isLatest = splitToPath[2] === "latest";
const lastVersionPath = pathVersions.find((p) => !!p);
const isLastVersion = toPath === lastVersionPath;
+
// latest version should always redirect to .../latest/...
if (isLatest) {
actions.createRedirect({
@@ -382,8 +375,6 @@ const configureRedirects = (
});
}
- if (!redirects) return;
-
for (let fromPath of redirects) {
if (!fromPath) continue;
if (fromPath !== toPath) {
@@ -434,15 +425,79 @@ const configureRedirects = (
const toIsLatest = isLatest || isLastVersion;
if (toIsLatest) {
fromPath = replacePathVersion(fromPath);
- if (fromPath !== toPath)
+ if (fromPath !== toPath) {
+ let value = validPaths.get(fromPath) || [];
+ value.push({
+ urlpath: toPath,
+ filepath: node.fileAbsolutePath,
+ });
+ if (value.length === 1) validPaths.set(fromPath, value);
actions.createRedirect({
fromPath,
toPath,
redirectInBrowser: false,
isPermanent: false,
});
+ }
}
}
+
+ return pathVersions;
+};
+
+const reportRedirectCollisions = (validPaths, reporter) => {
+ let collisionCount = 0,
+ sourceCount = 0;
+ for (const [urlpath, sources] of validPaths) {
+ if (sources.length <= 1) continue;
+
+ collisionCount += 1;
+ sourceCount += sources.length;
+
+ for (const source of sources) {
+ if (source.urlpath === urlpath) continue;
+ if (isGHBuild) {
+ let list = sources
+ .filter((s) => s !== source)
+ .map((existing) => {
+ const existingIsRedirect = existing.urlpath !== urlpath;
+ return ` - ${
+ existingIsRedirect ? "redirect" : "page"
+ } at https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/docs/blob/${ghBranch}/${path.relative(
+ process.cwd(),
+ existing.filepath,
+ )}`;
+ })
+ .join("\n");
+ reporter.warn(`
+::warning file=${
+ source.filepath
+ },title=Overlapping redirect found in::Redirect ${urlpath} also matches matches ${(
+ "\n" + list
+ )
+ .replace(/%/g, "%25")
+ .replace(/\r/g, "%0D")
+ .replace(/\n/g, "%0A")}`);
+ } else {
+ let list = sources
+ .filter((s) => s !== source)
+ .map((existing) => {
+ const existingIsRedirect = existing.urlpath !== urlpath;
+ return ` - ${
+ existingIsRedirect ? "redirect" : "page"
+ } at ${path.relative(process.cwd(), existing.filepath)}`;
+ })
+ .join("\n");
+ reporter.warn(`Redirect ${urlpath} for page ${source.filepath} matches the path of
+${list}`);
+ break; // reduce noise: only report once for each collision on non-CI builds
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+ reporter.info(
+ `redirects: ${collisionCount} collisions across ${sourceCount} locations`,
+ );
};
const convertLegacyDocsPathToLatest = (fromPath) => {
@@ -566,7 +621,6 @@ module.exports = {
replacePathVersion,
filePathToDocType,
removeTrailingSlash,
- isPathAnIndexPage,
removeNullEntries,
pathToDepth,
mdxNodesToTree,
@@ -578,6 +632,7 @@ module.exports = {
findPrevNextNavNodes,
preprocessPathsAndRedirects,
configureRedirects,
+ reportRedirectCollisions,
configureLegacyRedirects,
makeFileNodePublic,
readFile,
diff --git a/src/constants/utils.js b/src/constants/utils.js
index b32c0f2e949..bef256c446e 100644
--- a/src/constants/utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/utils.js
@@ -28,3 +28,6 @@ export const capitalize = (s) => {
export const getBaseUrl = (path, depth) => {
return path.split("/").slice(0, depth).join("/");
};
+
+export const isPathAnIndexPage = (filePath) =>
+ filePath.endsWith("/index.mdx") || filePath === "index.mdx";
diff --git a/src/templates/doc.js b/src/templates/doc.js
index f84e0bc80bd..02b69e07b44 100644
--- a/src/templates/doc.js
+++ b/src/templates/doc.js
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
import React from "react";
-import { Container, Row, Col, Dropdown, DropdownButton } from "react-bootstrap";
+import { Container, Row, Col } from "react-bootstrap";
import { graphql, Link } from "gatsby";
+import { isPathAnIndexPage } from "../constants/utils";
import { MDXRenderer } from "gatsby-plugin-mdx";
import {
CardDecks,
@@ -15,7 +16,7 @@ import {
TableOfContents,
} from "../components";
import { products } from "../constants/products";
-import Icon, { iconNames } from "../components/icon";
+import { FeedbackDropdown } from "../components/feedback-dropdown";
export const query = graphql`
query ($nodeId: String!) {
@@ -27,6 +28,11 @@ export const query = graphql`
}
body
tableOfContents
+ fileAbsolutePath
+ }
+ edbGit {
+ docsRepoUrl
+ branch
}
}
`;
@@ -181,53 +187,15 @@ const Section = ({ section }) => (
);
-const FeedbackDropdown = ({ githubIssuesLink }) => (
-
- }
- >
-
- Report a problem
-
-
- Give product feedback
-
-
-);
-
const DocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
- const { fields, body, tableOfContents } = data.mdx;
+ const { fields, body, tableOfContents, fileAbsolutePath } = data.mdx;
+ const gitData = data.edbGit;
const { path, mtime, depth } = fields;
const {
frontmatter,
pagePath,
productVersions,
versions,
- githubFileLink,
- githubEditLink,
- githubIssuesLink,
- isIndexPage,
navTree,
prevNext,
} = pageContext;
@@ -249,6 +217,20 @@ const DocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
deepToC,
} = frontmatter;
+ // don't encourage folks to edit on main - set the edit links to develop in production builds
+ const branch = gitData.branch === "main" ? "develop" : gitData.branch;
+ const fileUrlSegment = fileAbsolutePath.split("/product_docs/docs").slice(1);
+ const githubFileLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/blob/${gitData.branch}/product_docs/docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubFileHistoryLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/commits/${gitData.branch}/product_docs/docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubEditLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/edit/${branch}/product_docs/docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubIssuesLink = `${
+ gitData.docsRepoUrl
+ }/issues/new?title=${encodeURIComponent(
+ `Feedback on ${product} ${version} - "${frontmatter.title}"`,
+ )}&context=${encodeURIComponent(
+ `${githubFileLink}\n`,
+ )}&template=problem-with-topic.yaml`;
+
const sections = depth === 2 ? buildSections(navTree) : null;
let title = frontmatter.title;
@@ -266,7 +248,7 @@ const DocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
title: title,
description: description,
path: pagePath,
- isIndexPage,
+ isIndexPage: isPathAnIndexPage(fileAbsolutePath),
productVersions,
canonicalPath: pageContext.pathVersions.filter((p) => !!p)[0],
};
@@ -349,7 +331,7 @@ const DocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
{depth > 2 && }
-
+
diff --git a/src/templates/learn-doc.js b/src/templates/learn-doc.js
index 5329bca2e72..1320f11527c 100644
--- a/src/templates/learn-doc.js
+++ b/src/templates/learn-doc.js
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
import React from "react";
import { Container, Row, Col } from "react-bootstrap";
import { graphql } from "gatsby";
+import { isPathAnIndexPage } from "../constants/utils";
import { MDXRenderer } from "gatsby-plugin-mdx";
import {
CardDecks,
@@ -24,6 +25,11 @@ export const query = graphql`
}
body
tableOfContents
+ fileAbsolutePath
+ }
+ edbGit {
+ docsRepoUrl
+ branch
}
}
`;
@@ -111,17 +117,13 @@ const FeedbackButton = ({ githubIssuesLink }) => (
);
const LearnDocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
- const { mdx } = data;
+ const { mdx, edbGit: gitData } = data;
const { mtime, path, depth } = mdx.fields;
const {
frontmatter,
pagePath,
productVersions,
navLinks,
- githubFileLink,
- githubEditLink,
- githubIssuesLink,
- isIndexPage,
navTree,
prevNext,
} = pageContext;
@@ -140,7 +142,7 @@ const LearnDocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
title: title,
description: description,
path: pagePath,
- isIndexPage: isIndexPage,
+ isIndexPage: isPathAnIndexPage(mdx.fileAbsolutePath),
productVersions,
};
@@ -150,6 +152,20 @@ const LearnDocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
? frontmatter.showInteractiveBadge
: !!katacodaPanel;
+ // don't encourage folks to edit on main - set the edit links to develop in production builds
+ const branch = gitData.branch === "main" ? "develop" : gitData.branch;
+ const fileUrlSegment = mdx.fileAbsolutePath.split("/advocacy_docs").slice(1);
+ const githubFileLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/blob/${gitData.branch}/advocacy_docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubFileHistoryLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/commits/${gitData.branch}/advocacy_docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubEditLink = `${gitData.docsRepoUrl}/edit/${branch}/advocacy_docs${fileUrlSegment}`;
+ const githubIssuesLink = `${
+ gitData.docsRepoUrl
+ }/issues/new?title=${encodeURIComponent(
+ `Regarding "${title}"`,
+ )}&context=${encodeURIComponent(
+ `${githubFileLink}\n`,
+ )}&template=problem-with-topic.yaml`;
+
// CNO isn't editable
// TODO unify docs/advo to share one smart component that knows what to show
const editOrFeedbackButton =
@@ -239,7 +255,7 @@ const LearnDocTemplate = ({ data, pageContext }) => {
!
-
+
From dc08e4b9d96f541f037c462151fb5424280f5b00 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 15:44:32 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 153/370] another bit of deployment speedup: remove
webpackCompilationHash from final builds
---
gatsby-node.js | 29 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++-
src/components/feedback-dropdown.js | 9 +++++++--
src/components/footer.js | 7 ++++++-
src/components/layout.js | 2 +-
src/constants/gatsby-utils.js | 2 +-
5 files changed, 43 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/gatsby-node.js b/gatsby-node.js
index cb88af871c3..edc5035c1d3 100644
--- a/gatsby-node.js
+++ b/gatsby-node.js
@@ -3,7 +3,6 @@ const realFs = require("fs");
const path = require("path");
const gracefulFs = require("graceful-fs");
gracefulFs.gracefulify(realFs);
-
const { createFilePath } = require(`gatsby-source-filesystem`);
const { exec, execSync } = require("child_process");
@@ -580,6 +579,34 @@ exports.onPostBuild = async ({ graphql, reporter, pathPrefix }) => {
path.join(__dirname, "/public/netlify.toml"),
);
+ //
+ // get rid of compilation hash - speeds up netlify deploys
+ //
+ const { globby } = await import("globby");
+ const generatedHTML = await globby([
+ path.join(__dirname, "/public/**/*.html"),
+ ]);
+ for (let filename of generatedHTML) {
+ let file = await readFile(filename);
+ file = file.replace(
+ /window\.___webpackCompilationHash="[^"]+"/,
+ 'window.___webpackCompilationHash=""',
+ );
+ await writeFile(filename, file);
+ }
+ const appDataFilename = path.join(
+ __dirname,
+ "/public/page-data/app-data.json",
+ );
+ const appData = await readFile(appDataFilename);
+ await writeFile(
+ appDataFilename,
+ appData.replace(
+ /"webpackCompilationHash":"[^"]+"/,
+ '"webpackCompilationHash":""',
+ ),
+ );
+
//
// additional headers
//
diff --git a/src/components/feedback-dropdown.js b/src/components/feedback-dropdown.js
index 001c6d3293f..0d664121705 100644
--- a/src/components/feedback-dropdown.js
+++ b/src/components/feedback-dropdown.js
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ export const FeedbackDropdown = ({ githubIssuesLink }) => {
`);
// add the last commit SHA to paths dynamically to minimize page changes
- const [url, setUrl] = useState(githubIssuesLink);
+ const [url, setUrl] = useState();
useEffect(() => {
if (githubIssuesLink)
setUrl(
@@ -28,7 +28,12 @@ export const FeedbackDropdown = ({ githubIssuesLink }) => {
),
),
);
- });
+ }, [
+ githubIssuesLink,
+ data.edbGit.docsRepoUrl,
+ data.edbGit.branch,
+ data.edbGit.sha,
+ ]);
return (
{
`${data.edbGit.docsRepoUrl}/commits/${data.edbGit.sha}/`,
),
);
- });
+ }, [
+ githubFileLink,
+ data.edbGit.docsRepoUrl,
+ data.edbGit.branch,
+ data.edbGit.sha,
+ ]);
if (timestamp) {
return (
diff --git a/src/components/layout.js b/src/components/layout.js
index 2ab8d5275ed..541df4a1b64 100644
--- a/src/components/layout.js
+++ b/src/components/layout.js
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ const Layout = ({
Archive,
AuthenticatedContentPlaceholder,
}),
- [katacodaPanelData, meta.path, meta.isIndexPage],
+ [katacodaPanelData, meta.path, meta.isIndexPage, meta.productVersions],
);
return (
diff --git a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
index f93a968b89b..3b340801922 100644
--- a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
@@ -472,7 +472,7 @@ const reportRedirectCollisions = (validPaths, reporter) => {
reporter.warn(`
::warning file=${
source.filepath
- },title=Overlapping redirect found in::Redirect ${urlpath} also matches matches ${(
+ },title=Overlapping redirect found in::Redirect ${urlpath} also matches ${(
"\n" + list
)
.replace(/%/g, "%25")
From 49fc48025070396403525c4638e103f9dbfbc873 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 21:20:36 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 154/370] avoid duplicate redirects / warnings
---
src/constants/gatsby-utils.js | 14 +++++++-------
1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
diff --git a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
index 3b340801922..66817d6cdb9 100644
--- a/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
+++ b/src/constants/gatsby-utils.js
@@ -265,12 +265,12 @@ const preprocessPathsAndRedirects = (nodes, productVersions) => {
productVersions[node.fields.product][0] === node.fields.version;
const nodePathLatest = isLatest && replacePathVersion(nodePath);
const addPath = (url) => {
- let value = validPaths.get(url) || [];
+ let value = validPaths.get(url);
+ if (!value) validPaths.set(url, (value = []));
value.push({
urlpath: nodePathLatest || nodePath,
filepath: node.fileAbsolutePath,
});
- if (value.length === 1) validPaths.set(url, value);
};
addPath(nodePath);
@@ -424,16 +424,16 @@ const configureRedirects = (productVersions, node, validPaths, actions) => {
// /epas/latest/B -> /epas/latest/C
const toIsLatest = isLatest || isLastVersion;
if (toIsLatest) {
- fromPath = replacePathVersion(fromPath);
- if (fromPath !== toPath) {
- let value = validPaths.get(fromPath) || [];
+ const fromPathLatest = replacePathVersion(fromPath);
+ if (fromPathLatest !== fromPath && fromPathLatest !== toPath) {
+ let value = validPaths.get(fromPathLatest);
+ if (!value) validPaths.set(fromPathLatest, (value = []));
value.push({
urlpath: toPath,
filepath: node.fileAbsolutePath,
});
- if (value.length === 1) validPaths.set(fromPath, value);
actions.createRedirect({
- fromPath,
+ fromPath: fromPathLatest,
toPath,
redirectInBrowser: false,
isPermanent: false,
From 79a42e1b5175e4a4792df0dbc12081a1cc7f6e17 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 10:14:11 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 155/370] Update
product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
Co-authored-by: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
---
.../02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
index bbd6d241e79..4f4efffab17 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/database_administration/02_edb_loader/edb_loader_overview_and_restrictions.mdx
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ EDB\*Loader features include:
The important version compatibility restrictions between the EDB\*Loader client and the database server are:
-- When you invoke the EDB\*Loader program (called `edbldr`), you pass in parameters and directive information to the database server. We strongly recommend that you use the version 14 EDB\*Loader client (the `edbldr` program supplied with EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14) to load data only into version 14 of the database server. In general, use the same version for the EDB\*Loader client and database server.
+- When you invoke the EDB\*Loader program (called `edbldr`), you pass in parameters and directive information to the database server. We strongly recommend that you use the version of the EDB\*Loader client, the `edbldr` program supplied with the version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server you are using, to load data only into the database server. In general, use the same version for the EDB\*Loader client and database server.
- Using EDB\*Loader with connection poolers such as PgPool-II and PgBouncer isn't supported. EDB\*Loader must connect directly to EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 14. Alternatively, you can use these commands for loading data through connection poolers:
From cec0313cfbf321a812eba00b91b698f0c979de9c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 06:56:14 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 156/370] EPAS: link in install topics
---
.../templates/products/edb-postgres-advanced-server/base.njk | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_7.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_8.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_9.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_12.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_15.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_centos_7.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_8.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_9.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_7.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_8.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_9.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_12.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_15.mdx | 2 +-
14 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/install_template/templates/products/edb-postgres-advanced-server/base.njk b/install_template/templates/products/edb-postgres-advanced-server/base.njk
index 8969a17d503..c04b8572d23 100644
--- a/install_template/templates/products/edb-postgres-advanced-server/base.njk
+++ b/install_template/templates/products/edb-postgres-advanced-server/base.njk
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ Where `package_name` can be any of the available packages from the [available pa
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
{# this is kinda awful, but gotta deal with the reorg somehow... --jh #}
-{% set init_cluster_url = "../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/" if product.version >= 15 else "../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode" %}
+{% set init_cluster_url = "../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode" if product.version >= 15 else "../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode" %}
First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-{{ product.version | replace(".", "") }}-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode]({{ init_cluster_url }}).
```shell
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_7.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_7.mdx
index b7c03db8d12..fadb9f01f04 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_7.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_7.mdx
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_8.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_8.mdx
index 41c4b5182a9..b9d8718e83a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_8.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_8.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_9.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_9.mdx
index c7414e4ab9f..0be46476011 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_9.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_rhel_9.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_12.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_12.mdx
index 85a4b80c4dd..f497ac63eb0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_12.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_12.mdx
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Where `package_name` can be any of the available packages from the [available pa
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_15.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_15.mdx
index 6547ac9e69c..9205ac4472c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_15.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_ppc64le/epas_sles_15.mdx
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Where `package_name` can be any of the available packages from the [available pa
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_centos_7.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_centos_7.mdx
index 2bef50e67ad..ab0da72c2da 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_centos_7.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_centos_7.mdx
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_8.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_8.mdx
index 259dbf6f6f7..9ffbe1028fd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_8.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_8.mdx
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_9.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_9.mdx
index 468292b80af..f8acd3ad53f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_9.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_other_linux_9.mdx
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_7.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_7.mdx
index e1c87b26fc0..b6effda2dcc 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_7.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_7.mdx
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_8.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_8.mdx
index 26c8c4cf628..41177790cb4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_8.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_8.mdx
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_9.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_9.mdx
index 47fd7bf352f..39e9d81371e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_9.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_rhel_9.mdx
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Installing the server package creates an operating system user named enterprised
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_12.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_12.mdx
index 729f4b289f8..e9b510cb09a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_12.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_12.mdx
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ Where `package_name` can be any of the available packages from the [available pa
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_15.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_15.mdx
index 1f125a35ea3..6946d889b00 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_15.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/installing/linux_x86_64/epas_sles_15.mdx
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Where `package_name` can be any of the available packages from the [available pa
This section steps you through getting started with your cluster including logging in, ensuring the installation and initial configuration was successful, connecting to your cluster, and creating the user password.
-First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/).
+First you need to initialize and start the database cluster. The `edb-as-15-setup` script creates a cluster in Oracle-compatible mode with the `edb` sample database in the cluster. To create a cluster in Postgres mode, see [Initializing the cluster in Postgres mode](../linux_install_details/managing_an_advanced_server_installation/specifying_cluster_options/#initializing-the-cluster-in-postgres-mode).
```shell
sudo PGSETUP_INITDB_OPTIONS="-E UTF-8" /usr/edb/as15/bin/edb-as-15-setup initdb
From f4741efa2a3814cbc0f8b0ae2467e0844f25d249 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 11 Aug 2023 13:05:55 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 157/370] BigAnimal: PGD GA
---
.../creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx | 4 ++--
.../getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx | 3 +--
.../release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 4 ++--
.../biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 11 ++++++++---
.../release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx | 4 ----
.../release/using_cluster/04_backup_and_restore.mdx | 2 +-
6 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
index fc55060c4d4..74d6dec97b3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ When you create a distributed high-availability cluster, you need to set up the
1. On the **Nodes Settings** tab, in the **Nodes** section, select **Two Data Nodes** or **Three Data Nodes**.
- For more information on node architecture, see [Distributed high availability (Preview)](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview).
+ For more information on node architecture, see [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability).
1. In the **Database Type** section:
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ After creating the first data group, you can create a second data group for your
By default, the settings for your first data group populate the second data group's settings. However, if you want to change certain settings you can. Just know that your changes can change the settings for the entire cluster. That being said, the database type and cloud provider must be consistent across both data groups. The data groups and the witness group must all be in different regions. Otherwise, you can choose the second data group's settings as needed.
-When choosing the number of data nodes for the second data group, see [Distributed high availability (Preview)](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview) for information on node architecture.
+When choosing the number of data nodes for the second data group, see [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) for information on node architecture.
!!! Note
To maintain high availability, BigAnimal doesn't allow the maintenance windows of data groups to overlap.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
index 28f72719af7..809f7e3df41 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Before creating your cluster, make sure you have enough resources. Without enoug
!!!note "When using BigAnimal's cloud"
The following options aren't available when creating your cluster:
-- Distributed High Availability for cluster type
- AWS IAM authentication
- Superuser access
- PgBouncer
@@ -44,7 +43,7 @@ The following options aren't available when creating your cluster:
- [Primary/Standby High Availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#primarystandby-high-availability) creates a cluster with one primary and one or two standby replicas in different availability zones. You can create primary/standby high-availability clusters running PostgreSQL or EDB Postgres Advanced Server. Only primary/standby high-availability clusters allow you to enable read-only workloads for users. However, if you enable read-only workloads, then you might have to raise the IP address resource limits for the cluster.
- - [Distributed High Availability (Preview)](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview) creates a cluster, powered by EDB Postgres Distributed, with up to two data groups spread across multiple cloud regions to deliver higher performance and faster recovery. See [Creating a distributed high-availability cluster](creating_an_eha_cluster) for instructions.
+ - [Distributed High Availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) creates a cluster, powered by EDB Postgres Distributed, with up to two data groups spread across multiple cloud regions to deliver higher performance and faster recovery. See [Creating a distributed high-availability cluster](creating_an_eha_cluster) for instructions.
See [Supported cluster types](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/) for more information about the different cluster types.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 188e2b8151f..6a41a2cb8e4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ redirects:
BigAnimal supports three cluster types:
- Single node
- Primary/standby high availability
-- Distributed high availability (Preview)
+- Distributed high availability)
You choose the type of cluster you want on the [Create Cluster](https://portal.biganimal.com/create-cluster) page in the [BigAnimal](https://portal.biganimal.com) portal.
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ To ensure write availability, BigAnimal disables synchronous replication during
Since BigAnimal replicates to only one node synchronously, some standby replicas in three-node clusters might experience replication lag. Also, if you override the BigAnimal synchronous replication configuration, then the standby replicas are inconsistent.
-## Distributed high availability (Preview)
+## Distributed high availability
Distributed high-availability clusters are powered by [EDB Postgres Distributed](/pgd/latest/) using multi-master logical replication to deliver more advanced cluster management compared to a physical replication-based system. Distributed high-availability clusters offer the ability to deploy a cluster across multiple regions or a single region. For use cases where high availability across regions is a major concern, a cluster deployment with distributed high availability enabled can provide one region with three data nodes, another region with the same configuration, and one group with a witness node in a third region for a true active-active solution.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index 468f637b369..ab634a67555 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -8,15 +8,20 @@ BigAnimal calculates the estimated monthly price for your cluster and displays i
## Database pricing
-Pricing is based on the number of virtual central processing units (vCPUs) provisioned for the database software offering. Consumption of vCPUs is metered hourly. A deployment is typically made up of either one instance or one primary and two standby replica instances of either PostgreSQL or EDB Postgres Advanced Server. When primary/standby high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of replicas configured to calculate the full price for all resources used. This table shows the cost breakdown.
+Pricing is based on the number of virtual central processing units (vCPUs) provisioned for the database software offering. Consumption of vCPUs is metered hourly.
+
+When primary/standby high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of replicas configured to calculate the full price for all resources used.
+
+When distributed high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of data nodes configured to calculate the full price for all resources used. You aren't charged an hourly fee for witness nodes or groups in distributed high-availability configurations, only for the infrastructure costs associated with them.
+
+This table shows the cost breakdown.
| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
| PostgreSQL | $0.0856 / vCPU | $62.49 / vCPU |
+| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.1655 / vCPU | $120.82 / VCPU |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.2568 / vCPU | $187.46 / vCPU |
-Distributed high availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed is now available in preview! Contact Sales for more information about pricing.
-
\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
index 2f97f75a835..5b66fd2016c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/reference/cli/managing_clusters.mdx
@@ -137,10 +137,6 @@ __OUTPUT__
└────────┴───────────────────────────┴──────────┘
```
-!!!Note
-Distributed high-availability architecture isn't enabled by default. To get access, contact your sales representative or [Support](/biganimal/release/overview/support).
-!!!
-
!!!Tip
You can turn off the confirmation step with the `biganimal disable-confirm` command.
!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/04_backup_and_restore.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/04_backup_and_restore.mdx
index f8177a82f14..57313f0d4da 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/04_backup_and_restore.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/04_backup_and_restore.mdx
@@ -54,6 +54,6 @@ The restore operation is available for any cluster that has at least one availab
1. Select **Next: Data Group**.
1. Select the **Node Settings** tab.
1. In the **Source** section, select **Fully Restore** or **Point in Time Restore**. A point-in-time restore restores the data group as it was at the specified date and time.
-1. In the **Nodes** section, select **Two Data Nodes** or **Three Data Nodes**. For more information on node architecture, see [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview).
+1. In the **Nodes** section, select **Two Data Nodes** or **Three Data Nodes**. For more information on node architecture, see [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability).
1. Follow Steps 3-5 in [Creating a distributed high-availability cluster](../getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster/).
1. Select **Restore**.
From 4887e1732b9409fd35d4f0ff8e12619b6a562a14 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 14 Aug 2023 14:32:03 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 158/370] incorporating Natalia's feedback
---
.../release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 21 ++++++++++++++-----
1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index ab634a67555..6c55cf66b79 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -10,17 +10,28 @@ BigAnimal calculates the estimated monthly price for your cluster and displays i
Pricing is based on the number of virtual central processing units (vCPUs) provisioned for the database software offering. Consumption of vCPUs is metered hourly.
+### Single-node and primary/standby high-availability pricing
When primary/standby high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of replicas configured to calculate the full price for all resources used.
-When distributed high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of data nodes configured to calculate the full price for all resources used. You aren't charged an hourly fee for witness nodes or groups in distributed high-availability configurations, only for the infrastructure costs associated with them.
+This table shows the cost breakdown.
+
+| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
+| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
+| PostgreSQL | $0.0856 / vCPU | $62.49 / vCPU |
+| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.2568 / vCPU | $187.46 / vCPU |
+
+\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
+
+### Distributed high-availability pricing
+
+When distributed high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of data nodes configured to calculate the full price for all resources used. You aren't charged for the database price for witness nodes or groups in distributed high-availability configurations, just the infrastructure resources, such as compute.
This table shows the cost breakdown.
-| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
+| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
-| PostgreSQL | $0.0856 / vCPU | $62.49 / vCPU |
-| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.1655 / vCPU | $120.82 / VCPU |
-| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.2568 / vCPU | $187.46 / vCPU |
+| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.2511 / vCPU | $188.33 / vCPU |
+| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.3424 / vCPU | $256.80 / vCPU |
\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
From cb87eb681ffdee5563bc479539131e83047883e7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 13:11:08 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 159/370] can't change data nodes (per Natalia)
---
.../release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
index 69f3e3dfed0..981ea61c664 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ You can also modify your cluster by installing Postgres extensions. See [Postgre
| Volume type | **Cluster Settings** | You can't switch between the io2 and io2 Block Express volume types in an AWS cluster. |
| Volume properties | **Cluster Settings** | It can take up to six hours to tune IOPS or resize the disks of your cluster because AWS requires a cooldown period after volume modifications, as explained in [Limitations](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AWSEC2/latest/UserGuide/modify-volume-requirements.html). The volume properties are disabled and can't be modified while this is in progress. |
| Networking type (public or private) | **Cluster Settings** | If you're using Azure and previously set up a private link and want to change to a public network, you must remove the private link resources before making the change. |
- | Nodes (for a distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | — |
+ | Nodes (for a distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | You can't change the number of data nodes after you create your cluster. |
| Database configuration parameters | **DB Configuration** | If you're using faraway replicas, only a small subset of parameters are editable. These parameters need to be modified in the replica when increased in the replica's source cluster. See [Modify a faraway replica](/biganimal/latest/using_cluster/managing_replicas/#modify-a-faraway-replica) for details. |
| Retention period for backups | **Additional Settings** | — |
| Custom maintenance window | **Additional Settings** | Set or modify a maintenance window in which maintenance upgrades occur for the cluster. See [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance). |
From f27b915aba60973748ae93866d7e602380baaae4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 08:58:51 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 160/370] adjusted indentation and added storage tip
---
.../creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx | 3 +++
.../creating_a_cluster/index.mdx | 25 ++++++++++---------
2 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
index 74d6dec97b3..1d43a11f21e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
@@ -22,6 +22,9 @@ When you create a distributed high-availability cluster, you need to set up the
1. Select the settings for your cluster according to [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/). Find the instructions for the **Node Settings** tab in [Cluster Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#cluster-settings-tab) and [Additional Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#additional-settings-tab).
+ !!!tip
+ When choosing your storage options, for most workloads, consider using at least 20GB of storage.
+
1. In the **Parameters** section on the **DB Configuration** tab, you can update the value of the database configuration parameters for the data group as needed.
To update the parameter values, see [Modifying your database configuration parameters](../../using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/05_db_configuration_parameters).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
index 809f7e3df41..e3a130a9f58 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -94,25 +94,26 @@ The following options aren't available when creating your cluster:
To maximize your disk size for AWS, select Rb5 as your instance and then io2 Block Express as your storage to get a maximum disk size of 64 TB and 256,000 IOPS.
1. In the **Storage** section, from the **Volume Type** list, select your volume type.
- - For Azure, in **Volume Type**, select **Premium SSD** or **Ultra Disk**. Compared to Premium SSD volumes, ultra disks offer lower-latency, high-performance options and direct control over your disk's input/output operations per second (IOPS). For BigAnimal, we recommend using ultra disks for workloads that require the most demanding performance. See [Using Azure ultra disks](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-enable-ultra-ssd?tabs=azure-portal) for more information.
- - For Premium SSD, in **Volume Properties**, select the type and amount of storage needed for your cluster. See [Azure Premium SSD storage types](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-types#premium-ssds) for more information.
+ - For Azure, in **Volume Type**, select **Premium SSD** or **Ultra Disk**. Compared to Premium SSD volumes, ultra disks offer lower-latency, high-performance options and direct control over your disk's input/output operations per second (IOPS). For BigAnimal, we recommend using ultra disks for workloads that require the most demanding performance. See [Using Azure ultra disks](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-enable-ultra-ssd?tabs=azure-portal) for more information.
+
+ - For Premium SSD, in **Volume Properties**, select the type and amount of storage needed for your cluster. See [Azure Premium SSD storage types](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-types#premium-ssds) for more information.
- - For ultra disk, in **Volume Properties**, select the disk size and IOPS for your cluster. BigAnimal calculates disk throughput based on your IOPS settings, but you have the option of updating the value.
+ - For ultra disk, in **Volume Properties**, select the disk size and IOPS for your cluster. BigAnimal calculates disk throughput based on your IOPS settings, but you have the option of updating the value.
- !!!important
- While setting the required IOPS for the disk that you selected, consider the VM limits that are tied to the VM size that you selected. See [Ultra disk IOPS](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-types#ultra-disk-iops) for more information.
+ !!!important
+ While setting the required IOPS for the disk that you selected, consider the VM limits that are tied to the VM size that you selected. See [Ultra disk IOPS](https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/azure/virtual-machines/disks-types#ultra-disk-iops) for more information.
- - For AWS, in **Volume Type**, select **General Purpose SSD (GP3)**, **io2**, or **io2 Block Express**.
+ - For AWS, in **Volume Type**, select **General Purpose SSD (GP3)**, **io2**, or **io2 Block Express**.
- !!!Note
- io2 Block Express is available for selected instance types, such as R5b. However, you can't switch between io2 and io2 Block Express after creating your cluster.
- !!!
+ !!!Note
+ io2 Block Express is available for selected instance types, such as R5b. However, you can't switch between io2 and io2 Block Express after creating your cluster.
+ !!!
- In **Volume Properties**, select the disk size for your cluster, and configure the IOPS.
+ In **Volume Properties**, select the disk size for your cluster, and configure the IOPS.
- - For Google Cloud, in **Volume Type**, select **SSD Persistent Disk**.
+ - For Google Cloud, in **Volume Type**, select **SSD Persistent Disk**.
- In **Volume Properties**, select the disk size for your cluster, and configure the IOPS.
+ In **Volume Properties**, select the disk size for your cluster, and configure the IOPS.
2. ##### Network, Logs, & Telemetry section
From 6cb995bef3c5280b900ec562e373c15ade65af15 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 10:38:15 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 161/370] removed support for PGE
---
.../creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx | 8 ++------
.../biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 1 -
.../docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 1 -
3 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
index 1d43a11f21e..73d108e4f79 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
@@ -12,13 +12,9 @@ When you create a distributed high-availability cluster, you need to set up the
1. In the **Database Type** section:
- 1. Select the type of Postgres you want to use in the **Postgres Type** field:
-
- - **[EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/)** is EDB's Oracle-compatible database offering. View [a quick demonstration of Oracle compatibility on BigAnimal](../../using_cluster/06_demonstration_oracle_compatibility).
-
- - **[EDB Postgres Extended Server](/pge/latest/)** is EDB's advanced logical replication, PostgreSQL-compatible database offering.
+ 1. Select [EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/) in the **Postgres Type** field:
- 1. In the **Postgres Version** list, select either 14 or 15 as the version of Postgres that you want to use.
+ 1. In the **Postgres Version** list, select either 14 or 15 as the version of Postgres that you want to use.
1. Select the settings for your cluster according to [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/). Find the instructions for the **Node Settings** tab in [Cluster Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#cluster-settings-tab) and [Additional Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#additional-settings-tab).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 6a41a2cb8e4..97b8dfaefb4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,6 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by cluster and deployment type.
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 12–15 | Single-node, primary/standby high-availability | Your cloud account |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Single node, primary/standby high availability | BigAnimal cloud account |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Distributed high-availability | Your cloud account |
-| EDB Postgres Extended Server | 14-15 | Distributed high-availability | Your cloud account |
## Single node
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index 6c55cf66b79..faa9ab96a08 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -30,7 +30,6 @@ This table shows the cost breakdown.
| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
-| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.2511 / vCPU | $188.33 / vCPU |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.3424 / vCPU | $256.80 / vCPU |
\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
From 473efb0c0508210d3406b01d4bf8dba344682436 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 13:06:29 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 162/370] removed preview/beta references from PGD docs
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index ea5c28523f4..ad70985d932 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- EDB BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single and multi-region Always On clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview) in the [EDB BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account where it's operated by the Postgres experts. BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of extreme-high-availability support through EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) allows single-region Always On Gold clusters. These clusters are two PGD groups in different availability zones in a single cloud region, with a witness node in a third availability zone. See [Extreme high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
index 7bd143a9660..a3a691b0075 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/quickstart/index.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ navigation:
EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) is a multi-master replicating implementation of Postgres designed for high performance and availability. You can create database clusters made up of many bidirectionally synchronizing database nodes. The clusters can have a number of proxy servers that direct your query traffic to the most available nodes, adding further resilience to your cluster configuration.
!!! Note Fully managed BigAnimal
- If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as an option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal distributed high-availability clusters](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability-preview).
+ If you prefer to have a fully managed EDB Postgres Distributed experience, PGD is now available as an option on BigAnimal, EDB's cloud platform for Postgres. Read more about [BigAnimal distributed high-availability clusters](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability).
PGD is very configurable. To quickly evaluate and deploy PGD, use this quick start. It'll get you up and running with a fully configured PGD cluster using the same tools that you'll use to deploy to production. This quick start includes:
From 355ad67d274eb40dbb551dfca5e2714b89950309 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 15:37:16 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 163/370] redoing the pooler note
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index 439a9360f06..1cf43729998 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -9,13 +9,13 @@ BigAnimal supports [EDB PgBouncer](/pgbouncer/latest/) and [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpo
EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently. It's particularly useful if you plan to use more than a few hundred active connections. You can enable EDB PgBouncer to be hosted by BigAnimal when creating your cluster. See [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#pgbouncer).
-!!!note
- To use PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster, see the [EDB Pgpool-II documentation](/pgpool/latest/installing).
-
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
+!!!note
+ To use PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster, use the self-hosted method.
+
### EDB Pgpool-II
From d047b72b1311491e8d61b3d4f899cf86e41f0320 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 07:59:12 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 164/370] reinstating original note re PgBouncer support
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 5 +++--
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index 1cf43729998..c9f70da26bd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -11,10 +11,11 @@ EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your wo
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
+!!!Note
+ Currently you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating an distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
+
If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
-!!!note
- To use PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster, use the self-hosted method.
### EDB Pgpool-II
From df22aeb17f21831565384818a23bc84e69b15b25 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 08:07:06 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 165/370] rename in pgd docs
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index ad70985d932..49e4eff4967 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account where it's operated by the Postgres experts. BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of extreme-high-availability support through EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) allows single-region Always On Gold clusters. These clusters are two PGD groups in different availability zones in a single cloud region, with a witness node in a third availability zone. See [Extreme high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#extreme-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by the Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability support powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single- and and multi-region Always On Gold clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From a0b8c6a0c7dc93c811f917bb5bafb531a1885408 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 08:22:05 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 166/370] missed commit
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 49e4eff4967..b7ea55a249e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
-- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by the Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability support powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single- and and multi-region Always On Gold clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
+- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability support powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single- and and multi-region Always On Gold clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
From 866959a71613e4869b145db75dcc140191bd1e07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 22 Aug 2023 14:20:40 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 167/370] New release notes conventions prototype
---
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx | 5 ++++-
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx | 5 ++++-
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 5 ++++-
3 files changed, 12 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 5fa5300340f..04e30a26565 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
---
-title: "Version 15.2.0"
+title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.2.0 release notes
+navTitle: "Version 15.2.0"
---
+Released: 14 Feb 2023
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.2.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Category |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 896039e386f..a8fee6d4742 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@
---
-title: "Version 15.3.0"
+title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.3.0 release notes"
+navTitle: Version 15.3.0
---
+Released: 11 May 2023
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.3.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Category |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 9a03d92300c..61c30f035af 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
---
-title: "Version 15.4.0"
+title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.4.0 release notes"
+navTitle: Version 15.4.0
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
From 517fde78f6da14e0d7b5f31da4e3425a54b61574 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 05:31:03 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 168/370] removed version from title
---
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 04e30a26565..402c04ce197 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_2_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.2.0 release notes
+title: EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.2.0 release notes
navTitle: "Version 15.2.0"
---
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
index a8fee6d4742..768c1e15c78 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_3_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.3.0 release notes"
+title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.3.0 release notes"
navTitle: Version 15.3.0
---
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 61c30f035af..898d024fa5a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 15.4.0 release notes"
+title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 release notes"
navTitle: Version 15.4.0
hideToC: true
---
From 96ed199a9f9cf16499d7de9dae264c56621a89bb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 11:27:07 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 169/370] Updated epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
De h4'd the opening para
---
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 898d024fa5a..4a92e59dce9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,11 +6,12 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses | |
From faa0035a469624afcc28a8ec09a0f2d991178bde Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 17:26:17 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 170/370] Release note fixes and notes on UTL Mail
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx | 10 +++++++++-
.../12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx | 10 +++++++++-
.../13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx | 10 +++++++++-
.../epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx | 10 +++++++++-
.../epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 13 +++++++++++--
5 files changed, 47 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
index 59ab86efb7a..ae84f468620 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,11 +3,19 @@ title: "Version 11.21.32"
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 11.21.32 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+!!! Note After applying patches
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+!!!
+
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 11.21.32 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
index bed112d7f05..b8d10cbff3e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,11 +3,19 @@ title: "Version 12.16.20"
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 12.16.20 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+!!! Note After applying patches
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+!!!
+
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 12.16.20 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
index c5557d68bd9..71435aaf69a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,11 +3,19 @@ title: "Version 13.12.17"
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 13.12.17 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+!!! Note After applying patches
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+!!!
+
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 13.12.17 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
index d56b0600eb8..2662e0b5508 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,11 +3,19 @@ title: "Version 14.9.0"
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14.9.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+!!! Note After applying patches
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+!!!
+
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14.9.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 9a03d92300c..5cd928fcaba 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,13 +1,22 @@
---
-title: "Version 15.4.0"
+title: "EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 release notes"
+navTitle: Version 15.4.0
hideToC: true
---
+Released: 21 Aug 2023
+
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
-#### EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+!!! Note After applying patches
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+!!!
| Type | Description | Addresses | |
From ea1760afa59cae8901dc5d258ef12768eb1444f1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 13:08:23 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 171/370] BigAnimal: pg_ba_admin on BYOA
---
.../release/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/index.mdx | 2 --
1 file changed, 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/index.mdx
index 83780e88c56..bd207325b1f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/01_postgres_access/index.mdx
@@ -25,8 +25,6 @@ psql -W "postgres://edb_admin@xxxxxxxxx.xxxxx.biganimal.io:5432/edb_admin?sslmod
### pg_ba_admin
So that we can effectively manage the cloud resources and ensure users are protected against security threats, BigAnimal provides a special administrative role, pg_ba_admin. The edb_admin user is a member of the pg_ba_admin role. The pg_ba_admin role has privileges similar to a Postgres superuser. Like the edb_admin user, the pg_ba_admin role shouldn't be used for day-to-day application operations and access to the role must be controlled carefully. See [pg_ba_admin role](pg_ba_admin) for details.
-The pg_ba_admin role is present on clusters deployed in BigAnimal's cloud account. Soon, it will be deployed to all BigAnimal clusters.
-
### superuser
When using your own cloud account, you can grant the edb_admin role superuser privileges for a cluster. See [Superuser access](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#superuser-access). If you grant superuser privileges, you must take care to limit the number of connections used by superusers to avoid degraded service or compromising availability.
From 87438470b9e814035564ab5961dce4e4fa7f3220 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 13:59:53 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 172/370] BigAnimal: pooler language updates
---
.../release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 6 +++---
3 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
index e3a130a9f58..111a2f3856c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ For information on replication lag while using read-only workloads, see [Standby
!!! Note
Enabling PgBouncer incurs additional costs. For more information, see [PgBouncer costs](../../pricing_and_billing/#pgbouncer-costs).
-Enable **PgBouncer** to have it manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently. To learn more about PgBouncer, see [Connection poolers](/biganimal/latest/overview/poolers/#edb-pgbouncer).
+Enable **PgBouncer** to have it manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently — all entirely managed by BigAnimal. To learn more about PgBouncer, see [Connection poolers](/biganimal/latest/overview/poolers/#edb-pgbouncer).
Use the **PgBouncer Configuration Settings** menu to set PgBouncer-specific settings. Select the **Read-Write** and **Read-Only** tabs according to the type of connection you want to configure. The **Read-Only** tab is available if you're creating a primary/standby high-availability cluster and have enabled read-only workloads.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
index 25a3c1c7f69..f947c20eeec 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ See the following articles for step-by-step instructions for creating links to r
- [Using edb_dblink_oci](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5528996025497-How-to-create-a-database-link-from-EnterpriseDB-PostgreSQL-Advanced-Server-EPAS-cluster-to-remote-Oracle-server)
- [Using dblink_ora_connect()](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/11737021242649-How-to-establish-a-database-link-from-EPAS-cluster-to-a-remote-Oracle-server-using-dblink-ora-connect-function)
-## Configuring self-hosted connection poolers
+## Deploying connection poolers outside of BigAnimal
See the following articles for step-by-step instructions for setting up self-hosted connection poolers:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index c9f70da26bd..6cf9a3a0d2f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -7,14 +7,14 @@ BigAnimal supports [EDB PgBouncer](/pgbouncer/latest/) and [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpo
### EDB PgBouncer
-EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently. It's particularly useful if you plan to use more than a few hundred active connections. You can enable EDB PgBouncer to be hosted by BigAnimal when creating your cluster. See [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#pgbouncer).
+EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently. It's particularly useful if you plan to use more than a few hundred active connections. You can enable EDB PgBouncer to be entirely managed by BigAnimal, when creating your cluster. See [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#pgbouncer).
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
!!!Note
Currently you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating an distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
-If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
+If you want to deploy and manage PgBouncer outside of BigAnimal, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
@@ -22,6 +22,6 @@ If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configur
EDB Pgpool-II acts as middleware between client applications and a Postgres database server. It saves connections to the Postgres servers and reuses them whenever a new connection with the same properties (that is, username, database, protocol version) comes in. It reduces connection overhead and improves the system's overall throughput.
-See [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpool/latest/) for information on installing and configuring self-hosted EDB Pgpool-II. You can find other related content in the [How to configure EDB Pgpool with a BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5475273722009-How-to-configure-Pgpool-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
+See [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpool/latest/) for information on installing and configuring EDB Pgpool-II outside of BigAnimal. You can find other related content in the [How to configure EDB Pgpool with a BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5475273722009-How-to-configure-Pgpool-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
From 29c75d4e25b6a98aad5a09c9029138c84a772fda Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 14:38:34 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 173/370] removed future tense
---
.../docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
.../docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
.../docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
.../docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
5 files changed, 10 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
index ae84f468620..35ecfb24d3d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
-Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
-Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 11.21.32 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
index b8d10cbff3e..118b00dc0d1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
-Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
-Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 12.16.20 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
index 71435aaf69a..61f1eb1176a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
-Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
-Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 13.12.17 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 2662e0b5508..3c7341713d5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
-Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
-Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14.9.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 32f41bf6b2c..b625e4219c4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -13,9 +13,9 @@ Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
-Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
+Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_SMTP and UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_MAIL.
-Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package will now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
+Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
From 8d392efe634eb0e3b6a78a2a10fa56a45b0c32df Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 10:03:27 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 174/370] Clean up last bad dates (four letter months!)
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 9ea08a1e8fd..740f82d6845 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -25,15 +25,15 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR | HARP | CLI | TPAexec |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| 2023 July 27 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
-| 2023 July 12 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
+| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
+| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
| 30 Mar 2023 | [4.3.0-1](pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.2 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 14 Feb 2023 | [4.3.0](pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 14 Dec 2022 | [4.2.2](pgd_4.2.2_rel_notes) | 4.2.2 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 16 Nov 2022 | [4.2.1](pgd_4.2.1_rel_notes) | 4.2.1 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.7](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-237) |
| 22 Aug 2022 | [4.2.0](pgd_4.2.0_rel_notes) | 4.2.0 | 2.2.0 | 1.1.0 | [23.5](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-235) |
-| 2022 June 21 | [4.1.1](pgd_4.1.1_rel_notes) | 4.1.1 | 2.1.1 | 1.0.0 | [23.2](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-232) |
+| 21 June 2022 | [4.1.1](pgd_4.1.1_rel_notes) | 4.1.1 | 2.1.1 | 1.0.0 | [23.2](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-232) |
| 17 May 2022 | [4.1.0](pgd_4.1.0_rel_notes) | 4.1.0 | 2.1.0 | 1.0.0 | [23.1](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-231) |
| 31 Mar 2022 | [4.0.3](pgd_4.0.3_rel_notes) | - | 2.0.3 | - | 22.10 |
| 24 Feb 2022 | [4.0.2](pgd_4.0.2_rel_notes) | 4.0.2 | 2.0.2 | - | 22.9 |
From ef838294a4543d066a0c065a594b72414b992c42 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 06:45:52 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 175/370] added updated date
---
.../docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx | 2 ++
.../docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx | 2 ++
.../docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx | 2 ++
.../docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx | 2 ++
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
5 files changed, 10 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
index 35ecfb24d3d..acf4dc472c1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
+Updated: 30 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
index 118b00dc0d1..bd79f163261 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
+Updated: 30 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
index 61f1eb1176a..b9526e79643 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
+Updated: 30 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 3c7341713d5..66390b3ff79 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
+Updated: 30 Aug 2023
+
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index b625e4219c4..b00a9db8df3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ hideToC: true
Released: 21 Aug 2023
-EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
+Updated: 30 Aug 2023
!!! Important Upgrading
Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ Users making use of the UTL_MAIL package now require EXECUTE permission on the U
Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the UTL_TCP packages in addition to EXECUTE permission on UTL_SMTP.
!!!
-
+EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses | |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
From 36757a746b7e20a1738c9cf59e6d524fdee175ae Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 10:18:02 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 176/370] small edits to pr4696 eprs
Reordered words for clarity and consistency; fixed contraction use in the area.
---
.../upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx | 4 ++--
.../upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
index fb9f1dc6f0f..7de246140a8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_gui_installer.mdx
@@ -47,9 +47,9 @@ You can upgrade to Replication Server 7 using the graphical user interface insta
If you don't need to adjust the port numbers, register the publication server and subscription server with the Replication Server console as described in [Registering a publication server](../../05_smr_operation/02_creating_publication/01_registering_publication_server/#registering_publication_server) and [Registering a subscription server](../../05_smr_operation/03_creating_subscription/01_registering_subscription_server/#registering_subscription_server). The existing replication systems appear in the replication tree of the Replication Server Console.
-After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink (for Linux) to it or rename the driver (for Windows). See [Installing a JDBC driver](../installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
+After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink to it (for Linux) or rename the driver (for Windows). See [Installing a JDBC driver](../installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
-You are now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
+You're now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
!!! Note
**For Windows:** If you give a new admin password during an upgrade, it is ignored. After the upgrade, Replication Server picks the old admin user name and password (which is saved in `edb-replconf`).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
index 73387b79b40..8c4758286d8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/installing/upgrading_replication_server/upgrading_with_xdb_rpm_package.mdx
@@ -185,4 +185,4 @@ If you're using Replication Server 6.2.x that was installed using the Replicatio
After upgrading and before using Replication Server, you need to download a JDBC driver and create a symlink to it. See [Installing a JDBC driver](../installing_jdbc_driver/) for more information.
-You are now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
+You're now ready to use Replication Server 7 to create new replication systems and manage existing ones.
From 4eedabf7d91e05b21eda91d6156f5840cd26df56 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: William Ivanski
Date: Sat, 15 Jul 2023 18:54:10 -0300
Subject: [PATCH 177/370] Adjust bdr.default_replica_identity values
According to the observable behavior and the source code.
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx | 13 ++++++++-----
1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
index 6af5595994d..245fcf1ff22 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
@@ -37,10 +37,13 @@ identify rows that are updated or deleted.
The accepted values are:
-- `DEFAULT` — Records the old values of the columns of the primary key,
+- `default` — Records the old values of the columns of the primary key,
if any (this is the default PostgreSQL behavior).
-- `FULL` — Records the old values of all columns in the row.
-- `NOTHING` — Records no information about the old row.
+- `full` — Records the old values of all columns in the row.
+- `nothing` — Records no information about the old row.
+- `auto` — Tables with PK are created with REPLICA IDENTITY DEFAULT,
+ and tables without PK are created with REPLICA IDENTITY FULL. This is
+ the default PGD behavior.
See [PostgreSQL documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/sql-altertable.html#SQL-CREATETABLE-REPLICA-IDENTITY) for more details.
@@ -49,12 +52,12 @@ PGD can't replicate `UPDATE` and `DELETE` operations on tables without a
for the table is `FULL`, either by table-specific configuration or by
`bdr.default_replica_identity`.
-If `bdr.default_replica_identity` is `DEFAULT` and there is a `UNIQUE`
+If `bdr.default_replica_identity` is `default` and there is a `UNIQUE`
constraint on the table, it isn't automatically picked up as `REPLICA IDENTITY`.
You need to set it explicitly when creating the table or after, as described
above.
-Setting the replica identity of tables to `FULL` increases the volume of
+Setting the replica identity of tables to `full` increases the volume of
WAL written and the amount of data replicated on the wire for the table.
### `bdr.ddl_replication`
From b0c5f3595e153629079089ea5692c3d72670edfe Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer <63653723+josh-heyer@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 08:44:30 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 178/370] Simplify language around admonition slightly
---
.../postgres_for_kubernetes/1/kubectl-plugin.mdx | 14 +++++++++-----
1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/kubectl-plugin.mdx b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/kubectl-plugin.mdx
index 96f0a74dfa2..91b73ee5a9b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/kubectl-plugin.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/1/kubectl-plugin.mdx
@@ -890,10 +890,14 @@ This command will start `kubectl exec`, and the `kubectl` executable must be
reachable in your `PATH` variable to correctly work.
!!! Note
- Mind that when connecting to instances running on OpenShift, one has to explicitly
- pass a username to the `psql` command, because of a [security measure built into
- OpenShift](https://cloud.redhat.com/blog/a-guide-to-openshift-and-uids):
- `kubectl cnp psql cluster-example -- -U postgres`.
+When connecting to instances running on OpenShift, you must explicitly
+pass a username to the `psql` command, because of a [security measure built into
+OpenShift](https://cloud.redhat.com/blog/a-guide-to-openshift-and-uids):
+
+```shell
+kubectl cnp psql cluster-example -- -U postgres
+```
+!!!
### Snapshotting a Postgres cluster
@@ -937,4 +941,4 @@ A specific `VolumeSnapshotClass` can be requested via the `-c` option:
```shell
kubectl cnp snapshot cluster-example -c longhorn
-```
\ No newline at end of file
+```
From 22dc3024bec26dc33fdf3eb518b15f509e8321ea Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Mon, 21 Aug 2023 16:11:03 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 179/370] Reverting change from 5.2 update
---
.../docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 41 ++++++++-----------
1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index 0802df449da..c3efd69d9e5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -27,28 +27,19 @@ Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older version
## Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 5
-Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.7 to 5. You must first upgrade your cluster to 4.3.0 or later before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-from-version-37-to-version-4) for more information.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
+Upgrades directly from 3.7 to 5 may be possible by partnering with EDB
+Professional Services, or reaching out to EDB support for assistance.
+
+Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.7 to 5 using TPA. While it is
+possible to upgrade your 3.7 cluster to 4.3.0 or later[^1],
+you should be aware that you will be migrating to a proxy architecture that has
+been superceded in PGD 5. We therefore recommend you work with EDB professional
+services or EDB Support to perform a manual upgrade to 5, or hold off until a
+direct upgrade option is available.
+
+Development is underway to provide a direct upgrade path from 3.7 to 5 using TPA
+by Q4.
+
+[^1]: See [Upgrading from
+version 3.7 to version
+4](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-from-version-37-to-version-4)
\ No newline at end of file
From 4b912860c1cde3e783c759841748a24bdd01b076 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Thu, 24 Aug 2023 10:44:50 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 180/370] Final approved content for upgrade text
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 32 +++++++++----------
1 file changed, 16 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index c3efd69d9e5..fffac6f1323 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -27,19 +27,19 @@ Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older version
## Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 5
-Upgrades directly from 3.7 to 5 may be possible by partnering with EDB
-Professional Services, or reaching out to EDB support for assistance.
-
-Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.7 to 5 using TPA. While it is
-possible to upgrade your 3.7 cluster to 4.3.0 or later[^1],
-you should be aware that you will be migrating to a proxy architecture that has
-been superceded in PGD 5. We therefore recommend you work with EDB professional
-services or EDB Support to perform a manual upgrade to 5, or hold off until a
-direct upgrade option is available.
-
-Development is underway to provide a direct upgrade path from 3.7 to 5 using TPA
-by Q4.
-
-[^1]: See [Upgrading from
-version 3.7 to version
-4](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-from-version-37-to-version-4)
\ No newline at end of file
+At this time, TPA has only enabled upgrades from PGD 3.7 to 4 and PGD 4 to 5.
+Customers moving from 3.7 to 5 and desiring automation would need to use this
+two-step upgrade path and will potentially have their proxy architecture changed
+multiple times from HA Proxy to HARP and finally to PGD Proxy.
+
+Significant development has been done to make upgrading directly from 3.7 to 5
+possible and easier. We've expanded the database versions supported with PGD 5
+and enabled the upgradeability of the BDR extension across multiple PGD
+versions. Previously, we only supported upgrades from the previous major
+version. Often, a database upgrade was also required because only one database
+major version was supported by both PGD versions.
+
+Development is currently ongoing to provide a direct upgrade path from 3.7 to 5
+using TPA by Q4. In the interim, customers may reach out to EDB Professional
+Services or Support for assistance and guidance.
+
From 2dd4eb4ee295de8cf92b5a6b0a2fa4f51a3416f1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 14:58:05 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 181/370] Move online help redirects to PEM 9 (where online
help was eliminated)
---
.../8/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx | 5 -----
.../9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx | 5 +++++
2 files changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/8/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/8/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
index 62c7c935f0b..bdc762bd704 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/8/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/8/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
@@ -5,11 +5,6 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/configuring_pgBouncer.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/03_configuring_pgBouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/01_pem_pgbouncer_server_agent_connection/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/02_pem_pgbouncer_preparing_dbserver/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/03_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pgbouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/04_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pem_agent/
---
You must configure PgBouncer to work with the PEM database server. This example runs PgBouncer as the enterprisedb system user and outlines the process of configuring pgBouncer version 1.9 or later.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
index c25887e3c24..9729d83eaa7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,11 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/configuring_pgBouncer.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/03_configuring_pgBouncer/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/01_pem_pgbouncer_server_agent_connection/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/02_pem_pgbouncer_preparing_dbserver/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/03_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pgbouncer/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/04_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pem_agent/
---
You must configure PgBouncer to work with the PEM database server.
From 3e1b27217b2d01cb696feda8c271733a60c06047 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Sat, 26 Aug 2023 07:24:37 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 182/370] BigAnimal: choosing config
---
.../release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 22 ++++++++++++++++++-
1 file changed, 21 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 97b8dfaefb4..fe72c9d9780 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -67,7 +67,14 @@ Distributed high-availability clusters contain one or two data groups. Your data
The witness node/witness group doesn't host data but exists for management purposes, supporting operations that require a consensus, for example, in case of an availability zone failure.
-A single-region configuration with three data nodes (one lead and two shadow nodes each in separate availability zones) is available. However, if you're looking for a true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, select a three-region configuration with:
+
+### Single-region configuration
+
+A single-region configuration has three data nodes with one lead and two shadow nodes each in separate availability zones.
+
+### Three-region configuration
+
+A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a three-region configuration has:
- A data node, shadow node, and a witness node in one region
- The same configuration in another region
@@ -75,6 +82,19 @@ A single-region configuration with three data nodes (one lead and two shadow nod
![region(2 data + 1 shadow) + region(2 data + 1 shadow) + region(1 witness)](images/Multi-Region-3Nodes.png)
+### Considerations when choosing your configuration
+
+| Considerations | Single-region configuration | Three-region configuration |
+|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|
+| Locations needed | 1 | 3 |
+| Fast restoration of local HA after data node failure | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes |
+| Data protection in case of location failure | No (unless offsite backup) | Yes |
+| Global consensus in case of location failure | N/A | Yes |
+| Data restore required after location failure | Yes | No |
+| Immediate failover in case of location failure | No - requires data restore from backup | Yes - alternate Location |
+| Cross-location network traffic | Only if backup is offsite | Full replication traffic |
+| License cost | 2 or 3 PGD data nodes | 4 or 6 PGD data nodes |
+
### For more information
For instructions on creating a distributed high-availability cluster using the BigAnimal portal, see [Creating a distributed high-availability cluster](../getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster/).
From 31026deb87ba4b6ef1c45b9573a76345ef56a2bf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 13:04:19 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 183/370] fixed terminology per Natalia's slack
---
.../release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 10 +++++-----
1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 5 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index fe72c9d9780..0e881cce7b4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ Distributed high-availability clusters contain one or two data groups. Your data
The witness node/witness group doesn't host data but exists for management purposes, supporting operations that require a consensus, for example, in case of an availability zone failure.
-### Single-region configuration
+### Single data location
-A single-region configuration has three data nodes with one lead and two shadow nodes each in separate availability zones.
+A single data location configuration has three data nodes with one lead and two shadow nodes each in separate availability zones.
-### Three-region configuration
+### Two data locations and witness
-A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a three-region configuration has:
+A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a two data locations configuration has:
- A data node, shadow node, and a witness node in one region
- The same configuration in another region
@@ -84,7 +84,7 @@ A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a three-r
### Considerations when choosing your configuration
-| Considerations | Single-region configuration | Three-region configuration |
+| Considerations | Single data location | Two data locations and witness |
|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|
| Locations needed | 1 | 3 |
| Fast restoration of local HA after data node failure | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes |
From 5270d285806d735e87b12887119d916ce4a091d6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 07:40:20 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 184/370] used new table and did some reorg'ing
---
.../release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 41 +++++++++++--------
1 file changed, 23 insertions(+), 18 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 0e881cce7b4..25b99f6a2b0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
---
title: "Supported cluster types"
+deepToC: true
redirects:
- 02_high_availibility
---
@@ -11,7 +12,9 @@ BigAnimal supports three cluster types:
You choose the type of cluster you want on the [Create Cluster](https://portal.biganimal.com/create-cluster) page in the [BigAnimal](https://portal.biganimal.com) portal.
-Postgres distribution and version support varies by cluster and deployment type.
+## Choosing your Postgres distribution
+
+Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-cluster-type-and-configuration) and [deployment](deployment_options) type.
| Postgres distribution | Versions | Cluster type | Deployment type |
| ---------------------------- | -------- | ------------------------------ | ----------------------- |
@@ -21,7 +24,20 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by cluster and deployment type.
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Single node, primary/standby high availability | BigAnimal cloud account |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Distributed high-availability | Your cloud account |
-## Single node
+## Choosing your cluster type and configuration
+
+| Consideration | [Single node](#single-node) |[Primary/Standby HA](primarystandby-high-availability) | [HA + standby replica](#standby-replicas) | [Distributed HA single region](#single-data-location) | [Distributed HA multi-region](#two-data-locations-and-witness) |
+|--------------------------|-----------|------------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|
+| Data replication | None | Physical | Physical | Logical | Logical |
+| Region | Single | Single | Multi | Single | Multi |
+| VM failure tolerance | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| AZ failure tolerance | TBD | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| Region failure tolerance | TBD | TBD | ✅ | TBD | ✅ |
+| Recovery time objective | varies | 35s-60s | varies | 0 | 0 |
+| Recovery point objective | <5 min | 0 | <5 min | 0 | 30s (configurable) |
+| SLA | 99.5% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.995% |
+
+### Single node
For nonproduction use cases where high availability isn't a primary concern, a cluster deployment with high availability not enabled provides one primary with no standby replicas for failover or read-only workloads.
@@ -29,7 +45,7 @@ In case of unrecoverable failure of the primary, a restore from a backup is requ
![BigAnimal Cluster4](images/single-node.png)
-## Primary/standby high availability
+### Primary/standby high availability
The Primary/Standby High Availability option is provided to minimize downtime in cases of failures. Primary/standby high-availability clusters—one *primary* and one or two *standby replicas*—are configured automatically, with standby replicas staying up to date through physical streaming replication.
@@ -43,7 +59,7 @@ In case of temporary or permanent unavailability of the primary, a standby repli
Incoming client connections are always routed to the current primary. In case of failure of the primary, a standby replica is promoted to primary, and new connections are routed to the new primary. When the old primary recovers, it rejoins the cluster as a standby replica.
-### Standby replicas
+#### Standby replicas
By default, replication is synchronous to one standby replica and asynchronous to the other. That is, one standby replica must confirm that a transaction record was written to disk before the client receives acknowledgment of a successful commit.
@@ -68,11 +84,11 @@ Distributed high-availability clusters contain one or two data groups. Your data
The witness node/witness group doesn't host data but exists for management purposes, supporting operations that require a consensus, for example, in case of an availability zone failure.
-### Single data location
+#### Single data location
A single data location configuration has three data nodes with one lead and two shadow nodes each in separate availability zones.
-### Two data locations and witness
+#### Two data locations and witness
A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a two data locations configuration has:
@@ -82,18 +98,7 @@ A true active-active solution that protects against regional failures, a two dat
![region(2 data + 1 shadow) + region(2 data + 1 shadow) + region(1 witness)](images/Multi-Region-3Nodes.png)
-### Considerations when choosing your configuration
-
-| Considerations | Single data location | Two data locations and witness |
-|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|------------------------------------------------------|
-| Locations needed | 1 | 3 |
-| Fast restoration of local HA after data node failure | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes | Yes - if 3 PGD data nodes No - if 2 PGD data nodes |
-| Data protection in case of location failure | No (unless offsite backup) | Yes |
-| Global consensus in case of location failure | N/A | Yes |
-| Data restore required after location failure | Yes | No |
-| Immediate failover in case of location failure | No - requires data restore from backup | Yes - alternate Location |
-| Cross-location network traffic | Only if backup is offsite | Full replication traffic |
-| License cost | 2 or 3 PGD data nodes | 4 or 6 PGD data nodes |
+
### For more information
From e71f07030bf6e94ae549bda12d695fdeef64f1de Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 14:34:37 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 185/370] fixed angle brackets
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 25b99f6a2b0..7c2a131f971 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-clu
| AZ failure tolerance | TBD | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
| Region failure tolerance | TBD | TBD | ✅ | TBD | ✅ |
| Recovery time objective | varies | 35s-60s | varies | 0 | 0 |
-| Recovery point objective | <5 min | 0 | <5 min | 0 | 30s (configurable) |
+| Recovery point objective | <5 min | 0 | <5 min | 0 | 30s (configurable) |
| SLA | 99.5% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.995% |
### Single node
From 9814d25c8d71463cece6d2ef43ebf3a6b0de98b6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:17:46 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 186/370] some cleanup to the OCL doc
---
.../15/02_supported_platforms.mdx | 2 +-
.../15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx | 8 ++---
.../02_forming_a_connection_string.mdx | 10 +++---
.../03_compiling_and_linking_a_program.mdx | 31 +++++++------------
.../04_ref_cursor_support.mdx | 2 +-
.../05_ocl_function_reference.mdx | 16 +++++-----
.../06_ocl_error_codes_reference.mdx | 2 +-
.../04_open_client_library/08_otl_support.mdx | 20 ++++++------
.../15/05_generating_the_ocl_trace.mdx | 6 ++--
.../docs/ocl_connector/15/06_using_ssl.mdx | 6 ++--
.../15/07_scram_compatibility.mdx | 2 +-
.../ocl_connector/15/installing/windows.mdx | 8 ++---
12 files changed, 51 insertions(+), 62 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
index 9bf7285cd7b..0036e328fa5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/02_supported_platforms.mdx
@@ -5,5 +5,5 @@ title: "Supported platforms"
-The EDB OCL Connector is supported on the same platforms as EDB Postgres Advanced Server. To determine the platform support for the EDB OCL Connector, you can either refer to the platform support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server on the [Platform Compatibility page](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#epas) on the EDB website or refer to [Installing EDB OCL Connector](./installing).
+The EDB OCL Connector is supported on the same platforms as EDB Postgres Advanced Server. To determine the platform support for the EDB OCL Connector, you can refer either to the platform support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server on the [Platform Compatibility page](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#epas) on the EDB website or to [Installing EDB OCL Connector](./installing).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
index 2f5ea245c55..6f749a2bf6e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/03_libpq_compatibility.mdx
@@ -5,17 +5,17 @@ title: "libpq cross-version compatibility"
-EDB OCL installation always uses the latest libpq. The different scenarios supported under libpq cross-version compatibility are as following when upgrading to a new major release of EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS):
+EDB OCL installation always uses the latest libpq. When upgrading to a new major release of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, the different scenarios supported under libpq cross-version compatibility are as follows:
- If the latest libpq is installed on the machine, OCL uses it.
- If the latest libpq isn't already installed, OCL installs it. It doesn't use the existing libpq of older versions even if it's installed.
- If you upgrade the OCL version, then libpq is also upgraded to its latest version.
-If you are upgrading to a minor release, you need to manually upgrade libpq. See the following section for instructions.
+If you're upgrading to a minor release, you need to manually upgrade libpq.
-## Upgrading libpq for minor releases of EPAS
+## Upgrading libpq for minor releases of EDB Postgres Advanced Server
-For minor releases of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you may need to upgrade libpq to a required version on the client machine where you installed EDB OCL Connector. (Any new libpq version dependencies are listed in the release notes.) If you need to upgrade libpq, run the appropriate command for your operating system.
+For minor releases of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you might need to upgrade libpq to a required version on the client machine where you installed EDB OCL Connector. (Any new libpq version dependencies are listed in the release notes.) If you need to upgrade libpq, run the appropriate command for your operating system.
### For Ubuntu/Debian
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/02_forming_a_connection_string.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/02_forming_a_connection_string.mdx
index 260392ad1fd..77ee84e425f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/02_forming_a_connection_string.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/02_forming_a_connection_string.mdx
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ postgresql://[user[:password]@][host][:port][/dbname]
[?param1=value1&...]
```
-You can also use a Postgres-style URI to specify multiple host components (each with an optional port component) in a single URI. A multi-host connection string takes the form:
+You can also use a Postgres-style URI to specify multiple host components, each with an optional port component, in a single URI. A multi-host connection string takes the form:
`postgresql://:@host1:port1,host2:port2,host3:port3/`
@@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ Where:
`password` is the password associated with the connecting user.
- `host` is the host name or IP address to which you are connecting. To specify an IPV6 address, enclose the address in square brackets.
+ `host` is the host name or IP address to which you're connecting. To specify an IPV6 address, enclose the address in square brackets.
- `port` is the port number to which you are connecting.
+ `port` is the port number to which you're connecting.
- `dbname` is the name of the database with which you are connecting.
+ `dbname` is the name of the database with which you're connecting.
- `paramx=valuex` pairs specify extra (application-specific) connection properties.
+ `paramx=valuex` pairs specify extra, application-specific connection properties.
For example, each of the following connection strings establishes a connection to the `edb` database on port `5444` of a system with an IP address of `10.0.0.4`:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/03_compiling_and_linking_a_program.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/03_compiling_and_linking_a_program.mdx
index f6ff8c06e62..9cf803a12ba 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/03_compiling_and_linking_a_program.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/03_compiling_and_linking_a_program.mdx
@@ -7,13 +7,9 @@ title: "Compiling and linking a program"
The EDB Open Client Library allows applications written using the Oracle Call Interface API to connect to and access an EDB database with minimal changes to the C source code. The EDB Open Client Library files are named:
- On Linux:
+- On Linux: `libedboci.so`
- `libedboci.so`
-
- On Windows:
-
- `edboci.dll`
+- On Windows: `edboci.dll`
The files are installed in the `oci/lib` subdirectory.
@@ -21,30 +17,25 @@ The files are installed in the `oci/lib` subdirectory.
This example compiles and links the sample program `edb_demo.c` in a Linux environment. The `edb_demo.c` file is located in the `oci/samples` subdirectory.
-1. Set the `ORACLE_HOME` and `EDB_HOME` environment variables.
-
-2. Set `ORACLE_HOME` to the complete pathname of the Oracle home directory.
-
- For example:
+1. Set `ORACLE_HOME` to the complete pathname of the Oracle home directory, for example:
`export ORACLE_HOME=/usr/lib/oracle/xe/app/oracle/product/10.2.0/server`
-3. Set `EDB_HOME` to the complete pathname of the home directory.
-
- For example:
+1. Set `EDB_HOME` to the complete pathname of the home directory, for example:
`export EDB_HOME=/usr/edb`
-4. Set `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` to the complete path of `libpthread.so`. By default, `libpthread.so` is located in `/lib64`.
+1. Set `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` to the complete path of `libpthread.so`. By default, `libpthread.so` is located in `/lib64`.
`export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=/lib64/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH`
-5. Set `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` to include the EDB Postgres Advanced Server Open Client library. By default, `libedboci.so` is located in `$EDB_HOME/oci/lib`.
+1. Set `LD_LIBRARY_PATH` to include the EDB Postgres Advanced Server Open Client library. By default, `libedboci.so` is located in `$EDB_HOME/oci/lib`.
`export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$EDB_HOME/oci:$EDB_HOME/oci/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH`
-6. Then, compile and link the OCL API program.
-
- `cd $EDB_HOME/oci/samples`
+1. Compile and link the OCL API program:
- `make`
+ ```text
+ cd $EDB_HOME/oci/samples
+ make
+ ```
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/04_ref_cursor_support.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/04_ref_cursor_support.mdx
index b1f5902c2fb..cb84ed028d4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/04_ref_cursor_support.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/04_ref_cursor_support.mdx
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ The EDB Postgres Advanced Server Open Client Library supports the use of `REF CU
The EDB OCL Connector also supports the `SQLT_RSET` data type.
-This example invokes a stored procedure that opens a cursor and returns a `REF CURSOR` as an output parameter. The code sample assumes that a PL/SQL procedure named `openCursor` (with an `OUT` parameter of type `REF CURSOR`) was created on the database server and that the required handles were allocated:
+This example invokes a stored procedure that opens a cursor and returns a `REF CURSOR` as an output parameter. The code sample assumes that a PL/SQL procedure named `openCursor`, with an `OUT` parameter of type `REF CURSOR`, was created on the database server and that the required handles were allocated:
```c
char* openCursor = "begin \
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/05_ocl_function_reference.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/05_ocl_function_reference.mdx
index 731f5be95e7..04ff3cd9d87 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/05_ocl_function_reference.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/05_ocl_function_reference.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ title: "OCL function reference"
-The following tables list the functions supported by the EDB OCL connector. Any and all header files must be supplied by the user. EDB Postgres Advanced Server doesn't supply any such files.
+The following tables list the functions supported by the EDB OCL connector. You must supply any header files. EDB Postgres Advanced Server doesn't supply header files.
## Connect, authorize, and initialize functions
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ The following tables list the functions supported by the EDB OCL connector. Any
### Using the tnsnames.ora file
-The `OCIServerAttach` and `OCILogon` methods use `NET_SERVICE_NAME` as a connection descriptor specified in the `dblink` parameter of the `tnsnames.ora` file. Use the `tnsnames.ora` file (compatible with Oracle databases) to specify database connection details. OCL searches your home directory for a file named `.tnsnames.ora`. If OCL doesn't find the `.tnsnames.ora` file in the home directory, it searches for `tnsnames.ora` on the path specified in `TNS_ADMIN` environment variable.
+The `OCIServerAttach` and `OCILogon` methods use `NET_SERVICE_NAME` as a connection descriptor specified in the `dblink` parameter of the `tnsnames.ora` file. Use the `tnsnames.ora` file (compatible with Oracle databases) to specify database connection details. OCL searches your home directory for a file named `.tnsnames.ora`. If OCL doesn't find the `.tnsnames.ora` file there, it searches for `tnsnames.ora` on the path specified in `TNS_ADMIN` environment variable.
You can specify multiple descriptors `(NET_SERVICE_NAME)` in the `tnsnames.ora` file.
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ If you don't have a `tnsnames.ora` file, supply the connection string in the for
### EDB_ATTR_EMPTY_STRINGS
-By default, EDB Postgres Advanced Server treats an empty string as a `NULL` value. You can use the `EDB_ATTR_EMPTY_STRINGS` environment attribute to control the behavior of the OCL connector when mapping empty strings. To modify the mapping behavior, use the `OCIAttrSet()` function to set `EDB_ATTR_EMPTY_STRINGS` to one of the following.
+By default, EDB Postgres Advanced Server treats an empty string as a NULL value. You can use the `EDB_ATTR_EMPTY_STRINGS` environment attribute to control the behavior of the OCL connector when mapping empty strings. To modify the mapping behavior, use the `OCIAttrSet()` function to set `EDB_ATTR_EMPTY_STRINGS` to one of the following.
| Value | Description |
| ----------------------- | ------------------------------------------------- |
@@ -104,7 +104,7 @@ When EDB Postgres Advanced Server executes a `SELECT` statement, it examines the
If the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` handle is set to `EDB_WITHOUT_HOLD`, the query is executed as a normal prepared statement.
-If the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` handle is set to `OCI_DEFAULT`, EDB Postgres Advanced Server uses the value of the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` handle. (If the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` is set to `EDB_WITH_HOLD`, the query executes as a `WITH HOLD` cursor. Otherwise, the query executes as a protocol-prepared statement).
+If the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` handle is set to `OCI_DEFAULT`, EDB Postgres Advanced Server uses the value of the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` handle. (If the `EDB_ATTR_HOLDABLE` attribute in the `OCIServer` is set to `EDB_WITH_HOLD`, the query executes as a `WITH HOLD` cursor. Otherwise, the query executes as a protocol-prepared statement.)
### EDB_HOLD_CURSOR_ACTION
@@ -146,13 +146,13 @@ OCIStmtExecute(...);
If your application doesn't run properly with the extra commits added by `EDB_COMMIT_AFTER_CURSOR`, you can try setting `EDB_ATTR_HOLD_CURSOR_ACTION` to `EDB_CURSOR_WITHOUT_XACT_BLK`. With this action, the OCL doesn't begin a new transaction chain. If you create a `WITH HOLD` cursor immediately after committing or rolling back a transaction, the cursor is created in its own transaction, the database server commits that transaction, and the cursor persists.
-You might still experience errors if the cursor declaration is not the first statement in a transaction. If you execute some other statement before declaring the cursor, the `WITH HOLD` cursor is created in a transaction block and can be rolled back if an error occurs (or if your application calls `OCITransRollback()`).
+You might still experience errors if the cursor declaration isn't the first statement in a transaction. If you execute some other statement before declaring the cursor, the `WITH HOLD` cursor is created in a transaction block and can be rolled back if an error occurs or if your application calls `OCITransRollback()`.
-You can set the `EDB_HOLD_CURSOR_ACTION` on the server level (`OCIServer`) or for each statement handle (`OCIStmt`). If the statement attribute is set to a value other than `OCI_DEFAULT`, the value is derived from the statement handle. Otherwise (if the statement attribute is set to `OCI_DEFAULT`), the value is taken from the server handle. So you can define a server-wide default action by setting the attribute in the server handle and leaving the attribute set to `OCI_DEFAULT` in the statement handles. You can use different values for each statement handle (or server handle) as you see fit.
+You can set the `EDB_HOLD_CURSOR_ACTION` on the server level (`OCIServer`) or for each statement handle (`OCIStmt`). If the statement attribute is set to a value other than `OCI_DEFAULT`, the value is derived from the statement handle. Otherwise, if the statement attribute is set to `OCI_DEFAULT`, the value is taken from the server handle. So you can define a server-wide default action by setting the attribute in the server handle and leaving the attribute set to `OCI_DEFAULT` in the statement handles. You can use different values for each statement handle or server handle as you see fit.
### EDB_ATTR_STMT_LVL_TX
-Unless otherwise instructed, the OCL connector rolls back the current transaction whenever the server reports an error. You can override the automatic `ROLLBACK` with the `edb_stmt_level_tx` parameter, which preserves modifications in a transaction, even if one (or several) statements raise an error in the transaction.
+Unless otherwise instructed, the OCL connector rolls back the current transaction whenever the server reports an error. You can override the automatic `ROLLBACK` with the `edb_stmt_level_tx` parameter, which preserves modifications in a transaction, even if one or more statements raise an error in the transaction.
You can use the `OCIServer` attribute with `OCIAttrSet()` and `OCIAttrGet()` to enable or disable `EDB_ATTR_STMT_LEVEL_TX`. By default, `edb_stmt_level_tx` is disabled. To enable `edb_stmt_level_tx`, the client application must call `OCIAttrSet()`:
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ OCIAttrSet(server,
### xaoSvcCtx
-To use the `xaoSvcCtx` function, extensions in the `xaoSvcCtx` or `xa_open` connection string format must be provided as follows:
+To use the `xaoSvcCtx` function, provide extensions in the `xaoSvcCtx` or `xa_open` connection string format as follows:
`Oracle_XA{+ ...}`
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/06_ocl_error_codes_reference.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/06_ocl_error_codes_reference.mdx
index fe6f48d510c..13360a97423 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/06_ocl_error_codes_reference.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/06_ocl_error_codes_reference.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ title: "OCL error codes (reference)"
The following table lists the error code mappings defined by the OCL Connector. When the database server reports an error code or condition (shown in the first or second column), the OCL converts the value to the compatible value displayed in the third column.
-| Error Code | Condition Name | Oracle Error Code |
+| Error code | Condition name | Oracle error code |
| ---------- | ------------------------------------------------- | ----------------- |
| 42601 | syntax_error | ORA-16945 |
| 42P01 | undefined_table | ORA-00942 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/08_otl_support.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/08_otl_support.mdx
index c039d1a8b3d..5b5a1880ae4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/08_otl_support.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/04_open_client_library/08_otl_support.mdx
@@ -5,16 +5,16 @@ title: "OTL support"
-Oracle Template Library (OTL)) is a C++ library for database access. It consists of a single header file. To know more about OTL, see the [Oracle, Odbc and DB2-CLI Template Library Programmer's Guide](http://otl.sourceforge.net/).
+Oracle Template Library (OTL) is a C++ library for database access. It consists of a single header file. To know more about OTL, see the [Oracle, Odbc and DB2-CLI Template Library Programmer's Guide](http://otl.sourceforge.net/).
## OTL certification
-The EDB OCL Connector, version 13.1.4.2, is certified with OTL 4.0. To use OTL-supported data types and for other OTL-specific behavior, define the OTL environment variable (the value is not important) on the shell before running an OTL-based app. For example: You can export `OTL=TRUE` for conditional execution of scenarios that are related to OTL.
+The EDB OCL Connector, version 13.1.4.2, is certified with OTL 4.0. To use OTL-supported data types and for other OTL-specific behavior, define the OTL environment variable (the value isn't important) on the shell before running an OTL-based app. For example, you can export `OTL=TRUE` for conditional execution of scenarios that are related to OTL.
EDB OCL Connector is certified with the following OTL features:
-- Connect, disconnect, commit, and rollback using `otl_connect`.
-- Constant SQL statements (a SQL statement is constant if it doesn't have any bind variables) using the static function `otl_cursor::direct_exec`. It includes most DDL statements like `CREATE TABLE` and `CREATE PROCEDURE/FUNCTION`.
+- Connect, disconnect, commit, and roll back using `otl_connect`.
+- Constant SQL statements using the static function `otl_cursor::direct_exec`. (A SQL statement is constant if it doesn't have any bind variables.) It includes most DDL statements like `CREATE TABLE` and `CREATE PROCEDURE/FUNCTION`.
- SQL statements with bind variable using `otl_stream class`. It includes most DML statements like `SELECT`, `UPDATE`, `DELETE`, `INSERT`, and `PROCEDURE/FUNCTION` calls.
- Date/Time data types using `otl_datetime`.
- Raw/Long Raw data types using `otl_long_string`.
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ EDB OCL Connector is certified with the following OTL features:
## Connect and log in
-The following example initializes OCL and connects to a database using `tnsnames.ora` based connection string:
+This example initializes OCL and connects to a database using a `tnsnames.ora`-based connection string:
```c
otl_connect db;
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ if(db.connected)
## CREATE TABLE, INSERT, and SELECT
-The following example uses `otl_cursor::direct_exec` to create a table and then insert a row in this table. You can then use `otl_stream` to retrieve the inserted row.
+This example uses `otl_cursor::direct_exec` to create a table and then insert a row in the table. You can then use `otl_stream` to retrieve the inserted row.
```c
char* createstmt =
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ while (!otlCur.eof()) {
## UPDATE
-The following example uses bind parameters in an `UPDATE` statement:
+This example uses bind parameters in an `UPDATE` statement:
```c
char* updatestmt = "UPDATE testtable SET c1=:c1 "
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ otlCur << data << whereValue;
## Stored procedure
-The following example creates a stored procedure using `otl_cursor::direct_exec` and then calls it using `otl_stream`:
+This example creates a stored procedure using `otl_cursor::direct_exec` and then calls it using `otl_stream`:
```c
otl_cursor::direct_exec(
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ cout << "B: " << b << endl;
## Function
-The following example creates a function using `otl_cursor::direct_exec` and then calls it using `otl_stream`:
+This example creates a function using `otl_cursor::direct_exec` and then calls it using `otl_stream`:
!!! Note
This example is using the `emp` table in the `edb` sample database.
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ cout << "Retrieved Value: " << eno << endl;
## REF CURSOR
-The following example creates a package with a procedure that returns three ref cursors as `OUT` parameters and then calls it.
+This example creates a package with a procedure that returns three ref cursors as `OUT` parameters and then calls it.
!!! Note
This example is using the `emp` table in the `edb` sample database.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/05_generating_the_ocl_trace.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/05_generating_the_ocl_trace.mdx
index a5e12ee95a5..b6ef4d4b8da 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/05_generating_the_ocl_trace.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/05_generating_the_ocl_trace.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ title: "Generating the OCL trace"
-The OCL tracing option logs direct communication (queries, updates, etc.) with the backend in the specified `OCI_DEBUG_LOG file`. It also logs the functions/APIs that were invoked. The trace files are generated in the default working directory (`oci_log_file_name`). If you append the path with a file name (`directory path/oci_log_file_name`), then the trace files are generated at specific location.
+The OCL tracing option logs direct communication (queries, updates, and so on) with the backend in the specified `OCI_DEBUG_LOG file`. It also logs the functions/APIs that were invoked. The trace files are generated in the default working directory (`oci_log_file_name`). If you append the path with a file name (`directory path/oci_log_file_name`), then the trace files are generated at that specific location.
A trace file is generated for each connection in text-file (readable) format.
@@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ To generate the OCL trace:
1. Enable the EDB client-side tracing for OCL. You can enable the OCL tracing by setting these environment variables:
-`export OCI_DEBUG_LEVEL=4`
+ - `export OCI_DEBUG_LEVEL=4`
-`export OCI_DEBUG_LOG=oci_log_file`
+ - `export OCI_DEBUG_LOG=oci_log_file`
2. After you export the environment variables, run the application. The OCL trace files are generated in the specified directory.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/06_using_ssl.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/06_using_ssl.mdx
index fa87a5fcecf..24810e0bada 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/06_using_ssl.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/06_using_ssl.mdx
@@ -13,9 +13,7 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server provides native support for using SSL connections t
1. Configure the server and client-side certificates. For detailed information about configuring SSL client and server-side certificates, refer to the [PostgreSQL SSL documentation](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/12/libpq-ssl.html).
-2. Enable the SSL OCL connection:
-
- In an OCL client application, you can enable SSL mode by setting the `EDB_ATTR_SSL` attribute in `Session`.
+2. Enable the SSL OCL connection. In an OCL client application, you can enable SSL mode by setting the `EDB_ATTR_SSL` attribute in `Session`:
```c
char* sslmode = "verify-full";
@@ -30,7 +28,7 @@ retValue = OCIAttrSet((dvoid*)authp,
!!! Note
`EDB_ATTR_SSL` is defined in the `edboci.h` header file available in the installation directory.
-3. After setting SSL attribute, you can use the `OCILogon` function to create a connection:
+3. After setting the SSL attribute, you can use the `OCILogon` function to create a connection:
```c
OCILogon(pEnv,pError,&pSvc,(OraText*)pUsername,ub4)UsernameLen,
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/07_scram_compatibility.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/07_scram_compatibility.mdx
index d9e7d2f2b27..76b6fb8ed5d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/07_scram_compatibility.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/07_scram_compatibility.mdx
@@ -5,4 +5,4 @@ title: "Scram compatibility"
-The EDB OCL driver provides SCRAM-SHA-256 support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 11 and later. This support is available from EDB OCL 11.0.1 release and later.
+The EDB OCL driver provides SCRAM-SHA-256 support for EDB Postgres Advanced Server version 11 and later. This support is available in EDB OCL 11.0.1 release and later.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/windows.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/windows.mdx
index 808dd931752..0dfc9bb3234 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/windows.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/installing/windows.mdx
@@ -5,11 +5,11 @@ redirects:
- /ocl_connector/latest/04_open_client_library/01_installing_and_configuring_the_ocl_connector/install_on_windows/
---
-EDB provides a graphical interactive installer for Windows. You can access it two ways:
+EDB provides a graphical interactive installer for Windows. You can access it in two ways:
- Download the graphical installer from the [Downloads page](https://www.enterprisedb.com/software-downloads-postgres#connectors), and invoke the installer directly. See [Installing directly](#installing-directly).
-- Use StackBuilder Plus (with EDB Postgres Advanced Server) to download the EDB installer package and invoke the graphical installer. See [Using StackBuilder Plus](#using-stackbuilder-plus).
+- Use StackBuilder Plus with EDB Postgres Advanced Server to download the EDB installer package and invoke the graphical installer. See [Using StackBuilder Plus](#using-stackbuilder-plus).
## Installing directly
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ If you're using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you can invoke the graphical insta
1. In StackBuilder Plus, follow the prompts until you get to the module selection page.
- On the Welcome page, select the target server installation from the list of available servers. If your network requires you to use a proxy server to access the internet, select **Proxy servers** and specify a server. Select **Next**.
+ On the Welcome page, from the list of available servers, select the target server installation. If your network requires you to use a proxy server to access the internet, select **Proxy servers** and specify a server. Select **Next**.
1. Expand the **Database Drivers** node, and select **EnterpriseDB OCI Connector**.
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ If you're using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you can invoke the graphical insta
1. On the Setup OCI page, select **Next**.
-1. Browse to a directory where you want OCI to be installed, or leave the directory set to the default location. Select **Next**.
+1. Browse to a directory where you want to install OCI, or leave the directory set to the default location. Select **Next**.
1. On the Ready to Install page, select **Next**.
From a09abf0579f309c37018f6276fbffbfbe4155224 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 20:34:55 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 187/370] Updated all advisories and indexes
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../security/advisories/cve.mdx.template | 4 +--
.../security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx | 23 ++++++++--------
.../security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx | 24 +++++++++--------
.../security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx | 26 +++++++++----------
.../security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx | 23 ++++++++--------
.../security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx | 23 +++++++++-------
.../security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx | 23 ++++++++--------
.../security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx | 23 +++++++++-------
.../security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx | 23 ++++++++--------
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx | 16 ++++++------
advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx | 16 ++++++------
11 files changed, 118 insertions(+), 106 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve.mdx.template b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve.mdx.template
index bbd2e96f5c9..bea078ec99c 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve.mdx.template
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve.mdx.template
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ OPTIONAL UPDATE NOTE
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
* LINKS TO REFERENCES
@@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Source: SOURCE
## Change history
-DD mmmm YYYY: ACTION
+* DD mmmm YYYY: ACTION
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
index e9c67e52f30..fe7915b0664 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41113
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
-Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -70,8 +70,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
index 8fb4c6a9d37..dcb53b9f73d 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41114
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,16 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -52,8 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
-
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -68,8 +69,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
index 43a171e6f74..762ca3f2baa 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41115
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
-Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -54,8 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
-
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -70,10 +69,11 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
-This document is provided on an "as is" basis and does not imply any kind of guarantee or warranty, including the warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular use. Your use of the information on the document is at your own risk. EDB reserves the right to change or update this document at any time. Customers are therefore recommended to always view the latest version of this document.
\ No newline at end of file
+This document is provided on an "as is" basis and does not imply any kind of guarantee or warranty, including the warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular use. Your use of the information on the document is at your own risk. EDB reserves the right to change or update this document at any time. Customers are therefore recommended to always view the latest version of this document.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
index 2183c207db8..a60aae724bb 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41116
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -37,18 +37,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
-Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.16 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.16 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -73,8 +73,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
index 956850f22f1..851750b7317 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41117
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,16 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -52,7 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -67,8 +69,9 @@ Source: TBD
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
index 10947eb6eb8..402f7eb5dc8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41118
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
-Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch and patch existing clusters. |. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -70,8 +70,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
index cb7a1141fa1..0bb33b42be2 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41119
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,16 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -52,7 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -68,8 +70,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
index 36b0918f025..888359602f7 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@ navTitle: CVE-2023-41120
First Published: 2023/08/21
-Last Updated: 2023/08/28
+Last Updated: 2023/08/30
## Summary
@@ -34,18 +34,18 @@ EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS)
## Remediation/fixes
-Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
+Impacted users must upgrade to a fixed version of EPAS and then patch existing database instance clusters using edb_sqlpatch. Users running unsupported versions of EPAS should upgrade to receive these updates. For questions about updating, users can contact their account representative or [contact EDB](https://www.enterprisedb.com/contact).
| Product | VRMF | Remediation/First Fix |
|---------|------|-----------------------|
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) |
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/))
-| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/))
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 11.21.32 | Update to latest supported version (at least [11.21.32](/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 12.16.20 | Update to latest supported version (at least [12.16.20](/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 13.12.17 | Update to latest supported version (at least [13.12.17](/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 14.9.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [14.9.0](/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
+| EPAS | All versions prior to 15.4.0 | Update to latest supported version (at least [15.4.0](/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes/)) and patch existing clusters. |
!!! Note Update
-No updates as of 28 August 2023
+30 Aug 2023 - Added recommendation to Remediation to patch existing clusters
!!!
!!! Warning Warning:
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ The patch modifies the definitions of system objects inside the database, some b
## References
-* [https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
+* [CVSS Calculator v3.1](https://www.first.org/cvss/calculator/3.1)
## Related information
@@ -69,8 +69,9 @@ EnterpriseDB
## Change history
-21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
-28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
+* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
+* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
index baf3c369dd8..6147c7465e3 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ navigation:
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
index 640abdeecc1..5ac180ceb93 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ This policy outlines how EnterpriseDB handles disclosures related to suspected v
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory()
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
From 898ec4d172922da0c407d793cb08144364a98edb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 21:21:32 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 188/370] Fixed change history last date
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx | 2 +-
8 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
index fe7915b0664..b81a774e300 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341113.mdx
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
index dcb53b9f73d..c4dcb6de550 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341114.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
index 762ca3f2baa..83c847237dd 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341115.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
index a60aae724bb..13a342a4114 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341116.mdx
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
index 851750b7317..8fcbaacd774 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341117.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Source: TBD
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
index 402f7eb5dc8..5953cc41dde 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341118.mdx
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
index 0bb33b42be2..ca40495a3ec 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341119.mdx
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
index 888359602f7..fb9c0411444 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/cve202341120.mdx
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ EnterpriseDB
* 21 August 2023: Original Copy Published
* 28 August 2023: Updated with assigned CVE number
-* 30 August 2024: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
+* 30 August 2023: Updated with Remediation to patch existing clusters
## Disclaimer
From d28f0df39edb36fb2488bbe9ee2abe6f323f7fc1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: mlewandowski-edb <63003848+mlewandowski-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:47:37 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 189/370] Correct SQL Server related typo
Changed occurrence of "Microsoft SQL service" to "Microsoft SQL Server"
---
.../7/01_introduction/04_permitted_conf_and_permutations.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/04_permitted_conf_and_permutations.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/04_permitted_conf_and_permutations.mdx
index 0bba95596e5..58ddd45c6dd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/04_permitted_conf_and_permutations.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/04_permitted_conf_and_permutations.mdx
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@ The following table shows the combinations of source and target database server
-| Source/target | Oracle | Microsoft SQL service| PostgreSQL | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (Oracle compatible) | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (PostgreSQL compatible) |
+| Source/target | Oracle | Microsoft SQL Server | PostgreSQL | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (Oracle compatible) | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (PostgreSQL compatible) |
| ------------------------------------------- | ------ | -------------------- | ---------- | ----------------------------------- | --------------------------------------- |
| Oracle | No | No | Yes | Yes | Yes |
| Microsoft SQL Server | No | No | Yes | Yes | Yes |
From 80574712baafc29d395f554d23a2cbb482c33b18 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer <63653723+josh-heyer@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 19:48:52 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 190/370] Close admonition
---
.../sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/08_deletions.mdx | 5 +++--
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/08_deletions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/08_deletions.mdx
index 0692a11f52b..51bb75ca035 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/08_deletions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/08_deletions.mdx
@@ -54,10 +54,11 @@ __OUTPUT__
```
!!! Warning
- Be careful when giving a `DELETE` command without a `WHERE` clause such as the following:
+Be careful when giving a `DELETE` command without a `WHERE` clause such as the following:
```sql
DELETE FROM tablename;
```
- This statement removes all rows from the given table, leaving it completely empty. The system doesn't request confirmation before doing this.
+This statement removes all rows from the given table, leaving it completely empty. The system doesn't request confirmation before doing this.
+!!!
From 182f37603239d3fca31c9a7fcd8b5f0c2eb62bce Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer <63653723+josh-heyer@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 19:49:36 -0700
Subject: [PATCH 191/370] Path version for v15 is 15
---
.../01_sample_database/01_sample_database_installation.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/01_sample_database/01_sample_database_installation.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/01_sample_database/01_sample_database_installation.mdx
index a32847461e0..0afd2cab5b1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/01_sample_database/01_sample_database_installation.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/fundamentals/sql_fundamentals/02_sql_tutorial/01_sample_database/01_sample_database_installation.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ redirects:
-When EDB Postgres Advanced Server is installed, a sample database named `edb` is automatically created. This sample database contains the tables and programs used in this tutorial after you execute the script `edb-sample.sql`, located in the `/usr/edb/as14/share` directory.
+When EDB Postgres Advanced Server is installed, a sample database named `edb` is automatically created. This sample database contains the tables and programs used in this tutorial after you execute the script `edb-sample.sql`, located in the `/usr/edb/as15/share` directory.
This script does the following:
From 82beabe1b63d3c88174cd7f655135cb0f1b6ea32 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: nidhibhammar <59045594+nidhibhammar@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 13:54:59 +0530
Subject: [PATCH 192/370] Moved redirects to actual topic files
---
.../9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx | 4 ----
.../pem_pgbouncer/configuring_the_pem_agent.mdx | 1 +
.../docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/index.mdx | 1 +
.../pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.mdx | 1 +
.../pem_pgbouncer/preparing_the_pem_database_server.mdx | 1 +
5 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
index 9729d83eaa7..39c05d55cc9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_pgBouncer.mdx
@@ -5,11 +5,7 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/configuring_pgBouncer.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/03_configuring_pgBouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/01_pem_pgbouncer_server_agent_connection/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/02_pem_pgbouncer_preparing_dbserver/
- /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/03_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pgbouncer/
- - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/04_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pem_agent/
---
You must configure PgBouncer to work with the PEM database server.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_the_pem_agent.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_the_pem_agent.mdx
index 3bebefdbc2c..ca24ea8aec0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_the_pem_agent.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/configuring_the_pem_agent.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/configuring_the_pem_agent.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/04_configuring_the_pem_agent/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/04_pem_pgbouncer_configuring_pem_agent/
---
You can use an RPM package to install a PEM agent. For detailed installation information, see [Installating the PEM agent](../../installing_pem_agent/).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/index.mdx
index 8a962aabf53..d6a460e5bd7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/index.mdx
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/index.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/
+- /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/
navigation:
- pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.mdx
index e2a76510044..ff5a0a68569 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/the_pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/01_the_pem_server_pem_agent_connection_management_mechanism/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/01_pem_pgbouncer_server_agent_connection/
---
Each PEM agent connects to the PEM database server using the SSL certificates for each user. For example, an agent with `ID#1` connects to the PEM database server using the agent1 user.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/preparing_the_pem_database_server.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/preparing_the_pem_database_server.mdx
index 6aef1d3d6e0..d86c607e09c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/preparing_the_pem_database_server.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/considerations/pem_pgbouncer/preparing_the_pem_database_server.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ legacyRedirectsGenerated:
- "/edb-docs/d/edb-postgres-enterprise-manager/installation-getting-started/pgbouncer-configuration-guide/8.0/preparing_the_pem_database_server.html"
redirects:
- /pem/latest/pem_pgbouncer/02_preparing_the_pem_database_server/
+ - /pem/latest/pem_online_help/09_toc_pem_configure_pgbouncer/02_pem_pgbouncer_preparing_dbserver/
---
You must configure the PEM database server to work with PgBouncer. This example shows how to configure the PEM database server.
From 0a3f4a889625bd30d59306c7359b0d940aafc5e5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:11:05 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 193/370] Removed PgPool
---
.../getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx | 5 ++---
.../biganimal/release/overview/extensions_tools.mdx | 3 ++-
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 13 +------------
4 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
index 111a2f3856c..931630f5e0f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ For information on replication lag while using read-only workloads, see [Standby
!!! Note
Enabling PgBouncer incurs additional costs. For more information, see [PgBouncer costs](../../pricing_and_billing/#pgbouncer-costs).
-Enable **PgBouncer** to have it manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently — all entirely managed by BigAnimal. To learn more about PgBouncer, see [Connection poolers](/biganimal/latest/overview/poolers/#edb-pgbouncer).
+Enable **PgBouncer** to have it manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently — all entirely managed by BigAnimal. Learn more about [EDB PgBouncer](/biganimal/latest/overview/poolers/).
Use the **PgBouncer Configuration Settings** menu to set PgBouncer-specific settings. Select the **Read-Write** and **Read-Only** tabs according to the type of connection you want to configure. The **Read-Only** tab is available if you're creating a primary/standby high-availability cluster and have enabled read-only workloads.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
index f947c20eeec..2e764a8b062 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/knowledge_base.mdx
@@ -27,9 +27,8 @@ See the following articles for step-by-step instructions for creating links to r
- [Using edb_dblink_oci](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5528996025497-How-to-create-a-database-link-from-EnterpriseDB-PostgreSQL-Advanced-Server-EPAS-cluster-to-remote-Oracle-server)
- [Using dblink_ora_connect()](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/11737021242649-How-to-establish-a-database-link-from-EPAS-cluster-to-a-remote-Oracle-server-using-dblink-ora-connect-function)
-## Deploying connection poolers outside of BigAnimal
+## Deploying PgBouncer outside of BigAnimal
-See the following articles for step-by-step instructions for setting up self-hosted connection poolers:
+See the following article for step-by-step instructions for setting up deploying PgBouncer outside of BigAnimal:
- [How to configure PgBouncer with a BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster)
-- [How to configure Pgpool-II with a BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5475273722009-How-to-configure-Pgpool-with-BigAnimal-Cluster)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/extensions_tools.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/extensions_tools.mdx
index c4d368a395d..7e8c0139be9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/extensions_tools.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/extensions_tools.mdx
@@ -30,4 +30,5 @@ EDB develops and maintains several extensions and tools. These include:
- [PG Failover Slots](/pg_extensions/pg_failover_slots/) — Is an extension released as open source software under the PostgreSQL License. If you have logical replication publications on Postgres databases that are also part of a streaming replication architecture, PG Failover Slots avoids the need for you to reseed your logical replication tables when a new standby gets promoted to primary.
- [Foreign Data Wrappers](foreign_data_wrappers) — Allow you to connect your Postgres database server to external data sources.
-- [Connection poolers](poolers) — Allow you to manage your connections to your Postgres database.
+
+- [EDB PgBouncer](poolers) — Allows you to manage your connections to your Postgres database.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index 6cf9a3a0d2f..4f360729216 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -1,12 +1,7 @@
---
-title: Connection poolers
+title: EDB PgBouncer
---
-BigAnimal supports [EDB PgBouncer](/pgbouncer/latest/) and [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpool/latest/) to manage your connections to your Postgres database. PgBouncer can be hosted on BigAnimal or self-hosted, while EDB Pgpool-II can only be self-hosted.
-
-
-### EDB PgBouncer
-
EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your workloads run more efficiently. It's particularly useful if you plan to use more than a few hundred active connections. You can enable EDB PgBouncer to be entirely managed by BigAnimal, when creating your cluster. See [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#pgbouncer).
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
@@ -18,10 +13,4 @@ If you want to deploy and manage PgBouncer outside of BigAnimal, see the [How to
-### EDB Pgpool-II
-
-EDB Pgpool-II acts as middleware between client applications and a Postgres database server. It saves connections to the Postgres servers and reuses them whenever a new connection with the same properties (that is, username, database, protocol version) comes in. It reduces connection overhead and improves the system's overall throughput.
-
-See [EDB Pgpool-II](/pgpool/latest/) for information on installing and configuring EDB Pgpool-II outside of BigAnimal. You can find other related content in the [How to configure EDB Pgpool with a BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/5475273722009-How-to-configure-Pgpool-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
-
From a3734392023eea4f0c3494785d4622eae091702a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Lenz Grimmer
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 12:18:14 +0200
Subject: [PATCH 194/370] Update README.md
Update link to the style guide, which is now hosted on the docs site.
---
README.md | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
index 9a659fcd2f6..047b5a9ca1d 100644
--- a/README.md
+++ b/README.md
@@ -367,18 +367,18 @@ Content is indexed for search when the production site builds.
To contribute content to this site submit as a pull request (PR). There are two options for this:
-Option 1: locally
+Option 1: Making changes locally
1. [Clone](https://docs.github.com/en/github/creating-cloning-and-archiving-repositories/cloning-a-repository) this repository.
2. [Make a new branch.](https://git-scm.com/book/en/v2/Git-Branching-Basic-Branching-and-Merging)
3. Add commits to branch and [push to GitHub](https://git-scm.com/book/en/v2/Git-Branching-Remote-Branches).
4. Create a new PR on GitHub.
-Option 2: on GitHub
+Option 2: Editing files on GitHub
1. Edit a file on GitHub.
2. Submit changes as a PR on a new branch.
### Style Guide for EDB contributors
-See [EDB documentation style guide](https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/wiki/spaces/DCBC/pages/2387870239/Documentation+Style+Guide).
+See [EDB documentation style guide](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/community/contributing/styleguide/).
From 6b0c32d8cfca353d72405725f6b68f23c000b9a3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 07:25:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 195/370] BigAnimal: fixed link in Choosing cluster topic
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 7c2a131f971..6d0ee99f5cf 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-clu
## Choosing your cluster type and configuration
-| Consideration | [Single node](#single-node) |[Primary/Standby HA](primarystandby-high-availability) | [HA + standby replica](#standby-replicas) | [Distributed HA single region](#single-data-location) | [Distributed HA multi-region](#two-data-locations-and-witness) |
+| Consideration | [Single node](#single-node) |[Primary/Standby HA](#primarystandby-high-availability) | [HA + standby replica](#standby-replicas) | [Distributed HA single region](#single-data-location) | [Distributed HA multi-region](#two-data-locations-and-witness) |
|--------------------------|-----------|------------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|
| Data replication | None | Physical | Physical | Logical | Logical |
| Region | Single | Single | Multi | Single | Multi |
From 77c0b9a9a7bd23c796f9c3dee9b29f52a2076823 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 09:53:02 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 196/370] BigAnimal: spell out SLA for clarity
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 6d0ee99f5cf..a6aeb45dd57 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-clu
| Region failure tolerance | TBD | TBD | ✅ | TBD | ✅ |
| Recovery time objective | varies | 35s-60s | varies | 0 | 0 |
| Recovery point objective | <5 min | 0 | <5 min | 0 | 30s (configurable) |
-| SLA | 99.5% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.995% |
+| Service level agreement | 99.5% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.99% | 99.995% |
### Single node
From f85a21d55d6c44efe32c04ca686a87b327884e86 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 11:15:21 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 197/370] Fixes bdr.commit_scopes classification and entry.
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/index.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx | 6 +++---
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/index.mdx
index 7c9617cf7c8..504e73f87c9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/index.mdx
@@ -171,7 +171,7 @@ The reference section is a definitive listing of all functions, views and comman
* [`bdr.min_worker_backoff_delay`](pgd-settings#bdrmin_worker_backoff_delay)
### [CRDTs](pgd-settings#crdts)
* [`bdr.crdt_raw_value`](pgd-settings#bdrcrdt_raw_value)
-### [Eager Replication](pgd-settings#eager-replication)
+### [Commit Scopes](pgd-settings#commit-scopes)
* [`bdr.commit_scope`](pgd-settings#bdrcommit_scope)
### [Commit At Most Once](pgd-settings#commit-at-most-once)
* [`bdr.camo_local_mode_delay`](pgd-settings#bdrcamo_local_mode_delay)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
index 245fcf1ff22..9d6a47eebf9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/reference/pgd-settings.mdx
@@ -366,12 +366,12 @@ value of the base CRDT type (for example, a bigint for `crdt_pncounter`).
When set to `on`, the returned value represents the full representation of
the CRDT value, which can, for example, include the state from multiple nodes.
-## Eager Replication
+## Commit Scopes
### `bdr.commit_scope`
-Set's the current (or default) [commit scope](../durability/commit-scopes) (default
-`local`).
+Sets the current (or default) [commit scope](../durability/commit-scopes) (default
+is an empty string).
## Commit At Most Once
From a8115ce10e4726304530198b737a07a7a6c4547f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 12:24:45 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 198/370] Edits to the PEM pull request
---
.../configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx | 30 +++++++++----------
.../monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx | 6 ++--
.../pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx | 2 +-
4 files changed, 20 insertions(+), 20 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
index 8d3a039b251..6feec547ee0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/installing/configuring_the_pem_server_on_linux.mdx
@@ -26,20 +26,20 @@ When invoking the script, you can include command line options to specify config
| ----------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| `-acp` or `--pemagent-certificate-path` | Defines PEM agent certificate path. The default is `/root/.pem`. |
| `-ci` or `--cidr-address` | CIDR-formatted network address range that agents connect to the server from, to be added to the server's `pg_hba.conf` file, for example, `192.168.1.0/24`. The default is `0.0.0.0/0`. |
-| `-dbi` or `--db-install-path` | The directory for the database server installation, for example, `/usr/edb/as12` for EDB Postgres Advanced Server or `/usr/pgsql-12` for PostgreSQL. |
-| `-ds` or `--db-unitfile` | The unit file name of the PEM database server. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, the default file name is `edb-as-12`. For PostgreSQL, it's `postgresql-12`. |
-| `-ho` or `--host` | The host address of the PEM database server. |
-| `-p` or `--port` | The port number of the PEM database server. |
-| `-ps` or `--pemagent-servicename` | The service name of the pemagent. The default value is `pemagent`. |
-| `-sp` or `--superpassword` | The superuser password of the PEM database server. This value is required. |
-| `-su` or `--superuser` | The superuser name of the PEM database server. |
-| `-au` or `--use-agent-user` | The option to provide the PEM agent user name. |
-| `-t` or `--type` | The installation type: Specify `1` if the configuration is for web services and backend database, `2` if you're configuring web services, or `3` if you're configuring the backend database. If you specify `3`, the database must reside on the local host. |
-| `-un` or `--uninstall-pem-server` | The option to uninstall the PEM server. |
-| `-nhc` or `--no-hba-change` | The option to skip the changes done to `pg_hba.conf` and `pg_config` files. |
-| `-uac` or `--use-agent-sslcert` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL certificate while configuring the PEM server. |
-| `-uak` or `--use-agent-sslkey` | The option to reuse the existing agent SSL key while configuring the PEM server. |
-| `-h` or `--help` | The option to list all the available options while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-dbi` or `--db-install-path` | Directory for the database server installation, for example, `/usr/edb/as12` for EDB Postgres Advanced Server or `/usr/pgsql-12` for PostgreSQL. |
+| `-ds` or `--db-unitfile` | Unit file name of the PEM database server. For EDB Postgres Advanced Server, the default file name is `edb-as-12`. For PostgreSQL, it's `postgresql-12`. |
+| `-ho` or `--host` | Host address of the PEM database server. |
+| `-p` or `--port` | Port number of the PEM database server. |
+| `-ps` or `--pemagent-servicename` | Service name of the pemagent. The default value is `pemagent`. |
+| `-sp` or `--superpassword` | Superuser password of the PEM database server. This value is required. |
+| `-su` or `--superuser` | Superuser name of the PEM database server. |
+| `-au` or `--use-agent-user` | PEM agent user name. |
+| `-t` or `--type` | Installation type: Specify `1` if the configuration is for web services and backend database, `2` if you're configuring web services, or `3` if you're configuring the backend database. If you specify `3`, the database must reside on the local host. |
+| `-un` or `--uninstall-pem-server` | Uninstalls the PEM server. |
+| `-nhc` or `--no-hba-change` | Skips the changes done to `pg_hba.conf` and `pg_config` files. |
+| `-uac` or `--use-agent-sslcert` | Reuses the existing agent SSL certificate while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-uak` or `--use-agent-sslkey` | Reuses the existing agent SSL key while configuring the PEM server. |
+| `-h` or `--help` | Lists all the available options while configuring the PEM server. |
If you don't provide configuration properties on the command line, the script prompts you for values. When you invoke the script, choose from:
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ If you don't provide configuration properties on the command line, the script pr
!!! Note
If the web server and the backend database (PEM server) reside on separate hosts, configure the database server first (option 3) and then web services (option 2). The script proceeds only if the backend database is configured before web services.
-After selecting a configuration option, the script prompts you for configuration properties. When the script completes, it creates the objects required by the PEM server or performs the configuration steps required. To view help for the script, use the command:
+After selecting a configuration option, the script prompts you for configuration properties. When the script finishes, it creates the objects required by the PEM server or performs the configuration steps required. To view help for the script, use the command:
```shell
/usr/edb/pem/bin/configure-pem-server.sh -help
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
index a282fd81d8e..f8c131552fc 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/monitoring_performance/notifications.mdx
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ After confirming that Nagios is configured correctly, restart the Nagios service
## Customizing email templates
-Postgres Enterprise Manager monitors your system for conditions that require user attention and sends email notifications. Use the **Email Templates** to customize the email subject and the payload that the server sends if the current values deviate from the threshold values specified by an alert.
+PEM monitors your system for conditions that require user attention and sends email notifications. Use **Email Templates** to customize the email subject and the payload that the server sends if the current values deviate from the threshold values specified by an alert.
These are the default email templates that are customizable:
@@ -283,8 +283,8 @@ These are the default email templates that are customizable:
- Job step
- Job step (Database server)
-To customize the email template, select the edit button next to the email template name. Edit the **Subject** and **Payload** fields, as needed from the available list of placeholders. After modifying the field values, select the **Save** in the lower-right corner.
+To customize the email template, select the edit button next to the email template name. As needed, edit the **Subject** and **Payload** fields from the available list of placeholders. After modifying the field values, select **Save**.
If any of the default email templates are customized, then a green tick mark is displayed for that template in the `Custom Template?` column on the **Email Templates** tab.
-To restore the customized email template as the default template, select the custom template and select the undo button at the top on the **Email Templates** tab.
+To restore the customized email template as the default template, select the custom template and select the undo button at the top of the **Email Templates** tab.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
index c8012cd752b..2d7a69d1158 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/pem_rel_notes/930_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in PEM 9.3.0 include:
| Type | Description |
| ----------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
| Enhancement | Added the functionality to delete all the existing alerts while using the copy alert feature. |
-| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EPAS 16 beta support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
+| Enhancement | Added PostgreSQL and EDB Postgres Advanced Server 16 beta support as a backend database server and monitoring server. |
| Enhancement | Added support to customize the default email templates. |
| Enhancement | Added support to download the alert history report for agents and servers. |
| Enhancement | Added options to reuse the existing agent SSL certificate and key file while configuring the PEM server. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
index f81d03c01e7..4fd45e6659f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Select **Management > Reports > Alert History Report**. From the dialog box, sel
## System Configuration report
-The System Configuration report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain Postgres Enterprise Manager, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
+The System Configuration report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain PEManager server, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
The Postgres Enterprise Manager Summary provides details about:
From 22806cafa6e45ffc5f42eeba0c905f30c978a8d6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 12:28:15 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 199/370] Update reports.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
index 4fd45e6659f..c3a85f1dbc1 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pem/9/reports.mdx
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Select **Management > Reports > Alert History Report**. From the dialog box, sel
## System Configuration report
-The System Configuration report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain PEManager server, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
+The System Configuration report provides detailed information about the PEM Agents group, PEM Server Directory group, and custom groups listed under the browser tree. These groups can contain PEM server, PEM agent, and database servers. You can download this report in HTML and JSON formats.
The Postgres Enterprise Manager Summary provides details about:
From d59910465787091a19cef80f75c5634da9891078 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 13:26:13 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 200/370] Fixed capitalization error
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index a6aeb45dd57..34c2f0cad15 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-clu
## Choosing your cluster type and configuration
-| Consideration | [Single node](#single-node) |[Primary/Standby HA](#primarystandby-high-availability) | [HA + standby replica](#standby-replicas) | [Distributed HA single region](#single-data-location) | [Distributed HA multi-region](#two-data-locations-and-witness) |
+| Consideration | [Single node](#single-node) |[Primary/standby HA](#primarystandby-high-availability) | [HA + standby replica](#standby-replicas) | [Distributed HA single region](#single-data-location) | [Distributed HA multi-region](#two-data-locations-and-witness) |
|--------------------------|-----------|------------------|--------------------|----------------------------|---------------------------|
| Data replication | None | Physical | Physical | Logical | Logical |
| Region | Single | Single | Multi | Single | Multi |
From 507abc3aab2d94ced16c839985876a3544cdf135 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 17:50:04 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 201/370] Update lfs hooks (git lfs 3.4.0)
---
.husky/post-checkout | 2 +-
.husky/post-commit | 2 +-
.husky/post-merge | 2 +-
.husky/pre-push | 2 +-
4 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/.husky/post-checkout b/.husky/post-checkout
index c37815e2b56..ca7fcb40088 100755
--- a/.husky/post-checkout
+++ b/.husky/post-checkout
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
#!/bin/sh
-command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting '.git/hooks/post-checkout'.\n"; exit 2; }
+command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting the 'post-checkout' file in the hooks directory (set by 'core.hookspath'; usually '.git/hooks').\n"; exit 2; }
git lfs post-checkout "$@"
diff --git a/.husky/post-commit b/.husky/post-commit
index e5230c305f9..52b339cb3f4 100755
--- a/.husky/post-commit
+++ b/.husky/post-commit
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
#!/bin/sh
-command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting '.git/hooks/post-commit'.\n"; exit 2; }
+command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting the 'post-commit' file in the hooks directory (set by 'core.hookspath'; usually '.git/hooks').\n"; exit 2; }
git lfs post-commit "$@"
diff --git a/.husky/post-merge b/.husky/post-merge
index c99b752a527..a912e667aa3 100755
--- a/.husky/post-merge
+++ b/.husky/post-merge
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
#!/bin/sh
-command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting '.git/hooks/post-merge'.\n"; exit 2; }
+command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting the 'post-merge' file in the hooks directory (set by 'core.hookspath'; usually '.git/hooks').\n"; exit 2; }
git lfs post-merge "$@"
diff --git a/.husky/pre-push b/.husky/pre-push
index 216e91527e6..0f0089bc25d 100755
--- a/.husky/pre-push
+++ b/.husky/pre-push
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
#!/bin/sh
-command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting '.git/hooks/pre-push'.\n"; exit 2; }
+command -v git-lfs >/dev/null 2>&1 || { echo >&2 "\nThis repository is configured for Git LFS but 'git-lfs' was not found on your path. If you no longer wish to use Git LFS, remove this hook by deleting the 'pre-push' file in the hooks directory (set by 'core.hookspath'; usually '.git/hooks').\n"; exit 2; }
git lfs pre-push "$@"
From 7b4b9fce4f8adeb68715eb425fc9163ff832ea33 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:24:49 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 202/370] minor copy edits
---
.../creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx | 6 +++---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 4 ++--
.../using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx | 2 +-
4 files changed, 7 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
index 73d108e4f79..aaa054e2b80 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
@@ -12,11 +12,11 @@ When you create a distributed high-availability cluster, you need to set up the
1. In the **Database Type** section:
- 1. Select [EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/) in the **Postgres Type** field:
+ 1. In the **Postgres Type** field, select [EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/).
- 1. In the **Postgres Version** list, select either 14 or 15 as the version of Postgres that you want to use.
+ 1. In the **Postgres Version** list, select 14 or 15 as the version of Postgres that you want to use.
-1. Select the settings for your cluster according to [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/). Find the instructions for the **Node Settings** tab in [Cluster Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#cluster-settings-tab) and [Additional Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#additional-settings-tab).
+1. Select the settings for your cluster according to [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/). Find the instructions for the **Node Settings** tab in the [Cluster Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#cluster-settings-tab) and [Additional Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#additional-settings-tab).
!!!tip
When choosing your storage options, for most workloads, consider using at least 20GB of storage.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index c9f70da26bd..458294b30b8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your wo
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
!!!Note
- Currently you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating an distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
+ Currently, you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index faa9ab96a08..2ea262478c0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ BigAnimal calculates the estimated monthly price for your cluster and displays i
Pricing is based on the number of virtual central processing units (vCPUs) provisioned for the database software offering. Consumption of vCPUs is metered hourly.
### Single-node and primary/standby high-availability pricing
-When primary/standby high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of replicas configured to calculate the full price for all resources used.
+When primary/standby high-availability configurations are enabled, to calculate the full price for all resources used, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of replicas configured.
This table shows the cost breakdown.
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ This table shows the cost breakdown.
### Distributed high-availability pricing
-When distributed high-availability configurations are enabled, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of data nodes configured to calculate the full price for all resources used. You aren't charged for the database price for witness nodes or groups in distributed high-availability configurations, just the infrastructure resources, such as compute.
+When distributed high-availability configurations are enabled, to calculate the full price for all resources used, multiply the number of vCPUs per instance by the number of data nodes configured. You aren't charged for the database price for witness nodes or groups in distributed high-availability configurations, just the infrastructure resources, such as compute.
This table shows the cost breakdown.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
index 981ea61c664..e8abf58baf3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/using_cluster/03_modifying_your_cluster/index.mdx
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ You can also modify your cluster by installing Postgres extensions. See [Postgre
| Volume type | **Cluster Settings** | You can't switch between the io2 and io2 Block Express volume types in an AWS cluster. |
| Volume properties | **Cluster Settings** | It can take up to six hours to tune IOPS or resize the disks of your cluster because AWS requires a cooldown period after volume modifications, as explained in [Limitations](https://docs.aws.amazon.com/AWSEC2/latest/UserGuide/modify-volume-requirements.html). The volume properties are disabled and can't be modified while this is in progress. |
| Networking type (public or private) | **Cluster Settings** | If you're using Azure and previously set up a private link and want to change to a public network, you must remove the private link resources before making the change. |
- | Nodes (for a distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | You can't change the number of data nodes after you create your cluster. |
+ | Nodes (for a distributed high-availability cluster) | **Data Groups** | After you create your cluster, you can't change the number of data nodes. |
| Database configuration parameters | **DB Configuration** | If you're using faraway replicas, only a small subset of parameters are editable. These parameters need to be modified in the replica when increased in the replica's source cluster. See [Modify a faraway replica](/biganimal/latest/using_cluster/managing_replicas/#modify-a-faraway-replica) for details. |
| Retention period for backups | **Additional Settings** | — |
| Custom maintenance window | **Additional Settings** | Set or modify a maintenance window in which maintenance upgrades occur for the cluster. See [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance). |
From fc07e6d3f90a3ae555824b73459dd9a3aefee303 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:26:10 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 203/370] Update poolers.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
index 458294b30b8..607d8e4e540 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/poolers.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ EDB PgBouncer can manage your connections to Postgres databases and help your wo
BigAnimal provisions up to three instances per EDB PgBouncer-enabled cluster to ensure that performance is unaffected, so each availability zone receives its own instance of EDB PgBouncer.
!!!Note
- Currently, you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
+ Currently, you can't enable EDB PgBouncer when using BigAnimal's cloud account or when creating a distributed high-availability cluster using your cloud account.
If you want to self-host your EDB PgBouncer deployment, see the [How to configure EDB PgBouncer with BigAnimal cluster](https://support.biganimal.com/hc/en-us/articles/4848726654745-How-to-configure-PgBouncer-with-BigAnimal-Cluster) knowledge-base article.
From c4913620308b20937f2ecf838699a698aba5c690 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Josh Heyer
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 18:43:38 +0000
Subject: [PATCH 204/370] Restore caching for staging builds Also re-use
staging cache for drafts when no cache found for branch
---
.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml | 10 ++++++++++
.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml | 5 ++++-
2 files changed, 14 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml b/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
index 803a9d07ac0..1986c4459a7 100644
--- a/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
+++ b/.github/workflows/deploy-develop.yml
@@ -42,6 +42,16 @@ jobs:
run: |
npm rebuild
+ - name: Checking Gatsby cache
+ id: gatsby-cache-build
+ uses: actions/cache@v3
+ with:
+ path: |
+ public/*
+ !public/pdfs
+ .cache
+ key: ${{ runner.os }}-gatsby-build-develop
+
- uses: actions/setup-python@v4
with:
python-version: "3.x"
diff --git a/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml b/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
index 5e499e6a8b3..a343c3137ac 100644
--- a/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
+++ b/.github/workflows/deploy-draft.yml
@@ -56,9 +56,12 @@ jobs:
uses: actions/cache@v3
with:
path: |
- public
+ public/*
+ !public/pdfs
.cache
key: ${{ runner.os }}-gatsby-build-draft-${{ github.head_ref }}
+ restore-keys: |
+ ${{ runner.os }}-gatsby-build-develop
- name: Fix mtimes
run: npm run fix-mtimes
From 2de4c190b2f96920794cd818cbdc18d3f19d493e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:44:38 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 205/370] Small edit to migration index
Reordered sentence structure.
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/migration/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/migration/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/migration/index.mdx
index c3716ecd4df..89629048058 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/migration/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/migration/index.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ EDB provides migration tools to bring data from Oracle, PostgresSQL, and EDB Pos
## Migrating from Oracle
-Review the EDB [Migration Handbook](/migrating/oracle/) for helpful considerations and information when migrating from Oracle.
+For helpful considerations and information when migrating from Oracle, review the EDB [Migration Handbook](/migrating/oracle/).
EDB also provides a tool, [Migration Portal](/migration_portal/latest), which provides the details for executing the migration steps:
From d2c694fbeee99ad790432f94da69b3634b47435c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: michaelwilleredb
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 10:06:10 +0200
Subject: [PATCH 206/370] Update factors_to_consider.mdx
Updated with Vibhor's suggestions.
Removed mentioning of HammerDB.
---
advocacy_docs/migrating/oracle/factors_to_consider.mdx | 4 +---
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/migrating/oracle/factors_to_consider.mdx b/advocacy_docs/migrating/oracle/factors_to_consider.mdx
index c778f609d78..68bf5e9d171 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/migrating/oracle/factors_to_consider.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/migrating/oracle/factors_to_consider.mdx
@@ -79,9 +79,7 @@ Why is that?
Postgres and Oracle are very different under the hood, with different SQL planning and different storage and access patterns. Even the version control and transaction isolation are implemented in a different way. That makes it difficult to set up a simple formula that covers all possible permutations of Oracle configurations and architectures. All databases respond differently to the workload being run.
-EDB has performed many benchmarks on different CPU/RAM configurations that show that Postgres and EDB Postgres Advanced Server are both slightly faster than Oracle on a TPC-C workload. These results might not apply to your applications, but thye offer a good starting point.
-
-If the hardware on the new server differs from the existing Oracle servers, then you can use a tool like [HammerDB](http://hammerdb.com) to compare the performance. Refer to the [HammerDB documentation(https://www.hammerdb.com/docs/ch03s04.html) when comparing results.
+Customers of EDB who have migrated to EPAS have found performance on par with Oracle when using similar hardware. In some instances, depending on their workload, they even outperform Oracle. All our customers who migrated aimed to at least match Oracle's performance and, if feasible, to exceed it either on comparable hardware or by adding resources as needed. We (EDB) also suggest conducting a benchmark using your specific workload to ensure the system meets performance expectations and to plan production accordingly.
## Some best practice considerations
From 53c1b764a6f6f114015e54eafc9f81e6362311ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:35:09 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 207/370] small edits to epas release notes
---
.../15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 18 +++++++++---------
1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index b00a9db8df3..c7ba3885282 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Released: 21 Aug 2023
Updated: 30 Aug 2023
!!! Important Upgrading
-Once you have upgraded to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you will need to run `edb_sqlpatch` on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application will check that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
+After you upgrade to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you need to run edb_sqlpatch on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application checks that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
@@ -23,14 +23,14 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug
| Type | Description | Addresses | |
| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
| Upstream merge | Merged with community PostgreSQL 15.4. See the [PostgreSQL 15 Release Notes](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/15/release-15-4.html) for more information. | | |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures might be hijacked by way of search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server dbms_aq helper function might run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server permissions bypass by way of accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server authenticated users can fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+ |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server DBMS_PROFILER data might be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+ |
| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+ |
| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+ |
| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 | 11+ |
From bf4bcb251089d8751be8ce7c868a278ed8902d3a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Betsy Gitelman <93718720+ebgitelman@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:37:14 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 208/370] Update epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
---
.../docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index c7ba3885282..097a670e896 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Released: 21 Aug 2023
Updated: 30 Aug 2023
!!! Important Upgrading
-After you upgrade to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you need to run edb_sqlpatch on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application checks that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
+Once you upgrade to this version of EDB Postgres Advanced Server, you need to run edb_sqlpatch on all your databases to complete the upgrade. This application checks that your databases system objects are up to date with this version. See the [EDB SQL Patch](/tools/edb_sqlpatch) documentation for more information on how to deploy this tool.
!!!
!!! Note After applying patches
From ed7b3a1e23524c6c51971de78a06637c1c2e48a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 06:26:05 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 209/370] BigAnimal: switchover
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 2 ++
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 34c2f0cad15..b898ea3c32d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -83,6 +83,8 @@ Distributed high-availability clusters contain one or two data groups. Your data
The witness node/witness group doesn't host data but exists for management purposes, supporting operations that require a consensus, for example, in case of an availability zone failure.
+!!!Note
+ Operations against a distributed high-availability cluster leverage the [EDB Postgres Distributed switchover](/pgd/latest/cli/command_ref/pgd_switchover/) feature which provides sub-second interruptions during planned lifecycle operations.
#### Single data location
From 5c1987415cf840e07b052a9a4f69568983151e3f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Sunny Kumar
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 13:19:41 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 210/370] Add 3.7.22 release notes
Fixes: BDR-3976
Signed-off-by: Sunny Kumar
---
.../docs/pgd/3.7/bdr/release-notes.mdx | 47 +++++++++++++++++++
.../docs/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes.mdx | 22 +++++++++
2 files changed, 69 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/bdr/release-notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/bdr/release-notes.mdx
index ce71ecd32d6..6806efce768 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/bdr/release-notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/bdr/release-notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,53 @@ originalFilePath: release-notes.md
---
+## BDR 3.7.22 (2023 Aug 31)
+
+This is a maintenance release for BDR 3.7 that includes minor
+improvements as well as fixes for issues identified in previous
+versions.
+
+Also check the release notes for [pglogical 3.7.22](/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes/#pglogical-3722) for resolved issues
+that affect BDR as well.
+
+
+### Resolved issues
+
+- Changed `bdr.autopartition_drop_partition()` signature to use text.
+
+- Autopartition: Drop partition if it exists
+ It will help in recover from the cases when duplicate drop_partition workitems are created.
+
+- Fixed memory leak in `bdr.sequence_alloc` by modifying the missing catalog signature.
+
+- Prevented superuser check when GUC was specified on PG command line.
+
+- Fixed check for malformed connection string tp prevent failure in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453)
+
+- Backport `bdr.accept_connections` GUC.
+
+- Fixed a memory leak in `bdr.sequence_alloc`.
+
+- Remove txn_config entry from ReorderBuffer hash table
+
+- Ignore global_lock check from repset_func when SDW enabled
+
+- Added check for conflicting node names.
+
+- Fixed an issue whereby a crash occurred when BDR extension is used with pgaudit.
+
+- Fixed an issue by allowing a logical join of node if there are foreign key constraints violations. (RT91745)
+
+
+### Improvements
+
+### Upgrades
+
+This release supports upgrading from the following versions of BDR:
+
+ - 3.7.9 and higher
+ - 3.6.29 and higher
+
## BDR 3.7.21 (2023 May 16)
This is a maintenance release for BDR 3.7 that includes minor
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes.mdx
index a9e95e49632..ba1ca43544a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/3.7/pglogical/release-notes.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,28 @@ originalFilePath: release-notes.md
---
+## pglogical 3.7.22
+
+This is a maintenance release for pglogical 3.7 which includes minor
+improvements as well as fixes for issues identified previously.
+
+### Resolved Issues
+
+- Fixed a bug in handling of memory context in presence of triggers (RT95948).
+
+- Ensured that table slots are allocated in query context and not in per-tuple context
+
+- Fixed a bug during binary upgrade to avoid issue during hook execution.
+
+
+### Upgrades
+
+This release supports upgrading from following versions of pglogical:
+
+ - 3.7.9 and higher
+ - 3.6.29 and higher
+ - 2.4.0 and 2.4.1
+
## pglogical 3.7.21
This is a maintenance release for pglogical 3.7 which includes minor
From 68899d3ed634e24640e6e52b82f387b77062f0b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Sunny Kumar
Date: Wed, 23 Aug 2023 18:17:07 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 211/370] Add 4.3.2 release notes
Fixes: BDR-3975
Signed-off-by: Sunny Kumar
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 ++
.../pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 26 +++++++++++++++++++
2 files changed, 28 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 740f82d6845..1c6319f1e7d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
title: "EDB Postgres Distributed Release notes"
navTitle: "Release notes"
navigation:
+- pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes
- pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes
- pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes
- pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes
@@ -25,6 +26,7 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR | HARP | CLI | TPAexec |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| 30 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..42a70e55c8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+---
+title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2"
+navTitle: "Version 4.3.2"
+---
+
+EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
+
+!!! Note
+ This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8 and later.
+
+| Component | Version | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a bug in handling of memory context in presence of triggers. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevent overflow of EagerTxnConfig::node_idss array |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed `bdr.sequence_alloc` upgrade script. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed check for malformed connection string tp prevent failure in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Remove txn_config entry from ReorderBuffer hash table. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in `bdr.sequence_alloc`. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Ignore global_lock check from repset_func when SDW enabled |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added wrapper for checking RTE permissions to disable pgaudit |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by allowing a logical join of node if there are foreign key constraints violations. (RT91745) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Foreign key constraints will be skipped during sync. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Writers wakeup receiver waiting for free commit queue entry |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is executing.|
From a524d250e8b6371177f0cc5d8b64717d5e8a8956 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Petr Jelinek
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:01:57 +0300
Subject: [PATCH 212/370] Update pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
---
.../pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 19 ++++++++-----------
1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index 42a70e55c8d..dac249d9017 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,17 +10,14 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distri
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a bug in handling of memory context in presence of triggers. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevent overflow of EagerTxnConfig::node_idss array |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed `bdr.sequence_alloc` upgrade script. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed check for malformed connection string tp prevent failure in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Remove txn_config entry from ReorderBuffer hash table. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in `bdr.sequence_alloc`. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Ignore global_lock check from repset_func when SDW enabled |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fix crash in conflict triggers during bulk inserts. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevent overflow in group commit transaction tracking on large clusters. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Add missing columns to the bdr.sequence_alloc catalog. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Validate node connection strings in bdr.create_node(). (RT95453) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fix memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added wrapper for checking RTE permissions to disable pgaudit |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Add workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed an issue by allowing a logical join of node if there are foreign key constraints violations. (RT91745) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Foreign key constraints will be skipped during sync. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Writers wakeup receiver waiting for free commit queue entry |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Don't check foreign keys during node join, this makes the join behave the same as replication. (RT91745) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improve consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is executing.|
From a7927558bf1f47ecb6f2c469df1913c880f41a01 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Sunny Kumar
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 16:41:43 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 213/370] Add 4.3.2 release notes
Fixes: BDR-3975
Signed-off-by: Sunny Kumar
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 16 ++++++++--------
2 files changed, 9 insertions(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 1c6319f1e7d..177e693fbfb 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR | HARP | CLI | TPAexec |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| 30 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
+| 30 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.20](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.20_rel_notes) |
| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index dac249d9017..50efd317829 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,14 +10,14 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distri
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fix crash in conflict triggers during bulk inserts. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevent overflow in group commit transaction tracking on large clusters. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Add missing columns to the bdr.sequence_alloc catalog. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Validate node connection strings in bdr.create_node(). (RT95453) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fix memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a crash in conflict triggers during bulk inserts. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevented the overflow in group commit transaction tracking on large clusters. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a missing columns to the `bdr.sequence_alloc` catalog. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a validatation in node connection strings in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Add workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Don't check foreign keys during node join, this makes the join behave the same as replication. (RT91745) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improve consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is executing.|
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improved consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is being executed.|
From a3ae503e447947bc11af92700724b4c367565d38 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Petr Jelinek
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 20:17:17 +0300
Subject: [PATCH 214/370] Update pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
Kelly's feedback
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index 50efd317829..71c68b649e7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -18,6 +18,6 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distri
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Don't check foreign keys during node join, this makes the join behave the same as replication. (RT91745) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | When joining a node, don’t check foreign keys to match the behavior of replication. (RT91745) |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improved consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is being executed.|
From 390b8dc2759bfa221607ef7cfe1fa3f557cbac10 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 10:26:08 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 215/370] Fix bug fix from wrapping
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 22 +++++++++----------
1 file changed, 11 insertions(+), 11 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index 71c68b649e7..b07ef57eb04 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,14 +10,14 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distri
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a crash in conflict triggers during bulk inserts. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevented the overflow in group commit transaction tracking on large clusters. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a missing columns to the `bdr.sequence_alloc` catalog. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a validatation in node connection strings in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | When joining a node, don’t check foreign keys to match the behavior of replication. (RT91745) |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improved consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is being executed.|
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a crash in conflict triggers during bulk inserts. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Prevented the overflow in group commit transaction tracking on large clusters. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a missing columns to the `bdr.sequence_alloc` catalog. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a validatation in node connection strings in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | When joining a node, don’t check foreign keys to match the behavior of replication. (RT91745) |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improved consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
+| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a deadlock on autopartition catalogs when a concurrent DROP EXTENSION is being executed.|
From 6e60ca1125522c4bcdc41ecad373fc350823707d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 10:27:45 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 216/370] Fix older bug fix wrapping release notes.
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx | 9 +++++----
1 file changed, 5 insertions(+), 4 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx
index 987366fdb48..2463b19f4dd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -11,7 +11,8 @@ If you are using any previous release of HARP, we recommend that you upgrade to
This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
- Component | Version | Type | Description
- --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
- HARP | 2.3.1 | Bug fix | HARP Proxy cannot determine the leader after an extended outage - (BDR-3768).
- HARP | 2.3.1 | Bug fix | Upgrade database driver library version which fixes `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer`.
+| Component | Version | Type | Description |
+| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
+| HARP | 2.3.1 | Bug fix | HARP Proxy cannot determine the leader after an extended outage - (BDR-3768). |
+| HARP | 2.3.1 | Bug fix | Upgrade database driver library version which fixes `connect_timeout` issue when `sslmode=allow` or `sslmode=prefer`. |
+
From 6d8a61cd0ee280645e9c02e5d0a85ad7f2fbed6b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Sunny Kumar
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 16:02:48 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 217/370] Adjust release date
Signed-off-by: Sunny Kumar
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 177e693fbfb..2a8792ec6a9 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR | HARP | CLI | TPAexec |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| 30 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.20](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.20_rel_notes) |
+| 31 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.20](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.20_rel_notes) |
| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
From f9693b51a331119f43fc2f2f4034cf7ae6aeb49c Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 09:00:32 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 218/370] added pricing back in
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 1 +
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index 2ea262478c0..2ac039585a8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ This table shows the cost breakdown.
| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
+| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.2511 / vCPU | $188.33 / vCPU |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.3424 / vCPU | $256.80 / vCPU |
\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
From 182205b7a30b22080eb328166195ef65ef9040b5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 08:58:03 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 219/370] Deployment update with table
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 14 ++++++++++++++
1 file changed, 14 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index b7ea55a249e..78e5e21cf0d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -12,3 +12,17 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
+| |
On-prem
|
BigAnimal
|
Kubernetes (preview)
|
+|--------------------------------------------|:------------------------:|:------------------------------------------:|:-----------------------------------------:|
+| Single Region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| Active-Active Support | 2+ regions | 2 regions | 2 regions |
+| Write/Read Routing | Local or global | Local | Local |
+| Automated Failover | AZ or Region | AZ | AZ |
+| Major Version Upgrades | ✅ | Roadmap | Roadmap |
+| Subscriber-only nodes (read replicas) | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
+| Logical standby nodes | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
+| PgBouncer | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
+| Selective data replication | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| Maintenance windows per region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| Target Availability | 99.999% SLO | 99.99 SLA (single) 99.995% SLA (multi) | 99.999% SLO |
+
From d6ef3b7fe2d24adec7aa034d7725c804c740b767 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 10:51:08 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 220/370] Updated deployments text for TPA
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 16 ++++++++--------
1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 78e5e21cf0d..744013e70f4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -6,23 +6,23 @@ indexCards: simple
You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following methods:
-- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
+- [Trusted Postgres Architect](/tpa/latest) (TPA) is an orchestration tool that uses Ansible to build Postgres clusters using a set of reference architectures that document how to set up and operate Postgres in various scenarios. TPA represents the best practices followed by EDB, and its recommendations apply to quick testbed setups just as they do to production environments. TPA's flexibility allows deployments to virtual machines, AWS cloud instances or Linux host hardware. See [Deploying with TPA](tpa) for more information.
- BigAnimal is a fully managed database-as-a-service with built-in Oracle compatibility that runs in your cloud account or BigAnimal's cloud account where it's operated by our Postgres experts. EDB BigAnimal makes it easy to set up, manage, and scale your databases. The addition of distributed high-availability support powered by EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) enables single- and and multi-region Always On Gold clusters. See [Distributed high availability](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/#distributed-high-availability) in the [BigAnimal documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information.
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
-| |
On-prem
|
BigAnimal
|
Kubernetes (preview)
|
+| |
On-prem/TPA
|
BigAnimal
|
Kubernetes (preview)
|
|--------------------------------------------|:------------------------:|:------------------------------------------:|:-----------------------------------------:|
-| Single Region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
-| Active-Active Support | 2+ regions | 2 regions | 2 regions |
-| Write/Read Routing | Local or global | Local | Local |
-| Automated Failover | AZ or Region | AZ | AZ |
-| Major Version Upgrades | ✅ | Roadmap | Roadmap |
+| Single region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
+| Active-Active support | 2+ regions | 2 regions | 2 regions |
+| Write/Read routing | Local or global | Local | Local |
+| Automated failover | AZ or Region | AZ | AZ |
+| Major version upgrades | ✅ | Roadmap | Roadmap |
| Subscriber-only nodes (read replicas) | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
| Logical standby nodes | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
| PgBouncer | ✅ | TBD | TBD |
| Selective data replication | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
| Maintenance windows per region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
-| Target Availability | 99.999% SLO | 99.99 SLA (single) 99.995% SLA (multi) | 99.999% SLO |
+| Target availability | 99.999% SLO | 99.99 SLA (single) 99.995% SLA (multi) | 99.999% SLO |
From 477e499c8bb23ef70a0f91bd8e5729b192626a77 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 18:07:34 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 221/370] Removed on-prem from heading
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
index 744013e70f4..ca16d43536a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/deployments.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ You can deploy and install EDB Postgres Distributed products using the following
- EDB Postgres Distributed for Kubernetes is a Kubernetes operator designed, developed, and supported by EDB. It covers the full lifecycle of highly available Postgres database clusters with a multi-master architecture, using PGD replication. It's based on the open source CloudNativePG operator and provides additional value, such as compatibility with Oracle using EDB Postgres Advanced Server, Transparent Data Encryption (TDE) using EDB Postgres Extended or Advanced Server, and additional supported platforms including IBM Power and OpenShift. This offering is currently in preview.
-| |
On-prem/TPA
|
BigAnimal
|
Kubernetes (preview)
|
+| |
TPA
|
BigAnimal
|
Kubernetes (preview)
|
|--------------------------------------------|:------------------------:|:------------------------------------------:|:-----------------------------------------:|
| Single region | ✅ | ✅ | ✅ |
| Active-Active support | 2+ regions | 2 regions | 2 regions |
From 1424c746595952072db43c8d94cb28fd798aa0e7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 09:58:04 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 222/370] revert the revert
---
.../creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx | 8 ++++++--
.../biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx | 1 +
.../docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
index aaa054e2b80..d11fe0dd5a3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/creating_an_eha_cluster.mdx
@@ -12,8 +12,12 @@ When you create a distributed high-availability cluster, you need to set up the
1. In the **Database Type** section:
- 1. In the **Postgres Type** field, select [EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/).
-
+ 1. Select the type of Postgres you want to use in the **Postgres Type** field:
+
+ - **[EDB Postgres Advanced Server](/epas/latest/)** is EDB's Oracle-compatible database offering. View [a quick demonstration of Oracle compatibility on BigAnimal](../../using_cluster/06_demonstration_oracle_compatibility).
+
+ - **[EDB Postgres Extended Server](/pge/latest/)** is EDB's advanced logical replication, PostgreSQL-compatible database offering.
+
1. In the **Postgres Version** list, select 14 or 15 as the version of Postgres that you want to use.
1. Select the settings for your cluster according to [Creating a cluster](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/). Find the instructions for the **Node Settings** tab in the [Cluster Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#cluster-settings-tab) and [Additional Settings tab](../creating_a_cluster/#additional-settings-tab).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
index 34c2f0cad15..7448a69c91d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/02_high_availability.mdx
@@ -23,6 +23,7 @@ Postgres distribution and version support varies by [cluster](#choosing-your-clu
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 12–15 | Single-node, primary/standby high-availability | Your cloud account |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Single node, primary/standby high availability | BigAnimal cloud account |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | 14–15 | Distributed high-availability | Your cloud account |
+| EDB Postgres Extended Server | 14-15 | Distributed high-availability | Your cloud account |
## Choosing your cluster type and configuration
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
index 2ac039585a8..ffc41414e80 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/pricing_and_billing/index.mdx
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ This table shows the cost breakdown.
| Database type | Hourly price | Monthly price\* |
| ---------------------------- | -------------- | --------------- |
-| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.2511 / vCPU | $188.33 / vCPU |
+| EDB Postgres Extended Server | $0.2511 / vCPU | $188.33 / vCPU |
| EDB Postgres Advanced Server | $0.3424 / vCPU | $256.80 / vCPU |
\* The monthly cost is approximate and assumes 730 hours in a month.
From 3407af9036cd24ca3dfe01477deccf2921cd50a6 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: francoughlin
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 15:18:48 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 223/370] BigAnimal: UPM-23888-Maintenance-for-HA-clusters
Added new section to Periodic maintenance topic for maintenance for high-availability clusters. Also split content into separate sections.
---
.../docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx | 13 ++++++++++++-
1 file changed, 12 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
index f232efe1632..089575db40e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
@@ -2,14 +2,25 @@
title: Periodic maintenance
---
-EDB performs periodic maintenance to ensure stability and security of your clusters. We perform minor version upgrades and patch updates as part of this periodic maintenance. You're notified in the BigAnimal portal before maintenance occurs. Details are available on the [BigAnimal status page](https://status.biganimal.com/). You can subscribe to get these updates in a feed by selecting **Subscribe to Updates** on the status page.
+EDB performs periodic maintenance to ensure stability and security of your clusters. We perform minor version upgrades and patch updates as part of this periodic maintenance.
+
+## Notification of upcoming maintenance
+
+You're notified in the BigAnimal portal before maintenance occurs. Details are available on the [BigAnimal status page](https://status.biganimal.com/). You can subscribe to get these updates in a feed by selecting **Subscribe to Updates** on the status page.
EDB reserves the right to upgrade customers to the latest minor version without prior notice in an extraordinary circumstance. You can't configure minor versions.
In some cases, these updates might terminate existing network connections to your clusters. If that happens, the outage is typically less than 30 seconds. Be sure your applications are configured to automatically reconnect when connections are interrupted. Most modern database libraries do this by default.
+## Specifying maintenance windows
+
If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly maintenance window for each cluster or each data group in the case of a distributed high-availability cluster. BigAnimal displays a *scheduled maintenance* message on your cluster list four hours prior to the scheduled maintenance time to remind you of the upcoming maintenance window. This reminder allows you to make any necessary preparations, such as saving your work and closing any open connections. For more information on specifying maintenance windows, see [Maintenance](/biganimal/latest/getting_started/creating_a_cluster/#maintenance).
+## Maintenance for high-availability clusters
+
+For high-availability clusters, periodic maintenance is performed first on the standby replicas and then on the primary.
+
+While there is no downtime during periodic maintenance, there will be a network connection reset as the primary is failing over.
## Connectivity issues after an automatic upgrade
From afea564369dcb6ce1b07acc6d3e7a7614ef853c4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Mon, 4 Sep 2023 14:59:24 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 224/370] Removed bogus line, added dates as per new spec
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 5 ++++-
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index b07ef57eb04..b0bbc2d38b3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,6 +3,10 @@ title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2"
navTitle: "Version 4.3.2"
---
+Released: 31 Aug 2023
+
+Updated: 04 Sep 2023
+
EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
!!! Note
@@ -16,7 +20,6 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distri
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a validatation in node connection strings in `bdr.create_node()`. (RT95453) |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak in group commit and camo caused by transaction tracking. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added check for conflicting node names. |
-| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Added a workaround for pgaudit crash bug #212 which occurs with some 3rd party extensions, including BDR. |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Fixed the consensus snapshot compatibility with PGD 3.7. (RT93022) |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | When joining a node, don’t check foreign keys to match the behavior of replication. (RT91745) |
| BDR | 4.3.2 | Bug fix | Improved consumption of replication queue on busy subscriptions. |
From 3cc4da3468d0a744e9fbc5517b94e8f86f6fad88 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Mon, 4 Sep 2023 17:56:23 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 225/370] Switched to +p(packagednumber)
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 12 ++++++------
....0-1_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx} | 6 +++---
....1-1_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx} | 6 +++---
....1-2_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx} | 6 +++---
product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 2 +-
5 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 16 deletions(-)
rename product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/{pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx} (80%)
rename product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/{pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx} (80%)
rename product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/{pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx => pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx} (82%)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 2a8792ec6a9..6983fd64247 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -3,10 +3,10 @@ title: "EDB Postgres Distributed Release notes"
navTitle: "Release notes"
navigation:
- pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes
-- pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes
-- pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes
+- pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes
+- pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes
- pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes
-- pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes
+- pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes
- pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes
- pgd_4.2.2_rel_notes
- pgd_4.2.1_rel_notes
@@ -27,10 +27,10 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| Release Date | EDB Postgres Distributed | BDR | HARP | CLI | TPAexec |
| ------------ | ---------------------------- | ----- | ----- | ----- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 31 Aug 2023 | [4.3.2 ](pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes)| 4.3.2 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.20](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.20_rel_notes) |
-| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-2 ](pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
-| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1-1 ](pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
+| 27 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1+p2 ](pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.1 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
+| 12 Jul 2023 | [4.3.1+p1 ](pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes)| 4.3.1 | 2.3.0 | 1.1.1 | [23.19](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.19_rel_notes) |
| 17 May 2023 | [4.3.1](pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes) | 4.3.1 | 2.2.3 | 1.1.1 | [23.17](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.17_rel_notes) |
-| 30 Mar 2023 | [4.3.0-1](pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.2 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
+| 30 Mar 2023 | [4.3.0+p1](pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.2 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 14 Feb 2023 | [4.3.0](pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes) | 4.3.0 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 14 Dec 2022 | [4.2.2](pgd_4.2.2_rel_notes) | 4.2.2 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.9](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-239) |
| 16 Nov 2022 | [4.2.1](pgd_4.2.1_rel_notes) | 4.2.1 | 2.2.1 | 1.1.0 | [23.7](/tpa/latest/rel_notes/tpa_23.1-11_rel_notes/#tpa-237) |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
similarity index 80%
rename from product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes.mdx
rename to product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
index 188e5649f2f..25f079a3304 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0-1_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
---
-title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0-1"
-navTitle: "Version 4.3.0-1"
+title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0+p1"
+navTitle: "Version 4.3.0+p1"
---
-EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0-1 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
+EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0+p1 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
It includes a patch to HARP 2.2.1 to address a security vulnerability. If you are using HARP 2.2.1 or earlier, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.2.2.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
similarity index 80%
rename from product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes.mdx
rename to product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
index a24fd832aed..4fd0eceff5a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-1_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
---
-title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1-1"
-navTitle: "Version 4.3.1-1"
+title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p1"
+navTitle: "Version 4.3.1+p1"
---
-EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1-1 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
+EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p1 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
If you are using any previous release of HARP, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.3.0.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
similarity index 82%
rename from product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx
rename to product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
index 2463b19f4dd..6e24007ab73 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1-2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
---
-title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1-2"
-navTitle: "Version 4.3.1-2"
+title: "Release notes for EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p2"
+navTitle: "Version 4.3.1+p2"
---
-EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1-2 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
+EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p2 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
If you are using any previous release of HARP, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.3.1.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index fffac6f1323..79635bf9605 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ title: Supported PGD upgrade paths
Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older versions, upgrade to 4.3.0 before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading within 4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-within-version-4) for more information. After upgrading to 4.3.0 or later, the following combinations are allowed.
-| 4.3.0 | 4.3.0-1 | 4.3.1 | 4.3.1-1 | Target PGD version |
+| 4.3.0 | 4.3.0+p1 | 4.3.1 | 4.3.1+p1 | Target PGD version |
|-------|---------|-------|---------|--------------------|
| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | 5.2.0 |
| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | 5.1.0 |
From 778387bd24666787643633768c9140b5868a5e0d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 09:16:55 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 226/370] Added note on the +p suffix. Also fix note fences.
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx | 3 +++
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx | 4 ++--
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx | 3 ++-
7 files changed, 15 insertions(+), 8 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 6983fd64247..777c4fe8636 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -43,3 +43,6 @@ The EDB Postgres Distributed documentation describes the latest version of EDB P
| 01 Dec 2021 | [4.0.0](pgd_4.0.0_rel_notes) | 4.0.0 | 2.0.0 | - | 21.9 |
+!!! Note About version numbers
+PGD Version 4 takes its version number from the BDR version bundled with the release. Where HARP, TPA or the CLI have been updated without a change in BDR version, that new package is shown as +p1 or +p2 and so on appended to the version number.
+!!!
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
index 25f079a3304..0f0f4902fc5 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0+p1_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,8 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0+p1 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Dis
It includes a patch to HARP 2.2.1 to address a security vulnerability. If you are using HARP 2.2.1 or earlier, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.2.2.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.14.18, 13.10.14, 14.7.0 and later.
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.14.18, 13.10.14, 14.7.0 and later.
+!!!
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes.mdx
index dcda6dfd9cc..78a8c2e004f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -8,7 +8,8 @@ redirects:
EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.0 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.14.18, 13.10.14, 14.7.0 and later.
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.14.18, 13.10.14, 14.7.0 and later.
+!!!
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
index 4fd0eceff5a..ee94f2bc591 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p1_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -8,8 +8,8 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p1 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Dis
If you are using any previous release of HARP, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.3.0.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
-
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
+!!!
Component | Version | Type | Description
--------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
index 6e24007ab73..31d2fc1e375 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1+p2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -8,8 +8,8 @@ EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1+p2 is a patch release of EDB Postgres Dis
If you are using any previous release of HARP, we recommend that you upgrade to HARP 2.3.1.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
-
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
+!!!
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes.mdx
index 66501aeccda..e567b8b0981 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.1_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,8 @@ navTitle: "Version 4.3.1"
EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.1 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8, and later.
+!!!
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
index b0bbc2d38b3..0de7b66df27 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/rel_notes/pgd_4.3.2_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,7 +10,8 @@ Updated: 04 Sep 2023
EDB Postgres Distributed version 4.3.2 is a minor release of EDB Postgres Distributed 4, which includes bug fixes for issues identified in previous versions.
!!! Note
- This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8 and later.
+This version is required for EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 12.15, 13.11, 14.8 and later.
+!!!
| Component | Version | Type | Description |
| --------- | ------- | --------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------|
From 4b3283748e69ec14f2ec7143037eb206f23d331a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Fran Coughlin <132373434+francoughlin@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 07:56:56 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 227/370] Update
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
Good call!
Co-authored-by: Dee Dee Rothery <83650384+drothery-edb@users.noreply.github.com>
---
product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
index 089575db40e..816ad84973d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/biganimal/release/overview/updates.mdx
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ If you want to control when the updates are pushed, you can specify a weekly mai
## Maintenance for high-availability clusters
-For high-availability clusters, periodic maintenance is performed first on the standby replicas and then on the primary.
+For primary/standby high-availability clusters, periodic maintenance is performed first on the standby replicas and then on the primary.
While there is no downtime during periodic maintenance, there will be a network connection reset as the primary is failing over.
From 3c0e50d088839ba1d9d15883f2dd8a90f8031ed9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Mon, 4 Sep 2023 12:28:52 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 228/370] Fixed up CVE links and removed "spare" column
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx | 20 ++++-----
.../epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx | 26 ++++++------
.../epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx | 28 ++++++-------
.../epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx | 34 +++++++--------
.../epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx | 42 +++++++++----------
5 files changed, 75 insertions(+), 75 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
index acf4dc472c1..532a4470ba3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_rel_notes/epas11_21_32_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -21,16 +21,16 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server 11.21.32 includes the following enhancements and bu
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+
-| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-41117](/security/advisories/cve202341117/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-41119](/security/advisories/cve202341119/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-41113](/security/advisories/cve202341113/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-41118](/security/advisories/cve202341118/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-41116](/security/advisories/cve202341116/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-41114](/security/advisories/cve202341114/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-41115](/security/advisories/cve202341115/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-41120](/security/advisories/cve202341120/) |
+| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 |
!!! Note Addresses
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
index bd79f163261..14c6f471edc 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_rel_notes/epas12_16_20_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -21,19 +21,19 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server 12.16.20 includes the following enhancements and bu
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+
-| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 | 11+
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-41117](/security/advisories/cve202341117/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-41119](/security/advisories/cve202341119/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-41113](/security/advisories/cve202341113/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-41118](/security/advisories/cve202341118/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-41116](/security/advisories/cve202341116/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-41114](/security/advisories/cve202341114/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-41115](/security/advisories/cve202341115/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-41120](/security/advisories/cve202341120/) |
+| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 |
+| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 |
!!! Note Addresses
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
index b9526e79643..a08339f7d5c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/13/epas_rel_notes/epas13_12_17_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -21,20 +21,20 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server 13.12.17 includes the following enhancements and bu
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+
-| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command.| | 13+
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-41117](/security/advisories/cve202341117/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-41119](/security/advisories/cve202341119/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-41113](/security/advisories/cve202341113/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-41118](/security/advisories/cve202341118/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-41116](/security/advisories/cve202341116/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-41114](/security/advisories/cve202341114/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-41115](/security/advisories/cve202341115/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-41120](/security/advisories/cve202341120/) |
+| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 |
+| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 |
+| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command.| |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
index 66390b3ff79..960aa9eaad4 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_rel_notes/epas14_9_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -21,23 +21,23 @@ EDB Postgres Advanced Server 14.9.0 includes the following enhancements and bug
| Type | Description | Addresses |
| -------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| --------------------- |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+
-| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 | 11+
-| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command.| | 13+
-| Bug fix | Dumped/restored the sequences created for GENERATED AS IDENTITY constraint. | #90658 | 14+
-| Bug fix | Skipped updating the last DDL time for the parent table in CREATE INDEX. | #91270 | 14+
-| Bug fix | Removed existing package private procedure or function entries from the edb_last_ddl_time while replacing the package body. | | 14+
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-41117](/security/advisories/cve202341117/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-41119](/security/advisories/cve202341119/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-41113](/security/advisories/cve202341113/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-41118](/security/advisories/cve202341118/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-41116](/security/advisories/cve202341116/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-41114](/security/advisories/cve202341114/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-41115](/security/advisories/cve202341115/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-41120](/security/advisories/cve202341120/) |
+| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 |
+| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 |
+| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command.| |
+| Bug fix | Dumped/restored the sequences created for GENERATED AS IDENTITY constraint. | #90658 |
+| Bug fix | Skipped updating the last DDL time for the parent table in CREATE INDEX. | #91270 |
+| Bug fix | Removed existing package private procedure or function entries from the edb_last_ddl_time while replacing the package body. | |
!!! Note Addresses
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
index b00a9db8df3..1e35e3e32dd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/15/epas_rel_notes/epas15_4_0_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -21,27 +21,27 @@ Users making use of the UTL_SMTP package now require EXECUTE permission on the U
EDB Postgres Advanced Server 15.4.0 includes the following enhancements and bug fixes:
| Type | Description | Addresses | |
-| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --- |
-| Upstream merge | Merged with community PostgreSQL 15.4. See the [PostgreSQL 15 Release Notes](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/15/release-15-4.html) for more information. | | |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-1](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx1/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-2](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx2/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-3](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx3/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-4](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx4/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-5](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx5/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-6](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx6/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-7](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx7/) | 11+ |
-| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-XXXXX-8](/security/advisories/cve2023xxxxx8/) | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 | 11+ |
-| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command. | | 13+ |
-| Bug fix | Dumped/restored the sequences created for GENERATED AS IDENTITY constraint. | #90658 | 14+ |
-| Bug fix | Skipped updating the last DDL time for the parent table in CREATE INDEX. | #91270 | 14+ |
-| Bug fix | Removed existing package private procedure or function entries from the edb_last_ddl_time while replacing the package body. | | 14+ |
-| Bug fix | Fixed libpq to allow multiple PQprepare() calls under the same transaction. | #94735 | 14+ |
-| Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak experienced when using EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) with Transparent Data Encryption (TDE). | #93936 | |
+| ----------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Upstream merge | Merged with community PostgreSQL 15.4. See the [PostgreSQL 15 Release Notes](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/15/release-15-4.html) for more information. | |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) SECURITY DEFINER functions and procedures may be hijacked via search_path. | [CVE-2023-41117](/security/advisories/cve202341117/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) dbms_aq helper function may run arbitrary SQL as a superuser. | [CVE-2023-41119](/security/advisories/cve202341119/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permissions bypass via accesshistory() | [CVE-2023-41113](/security/advisories/cve202341113/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) UTL_FILE permission bypass | [CVE-2023-41118](/security/advisories/cve202341118/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views | [CVE-2023-41116](/security/advisories/cve202341116/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) authenticated users may fetch any URL | [CVE-2023-41114](/security/advisories/cve202341114/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects | [CVE-2023-41115](/security/advisories/cve202341115/) |
+| Security fix | EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) DBMS_PROFILER data may be removed without permission | [CVE-2023-41120](/security/advisories/cve202341120/) |
+| Bug fix | Allowed subtypes in INDEX BY clause of the packaged collection. | #1371 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed %type resolution when pointing to a packaged type field. | #1243 |
+| Bug fix | Profile: Fixed upgrade when `REUSE` constraints were `ENABLED`/`DISABLED`. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Set correct collation for packaged cursor parameters. | #92739 |
+| Bug fix | Rolled back autonomous transaction creating pg_temp in case of error. | #91614 |
+| Bug fix | Added checks to ensure required WAL logging in EXCHANGE PARTITION command. | |
+| Bug fix | Dumped/restored the sequences created for GENERATED AS IDENTITY constraint. | #90658 |
+| Bug fix | Skipped updating the last DDL time for the parent table in CREATE INDEX. | #91270 |
+| Bug fix | Removed existing package private procedure or function entries from the edb_last_ddl_time while replacing the package body. | |
+| Bug fix | Fixed libpq to allow multiple PQprepare() calls under the same transaction. | #94735 |
+| Bug fix | Fixed a memory leak experienced when using EDB Postgres Distributed (PGD) with Transparent Data Encryption (TDE). | #93936 |
!!! Note Addresses
Entries in the Addresses column are either CVE numbers or, if preceded by #, a customer case number.
From df3c3cba8563a40889e8da161466d58ba524f3ed Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 11:54:04 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 229/370] TPA 23.21 autoimported
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/INSTALL.mdx | 34 +++++-----
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/architecture-M1.mdx | 63 ++++++++++++-------
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/index.mdx | 31 ++++++++-
.../23/reference/2q_and_edb_repositories.mdx | 6 +-
.../docs/tpa/23/reference/INSTALL-repo.mdx | 14 ++---
.../docs/tpa/23/reference/patroni.mdx | 9 +++
.../reference/tpaexec-download-packages.mdx | 18 ++++++
.../docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-info.mdx | 48 ++++++++++++++
.../docs/tpa/23/tpaexec-configure.mdx | 6 +-
9 files changed, 179 insertions(+), 50 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-info.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/INSTALL.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/INSTALL.mdx
index 02ffb7e25ee..6398a34f496 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/INSTALL.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/INSTALL.mdx
@@ -5,14 +5,15 @@ originalFilePath: INSTALL.md
---
-To use TPA, you need to install tpaexec and run the `tpaexec setup`
-command. This document explains how to install TPA packages. See
-[Distribution support](reference/distributions/) for information on what
-platforms are supported.
+To use TPA, you need to install from packages or source and run the
+`tpaexec setup` command. This document explains how to install TPA
+packages. If you have an EDB subscription plan, and therefore have
+access to the EDB repositories, you should follow these instructions. To
+install TPA from source, please refer to
+[Installing TPA from Source](reference/INSTALL-repo/).
-TPA packages are available to prospects (for a 60 day trial), EDB
-customers with a valid Extreme HA subscription, or by prior arrangement.
-Please contact your account manager to request access.
+See [Distribution support](reference/distributions/) for information
+on what platforms are supported.
!!! Info
@@ -25,19 +26,21 @@ Please contact your account manager to request access.
Login to [EDB Repos 2.0](https://www.enterprisedb.com/repos-downloads)
to obtain your token. Then execute the following command, substituting
-your token for ``.
+your token for `` and replacing `` with
+one of the following according to which EDB plan you are subscribed:
+`enterprise`, `standard`, `community360`, `postgres_distributed`.
#### Add repository and install TPA on Debian or Ubuntu
```bash
-curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com//postgres_distributed/setup.deb.sh' | sudo -E bash
+curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com///setup.deb.sh' | sudo -E bash
sudo apt-get install tpaexec
```
#### Add repository and install TPA on RHEL, Rocky, AlmaLinux or Oracle Linux
```bash
-curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com//postgres_distributed/setup.rpm.sh' | sudo -E bash
+curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com///setup.rpm.sh' | sudo -E bash
sudo yum install tpaexec
```
@@ -58,7 +61,8 @@ More detailed explanations of each step are given below.
## Where to install TPA
As long as you are using a supported platform, TPA can be installed and
-run from your workstation. This is fine for learning, local testing or demonstration purposes. TPA supports [deploying to Docker containers](platform-docker/)
+run from your workstation. This is fine for learning, local testing or
+demonstration purposes. TPA supports [deploying to Docker containers](platform-docker/)
should you wish to perform a complete deployment on your own workstation.
For production use, we recommend running TPA on a dedicated, persistent
@@ -75,19 +79,21 @@ provides it. The preferred source for repositories is EDB Repos 2.0.
Login to [EDB Repos 2.0](https://www.enterprisedb.com/repos-downloads)
to obtain your token. Then execute the following command, substituting
-your token for ``.
+your token for `` and replacing `` with
+one of the following according to which EDB plan you are subscribed:
+`enterprise`, `standard`, `community360`, `postgres_distributed`.
#### Add repository on Debian or Ubuntu
```bash
-curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com//postgres_distributed/setup.deb.sh' | sudo -E bash
+curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com///setup.deb.sh' | sudo -E bash
```
#### Add repository on RHEL, Rocky, AlmaLinux or Oracle Linux
```bash
-curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com//postgres_distributed/setup.rpm.sh' | sudo -E bash
+curl -1sLf 'https://downloads.enterprisedb.com///setup.rpm.sh' | sudo -E bash
```
Alternatively, you may obtain TPA from the legacy 2ndQuadrant
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/architecture-M1.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/architecture-M1.mdx
index ffa6345b1c4..ca8b39ddccf 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/architecture-M1.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/architecture-M1.mdx
@@ -6,15 +6,12 @@ originalFilePath: architecture-M1.md
A Postgres cluster with a primary and a streaming replica, one Barman
server, and any number of additional replicas cascaded from the first
-one. This architecture is suitable for testing, demonstrating and
-learning. We plan to release a production primary/standby architecture
-for TPA in the near future.
-
-In default configuration this architecture uses open source software
-only. To use subscription-only EDB software with this architecture
-requires credentials for EDB Repos 1.0. If you choose EDB Advanced
-Server (EPAS) you will also require credentials for the legacy
-2ndQuadrant repos.
+one. This architecture is suitable for production and is also suited to
+testing, demonstrating and learning due to its simplicity and ability to
+be configured with no proprietary components.
+
+If you select subscription-only EDB software with this architecture
+it will be sourced from EDB Repos 2.0 and you will need to provide a token.
See [How TPA uses 2ndQuadrant and EDB repositories](reference/2q_and_edb_repositories/)
for more detail on this topic.
@@ -32,6 +29,26 @@ additionally configured as a witness. This ensures that the
number of nodes is always odd, which is convenient when
enabling automatic failover.
+## Application and backup failover
+
+The M1 architecture implements failover management in that it ensures
+that a replica will be promoted to take the place of the primary should
+the primary become unavailable. However it *does not provide any
+automatic facility to reroute application traffic to the primary*. If
+you require, automatic failover of application traffic you will need to
+configure this at the application itself (for example using multi-host
+connections) or by using an appropriate proxy or load balancer and the
+facilities offered by your selected failover manager.
+
+The above is also true of the connection between the backup node and the
+primary created by TPA. The backup will not be automatically adjusted to
+target the new primary in the event of failover, instead it will remain
+connected to the original primary. If you are performing a manual
+failover and wish to connect the backup to the new primary, you may
+simply re-run `tpaexec deploy`. If you wish to automatically change the
+backup source, you should implement this using your selected failover
+manager as noted above.
+
## Cluster configuration
### Overview of configuration options
@@ -44,7 +61,8 @@ tpaexec configure ~/clusters/m1 \
--architecture M1 \
--platform aws --region eu-west-1 --instance-type t3.micro \
--distribution Debian \
- --postgresql 14
+ --postgresql 14 \
+ --failover-manager repmgr
```
You can list all available options using the help command.
@@ -59,25 +77,22 @@ More detail on the options is provided in the following section.
#### Mandatory Options
-| Parameter | Description |
-| ----------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `--architecture` (`-a`) | Must be set to `M1`. |
-| Postgres flavour and version (e.g. `--postgresql 15`) | A valid [flavour and version specifier](tpaexec-configure/#postgres-flavour-and-version). |
+| Parameter | Description |
+| ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| `--architecture` (`-a`) | Must be set to `M1`. |
+| Postgres flavour and version (e.g. `--postgresql 15`) | A valid [flavour and version specifier](tpaexec-configure/#postgres-flavour-and-version). |
+| One of: * `--failover-manager {efm, repmgr, patroni}` * `--enable-efm` * `--enable-repmgr` * `--enable-patroni` | Select the failover manager from [`efm`](reference/efm/), [`repmgr`](reference/repmgr/) and [`patroni`](reference/patroni/). |
#### Additional Options
-| Parameter | Description | Behaviour if omitted |
-| ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
-| `--platform` | One of `aws`, `docker`, `bare`. | Defaults to `aws`. |
-| `--num-cascaded-replicas` | The number of cascaded replicas from the first replica. | Defaults to 1. |
-| `--failover-manager` | Select the failover manager from `efm`, `repmgr` and `patroni`. | TPA will select EFM as the failover manager for EPAS, and repmgr for all other flavours. |
-| `--enable-efm` | Configure Failover Manager as the cluster failover manager. | See `--failover-manager` above. |
-| `--enable-repmgr` | Configure Replication Manager as the cluster failover manager. | See `--failover-manager` above. |
-| `--enable-patroni` | Configure Patroni as the cluster failover manager. | See `--failover-manager` above. |
-| `--enable-haproxy` | 2 additional nodes will be added as a load balancer layer. Only supported with Patroni as the failover manager. | HAproxy nodes will not be added to the cluster. |
-| `--patroni-dcs` | Select the Distributed Configuration Store backend for patroni. Only option is `etcd` at this time. Only supported with Patroni as the failover manager. | Defaults to `etcd`. |
+| Parameter | Description | Behaviour if omitted |
+| ------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ----------------------------------------------- |
+| `--platform` | One of `aws`, `docker`, `bare`. | Defaults to `aws`. |
+| `--num-cascaded-replicas` | The number of cascaded replicas from the first replica. | Defaults to 1. |
+| `--enable-haproxy` | 2 additional nodes will be added as a load balancer layer. Only supported with Patroni as the failover manager. | HAproxy nodes will not be added to the cluster. |
+| `--patroni-dcs` | Select the Distributed Configuration Store backend for patroni. Only option is `etcd` at this time. Only supported with Patroni as the failover manager. | Defaults to `etcd`. |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/index.mdx
index 01355e1f8eb..f7dfb75ecfb 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/index.mdx
@@ -95,7 +95,8 @@ TPA operates in four distinct stages to bring up a Postgres cluster:
```bash
# 1. Configuration: decide what kind of cluster you want
[tpa]$ tpaexec configure clustername --architecture M1 --platform aws \
- --postgresql 14
+ --postgresql 14 \
+ --failover-manager repmgr
# 2. Provisioning: create the servers needed to host the cluster
[tpa]$ tpaexec provision clustername
@@ -221,7 +222,33 @@ designed to make life simpler, but there is no hidden magic or anything
standing in the way between you and the database. You can do everything
on a TPA cluster that you could do on any other Postgres installation.
-## Getting started
+## Versioning in TPA
+
+TPA previously used a date-based versioning scheme whereby the major
+version was derived from the year. From version 23 we have moved to a
+derivative of semantic versioning. For historical reasons, we are not
+using the full three-part semantic version number. Instead TPA uses a
+two-part `major.minor` format. The minor version is incremented on every
+release, the major version is only incremented where required to comply
+with the backward compatibility principle below.
+
+### Backwards compatibility
+
+A key development principle of TPA is to maintain backwards
+compatibility so there is no reason for users to need anything other
+than the latest version of TPA. We define backwards compatibility as
+follows:
+
+- A config.yml created with TPA X.a will be valid with TPA X.b where
+ b>=a
+- The cluster created from that config.yml will be maintainable and
+ re-deployable with TPA X.b
+
+ Therefore, a new major version implies a break in backward
+ compatibility. As such, we aim to avoid releasing major versions and
+ will only do so in exceptional circumstances.
+
+ ## Getting started
Follow the [TPA installation instructions](INSTALL/) for your
system, then [configure your first cluster](tpaexec-configure/).
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/2q_and_edb_repositories.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/2q_and_edb_repositories.mdx
index 19815ae4f4e..dd191b340ed 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/2q_and_edb_repositories.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/2q_and_edb_repositories.mdx
@@ -67,7 +67,11 @@ If the PGD-Always-ON architecture is selected, repositories will be
selected from EDB Repos 2.0 and all software will be sourced
from these repositories.
-For M1 and BDR-Always-ON architectures, the default source is
+If the M1 architecture is selected and no proprietary EDB software is
+selected, all packages will be sourced from PGDG. If any proprietary EDB
+software is selected, all packages will be sourced from EDB Repos 2.0.
+
+For the BDR-Always-ON architecture, the default source is
2ndQuadrant, and the necessary repositories will be added from this
source. In addition, the PGDG repositories will be used for community
packages such as PostgreSQL and etcd as required.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/INSTALL-repo.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/INSTALL-repo.mdx
index a6aa71d9b15..6d762c6d8a7 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/INSTALL-repo.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/INSTALL-repo.mdx
@@ -7,15 +7,15 @@ originalFilePath: INSTALL-repo.md
This document explains how to use TPA from a copy of the source code
repository.
-Please [install TPA from packages](../INSTALL/) if you can; install
-from source only if no packages are available for your system (e.g., on
-MacOS X), or if you are collaborating with the TPA developers to
-test unreleased code.
+!!! Note
+
+ EDB customers must [install TPA from packages](../INSTALL/) in
+ order to receive EDB support for the software.
To run TPA from source, you must install all of the dependencies
(e.g., Python 3.6+) that the packages would handle for you, or download
the source and [run TPA in a Docker container](INSTALL-docker/).
-(Either way will work fine on Linux and MacOS X.)
+(Either way will work fine on Linux and macOS.)
## Quickstart
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ something other than `sudo` to run these commands as root, if you
prefer.)
```bash
-# Debian (python3.7) or Ubuntu (python3.6)
-$ sudo apt-get install python3.7 python3-pip python3-venv \
+# Debian or Ubuntu
+$ sudo apt-get install python3 python3-pip python3-venv \
git openvpn patch
# RedHat, Rocky or AlmaLinux (python3 for RHEL7, python36 for RHEL8)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/patroni.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/patroni.mdx
index 5c664de68a3..8e88c4b1097 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/patroni.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/patroni.mdx
@@ -18,6 +18,15 @@ cluster_vars:
failover_manager: patroni
```
+If deploying to RedHat you must also add the `PGDG` repository to your
+yum repository list in config.yml:
+
+```yaml
+cluster_vars:
+ yum_repository_list:
+ - PGDG
+```
+
TPA `configure` will add 3 etcd nodes and 2 haproxy nodes. Etcd is used
for the Distributed Configuration Store (DCS). Patroni supports other
DCS backends, but they are not currently supported by EDB or TPA.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-download-packages.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-download-packages.mdx
index b0dbfa12247..241fe346bf2 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-download-packages.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-download-packages.mdx
@@ -61,3 +61,21 @@ cluster-dir/
You can use this in the cluster as is or copy it to a target control
node. See [recommendations for installing to an air-gapped environment](air-gapped/). A [local-repo](local-repo/) will be detected and used
automatically by TPA.
+
+## Cleaning up failed downloader container
+
+If there is an error during the download process, the command will leave
+behind the downloader container running to help with debugging. For
+instance you may want to log in to the failed downloader container to
+inspect logs or networking. Downloader container is typically named
+$cluster_name-downloader unless it exceeds the allowed limit of 64
+characters for the container name. You can check for the exact name by
+running `docker ps` to list the running containers and look for a container
+name that matches your cluster name. In most cases you can log in to the
+running container by executing `docker exec -it $cluster_name-downloader /bin/bash`.
+After the inspection, you can clean up the left over container by running the
+`download-packages` command with `--tags cleanup`. For example:
+
+```shell
+tpaexec download-packages cluster-dir --docker-image tpa/redhat:8 --tags cleanup
+```
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-info.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-info.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..8ef67a153d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/reference/tpaexec-info.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+---
+title: tpaexec info
+originalFilePath: tpaexec-info.md
+
+---
+
+You can use the info command to output information about the TPA installation.
+Providing this information is valuable for troubleshooting.
+
+## Usage
+
+- Run `tpaexec info`
+
+### Subcommands
+
+- `tpaexec info version`
+
+ Displays current TPA version
+
+- `tpaexec info platforms`
+
+ Displays available deployment platforms
+
+- `tpaexec info architectures`
+
+ Displays available deployment architectures
+
+- `tpaexec info platforms/`
+
+ Displays information about a particular platform
+
+- `tpaexec info architectures/`
+
+ Displays information about a particular architecture
+
+## Example Output
+
+The `tpaexec info` command outputs the following:
+
+```bash
+# TPAexec 23.18.18
+tpaexec=./tpaexec
+TPA_DIR=/opt/EDB/TPA
+PYTHON=/opt/EDB/TPA/tpa-venv/bin/python3 (v3.7.3, venv)
+TPA_VENV=/opt/EDB/TPA/tpa-venv
+ANSIBLE=/opt/EDB/TPA/tpa-venv/bin/ansible (v2.9.27)
+Validation: e05e5302cd357b8ddbb042b7591bf66dfa283213ccbe5073b2cff3c783be1310 [OK]
+```
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/tpaexec-configure.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/tpaexec-configure.mdx
index 34ee0098b17..d1e72dd042d 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/tpaexec-configure.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/tpaexec-configure.mdx
@@ -13,7 +13,8 @@ cycle.
```bash
[tpa]$ tpaexec configure ~/clusters/speedy --architecture M1 \
- --postgresql 14
+ --postgresql 14 \
+ --failover-manager repmgr
```
This command will create a directory named `~/clusters/speedy` and
@@ -416,7 +417,8 @@ Let's see what happens when we run the following command:
--platform aws --region us-east-1 --network 10.33.0.0/16 \
--instance-type t2.medium --root-volume-size 32 \
--postgres-volume-size 64 --barman-volume-size 128 \
- --postgresql 14
+ --postgresql 14 \
+ --failover-manager repmgr
[tpa]$
```
From 755ba0e703decf317ce65bd46f4363aa192449ba Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Notley <43099400+sonotley@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 11:59:51 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 230/370] Add release notes for TPA 23.21
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 ++
.../tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx | 18 ++++++++++++++++++
2 files changed, 20 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 6c170e0878d..ba4a6636d76 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
title: Trusted Postgres Architect release notes
navTitle: "Release notes"
navigation:
+ - tpa_23.21_rel_notes
- tpa_23.20_rel_notes
- tpa_23.19_rel_notes
- tpa_23.18_rel_notes
@@ -18,6 +19,7 @@ The Trusted Postgres Architect documentation describes the latest version of Tru
| Version | Release date |
| ---------------------------- | ------------ |
+| [23.21](tpa_23.21_rel_notes) | 5 Sept 2023 |
| [23.20](tpa_23.20_rel_notes) | 1 Aug 2023 |
| [23.19](tpa_23.19_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2023 |
| [23.18](tpa_23.18_rel_notes) | 23 May 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ecd3ee46e46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+---
+title: Trusted Postgres Architect 23.21 release notes
+navTitle: "Version 23.21"
+---
+
+
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Architect 23.20 include the following:
+
+| Type | Description |
+| ---- |------------ |
+| Change | TPA is now an open source project, the source is available under the GPLv3 license from [GitHub](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/tpaexec) |
+| Change | The default M1 configuration now uses EDB Repos 2.0 if any EDB software is selected, otherwise PGDG is used. This only affects new clusters. |
+| Change | You must now choose a failover manager explicitly when running `tpaexec configure` with the M1 architecture. |
+| Bug fix | Fixed an issue with creation of PGD subscriber-only nodes whereby TPA incorrectly required 'subscriber-only' to be set on the replica instead of the upstream instance. |
+| Bug fix | TPA will now skip inapplicable tasks when deploying to containers even if you are using the 'bare' platform option (previously these were skipped only if 'docker' was selected). |
+| Bug fix | Fixed an issue with permissions on `/etc/edb` whereby if you added the pgd-proxy role to a data node in a deployed PGD5 cluster, pgd-proxy would fail to start because it did not have permissions to open pgd-proxy-config.yml. |
+| Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby `/var/log/postgres` could end up with inappropriate permissions (0600) if a strict umask was set |
+| Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby repeating `tpaexec deploy` on a Barman instance correctly registered with PEM would lose the PEM Agent Barman configuration. |
\ No newline at end of file
From aa8fe7f931f05ac2ca81b1cefdcb4f114dc1f302 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 13:36:24 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 231/370] Update
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx | 2 ++
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
index ecd3ee46e46..26e78a3d13f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ title: Trusted Postgres Architect 23.21 release notes
navTitle: "Version 23.21"
---
+Released: 5 Sep 2023
+
New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Architect 23.20 include the following:
From 7e47502df8b7497f8c88f4e48b3d293881f5c2a3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 13:36:30 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 232/370] Update product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
index ba4a6636d76..f4f666a6bfd 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ The Trusted Postgres Architect documentation describes the latest version of Tru
| Version | Release date |
| ---------------------------- | ------------ |
-| [23.21](tpa_23.21_rel_notes) | 5 Sept 2023 |
+| [23.21](tpa_23.21_rel_notes) | 05 Sep 2023 |
| [23.20](tpa_23.20_rel_notes) | 1 Aug 2023 |
| [23.19](tpa_23.19_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2023 |
| [23.18](tpa_23.18_rel_notes) | 23 May 2023 |
From 1ba0763925e7be4176b8fb011399a9e26caf38dc Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 13:36:36 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 233/370] Update product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
index f4f666a6bfd..428f5aec067 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ The Trusted Postgres Architect documentation describes the latest version of Tru
| Version | Release date |
| ---------------------------- | ------------ |
| [23.21](tpa_23.21_rel_notes) | 05 Sep 2023 |
-| [23.20](tpa_23.20_rel_notes) | 1 Aug 2023 |
+| [23.20](tpa_23.20_rel_notes) | 01 Aug 2023 |
| [23.19](tpa_23.19_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2023 |
| [23.18](tpa_23.18_rel_notes) | 23 May 2023 |
| [23.17](tpa_23.17_rel_notes) | 10 May 2023 |
From 7d2ad7d6a1ac3cd5ca95971db587f8b620ba989f Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan <126472455+djw-m@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 16:15:38 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 234/370] Remove open source entry
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx | 3 +--
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
index 26e78a3d13f..e777a6e3441 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -10,11 +10,10 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Arc
| Type | Description |
| ---- |------------ |
-| Change | TPA is now an open source project, the source is available under the GPLv3 license from [GitHub](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/tpaexec) |
| Change | The default M1 configuration now uses EDB Repos 2.0 if any EDB software is selected, otherwise PGDG is used. This only affects new clusters. |
| Change | You must now choose a failover manager explicitly when running `tpaexec configure` with the M1 architecture. |
| Bug fix | Fixed an issue with creation of PGD subscriber-only nodes whereby TPA incorrectly required 'subscriber-only' to be set on the replica instead of the upstream instance. |
| Bug fix | TPA will now skip inapplicable tasks when deploying to containers even if you are using the 'bare' platform option (previously these were skipped only if 'docker' was selected). |
| Bug fix | Fixed an issue with permissions on `/etc/edb` whereby if you added the pgd-proxy role to a data node in a deployed PGD5 cluster, pgd-proxy would fail to start because it did not have permissions to open pgd-proxy-config.yml. |
| Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby `/var/log/postgres` could end up with inappropriate permissions (0600) if a strict umask was set |
-| Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby repeating `tpaexec deploy` on a Barman instance correctly registered with PEM would lose the PEM Agent Barman configuration. |
\ No newline at end of file
+| Bug fix | Fixed an issue whereby repeating `tpaexec deploy` on a Barman instance correctly registered with PEM would lose the PEM Agent Barman configuration. |
From c4d75d981ba3944adda2d37ca53347be44de51d5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 14:09:11 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 235/370] Fix index pages as reported.
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx | 2 +-
2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
index 6147c7465e3..9501d20e4ff 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/advisories/index.mdx
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 1
Read Advisory
Updated: 2023/08/30
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
index 5ac180ceb93..4dccdc88fbc 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/security/index.mdx
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ An issue was discovered in EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) before 1
Read Advisory
Updated: 2023/08/30
-
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for materialized views
+
EDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) permission bypass for large objects
All versions of EnterpriseDB Postgres Advanced Server (EPAS) prior to 11.21.32, 12.16.20, 13.12.17, 14.9.0, 15.4.0
From 92be23f4a84f11dcaa3344094b0fdca605179893 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 6 Jun 2023 09:59:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 236/370] Tech Partner Veeam Kasten Guide
---
.../VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 12 +++++++
.../VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 8 +++++
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 0
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 0
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 10 ++++++
.../VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 31 +++++++++++++++++++
.../VeeamKasten/Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png | 3 ++
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/index.mdx | 14 +++++++++
8 files changed, 78 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/index.mdx
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5b80ceb0dcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+---
+title: 'Partner Information'
+description: 'Details of the Partner'
+
+---
+| | |
+| ----------- | ----------- |
+| **Partner Name** | Veeam Kasten |
+| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
+| **Partner Product** | Kasten |
+| **Version** | Kasten K10 |
+| **Product Description** | |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b074c1304f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+---
+title: 'Solution Summary'
+description: 'Explanation of the solution and its purpose'
+---
+
+Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide enterprise operations teams with an easy-to-use and secure system for backup and restore of Kubernetes applications. Veeam Kasten can be used in conjunction with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and the
+
+![](Images/.png)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2e4eae2d28f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+---
+title: 'Certification Environment'
+description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
+---
+
+| | |
+| ----------- | ----------- |
+| **Certification Test Date** | , 2023 |
+| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | |
+| **Veeam Kasten** | |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..c3e84bfe4ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+---
+title: 'Support and Logging Details'
+description: 'Details of the support process and logging information'
+---
+
+## Support
+
+Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and Veeam. A proper support contract is required to be in place at both EDB and Veeam. A support ticket can be opened on either side to start the process. If it is determined through the support ticket that resources from the other vendor is required, the customer should open a support ticket with that vendor through normal support channels. This will allow both companies to work together to help the customer as needed.
+
+## Logging
+
+**EDB Postgres Advanced Server Logs**
+
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs: `/var/lib/edb/as15/data/log`.
+
+**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
+
+Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
+
+**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
+
+The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
+
+- Debian-based system: `/var/log/postgresql/postgresql-x.x.main.log. X.x.`
+
+- Red Hat-based system: `/var/lib/pgsql/data/pg_log`
+
+- Windows: `C:\Program Files\PostgreSQL\9.3\data\pg_log`
+
+**Veeam Logs**
+
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..93e0514710b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/PartnerProgram.jpg.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:1953f3a5526ab37279a598f1c370c5acbf9f6d18f7902cb538161182fbed3b1f
+size 57295
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/index.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/index.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a054806aef1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/index.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+---
+title: 'Veeam Kasten Implementation Guide'
+indexCards: simple
+directoryDefaults:
+ iconName: handshake
+---
+
+
This document is intended to augment each vendor’s product documentation in order to guide the reader in getting the products working together. It is not intended to show the optimal configuration for the certified integration.
\ No newline at end of file
From 8df9cca3a0006ec264de03f7d43aaf5fc3e86805 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 7 Jun 2023 15:59:35 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 237/370] Index Change and Added Information
---
.../VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 6 +-
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 316 ++++++++++++++++++
.../Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png | 3 +
src/pages/index.js | 3 +
4 files changed, 326 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index b074c1304f8..26a071ded35 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -3,6 +3,8 @@ title: 'Solution Summary'
description: 'Explanation of the solution and its purpose'
---
-Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide enterprise operations teams with an easy-to-use and secure system for backup and restore of Kubernetes applications. Veeam Kasten can be used in conjunction with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and the
+Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide enterprise operations teams with an easy-to-use and secure system for backup and restore of Kubernetes applications. Veeam Kasten can be used in conjunction with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and the EDB external backup adapter to successfully backup and restore data with Veeam Kasten.
-![](Images/.png)
\ No newline at end of file
+The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes [external backup adapter](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/addons/#external-backup-adapter) allows for a third party tool such as Veeam Kasten to discover an API that is needed in order to create a successful backup.
+
+![Kasten K10 Architecture](Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index e69de29bb2d..747d230799e 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,316 @@
+title: 'Configuration'
+description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
+---
+
+Implementing EDB Postgres for Kubernetes with Veeam Kasten requires the following components:
+
+- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes
+- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes external backup adapter
+- Veeam Kasten K10
+
+## Prerequisites
+
+- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes configured and running
+- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes external backup adapter configured per your system requirements
+- Veeam Kasten K10 installed on your system
+
+
+## Install the Operator
+
+If you already have the EDB operator installed on Kubernetes you may skip this step.
+
+```bash
+kubectl apply -f https://get.enterprisedb.io/cnp/postgresql-operator-1.19.1.yaml
+```
+
+Running this command will create the operator namespace where the controller will be running.
+
+## Create an EDB Cluster, Client and Add Data
+
+If, in your environment, you already have an EDB cluster configured you may skip this step.
+
+1. Initiate the below lines of code in your Kubernetes environment.
+
+```bash
+kubctl create ns edb
+kubectl apply -f cluster-example.yaml -n edb
+```
+2. Wait until the cluster is completely ready.
+
+3. Install the cnp plugin, if you have already installed this you may skip this.
+
+```bash
+curl -sSfL \
+ https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/kubectl-cnp/raw/main/install.sh | \
+ sudo sh -s -- -b /usr/local/bin
+```
+
+4. Create a client certificate to the database.
+
+```bash
+kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
+ --cnp-cluster cluster-example \
+ --cnp-user app \
+ -n edb
+```
+
+**cluster-example** Example:
+``bash
+# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
+apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
+kind: Cluster
+metadata:
+ name: cluster-example
+ annotations:
+ "k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["external-backup-adapter-cluster"]'
+ "k8s.enterprisedb.io/externalBackupAdapterClusterConfig": |-
+ electedResourcesDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/elected"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ excludedResourcesDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded-reason"
+ metadataType: "annotation"
+ value: "Not necessary for backup"
+ backupInstanceDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ - key: "kanister.kasten.io/blueprint"
+ metadataType: "annotation"
+ value: "edb-hooks"
+ preBackupHookConfiguration:
+ container:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-container"
+ command:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-command"
+ onError:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-on-error"
+ postBackupHookConfiguration:
+ container:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-container"
+ command:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-command"
+spec:
+ instances: 3
+ # Example of rolling update strategy:
+ # - unsupervised: automated update of the primary once all
+ # replicas have been upgraded (default)
+ # - supervised: requires manual supervision to perform
+ # the switchover of the primary
+ primaryUpdateStrategy: unsupervised
+ # Require 1Gi of space
+ storage:
+ size: 1Gi
+```
+
+5. Create the client.
+
+```bash
+kubectl create -f client.yaml -n edb
+```
+**client.yaml** Example:
+```bash
+apiVersion: apps/v1
+kind: Deployment
+metadata:
+ name: cert-test
+spec:
+ replicas: 1
+ selector:
+ matchLabels:
+ app: webtest
+ template:
+ metadata:
+ labels:
+ app: webtest
+ spec:
+ containers:
+ - image: ghcr.io/cloudnative-pg/webtest:1.6.0
+ name: cert-test
+ volumeMounts:
+ - name: secret-volume-root-ca
+ mountPath: /etc/secrets/ca
+ - name: secret-volume-app
+ mountPath: /etc/secrets/app
+ ports:
+ - containerPort: 8080
+ env:
+ - name: PGPASSWORD
+ valueFrom:
+ secretKeyRef:
+ name: cluster-example-app
+ key: password
+ - name: DATABASE_URL
+ value: >
+ sslkey=/etc/secrets/app/tls.key
+ sslcert=/etc/secrets/app/tls.crt
+ sslrootcert=/etc/secrets/ca/ca.crt
+ host=cluster-example-rw.default.svc
+ dbname=app
+ user=app
+ sslmode=verify-full
+ - name: SQL_QUERY
+ value: SELECT 1
+ volumes:
+ - name: secret-volume-root-ca
+ secret:
+ secretName: cluster-example-ca
+ defaultMode: 0600
+ - name: secret-volume-app
+ secret:
+ secretName: cluster-app
+ defaultMode: 0600
+```
+
+6. Add some data.
+
+```bash
+kubectl exec -it deploy/cert-test -- bash
+psql 'sslkey=/etc/secrets/app/tls.key sslcert=/etc/secrets/app/tls.crt sslrootcert=/etc/secrets/ca/ca.crt host=cluster-example-rw dbname=app user=app sslmode=verify-full'
+\c app
+DROP TABLE IF EXISTS links;
+CREATE TABLE links (
+ id SERIAL PRIMARY KEY,
+ url VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
+ name VARCHAR(255) NOT NULL,
+ description VARCHAR (255),
+ last_update DATE
+);
+INSERT INTO links (url, name, description, last_update) VALUES('https://kasten.io','Kasten','Backup on kubernetes',NOW());
+select * from links;
+\q
+exit
+```
+
+## Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster
+
+If you created your cluster with the pieces from the previous section the **cluster-example** already includes the backup decorator, so you will not need to do this step again. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the backup decorator.
+
+1. Add the following annotations to your cluster:
+
+```bash
+"k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["external-backup-adapter-cluster"]'
+ "k8s.enterprisedb.io/externalBackupAdapterClusterConfig": |-
+ electedResourcesDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/elected"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ excludedResourcesDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded-reason"
+ metadataType: "annotation"
+ value: "Not necessary for backup"
+ backupInstanceDecorators:
+ - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks"
+ metadataType: "label"
+ value: "true"
+ - key: "kanister.kasten.io/blueprint"
+ metadataType: "annotation"
+ value: "edb-hooks"
+ preBackupHookConfiguration:
+ container:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-container"
+ command:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-command"
+ onError:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-on-error"
+ postBackupHookConfiguration:
+ container:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-container"
+ command:
+ key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-command"
+```
+
+## Install the EDB blueprint
+
+1. Enter the follwing command in your environment:
+
+```bash
+kubectl create -f edb-hooks.yaml
+```
+
+**edb-hooks.yaml** Example:
+
+```bash
+apiVersion: cr.kanister.io/v1alpha1
+kind: Blueprint
+metadata:
+ name: edb-hooks
+ namespace: kasten-io
+actions:
+ backupPrehook:
+ phases:
+ - func: KubeTask
+ name: edbPreBackupHook
+ args:
+ image: ghcr.io/kanisterio/kanister-kubectl-1.18:0.91.0
+ command:
+ - bash
+ - -x
+ - -o
+ - errexit
+ - -o
+ - pipefail
+ - -c
+ - |
+ namespace={{ .Namespace.Name }}
+ selector='kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks=true'
+ for pod in $(kubectl get po --no-headers -n $namespace -l $selector|awk '{print $1}')
+ do
+ preCommand=$(kubectl get po -n $namespace $pod -o jsonpath='{.metadata.annotations.kasten-enterprisedb\.io/pre-backup-command}')
+ preOnErrorCommand=$(kubectl get po -n $namespace $pod -o jsonpath='{.metadata.annotations.kasten-enterprisedb\.io/pre-backup-on-error}')
+ container=$(kubectl get po -n $namespace $pod -o jsonpath='{.metadata.annotations.kasten-enterprisedb\.io/pre-backup-container}')
+ command=${preCommand//[\[\]\"\,]/' '}
+ result=$(kubectl exec -it $pod -c $container -n $namespace $pod -- bash -c "if $command; then echo success; else echo failure; fi" | tail -1)
+ if [[ $result == "failure" ]]
+ then
+ echo "Error after running $preCommand in $pod/$container"
+ echo "Executing $preOnErrorCommand"
+ command=${preOnErrorCommand//[\[\]\"\,]/' '}
+ kubectl exec -it $pod -c $container -n $namespace $pod -- bash -c $command
+ exit 1
+ fi
+ done
+ exit 0
+ backupPosthook:
+ phases:
+ - func: KubeTask
+ name: edbPostBackupHook
+ args:
+ image: ghcr.io/kanisterio/kanister-kubectl-1.18:0.91.0
+ command:
+ - bash
+ - -x
+ - -o
+ - errexit
+ - -o
+ - pipefail
+ - -c
+ - |
+ namespace={{ .Namespace.Name }}
+ selector='kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks=true'
+ for pod in $(kubectl get po --no-headers -n $namespace -l $selector|awk '{print $1}')
+ do
+ postCommand=$(kubectl get po -n $namespace $pod -o jsonpath='{.metadata.annotations.kasten-enterprisedb\.io/post-backup-command}')
+ container=$(kubectl get po -n $namespace $pod -o jsonpath='{.metadata.annotations.kasten-enterprisedb\.io/post-backup-container}')
+ command=${postCommand//[\[\]\"\,]/' '}
+ result=$(kubectl exec -it $pod -c $container -n $namespace $pod -- bash -c "if $command; then echo success; else echo failure; fi" | tail -1)
+ if [[ $result == "failure" ]]
+ then
+ echo "Error after running $postCommand in $pod/$container"
+ exit 1
+ fi
+ done
+ exit 0
+```
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..024e1f828e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:b91718c7283f21b6004f1a0503d2bc2d39b0ac44643aa57338311a066382b395
+size 314038
diff --git a/src/pages/index.js b/src/pages/index.js
index 89f663535ac..82d40c8787c 100644
--- a/src/pages/index.js
+++ b/src/pages/index.js
@@ -343,6 +343,9 @@ const Page = () => (
Repostor Data Protector for PostgresSQL
+
+ Veeam Kasten
+
Veritas NetBackup for PostgreSQL
From 6de0541fad63c4f45599e62d8c69f9f12c52678a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 13:36:50 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 238/370] Guide info updates
---
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 35 +++++++++++++++++++
.../Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png | 3 ++
2 files changed, 38 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index e69de29bb2d..a00e995f898 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+---
+title: 'Using'
+description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
+---
+
+When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the Configuring section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
+
+## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
+
+In the `Configuring` section, you installed the EDB Blueprint with the edb-hooks.yaml file. You will now be able to create a backup policy with those hooks.
+
+1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
+
+Add the hooks example:
+ ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
+
+## Launch a Backup
+
+1. Using Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
+
+2. Delete the namespace `EDB`.
+
+```bash
+kubectl delete ns edb
+```
+
+## Restore Database
+
+1. Go to your remote restore point.
+
+2. On the remote restore point select `restore`.
+
+3. After you have restored all of your data should be present.
+
+
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..b1982e965f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:356a3883638fa3a8cd847a04ec87c8e4e2dc6cb5398e1ba9c55a18df60e812ec
+size 132778
From fd9b10e6ea6dfb0e4c6ee7669950e4dcfdbd9b07 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 14:55:53 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 239/370] Configuring Update
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 1 +
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 747d230799e..af2230d0ff7 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+---
title: 'Configuration'
description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
---
From 0db50ea88a117089717979701d9b2d40eb99ef9e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 15:34:23 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 240/370] Syntax Updates
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 3 ++-
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 5b80ceb0dcc..d45ed1a6199 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -7,6 +7,6 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| ----------- | ----------- |
| **Partner Name** | Veeam Kasten |
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
-| **Partner Product** | Kasten |
-| **Version** | Kasten K10 |
+| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
+| **Version** | |
| **Product Description** | |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index af2230d0ff7..a25d2611c33 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -56,7 +56,8 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
```
**cluster-example** Example:
-``bash
+
+```bash
# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
kind: Cluster
From 2c4243e2d5ecc54fc66bc142e4f7fff03e9f58b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 19:11:32 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 241/370] Edits per Kasten Team
---
.../VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 5 +++++
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 22 ++++++++++---------
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 2 ++
5 files changed, 23 insertions(+), 14 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index d45ed1a6199..7563a70c1ec 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -8,5 +8,5 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Partner Name** | Veeam Kasten |
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
-| **Version** | |
-| **Product Description** | |
\ No newline at end of file
+| **Version** | Kasten 6.0 |
+| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index a25d2611c33..5054ca7a06b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -311,7 +311,12 @@ actions:
done
exit 0
```
+## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
+1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
+
+Add the hooks example:
+ ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index a00e995f898..c53b1c0854a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -3,21 +3,23 @@ title: 'Using'
description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
-When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the Configuring section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
-
-## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
-
-In the `Configuring` section, you installed the EDB Blueprint with the edb-hooks.yaml file. You will now be able to create a backup policy with those hooks.
-
-1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
-
-Add the hooks example:
- ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
+When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
## Launch a Backup
1. Using Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
+!!! Note
+ The Veeam backup process is explained below:
+ 1. EDB elects a replica for the backup.
+ . Kasten will discover the replica.
+ 3. Kasten calls the EDB pre-backup command on the discovered replica.
+ 4. The replica becomes ready for the backup.
+ 5. Kasten takes the backup.
+ 6. Kasten calls the EDB post backup command on the replica.
+ 7. The replica leaves the backup mode.
+ 8. The backup is then over and is consistent for a restore.
+
2. Delete the namespace `EDB`.
```bash
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 2e4eae2d28f..27d56981acb 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -6,5 +6,5 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
| **Certification Test Date** | , 2023 |
-| **EDB Postgres Advanced Server** | |
-| **Veeam Kasten** | |
\ No newline at end of file
+| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.19.1 |
+| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index c3e84bfe4ee..fd9cdeebcb0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -29,3 +29,5 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
**Veeam Logs**
+On the Kasten UI you need to navigate to `Settings` then `Support` then you will click `Download Logs`.
+
From e0f5421a11c718a6b1a8451e4b7f50c8bdc871ec Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Fri, 9 Jun 2023 09:31:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 242/370] Logging Image Added
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png | 3 +++
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index fd9cdeebcb0..fa5287e1f82 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -30,4 +30,4 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
**Veeam Logs**
On the Kasten UI you need to navigate to `Settings` then `Support` then you will click `Download Logs`.
-
+ ![Veeam Kasten Logs](Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..a55d3875599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:e37ff91381e9c042ec63d7777030b8005171660a0d6b15e67f7269fef85a9d90
+size 129377
From c2bdac815a8786050e8961091523f22c921b6c15 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 6 Jun 2023 09:59:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 243/370] Tech Partner Veeam Kasten Guide
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 7563a70c1ec..642d0c0ce36 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
| **Version** | Kasten 6.0 |
-| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
\ No newline at end of file
+| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index 26a071ded35..bfb5f5857ae 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -7,4 +7,4 @@ Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide
The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes [external backup adapter](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/addons/#external-backup-adapter) allows for a third party tool such as Veeam Kasten to discover an API that is needed in order to create a successful backup.
-![Kasten K10 Architecture](Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png)
\ No newline at end of file
+![Kasten K10 Architecture](Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 27d56981acb..5d33117b4d9 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -7,4 +7,4 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| ----------- | ----------- |
| **Certification Test Date** | , 2023 |
| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.19.1 |
-| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
\ No newline at end of file
+| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
From 3524c40778ca87f6f660a843ce31c8031971d734 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 7 Jun 2023 15:59:35 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 244/370] Index Change and Added Information
---
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 10 +---------
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 9 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 5054ca7a06b..bae596f2fc0 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -1,4 +1,3 @@
----
title: 'Configuration'
description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
---
@@ -56,8 +55,7 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
```
**cluster-example** Example:
-
-```bash
+``bash
# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
kind: Cluster
@@ -311,12 +309,6 @@ actions:
done
exit 0
```
-## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
-
-1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
-
-Add the hooks example:
- ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
From a1b94b25587ddd7b57ff221d3580e6ba201e158d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 13:36:50 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 245/370] Guide info updates
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 11 ++++++++++-
1 file changed, 10 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index c53b1c0854a..9d368d70026 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -3,7 +3,16 @@ title: 'Using'
description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
-When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
+When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the Configuring section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
+
+## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
+
+In the `Configuring` section, you installed the EDB Blueprint with the edb-hooks.yaml file. You will now be able to create a backup policy with those hooks.
+
+1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
+
+Add the hooks example:
+ ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
## Launch a Backup
From 0d5c5e8ae4985436d0887bab8f972c08d8b84d9b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 14:55:53 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 246/370] Configuring Update
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 1 +
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index bae596f2fc0..ec1dcd74f1a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+---
title: 'Configuration'
description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
---
From 469b085b10233c598d3b15abcced982c7f8c5207 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 15:34:23 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 247/370] Syntax Updates
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 3 ++-
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 642d0c0ce36..a3cd807fcec 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -8,5 +8,5 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Partner Name** | Veeam Kasten |
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
-| **Version** | Kasten 6.0 |
-| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
+| **Version** | |
+| **Product Description** | |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index ec1dcd74f1a..37d05336b5b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -56,7 +56,8 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
```
**cluster-example** Example:
-``bash
+
+```bash
# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
kind: Cluster
From 66eb62e657dba3e908f2e406aedcbbd56d034ff8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 8 Jun 2023 19:11:32 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 248/370] Edits per Kasten Team
---
.../VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 5 +++++
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 11 +----------
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 1 -
4 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 13 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index a3cd807fcec..642d0c0ce36 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -8,5 +8,5 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Partner Name** | Veeam Kasten |
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
-| **Version** | |
-| **Product Description** | |
+| **Version** | Kasten 6.0 |
+| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 37d05336b5b..534ba58c6c2 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -311,7 +311,12 @@ actions:
done
exit 0
```
+## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
+1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
+
+Add the hooks example:
+ ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index 9d368d70026..c53b1c0854a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -3,16 +3,7 @@ title: 'Using'
description: 'Walkthrough of example usage scenarios'
---
-When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the Configuring section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
-
-## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
-
-In the `Configuring` section, you installed the EDB Blueprint with the edb-hooks.yaml file. You will now be able to create a backup policy with those hooks.
-
-1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
-
-Add the hooks example:
- ![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
+When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` section you will then be able to start taking backups and completing restores.
## Launch a Backup
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index fa5287e1f82..76fa1e74817 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -30,4 +30,3 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
**Veeam Logs**
On the Kasten UI you need to navigate to `Settings` then `Support` then you will click `Download Logs`.
- ![Veeam Kasten Logs](Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png)
From 2427086afe9c62a4b4722d06dfe54ae5ccb96842 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Fri, 9 Jun 2023 09:31:07 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 249/370] Logging Image Added
---
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 1 +
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index 76fa1e74817..fa5287e1f82 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -30,3 +30,4 @@ The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating
**Veeam Logs**
On the Kasten UI you need to navigate to `Settings` then `Support` then you will click `Download Logs`.
+ ![Veeam Kasten Logs](Images/VeeamKastenLogging.png)
From 13f25d1d9e74d570123b54069a2f4ed4e1c8103a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 09:29:48 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 250/370] Guide updates per testing
---
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 43 ++++---------------
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 2 +-
.../06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
3 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 36 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 534ba58c6c2..a98a3db9963 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Implementing EDB Postgres for Kubernetes with Veeam Kasten requires the followin
If you already have the EDB operator installed on Kubernetes you may skip this step.
```bash
-kubectl apply -f https://get.enterprisedb.io/cnp/postgresql-operator-1.19.1.yaml
+kubectl apply -f https://get.enterprisedb.io/cnp/postgresql-operator-1.20.2.yaml
```
Running this command will create the operator namespace where the controller will be running.
@@ -38,6 +38,12 @@ kubectl apply -f cluster-example.yaml -n edb
```
2. Wait until the cluster is completely ready.
+```bash
+kubectl get clusters.postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io -n edb
+NAME AGE INSTANCES READY STATUS PRIMARY
+cluster-example 19m 3 3 Cluster in healthy state cluster-example-1
+```
+
3. Install the cnp plugin, if you have already installed this you may skip this.
```bash
@@ -64,38 +70,7 @@ kind: Cluster
metadata:
name: cluster-example
annotations:
- "k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["external-backup-adapter-cluster"]'
- "k8s.enterprisedb.io/externalBackupAdapterClusterConfig": |-
- electedResourcesDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/elected"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- excludedResourcesDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded-reason"
- metadataType: "annotation"
- value: "Not necessary for backup"
- backupInstanceDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- - key: "kanister.kasten.io/blueprint"
- metadataType: "annotation"
- value: "edb-hooks"
- preBackupHookConfiguration:
- container:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-container"
- command:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-command"
- onError:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-on-error"
- postBackupHookConfiguration:
- container:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-container"
- command:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-command"
+ "k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["kasten"]'
spec:
instances: 3
# Example of rolling update strategy:
@@ -190,7 +165,7 @@ exit
## Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster
-If you created your cluster with the pieces from the previous section the **cluster-example** already includes the backup decorator, so you will not need to do this step again. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the backup decorator.
+If you create the cluter from the previous section the ***cluster-example*** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
1. Add the following annotations to your cluster:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index c53b1c0854a..bd2f0483e62 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
!!! Note
The Veeam backup process is explained below:
1. EDB elects a replica for the backup.
- . Kasten will discover the replica.
+ 2. Kasten will discover the replica.
3. Kasten calls the EDB pre-backup command on the discovered replica.
4. The replica becomes ready for the backup.
5. Kasten takes the backup.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 5d33117b4d9..6cf41fdedae 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -6,5 +6,5 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
| **Certification Test Date** | , 2023 |
-| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.19.1 |
+| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.20.2 |
| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
From e66d59fa34d60c465c8768685c5fb2ccac8b9e95 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Mon, 28 Aug 2023 09:36:32 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 251/370] Date Edits and Image Add
---
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 3 ++-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenRestorePoint.png | 3 +++
3 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenRestorePoint.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index bd2f0483e62..75334c99a2e 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -32,6 +32,7 @@ kubectl delete ns edb
2. On the remote restore point select `restore`.
-3. After you have restored all of your data should be present.
+3. After you have restored all of your data will be present.
+ ![Kasten Data Restore Point](Images/KastenRestorePoint.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 6cf41fdedae..719c2a6a515 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -5,6 +5,6 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| | |
| ----------- | ----------- |
-| **Certification Test Date** | , 2023 |
+| **Certification Test Date** | August 28, 2023 |
| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.20.2 |
| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenRestorePoint.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenRestorePoint.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5c5f531b693
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenRestorePoint.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:ea7affcee5b936ae73b56f332769c77d9d77c6e6daa2a622f9326d3325889ec9
+size 158082
From 4ae744077e4f1dba6e02531e386031485d3bfbd7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 08:41:19 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 252/370] Edit from Kasten Suggestions
---
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 39 ++-----------------
1 file changed, 4 insertions(+), 35 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index a98a3db9963..ac54b2051a1 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
-n edb
```
-**cluster-example** Example:
+**cluster-example.yaml** Example:
```bash
# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
@@ -165,43 +165,12 @@ exit
## Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster
-If you create the cluter from the previous section the ***cluster-example*** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
+If you create the cluter from the previous section the ***cluster-example.yaml*** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
-1. Add the following annotations to your cluster:
+1. Add the following annotations to your cluster, in the above ***cluster-example.yaml*** there is an example of where to add the annotation.
```bash
-"k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["external-backup-adapter-cluster"]'
- "k8s.enterprisedb.io/externalBackupAdapterClusterConfig": |-
- electedResourcesDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/elected"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- excludedResourcesDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/excluded-reason"
- metadataType: "annotation"
- value: "Not necessary for backup"
- backupInstanceDecorators:
- - key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/hasHooks"
- metadataType: "label"
- value: "true"
- - key: "kanister.kasten.io/blueprint"
- metadataType: "annotation"
- value: "edb-hooks"
- preBackupHookConfiguration:
- container:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-container"
- command:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-command"
- onError:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/pre-backup-on-error"
- postBackupHookConfiguration:
- container:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-container"
- command:
- key: "kasten-enterprisedb.io/post-backup-command"
+"k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["kasten"]'
```
## Install the EDB blueprint
From b63a2d09277c1f1786ab547e49c2b9aa828dd2be Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Wed, 30 Aug 2023 09:53:37 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 253/370] Syntax Edit
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 4 ++--
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index ac54b2051a1..25a1e10882b 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ exit
## Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster
-If you create the cluter from the previous section the ***cluster-example.yaml*** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
+If you create the cluter from the previous section the **cluster-example.yaml** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
-1. Add the following annotations to your cluster, in the above ***cluster-example.yaml*** there is an example of where to add the annotation.
+1. Add the following annotations to your cluster, in the above **cluster-example.yaml** there is an example of where to add the annotation.
```bash
"k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["kasten"]'
From b4d783f89a3bf47c7f287bbd54c9e95abf3212b0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 14:42:26 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 254/370] First round of review edits
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 6 +++---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 2 +-
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx | 4 ----
.../VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png | 3 +++
7 files changed, 11 insertions(+), 12 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
index 642d0c0ce36..c6deb89af54 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/02-PartnerInformation.mdx
@@ -9,4 +9,4 @@ description: 'Details of the Partner'
| **Web Site** | https://www.kasten.io/ |
| **Partner Product** | Kasten K10 |
| **Version** | Kasten 6.0 |
-| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can implement with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
+| **Product Description** | Kasten K10 is a Cloud Native data management platform for Day 2 operations. Purpose built for Kubernetes, Kasten backups and restores your applications, handles disaster recovery and manages application migration. Kasten can be implemented with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes to create fast backups and restores. |
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index bfb5f5857ae..079c65bd4e7 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ title: 'Solution Summary'
description: 'Explanation of the solution and its purpose'
---
-Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide enterprise operations teams with an easy-to-use and secure system for backup and restore of Kubernetes applications. Veeam Kasten can be used in conjunction with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and the EDB external backup adapter to successfully backup and restore data with Veeam Kasten.
+Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide enterprise operations teams with an easy-to-use and secure system for backup and restore of Kubernetes applications. Veeam Kasten can be used in conjunction with EDB Postgres for Kubernetes and the EDB external backup adapter to successfully backup and restore data.
The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes [external backup adapter](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/addons/#external-backup-adapter) allows for a third party tool such as Veeam Kasten to discover an API that is needed in order to create a successful backup.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 25a1e10882b..898e300809e 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -5,9 +5,9 @@ description: 'Walkthrough on configuring the integration'
Implementing EDB Postgres for Kubernetes with Veeam Kasten requires the following components:
-- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes
-- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes external backup adapter
-- Veeam Kasten K10
+- [EDB Postgres for Kubernetes](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/)
+- [EDB Postgres for Kubernetes external backup adapter](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/addons/#external-backup-adapter)
+- [Veeam Kasten K10](https://docs.kasten.io/latest/index.html)
## Prerequisites
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index 75334c99a2e..a0adc3d398d 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
## Launch a Backup
-1. Using Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
+1. Use Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
!!! Note
The Veeam backup process is explained below:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
index fa5287e1f82..4ba382d07b7 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/07-SupportandLogging.mdx
@@ -13,10 +13,6 @@ Technical support for the use of these products is provided by both EDB and Veea
Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Advanced Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, `current_logfiles` or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options or enable `edb_audit` logs. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Advanced Server logs: `/var/lib/edb/as15/data/log`.
-**EDB Postgres Extended Server Logs**
-
-Navigate to the `Data` directory in your chosen EDB Postgres Extended Server instance and from here you can navigate to `log`, or you can navigate to the `postgresql.conf` file where you can customize logging options. An example of the full path to view EDB Postgres Extended logs: `/var/lib/edb-pge/15/data/log`.
-
**PostgreSQL Server Logs**
The default log directories for PostgreSQL logs vary depending on the operating system:
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
index 024e1f828e8..ad2ac426c49 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:b91718c7283f21b6004f1a0503d2bc2d39b0ac44643aa57338311a066382b395
-size 314038
+oid sha256:a89f021a8af1b3054ec7906ed7b4fc67071ddba05858aad34d7301a60fab7d1b
+size 434992
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..024e1f828e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
+oid sha256:b91718c7283f21b6004f1a0503d2bc2d39b0ac44643aa57338311a066382b395
+size 314038
From f412a67f67b695276047441d4ec8e7fda5746575 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 16:27:54 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 255/370] Guide Review Meeting Edits 1
---
.../VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 64 ++++++++++---------
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 6 +-
2 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 32 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 898e300809e..631eb026cbf 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -15,10 +15,13 @@ Implementing EDB Postgres for Kubernetes with Veeam Kasten requires the followin
- EDB Postgres for Kubernetes external backup adapter configured per your system requirements
- Veeam Kasten K10 installed on your system
+!!! Note
+ The following steps will walk through a sample deployment from start to finish. You may already have some of these steps implemented in your environment, and if so you can skip that particular step.
+ The **Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster** section is the important section for the Kasten addon integration.
## Install the Operator
-If you already have the EDB operator installed on Kubernetes you may skip this step.
+1. Install the EDB Postgres for Kubernetes operator.
```bash
kubectl apply -f https://get.enterprisedb.io/cnp/postgresql-operator-1.20.2.yaml
@@ -28,14 +31,36 @@ Running this command will create the operator namespace where the controller wil
## Create an EDB Cluster, Client and Add Data
-If, in your environment, you already have an EDB cluster configured you may skip this step.
-
-1. Initiate the below lines of code in your Kubernetes environment.
+1. Initiate the below lines of code in your Kubernetes environment to create a specific namespace and apply your .yaml file.
```bash
kubctl create ns edb
kubectl apply -f cluster-example.yaml -n edb
```
+
+###Example **cluster-example.yaml** file:
+
+```bash
+# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
+apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
+kind: Cluster
+metadata:
+ name: cluster-example
+ annotations:
+ "k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["kasten"]'
+spec:
+ instances: 3
+ # Example of rolling update strategy:
+ # - unsupervised: automated update of the primary once all
+ # replicas have been upgraded (default)
+ # - supervised: requires manual supervision to perform
+ # the switchover of the primary
+ primaryUpdateStrategy: unsupervised
+ # Require 1Gi of space
+ storage:
+ size: 1Gi
+```
+
2. Wait until the cluster is completely ready.
```bash
@@ -44,7 +69,7 @@ NAME AGE INSTANCES READY STATUS PRIMARY
cluster-example 19m 3 3 Cluster in healthy state cluster-example-1
```
-3. Install the cnp plugin, if you have already installed this you may skip this.
+3. Install the cnp plugin.
```bash
curl -sSfL \
@@ -61,29 +86,6 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
-n edb
```
-**cluster-example.yaml** Example:
-
-```bash
-# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
-apiVersion: postgresql.k8s.enterprisedb.io/v1
-kind: Cluster
-metadata:
- name: cluster-example
- annotations:
- "k8s.enterprisedb.io/addons": '["kasten"]'
-spec:
- instances: 3
- # Example of rolling update strategy:
- # - unsupervised: automated update of the primary once all
- # replicas have been upgraded (default)
- # - supervised: requires manual supervision to perform
- # the switchover of the primary
- primaryUpdateStrategy: unsupervised
- # Require 1Gi of space
- storage:
- size: 1Gi
-```
-
5. Create the client.
```bash
@@ -143,7 +145,7 @@ spec:
defaultMode: 0600
```
-6. Add some data.
+6. Add some data into the cluster to test the backup and restore, the following is sample data that was used for this example.
```bash
kubectl exec -it deploy/cert-test -- bash
@@ -257,7 +259,9 @@ actions:
```
## Create a Backup Policy with the EDB hooks
-1. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
+1. Launch your Kasten K10 interface.
+
+2. Create a policy for the EDB namespace, you will need to set up a location profile for the export and kanister actions.
Add the hooks example:
![Kasten Backup Policy with EDB Hooks](Images/KastenBackupPolicywithHooks.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index a0adc3d398d..9c6bf425591 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -7,7 +7,9 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
## Launch a Backup
-1. Use Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
+1. Launch your Kasten K10 interface.
+
+2. Use Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
!!! Note
The Veeam backup process is explained below:
@@ -20,7 +22,7 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
7. The replica leaves the backup mode.
8. The backup is then over and is consistent for a restore.
-2. Delete the namespace `EDB`.
+3. To get ready for a Kasten K10 to complete a restore, this example deleted the namespace `EDB`.
```bash
kubectl delete ns edb
From 6465c00f661d156b52f9f6766295ebdf4635f559 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 09:10:46 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 256/370] Guide Review Edits 2
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 6 +++---
.../VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx | 1 +
2 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 631eb026cbf..093fe8bebc8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ kubctl create ns edb
kubectl apply -f cluster-example.yaml -n edb
```
-###Example **cluster-example.yaml** file:
+### Example **cluster-example.yaml** file:
```bash
# Example of PostgreSQL cluster
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ kubectl cnp certificate cluster-app \
```bash
kubectl create -f client.yaml -n edb
```
-**client.yaml** Example:
+### Example **client.yaml** file:
```bash
apiVersion: apps/v1
kind: Deployment
@@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ If you create the cluter from the previous section the **cluster-example.yaml**
kubectl create -f edb-hooks.yaml
```
-**edb-hooks.yaml** Example:
+### Example **edb-hooks.yaml** file:
```bash
apiVersion: cr.kanister.io/v1alpha1
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
index 719c2a6a515..8dac87a7df8 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/06-CertificationEnvironment.mdx
@@ -7,4 +7,5 @@ description: 'Overview of the certification environment'
| ----------- | ----------- |
| **Certification Test Date** | August 28, 2023 |
| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes** | 1.20.2 |
+| **EDB Postgres for Kubernetes External Backup Adapter** |
| **Veeam Kasten** | 6.0 |
From f426c3dba2b5711c0c684d722e7dd4827f0664cd Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 16:27:03 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 257/370] Review Round 2 Edits
---
.../VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx | 15 +++++++++------
1 file changed, 9 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
index 9c6bf425591..2275b542b5a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/05-UsingVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -11,6 +11,8 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
2. Use Veeam Kasten K10 launch a backup that creates two restore points, a local and a remote.
+3. You now have a backup we can use to validate a restore in the next section
+
!!! Note
The Veeam backup process is explained below:
1. EDB elects a replica for the backup.
@@ -22,19 +24,20 @@ When you have configured your Kubernetes environment per the `Configuring` secti
7. The replica leaves the backup mode.
8. The backup is then over and is consistent for a restore.
-3. To get ready for a Kasten K10 to complete a restore, this example deleted the namespace `EDB`.
+
+## Restore Database
+
+1. To get ready for a Kasten K10 to complete a restore, we will remove the EDB namespace in this example.
```bash
kubectl delete ns edb
```
-## Restore Database
-
-1. Go to your remote restore point.
+2. In the Kasten interface go to your remote restore point.
-2. On the remote restore point select `restore`.
+3. On the remote restore point select `restore`.
-3. After you have restored all of your data will be present.
+4. After you have restored all of your data will be present.
![Kasten Data Restore Point](Images/KastenRestorePoint.png)
From 2e267d26d3d16505e9fc492a5593154928423b6a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 12:19:21 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 258/370] Further Review Edits
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png | 4 ++--
.../VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png | 3 ---
3 files changed, 4 insertions(+), 7 deletions(-)
delete mode 100644 advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index 093fe8bebc8..af0953cd93a 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Implementing EDB Postgres for Kubernetes with Veeam Kasten requires the followin
- Veeam Kasten K10 installed on your system
!!! Note
- The following steps will walk through a sample deployment from start to finish. You may already have some of these steps implemented in your environment, and if so you can skip that particular step.
+ For this integration, use the **example.yaml** files provided in each section for the appropriate Kasten configuration pieces, and change any environment variables per your specific needs.
The **Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster** section is the important section for the Kasten addon integration.
## Install the Operator
@@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ exit
## Add the Backup Decorator Annotations to the Cluster
-If you create the cluter from the previous section the **cluster-example.yaml** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
+If you create the cluster from the previous section the **cluster-example.yaml** already includes the Kasten addon therefore you can skip this part. If you are working with your own cluster you will need to add the Kasten addon.
1. Add the following annotations to your cluster, in the above **cluster-example.yaml** there is an example of where to add the annotation.
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
index ad2ac426c49..a4f9cdbdaeb 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
@@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:a89f021a8af1b3054ec7906ed7b4fc67071ddba05858aad34d7301a60fab7d1b
-size 434992
+oid sha256:35b6cf294303cd3c7c034684ea4d4be063df7b5f3db30037003ba51f3c5563c6
+size 120393
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
deleted file mode 100644
index 024e1f828e8..00000000000
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage2.png
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3 +0,0 @@
-version https://git-lfs.github.com/spec/v1
-oid sha256:b91718c7283f21b6004f1a0503d2bc2d39b0ac44643aa57338311a066382b395
-size 314038
From 2a8e35475d92ade1bd767ea96296607a07be38b1 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 13:21:05 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 259/370] Spelling Edits
---
.../partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx | 4 ++--
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
index af0953cd93a..4b092088874 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/04-ConfiguringVeeamKasten.mdx
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Running this command will create the operator namespace where the controller wil
## Create an EDB Cluster, Client and Add Data
-1. Initiate the below lines of code in your Kubernetes environment to create a specific namespace and apply your .yaml file.
+1. Initiate the below lines of code in your Kubernetes environment to create a specific namespace and apply your `.yaml` file.
```bash
kubctl create ns edb
@@ -177,7 +177,7 @@ If you create the cluster from the previous section the **cluster-example.yaml**
## Install the EDB blueprint
-1. Enter the follwing command in your environment:
+1. Enter the following command in your environment:
```bash
kubectl create -f edb-hooks.yaml
From 8e03e8fe2105aea089e6ae1146929e9aeb29be97 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: jkitchens32
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 13:28:22 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 260/370] Name Change
---
advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx | 2 +-
...lutionSummaryImage.png => KastenSolutionSummaryImagenew.png} | 0
2 files changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
rename advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/{KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png => KastenSolutionSummaryImagenew.png} (100%)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
index 079c65bd4e7..0d079d0a6c3 100644
--- a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
+++ b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/03-SolutionSummary.mdx
@@ -7,4 +7,4 @@ Veeam Kasten is a data management platform built for Kubernetes that can provide
The EDB Postgres for Kubernetes [external backup adapter](https://www.enterprisedb.com/docs/postgres_for_kubernetes/latest/addons/#external-backup-adapter) allows for a third party tool such as Veeam Kasten to discover an API that is needed in order to create a successful backup.
-![Kasten K10 Architecture](Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png)
+![Kasten K10 Architecture](Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImagenew.png)
diff --git a/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png b/advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImagenew.png
similarity index 100%
rename from advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImage.png
rename to advocacy_docs/partner_docs/VeeamKasten/Images/KastenSolutionSummaryImagenew.png
From 3704cdbaf6f408617b5c5bff6bcd922ecaf0263a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Chris Estes <106166814+ccestes@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 16:54:53 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 261/370] release notes and -loadercount value update
---
.../07_invoking_mtk/08_mtk_command_options.mdx | 2 ++
.../migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 ++
.../55/mtk_rel_notes/mtk_5561_rel_notes.mdx | 16 ++++++++++++++++
3 files changed, 20 insertions(+)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/mtk_5561_rel_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/07_invoking_mtk/08_mtk_command_options.mdx b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/07_invoking_mtk/08_mtk_command_options.mdx
index e1316c08099..b0d38582974 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/07_invoking_mtk/08_mtk_command_options.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/07_invoking_mtk/08_mtk_command_options.mdx
@@ -393,6 +393,8 @@ The following options control the way MTK migrates data in parallel.
Use the `-loaderCount` option to specify the number of parallel threads available in the pool to perform data load in parallel. This option is particularly useful if the host system that's running Migration Toolkit has high-end CPU and RAM resources. While `value` can be any nonzero, positive number, we recommend that value not exceed the number of CPU cores. For example, a dual-core CPU has an optimal value of `2`. The default is `1`.
+The number of table-level threads can introduce overhead on the source database server depending on the table size and certain memory configurations, like `shared_buffers` and `work_mem` (memory configuration should be set to optimal values for the database server). It is recommended that for very large tables you try the lower `-loaderCount` option value, according to the total cores available on the machine, to calculate the optimal `-loaderCount` value.
+
!!! Note
When multiple threads are used, depending on the actual number of threads and table data size, you might need to adjust the memory heap size for the Migration Toolkit.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
index aa7cc862c00..ddcc2496f7f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@ title: "Release notes"
redirects:
- ../01_whats_new/
navigation:
+ - mtk_5561_rel_notes
- mtk_556_rel_notes
- mtk_555_rel_notes
- mtk_554_rel_notes
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ The Migration Toolkit documentation describes the latest version of Migration To
| Version | Release Date |
| ------- | ------------ |
+| [55.6.1](mtk_5561_rel_notes) | 09 Sep 2023 |
| [55.6.0](mtk_556_rel_notes) | 25 May 2023 |
| [55.5.0](mtk_555_rel_notes) | 14 Feb 2023 |
| [55.4.0](mtk_554_rel_notes) | 29 Nov 2022 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/mtk_5561_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/mtk_5561_rel_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..60d0662355b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/migration_toolkit/55/mtk_rel_notes/mtk_5561_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+---
+title: "Version 55.6.1"
+---
+
+Released: 06 Sep 2023
+
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Migration Toolkit 55.6.1 include:
+
+| Type | Description |
+| ------------ | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
+| Enhancement | Optimized the table-level parallel loading capability to reduce the overhead on the source database by using range-based criterion for loading each individual table data chunk instead of a fetch-offset approach. This optimization is applicable when the table primary key/unique constraint is based on a non-composite numeric type attribute. |
+| Bug fix | Fixed the issue where a data migration fails when Migration Toolkit attempts to drop a system generated index. Any system generated indexes are now skipped from removal. [Support ticket: #90282] |
+| Bug fix | Fixed the issue where a data migration fails with `Invalid LOB locator specified` error when migrating an Oracle table with an `XMLTYPE` column. [Support ticket: #92284] |
+| Bug fix | Fixed the issue where a `TRUNCATE` is always applied on the target database when performing a data only migration from SQL Server if the source table contains a LOB type column. This behavior is now corrected so that `TRUNCATE` only is applied when the user has specified the `-truncLoad` option. |
+| Bug fix | Updated the Migration Toolkit packaging for Debian so that the JDBC drivers are no longer bundled with Migration Toolkit to make it consistent with the packaging for the other OS platforms supported by Migration Toolkit. |
+
From d4ab4e2abafae7dddf447e4e86945f479c4db6b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Simon Notley <43099400+sonotley@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 6 Sep 2023 09:21:34 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 262/370] release notes for TPA 23.22 and correction to .21
---
product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx | 2 ++
.../docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx | 2 +-
.../docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.22_rel_notes.mdx | 13 +++++++++++++
3 files changed, 16 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
create mode 100644 product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.22_rel_notes.mdx
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
index 428f5aec067..a0aad80b43e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/index.mdx
@@ -2,6 +2,7 @@
title: Trusted Postgres Architect release notes
navTitle: "Release notes"
navigation:
+ - tpa_23.22_rel_notes
- tpa_23.21_rel_notes
- tpa_23.20_rel_notes
- tpa_23.19_rel_notes
@@ -19,6 +20,7 @@ The Trusted Postgres Architect documentation describes the latest version of Tru
| Version | Release date |
| ---------------------------- | ------------ |
+| [23.22](tpa_23.22_rel_notes) | 06 Sep 2023 |
| [23.21](tpa_23.21_rel_notes) | 05 Sep 2023 |
| [23.20](tpa_23.20_rel_notes) | 01 Aug 2023 |
| [23.19](tpa_23.19_rel_notes) | 12 Jul 2023 |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
index e777a6e3441..e35f65e0a93 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.21_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ navTitle: "Version 23.21"
Released: 5 Sep 2023
-New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Architect 23.20 include the following:
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Architect 23.21 include the following:
| Type | Description |
| ---- |------------ |
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.22_rel_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.22_rel_notes.mdx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..218d509361e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/product_docs/docs/tpa/23/rel_notes/tpa_23.22_rel_notes.mdx
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+---
+title: Trusted Postgres Architect 23.22 release notes
+navTitle: "Version 23.22"
+---
+
+Released: 6 Sep 2023
+
+
+New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in Trusted Postgres Architect 23.22 include the following:
+
+| Type | Description |
+| ---- |------------ |
+| Change | TPA is now an open source project! You can clone the source under the GPLv3 license from [GitHub](https://github.com/EnterpriseDB/tpa). |
From b42497f8f4e71a340b556ea5cafd37b529af8c05 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 6 Sep 2023 07:53:54 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 263/370] OCL Connector: fixed link
---
.../15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
index ecdef1079f4..8d7d07d7528 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/ocl_connector/15/ocl_rel_notes/15.2.0.4_ocl_release_notes.mdx
@@ -10,5 +10,5 @@ New features, enhancements, bug fixes, and other changes in the EDB OCL Connecto
| Bug fix | Fixed a regression whereby a spurious rollback/begin occurs after deallocating a statement. [Support ticket: #94735]|
!!!Important
- This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq version 15.4 or later on the client machine where the EDB OCL Connector is installed. See [Upgrading libpq for minor releases](../03_libpq_compatibility/#upgrading-libpq-for-minor-releases-of-epas).
+ This version requires EDB Postgres Advanced Server libpq version 15.4 or later on the client machine where the EDB OCL Connector is installed. See [Upgrading libpq for minor releases](../03_libpq_compatibility/#upgrading-libpq-for-minor-releases-of-edb-postgres-advanced-server).
From 2673ca03c5dac1194ac8abdbb08ee66102600fcb Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: Dj Walker-Morgan
Date: Wed, 6 Sep 2023 12:36:25 +0100
Subject: [PATCH 264/370] Redone pages for review
Signed-off-by: Dj Walker-Morgan
---
.../docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 39 +++++++++----------
.../docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx | 31 +++++++--------
2 files changed, 31 insertions(+), 39 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index 740a02f67a3..5d682abe58e 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -4,31 +4,28 @@ title: Supported BDR upgrade paths
## Upgrading within version 4
-Beginning with version 4, EDB Postgres Distributed has adopted semantic versioning. All changes within the same major will be backward compatible lowering the risk when upgrading and allowing you to choose any later minor or patch release as the upgrade target.
+Beginning with version 4, EDB Postgres Distributed has adopted [semantic versioning](https://semver.org/). All changes within the same major version will be backward compatible, lowering the risk when upgrading and allowing you to choose any later minor or patch release as the upgrade target. You can upgrade from any version 4.x release to a later 4.x release.
-| 4.0.0 | 4.0.1 | 4.0.2 | 4.1.0 | 4.1.1 | Target BDR version |
-|-------|-------|-------|--------|------|--------------------|
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | 4.2.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | 4.1.1 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | | 4.1.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | | | | 4.0.2 |
-| ✓ | | | | | 4.0.1 |
## Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 4
-Currently it is recommended that you are using 3.7.15 or later before upgrading to 4. See [Upgrading within from 3.7](/pgd/3.7/bdr/upgrades/supported_paths/#upgrading-within-version-37) in the 3.7 documentation for more information. After upgrading to 3.7.15 or later the following combinations are allowed
-
-| 3.7.15 | 3.7.16 | 3.7.17 | Target BDR version |
-|--------|--------|--------|--------------------|
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | 4.2.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | | 4.1.1 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | | 4.1.0 |
-| ✓ | | | 4.0.2 |
+Generally, we recommend you upgrade to the latest version 3.7 release, before
+upgrading to the latest version 4 release. You will have to be using 3.7.15 or later
+before upgrading to 4. See [Upgrading within from 3.7](/pgd/3.7/bdr/upgrades/supported_paths/#upgrading-within-version-37) in the
+3.7 documentation for more information. After upgrading to 3.7.15 or later, the
+following upgrade paths are possible.
+
+| From version | To version |
+| ---- | -- |
+| 3.7.15 | 4.0.2 or later |
+| 3.7.16 | 4.1.0 or later |
+| 3.7.17 | Must be upgraded to a later 3.7.x version before upgrading |
+| 3.7.18 | 4.2.1 or later |
+| 3.7.19 | 4.2.2 or later |
+| 3.7.20 | 4.3.0 or later |
+| 3.7.21 | 4.3.1 or later |
+| 3.7.22 | 4.3.2 or later |
## Upgrading from version 3.6 to version 4
-Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.6 to 4. You must first upgrade your cluster to 3.7 before upgrading to 4. See [Upgrading from 3.6](/pgd/3.7/bdr/upgrades/supported_paths/#upgrading-from-version-36) in the 3.7 documentation for more information.
-
-
-
-
+Currently there are no direct upgrade paths from 3.6 to 4. You must first upgrade your cluster to 3.7 before upgrading to 4. See [Upgrading from 3.6](/pgd/3.7/bdr/upgrades/supported_paths/#upgrading-from-version-36) in the 3.7 documentation for more information.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
index 79635bf9605..d911ba899e3 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/pgd/5/upgrades/upgrade_paths.mdx
@@ -2,28 +2,24 @@
title: Supported PGD upgrade paths
---
-
## Upgrading within version 5
-| 5.0.0 | 5.0.1 | 5.1.0 | Target PGD version |
-|-------|-------|-------|--------------------|
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | 5.2.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | | 5.1.0 |
-| ✓ | | | 5.0.1 |
-
+You can upgrade from any version 5.x release to a later 5.x release.
## Upgrading from version 4 to version 5
-Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older versions, upgrade to 4.3.0 before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading within 4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-within-version-4) for more information. After upgrading to 4.3.0 or later, the following combinations are allowed.
-
-| 4.3.0 | 4.3.0+p1 | 4.3.1 | 4.3.1+p1 | Target PGD version |
-|-------|---------|-------|---------|--------------------|
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | 5.2.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | ✓ | | 5.1.0 |
-| ✓ | ✓ | | | 5.0.1 |
-| ✓ | | | | 5.0.0 |
-
+Upgrades from PGD 4 to PGD 5 are supported from version 4.3.0. For older
+versions, upgrade to 4.3.0 before upgrading to 5. See [Upgrading within
+4](/pgd/4/upgrades/upgrade_paths/#upgrading-within-version-4) for more
+information. Generally, we recommend you upgrade to the latest version 4
+release, before upgrading to the latest version 5 release. After upgrading to
+4.3.0 or later, the following upgrade paths are possible.
+| From version | To version |
+| ---- | -- |
+| 4.3.0 | 5.0.0 or later |
+| 4.3.1 | 5.1.0 or later |
+| 4.3.2 | 5.2.0 or later |
## Upgrading from version 3.7 to version 5
@@ -41,5 +37,4 @@ major version was supported by both PGD versions.
Development is currently ongoing to provide a direct upgrade path from 3.7 to 5
using TPA by Q4. In the interim, customers may reach out to EDB Professional
-Services or Support for assistance and guidance.
-
+Services or Support for assistance and guidance.
\ No newline at end of file
From 7728ba4547771c796043bf5bec602c6223e0c2c9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Sun, 27 Aug 2023 07:00:29 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 265/370] Replication Server 7.6 release
https://enterprisedb.atlassian.net/browse/XDB-2094
---
.../03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx | 10 ++++++++--
1 file changed, 8 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
index d72d21eb650..44a6c95fc3c 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
@@ -85,11 +85,17 @@ The table shows whether a configuration property can be reloaded.
This example reloads the configuration file.
-```shell
-$ java -jar edb-repcli.jar -reloadconf -repsvrfile ~/subsvr.prop
+!!! Note Note
+ When you execute the reloadconf command, if any configuration options have been changed from their default values, the output includes the configuration option and its new value.
+```shell
+java -jar edb-repcli.jar -reloadconf -repsvrfile subsvr.prop
+__OUTPUT__
Reloading Subscription Server configuration file...
Reloaded configuration options from ../etc/xdb_subserver.conf...
+The conf option 'snapshotParallelTableLoaderLimit' set to '1'
+The conf option 'skipCheckConst' set to 'false'
+The conf option 'snapshotParallelLoadCount' set to '1'
Configuration was reloaded successfully.
```
From 237c3d75e829ce1b70425ab6fe1f6888dd0bd0a0 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Sun, 27 Aug 2023 09:20:21 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 266/370] UPM-2072 Default locale for logs
---
.../01_controlling_logging_level.mdx | 23 ++++++++++++++-----
1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 6 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
index a7662b54ed4..85ea46bfd4b 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
---
-title: "Controlling logging level, log file sizes, and rotation count"
+title: "Controlling logging level, log file sizes, rotation count, and locale"
+navTitle: "Controlling message logging"
redirects:
- /eprs/latest/10_appendix/04_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level
---
@@ -13,7 +14,7 @@ The following options control various aspects of message logging in the publicat
See [Publication and subscription server startup failures](../../02_resolving_problems/02_where_to_look_for_errors/#pub_and_sub_startup_failures) and [Snapshot replication failures](../../02_resolving_problems/02_where_to_look_for_errors/#snapshot_replication_failures) for more information.
-`logging.level`
+## `logging.level`
Set the `logging.level` option to control the severity of messages written to the publication server log file and the subscription server log file.
@@ -21,7 +22,7 @@ Set the `logging.level` option to control the severity of messages written to th
The default value is `WARNING`.
-`logging.file.size`
+## `logging.file.size`
Set the `logging.file.size` option to control the maximum file size (in megabytes) of the publication server log file and the subscription server log file.
@@ -32,7 +33,7 @@ Set the `logging.file.size` option to control the maximum file size (in megabyte
The default value is `50`, in megabytes.
-`logging.file.count`
+## `logging.file.count`
Set the `logging.file.count` option to control the number of files in the log file rotation history of the publication server log file and the subscription server log file.
@@ -57,7 +58,15 @@ When log file rotation is enabled and the current, active log file (`pubserver.l
- Each remaining log file is renamed with the next greater integer suffix (`pubserver.log.m` is renamed to `pubserver.log.m+1`, with m varying from `0` to `n-2`).
- A new, active log file is created (`pubserver.log.0`).
-`mtk.logging.file.size`
+## `logging.default.locale`
+
+Set the `logging.default.locale` option to use either the current system locale or English (en) for publication and subscription logs.
+
+`logging.default.locale={system | en}`
+
+The default value is `system`.
+
+## `mtk.logging.file.size`
!!! Note
This option applies only to the publication server.
@@ -68,7 +77,7 @@ Set the `mtk.logging.file.size` option to control the maximum file size (in mega
The default value is `50`, in megabytes.
-`mtk.logging.file.count`
+## `mtk.logging.file.count`
!!! Note
This option applies only to the publication server.
@@ -94,3 +103,5 @@ When the current, active log file (`mtk.log`) reaches the size specified by `mtk
- Each remaining log file with a suffix is renamed with the next greater integer suffix (`mtk.log.m` is renamed to `mtk.log.m+1`, with `m` varying from `1` to `n-1`).
- Log file `mtk.log` is renamed to `mtk.log.1`.
- A new, active log file is created (`mtk.log`).
+
+
From 42f5d617d7248c4d5cee2df9ccf5533814c915b8 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Tue, 29 Aug 2023 15:04:16 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 267/370] XDB-1427 - BigAnimal support
---
.../7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx | 5 ++++-
product_docs/docs/eprs/7/supported_platforms.mdx | 4 ++--
2 files changed, 6 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
index a7f6073b5a3..6e3b38ed101 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
@@ -5,13 +5,16 @@ title: "Certified and supported product versions"
You can use the following database product versions with Replication Server:
- PostgreSQL versions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15
-- Advanced Server versions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15
+- EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions 11, 12, 13, 14, and 15
- Oracle 11g Release 2 version 11.2.0.2.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 11.2 line are supported as well.
- Oracle 12c version 12.1.0.2.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 12.1 line are supported as well.
- Oracle 18c version 18.1.0.2.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 18.1 line are supported as well.
- Oracle 19c version 19.1.0.2.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 19.1 line are supported as well.
- SQL Server 2014 version 12.0.5000.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 12.0 line are supported as well.
+!!!Note
+ See BigAnimal's [database version policy](/biganimal/latest/overview/05_database_version_policy/) for the versions of PostgreSQL and EDB Postgres Advanced Server available using [BigAnimal](/biganimal/latest/) (EDB’s managed database cloud service).
+
As of Replication Server 7.1.0:
- SQL Server 2016 version 13.00.5026 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 13.0 line are supported as well.
- SQL Server 2017 version 14.0.1000.169 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 14.0 line are supported as well.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/supported_platforms.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/supported_platforms.mdx
index 58e1e24015a..c142c40aef6 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/supported_platforms.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/supported_platforms.mdx
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
---
-title: "Supported platforms"
+title: "Supported Java platforms"
redirects:
- /eprs/latest/01_introduction/04_supported_jdk_versions/
- /eprs/latest/01_introduction/05_supported_jdk_versions/
@@ -22,4 +22,4 @@ Replication Server is certified to work with the following Java platforms:
| Debian 10 and 11 | Red Hat OpenJDK 11 |
| Ubuntu 18, 20, 22 | OpenJDK 11 |
-See [Product Compatibility](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#eprs) for more information.
+See [Product Compatibility](https://www.enterprisedb.com/platform-compatibility#eprs) for more information on operating system support.
From 76372f542a2fdcce4d4194954f87601bd58888ef Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Thu, 31 Aug 2023 09:17:04 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 268/370] Incorporated Matt's excellent suggestion
---
.../eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx | 3 ++-
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
index 6e3b38ed101..6c6cefbddc8 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/01_introduction/03_certified_supported_versions.mdx
@@ -13,7 +13,8 @@ You can use the following database product versions with Replication Server:
- SQL Server 2014 version 12.0.5000.0 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 12.0 line are supported as well.
!!!Note
- See BigAnimal's [database version policy](/biganimal/latest/overview/05_database_version_policy/) for the versions of PostgreSQL and EDB Postgres Advanced Server available using [BigAnimal](/biganimal/latest/) (EDB’s managed database cloud service).
+ All PostgreSQL and EDB Postgres Advanced Server versions available as BigAnimal single-node and primary/standby high availability cluster types are also supported for SMR configurations. Consult the BigAnimal (EDB’s managed database cloud service) [documentation](/biganimal/latest) for more information about BigAnimal’s [supported cluster types](/biganimal/latest/overview/02_high_availability/) and [database version policy](/biganimal/latest/overview/05_database_version_policy/) for the versions of PostgreSQL and EDB Postgres Advanced Server available in BigAnimal.
+
As of Replication Server 7.1.0:
- SQL Server 2016 version 13.00.5026 is explicitly certified. Newer minor versions in the 13.0 line are supported as well.
From 11ddce21fa9364a73b415ef0e98eec76f4fea270 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Fri, 1 Sep 2023 05:53:44 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 269/370] Added limitations to logging.default.locale
---
.../01_controlling_logging_level.mdx | 6 ++++++
1 file changed, 6 insertions(+)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
index 85ea46bfd4b..90931a7714a 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/10_appendix/03_miscellaneous_xdb_processing_topics/01_publications_and_subscriptions_server_conf_options/01_controlling_logging_level.mdx
@@ -66,6 +66,12 @@ Set the `logging.default.locale` option to use either the current system locale
The default value is `system`.
+!!!Note
+This option is only applicable for publication and subscription logs and isn't supported for mtk.log.
+
+The RepCLI and RepConsole logs continue showing text in the default locale.
+!!!
+
## `mtk.logging.file.size`
!!! Note
From 3a2a1976fb5993ee3bea7ba7a90d21ef11281bc4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: drothery-edb
Date: Wed, 6 Sep 2023 08:39:14 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 270/370] fenced note
---
.../7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx | 3 ++-
1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
index 44a6c95fc3c..a95c78c6c34 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/eprs/7/08_xdb_cli/03_xdb_cli_commands/52_reload_conf_file.mdx
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ The table shows whether a configuration property can be reloaded.
This example reloads the configuration file.
!!! Note Note
- When you execute the reloadconf command, if any configuration options have been changed from their default values, the output includes the configuration option and its new value.
+When you execute the reloadconf command, if any configuration options have been changed from their default values, the output includes the configuration option and its new value.
```shell
java -jar edb-repcli.jar -reloadconf -repsvrfile subsvr.prop
@@ -99,3 +99,4 @@ The conf option 'snapshotParallelLoadCount' set to '1'
Configuration was reloaded successfully.
```
+!!!
From 9107ec2579e8d857f72e14cc0ce0c783106e99c5 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: David Wicinas <93669463+dwicinas@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Tue, 5 Sep 2023 12:17:42 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 271/370] changes for version 14
---
.../01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx | 17 +++++------------
.../02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx | 9 ++++-----
2 files changed, 9 insertions(+), 17 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
index daa8f37bf9e..36b0ac4d969 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
@@ -53,15 +53,14 @@ Where `subprogram_spec` is the following:
Where `constructor` is the following:
```text
-CONSTRUCTOR
- [ ( [ SELF [ IN | IN OUT ] ]
- [, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
+CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION
+ [ ( [ [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ] ]
[, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ]
] ...)
]
-RETURN self AS RESULT
+RETURN ;
```
!!! Note
@@ -103,9 +102,9 @@ Before defining a method, use `[ NOT ] INSTANTIABLE` to specify whether the obje
`proc_name` is an identifier of a procedure. If you specify the `SELF` parameter, `name` is the object type name given in the `CREATE TYPE` command. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the procedure. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN`, `IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. The default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that you can specify for `IN` parameters.
-Include the `CONSTRUCTOR` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
+Include the `CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
-`func_name` is an identifier of a function. If you specify the `SELF` parameter, `name` is the object type name given in the `CREATE TYPE` command. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the function. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN`, `IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. The default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that you can specify for `IN` parameters. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns.
+`func_name` is an identifier of a function. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the function. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN`, `IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. The default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that you can specify for `IN` parameters. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns.
Note the following about an object type specification:
@@ -113,12 +112,6 @@ Note the following about an object type specification:
- There can be zero, one, or more methods defined in the object type.
-- For each member method, there is an implicit, built-in parameter named `SELF` whose data type is that of the object type being defined.
-
- `SELF` refers to the object instance that's currently invoking the method. `SELF` can be explicitly declared as an `IN` or `IN OUT` parameter in the parameter list (for example, as `MEMBER FUNCTION (SELF IN OUT object_type ...)`).
-
- If `SELF` is explicitly declared, `SELF` must be the first parameter in the parameter list. If `SELF` isn't explicitly declared, its parameter mode defaults to `IN OUT` for member procedures and `IN` for member functions.
-
- A static method can't be overridden. You can't specify `OVERRIDING` and `STATIC` together in `method_spec`.
- A static method must be instantiable. You can't specify `NOT INSTANTIABLE` and `STATIC` together in `method_spec`.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
index 68d391fa46f..99c695c2c35 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/14/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
@@ -59,15 +59,14 @@ Where `method_spec` is `subprogram_spec`, and `subprogram_spec` is the following
Where `constructor` is:
```text
-CONSTRUCTOR
- [ ( [ SELF [ IN | IN OUT ] ]
- [, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
+CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION
+ [ ( [ [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ] ]
[, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ]
] ...)
]
-RETURN self AS RESULT
+RETURN ;
{ IS | AS }
[ ]
BEGIN
@@ -92,7 +91,7 @@ If `NOT INSTANTIABLE` was specified in `method_spec` of the `CREATE TYPE` comman
`proc_name` is an identifier of a procedure specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command. The parameter declarations have the same meaning as described for the `CREATE TYPE` command. They must be specified in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command in the same manner as in the `CREATE TYPE` command.
-Include the `CONSTRUCTOR` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
+Include the `CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
`func_name` is an identifier of a function specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command. The parameter declarations have the same meaning as described for the `CREATE TYPE` command and must be specified in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command in the same manner as in the `CREATE TYPE` command. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns and must match the `return_type` given in the `CREATE TYPE` command.
From c7b9ced0a7c03cfbc89308a2758570550b0c8ca4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001
From: David Wicinas <93669463+dwicinas@users.noreply.github.com>
Date: Wed, 6 Sep 2023 08:37:41 -0400
Subject: [PATCH 272/370] changes for versions 11 through 13
---
.../01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx | 11 +++++------
.../02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx | 9 ++++-----
.../01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx | 11 +++++------
.../02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx | 9 ++++-----
.../01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx | 11 +++++------
.../02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx | 9 ++++-----
6 files changed, 27 insertions(+), 33 deletions(-)
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
index 2c685251cf8..a205868915f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
@@ -54,15 +54,14 @@ where `subprogram_spec` is the following:
where `constructor` is the following:
```text
-CONSTRUCTOR
- [ ( [ SELF [ IN | IN OUT ] ]
- [, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
+CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION
+ [ ( [ [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ] ]
[, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ]
] ...)
]
-RETURN self AS RESULT
+RETURN ;
```
!!! Note
@@ -104,9 +103,9 @@ Prior to the definition of a method, `[ NOT ] INSTANTIABLE` specifies whether or
`proc_name` is an identifier of a procedure. If the `SELF` parameter is specified, `name` is the object type name given in the `CREATE TYPE` command. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the procedure. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN, IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. If none are specified, the default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that may be specified for `IN` parameters.
-Include the `CONSTRUCTOR` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
+Include the `CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
-`func_name` is an identifier of a function. If the `SELF` parameter is specified, `name` is the object type name given in the `CREATE TYPE` command. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the function. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN, IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. If none are specified, the default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that may be specified for `IN` parameters. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns.
+`func_name` is an identifier of a function. If specified, `parm1, parm2, …` are the formal parameters of the function. `datatype1, datatype2, …` are the data types of `parm1, parm2, …` respectively. `IN, IN OUT`, and `OUT` are the possible parameter modes for each formal parameter. If none are specified, the default is `IN`. `value1, value2, …` are default values that may be specified for `IN` parameters. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns.
The following points should be noted about an object type specification:
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
index fa41c82315a..b01b6e080e0 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/11/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/02_object_type_body_syntax.mdx
@@ -64,15 +64,14 @@ and `subprogram_spec` is the following:
where `constructor` is:
```text
-CONSTRUCTOR
- [ ( [ SELF [ IN | IN OUT ] ]
- [, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
+CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION
+ [ ( [ [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ] ]
[, [ IN | IN OUT | OUT ]
[ DEFAULT ]
] ...)
]
-RETURN self AS RESULT
+RETURN ;
{ IS | AS }
[ ]
BEGIN
@@ -95,7 +94,7 @@ If `NOT INSTANTIABLE` was specified in `method_spec` of the `CREATE TYPE` comman
`proc_name` is an identifier of a procedure specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command. The parameter declarations have the same meaning as described for the `CREATE TYPE` command, and must be specified in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command in the same manner as specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command.
-Include the `CONSTRUCTOR` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
+Include the `CONSTRUCTOR FUNCTION` keyword and function definition to define a constructor function.
`func_name` is an identifier of a function specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command. The parameter declarations have the same meaning as described for the `CREATE TYPE` command, and must be specified in the `CREATE TYPE BODY` command in the same manner as specified in the `CREATE TYPE` command. `return_type` is the data type of the value the function returns and must match `return_type` given in the `CREATE TYPE` command.
diff --git a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
index 2c685251cf8..a205868915f 100644
--- a/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
+++ b/product_docs/docs/epas/12/epas_compat_spl/15_object_types_and_objects/02_object_type_components/01_object_type_specification_syntax.mdx
@@ -54,15 +54,14 @@ where `subprogram_spec` is the following:
where `constructor` is the following:
```text
-CONSTRUCTOR
- [ ( [ SELF [ IN | IN OUT ] ]
- [,